You are on page 1of 471

IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server

Service Guide 2105 Models 750/800 and Expansion Enclosure Volume 2 Chapters 4, 5, and 6

SY27-7636-05

IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server

Service Guide 2105 Models 750/800 and Expansion Enclosure Volume 2 Chapters 4, 5, and 6

SY27-7636-05

Note Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information under Notices on page xix.

Sixth Edition (November 2005) This edition replaces SY27-7636-04 This edition applies to the first release of the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server and to all following releases and changes until otherwise indicated in new editions. Order publications through your IBM representative or the IBM branch office serving your locality. Publications are not stocked at the address given below. IBM welcomes your comments. A form for readers comments may be supplied at the back of this publication, or you may mail your comments to the following address: International Business Machines Corporation Information Develpment Department 61C 9000 South Rita Road Tucson, AZ 85775-4401 U.S.A. When you send information to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute the information in any way it believes suitable without incurring any obligation to you. Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2004, 2005. All rights reserved. US Government Users Restricted Rights Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.

Contents
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Laser Safety and Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Translated Safety Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Emission Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement . . . . . . Industry Canada Compliance Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . European Community Compliance Statement . . . . . . . . . . Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) Class A Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Korean Ministry of Information and Communication (MIC) Statement . Taiwan Class A Compliance Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . Chinese Class A Electronic Emission Statement . . . . . . . . Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using This Service Guide . . . . Where to Start . . . . . . . . . Limited Vocabulary . . . . . . . Publications . . . . . . . . . TotalStorage ESS Product Library Ordering Publications . . . . . Web Sites . . . . . . . . . Other Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix xix xix xix xix xx xx xx xx xx xx xxi xxi xxii xxii xxii

. . . . . . . .

. xxv . xxv . xxv . xxvi . xxvi . xxvii . xxvii . xxvii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4: FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures . . . . . . Entry for Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DDM Bay FRU Replacement Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . CEC Drawer FRU Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . I/O Drawer FRU Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . Host Bay FRU Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . Rack FRU Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Repair Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . Using the Repair Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Tools Needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Attach the ESD Wrist Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ESD Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a FRU Using the Service Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a Non-Cluster FRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a Cluster FRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DDM BAY FRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES: . . . . . . . . . Disk Drive Module Locations, DDM Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . SSA Disk Drive Module Removal and Replacement, DDM Bay . . . . Bypass and Passthrough Card Removal and Replacement, DDM Bay Controller Card Removal and Replacement, DDM Bay . . . . . .
Copyright IBM Corp. 2004, 2005

1 1 1 1 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 . . . 11 . . . 13

iii

Frame Assembly Removal and Replacement, DDM Bay . . . . . . . . . 14 DDM BAY SSA CABLE FRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES: . . . . . . . 17 SSA Cable Removal and Replacement, DDM Bay . . . . . . . . . . . 17 CLUSTER CEC DRAWER REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES: . . . . . . . . 20 Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer . . . . 20 CEC Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 . . . . . . . . 23 CEC Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 . . . . . . 25 CEC Drawer Operator Panel and EEPROM Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 CD-ROM and Hard Disk Drive Removals and Replacements, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Planar Assembly, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 CEC Drawer Power Supply Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 41 CEC Processor Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800. . . . . 44 Memory Riser Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Memory Riser Card, Memory DIMM Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Drawer Fan Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer . . . 51 Drawer Fan Controller and LED Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Cable Removals and Replacements, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer . . . . 56 CLUSTER I/O DRAWER REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES: . . . . . . . . 61 Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer . . . . 61 I/O Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 . . . . . . . . 64 I/O Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 . . . . . . . 66 Diskette Drive Removals and Replacements, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer 67 I/O Drawer Planar Assembly Battery Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 I/O Drawer Planar Assembly, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer . . . . . . . . 72 I/O Drawer Power Supply Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 . . . 78 SSA Device Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer 81 NVS/IOA Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer . . . 85 NVS Battery Charger Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 NVS Battery Assembly Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Fan Controller Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer 96 RIO Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer . . . . 98 RJ45 Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer . . . . 102 Cable Removals and Replacements, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer . . . . . 105 HOST BAY REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES: . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Moving the Host Bay to Its Service Position, 2105 Model 800 . . . . . . 109 Host Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 . . . . . . . . 111 Host Bay Power Supply Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 . . . 114 Host Bay Drawer Backplane Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 116 ESCON and Fibre Channel Wrap Tools, 2105 Model 800 . . . . . . . . 118 Host Bay Planar Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 . . . . . . 120 2105 Model 800 and EXPANSION ENCLOSURE FRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Rack, Subsystem Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Primary Power Supply Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Mainline Power Cable Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

iv

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Primary Power Supply Fan Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 V Battery Set Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator Panel Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rack Power Control Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 RPC Switch Card (Local and Remote) Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Power Control Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 Storage Cage Power Supply Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage Cage Fan (Top) Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage Cage Fan (Center) Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage Cage Power Planar Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage Cage Fan/Power Sense Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and 2105 Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Removals and Replacements, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 5: Install and Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing and Testing the 2105 Subsystem . . . . . . . . 2105 Model 800 Installation Process and Checkpoints . . . Installation With Multiple Service Representatives . . . . Before You Install the 2105 Subsystem . . . . . . . . Begin the Physical Install of the 2105 Subsystem . . . . . Checking the Customer Power . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the 2105 Model 800 Switch Settings . . . . . . Setting 390 V Battery and Primary Power Supplies to On . . How to Power on and Test the 2105 Subsystem . . . . . Installing the 2105 Subsystem Using the Service Terminal . Complete the Physical Install of the 2105 . . . . . . . . . Begin Installation and Connection to the ESSNet . . . . . Configuring the Master Console . . . . . . . . . . . . Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Date and Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Service Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call Home Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial Port Configuration, Master Console to Cluster . . . Connect the 2105 to the Ethernet Hub and Configure Cluster Console IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verifying the Master Console Network Setup . . . . . . Master Console Backup and Restore Configuration Data . . Configuring the 2105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Customer Information . . . . . . . . . . . Configure SIM Reporting Options (System/390 only) . . . Configure Maximum Overall Problem Presentation Count . . Enable or Disable ESS Specialist . . . . . . . . . . Configure Call Home and Remote Services . . . . . . . Configure E-Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Pager Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 133 . 135 . 139 140 . 143 147 . 148 . 150 . 151 . 153 . 157 . 159 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 162 163 165 166 174 177 202 206 207 218 220 220 231 231 231 231 232 232 233 234 237 238 239 239 239 239 239 239 241 242 242

Contents

Configure Fibre Channel Port Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Control Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting an ESSNet1 or Master Console to a Customer Network . . . . Master Console Configuration for Customer Network . . . . . . . . 2105 Cluster Configuration for the Customer Network . . . . . . . . Verify Cluster IP Address on the Master Console . . . . . . . . . . Connect and Test the Customer Network Connection . . . . . . . . Testing Customer E-Mail and SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing Modem Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activating LIC Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Copy Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing Required Microcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Installation of the 2105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Certify DDMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional Testing of Retain Connection for Problem Notification and Data Upload (Master Console only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Routing Host System cables and Connecting the 2105 Model 800 to the Host System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logical Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Perform Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA . . . Finish the Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finish the Install (Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing and Testing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . Entry for 2105 Expansion Enclosure MES . . . . . . . . . . . . Entry for 2105 Expansion Enclosure with 2105 Model 800 . . . . . . How to Install the 2105 Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . 2105 Expansion Enclosure Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the Customer Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Power on the 2105 Expansion Enclosure and Test the Installation Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure Using the Service Terminal . . . Complete the Physical Install of the 2105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Installation of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure . . . . . 2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation . . . . . Tailgate Hardware Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . Cluster SCSI and Communication Cable Tailgate Clamps . . . . . . . Cluster Fibre Channel and ESCON Cable Tailgate Clamps . . . . . . Installing a DDM Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a DDM Bay for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Rack for Drawer Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the DDM Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reinstalling the Disk Drive Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logically Installing the DDM Bay Using the Service Terminal . . . . . Continuing the Installation of a DDM Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Installation of a DDM Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . 2105 Model 800 DDM Bay Installation with FC 0970 . . . . . . . . . Installing DDM Bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2105 Expansion Enclosure DDM Bay Installation with FC 0970 . . . . . Installing DDM Bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a Host Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Installation of a Host Card . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a Host Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a 2105 Model 800 Subsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Considerations when Moving a 2105 . . . . . . . . . . . . Determine if Shipping Containers are Required? . . . . . . . . . . Determine Configuration and Racks Being Moved . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

242 243 243 244 245 246 247 248 248 249 250 250 251 252

. 253 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 257 258 259 261 264 264 264 266 272 273 305 309 309 310 316 316 318 322 330 330 331 334 336 336 339 341 343 343 347 347 350 355 359 363 363 363 364

vi

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Check the Customer Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Considerations when Moving a 2105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repairing Existing Problems Using the Service Terminal . . . . . . . Powering Off the 2105 Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reinstall the Cluster to Cluster Ethernet Jumper Cable . . . . . . . . Disconnect Mainline Power Cables from Rack Being Moved . . . . . . Disconnect Control and Interface Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnecting 2105 Model 800 and 2105 Expansion Enclosure Frames Moving the 2105 Model 800 Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a Relocated 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure Subsystem Reinstallation of a 2105 Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discontinuing a 2105 Model 800 Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . Discontinuing a 2105 Model 800 Subsystem Using the Service Terminal Test Master Console Configuration and Communication Status . . . . . . Master Console Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating the Configuration of a 2105 ESS Subsystem . . . . . . . . Source ESS Subsystem Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capture the Source ESS Subsystem Configuration . . . . . . . . . Target ESS Subsystem Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicate the Configuration on the Target ESS Subsystem . . . . . . Chapter 6: Logical Configuration of Storage Facility . . . Pre-Installation Configuration Worksheets . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filling in fields on the Communications Resources Worksheet Activating LIC Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications Configuration of the 2105 . . . . . . . . Configure Customer Information . . . . . . . . . . . Configure SIM Reporting Options (System/390 only) . . . Configure Maximum Overall Problem Presentation Count . . Configure Call Home / Remote Services . . . . . . . . Configure E-Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Pager Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logical Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure ESS Specialist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Fibre Channel Port Topology . . . . . . . . Configure Control Switches Configuration. . . . . . . . Additional Configuration Procedures . . . . . . . . . . Change Date, Time, and Time Zone . . . . . . . . . Changing TCP/IP Configuration (Dual Cluster Version) . . . Changing TCP/IP Configuration (Single Cluster Version) . . Updating the Master Console TCP/IP Information . . . . . Regenerate ESS Specialist Certificate . . . . . . . . . Configure Copy Services, With DNS . . . . . . . . . Configure Copy Services, Without DNS . . . . . . . . Change/Show Control Switches . . . . . . . . . . . Enable or Disable CUIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Passwords on the Master Console . . . . . . Master Console Queue Management . . . . . . . . . . Master Console PE Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Console Offload User Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

364 364 365 365 368 368 369 374 376 377 377 386 386 388 388 391 391 392 392 393 395 395 395 396 396 397 397 397 397 397 398 399 399 399 400 400 400 401 401 401 405 409 410 410 412 415 415 415 416 417 418

Appendix. Accessibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Navigating by keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421


Contents

vii

Accessing the publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

viii

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Tables
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. DDM Bay FRU Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 CEC Drawer FRU Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 I/O Drawer FRU Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Host Bay FRU Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Rack FRU Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Cluster CEC drawer Cable and Connector Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Cluster I/O Drawer Cable and Connector Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Install and Remove Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 2105 Model 800 Install Without ISA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 2105 Model 800 Install With ISA Using the Background Certify and Build Logical Config from ISA Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Multiple SR Installation Activities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Before You Install the 2105 Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Checking the Customers Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Measuring Points for Three-Phase AC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Measuring Points for Three-Phase AC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Three-Phase AC Line Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Measuring Points for Three-Phase AC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Measuring Points for Three-Phase AC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Three-Phase AC Line Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 2105 Model 800 Rack Operator Panel Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Check the 2105 UEPO and Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 2105 Model 800 Rack Operator Panel Power Complete Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 2105 Model 800 Rack Operator Panel Power Complete Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer Power Supply CHK/PWR-GOOD Indicators . . . . . . . . . 211 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer Power Supply CHK/PWR-GOOD Indicators . . . . . . . . . . 212 2105 Model 800 Host Bay Power Supply CHK/PWR-GOOD Indicators . . . . . . . . . . 213 2105 Model 800 Storage Cage Power Supply CHK/PWR-GOOD Indicators . . . . . . . . . 213 2105 Model 800 Primary Power Supply PPS Good Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Connect the Service Terminal to the 2105 Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Default TCP/IP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Begin Install of the Master Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Begin Install of the Master Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 2105 Model 800 Recommended Ethernet Hub Connection Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . 228 2105 Model 800 Recommended Ethernet Hub Connection Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Install Completion Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Logical Configuration will be not be performed by SR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Logical Configuration Import from ISA Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Logical Configuration using ESS Specialist or Copy Services Duplication . . . . . . . . . . 252 Before You Install the 2105 Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Checking the Customers Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Measuring Points for Three-Phase AC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Measuring Points for Three-Phase AC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Three-Phase AC Line Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Measuring Points for Three-Phase AC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Measuring Points for Three-Phase AC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Three-Phase AC Line Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 2105 Expansion Enclosure Rack Operator Panel Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Check the 2105 UEPO and Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 2105 Expansion Enclosure Rack Operator Panel Power Complete Indicators . . . . . . . . 307 2105 Expansion Enclosure Rack Operator Panel Power Complete Indicators . . . . . . . . 307 2105 Model 800 Storage Cage Power Supply CHK/PWR-GOOD Indicators . . . . . . . . . 308 2105 Expansion Enclosure Primary Power Supply PPS Good Indicators . . . . . . . . . . 308

Copyright IBM Corp. 2004, 2005

ix

53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58.

DDM Bay Physical Installation Sequence . . . DDM Bay Physical Installation Sequence for Each Default TCP/IP Settings . . . . . . . . . . Default TCP/IP Settings . . . . . . . . . . Control Switch Activation Reboot Requirements . Master Console Launcher Passwords . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop on AAL Configured Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

331 332 403 406 415 416

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Figures
1. Chinese EMI Statement (s009679) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii 2. Disk Drive Module Locations in a DDM bay (S007706l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 3. Disk Drive Module Check Indicator (S007715m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 4. Drive Removal (S007718m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 5. Disk Drive Removal (S007719m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 6. Placing a DDM in a Safe Position (S007720m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 7. Disk Drive Module Replacement (S007721m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 8. Drive Module Installation (S007722m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 9. Drive Lock Installation (S007723m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 10. DDM bay Bypass and Passthrough Card Locations (S007732l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 11. Bypass and Passthrough Card Removal (S007733l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 12. DDM bay Bypass Card Jumper Settings (S008524l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 13. DDM bay Controller Card Removal (S007735l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 14. DDM Bay Frame Assembly Location (S007731l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 15. DDM bay Serial Number Plate Location (s009541) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 16. DDM Bay Locations (s009540) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 17. 2105 Model 800 Cluster SSA Device Card Connectors (s009166) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 18. DDM bay SSA Connectors (S007693l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 19. 2105 Model 800 Cluster Locations (s009294) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 20. RPC Card Cluster Power Switches (s009228) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 21. RPC Card Cluster Power Switches (s009228) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 22. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009227) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 23. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009229) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 24. CEC Drawer Top Cover Removal (s009230) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 25. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009227) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 26. CEC Drawer Operator Panel Location (s009232) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 27. CEC Drawer Operator Panel Removal (s009231) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 28. CEC Drawer Operator Panel VPD Module Swap (s009233) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 29. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009227) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 30. 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer Drive Locations (s009265) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 31. CEC Drawer Drive Mounting Screws (s009266) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 32. CEC Drawer Drive Removal (s009267). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 33. CD-ROM Drive Jumpers (s009268) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 34. CEC Drawer Drive Removal (s009269). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 35. Hard Disk Drive Jumpers (s009464) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 36. New 18 GB Hard Disk Drive Jumpers (s009709) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 37. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009227) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 38. CEC Drawer Planar Assembly Locations (s009295) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 39. CEC Drawer Power Supply Locations (s009251) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 40. CEC Processor and Memory Card Locations (s009270) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 41. CEC Drawer Locations (s009271) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 42. CEC Drawer Locations (s009272) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 43. CEC Drawer Locations (s009273) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 44. CEC Drawer Power Supply Locations (s009236) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 45. CEC Drawer Power Supply Cable Arm Locations (s009465) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 46. CEC Drawer Power Supply Locations (s009281) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 47. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009227) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 48. CEC Drawer, Processor Card Location (s009255) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 49. CEC Drawer, Processor Card Location (s009296) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 50. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009227) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 51. CEC Drawer, Memory Riser Card Locations (s009256) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 52. CEC Drawer, Memory Riser Card Locations (s009297) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 53. 2105 Model 800 Cluster CEC Drawer Locations (s009227) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Copyright IBM Corp. 2004, 2005

xi

54. 2105 Model 800 Memory Riser Card Memory DIMM Locations (s009241) . 55. Memory DIMM Removal (S008408m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56. Memory DIMM Installation (S008409m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57. 2105 Model 800 Cluster Locations (s009235) . . . . . . . . . . . 58. Cluster CEC Drawer Fan Removal (s009283) . . . . . . . . . . . 59. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009227) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60. Cluster, CEC Drawer Fan Controller and LED Card Locations (s009240) . 61. CEC Fan Controller Card Removal (s009278) . . . . . . . . . . . 62. CEC LED Card Removal (s009277) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63. CEC Cable Locations (s009227) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64. Cluster CEC Drawer Planar Connector Locations 1 (s009274) . . . . . 65. Cluster CEC Drawer Planar Connector Locations 2 (s009275) . . . . . 66. Cluster CEC Drawer Planar Connector Locations 3 (s009276) . . . . . 67. 2105 Model 800 Cluster Locations (s009294) . . . . . . . . . . . 68. RPC Card Cluster Power Switches (s009228) . . . . . . . . . . . 69. RPC Card Cluster Power Switches (s009228) . . . . . . . . . . . 70. I/O Drawer Service Position (s009284) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71. I/O Drawer Service Position (s009302) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72. I/O Drawer Top Cover Removal (s009303) . . . . . . . . . . . . 73. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74. I/O Drawer Diskette Drive Location (s009304) . . . . . . . . . . . 75. I/O Drawer Diskette Drive Location (s009480) . . . . . . . . . . . 76. I/O Drawer Planar Assembly Battery Location (s009284) . . . . . . . 77. I/O Drawer Planar Assembly Battery Location (s009299) . . . . . . . 78. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79. 2105 Model 800 Cluster I/O Drawer Locations (s009300) . . . . . . . 80. I/O Drawer Power Supply Locations (s009394) . . . . . . . . . . . 81. I/O Drawer Locations (s009525) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82. I/O Drawer Card Locations (s009397) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83. I/O Drawer Locations (s009523) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84. I/O Drawer Locations (s009524) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85. I/O Drawer Power Supply Locations (s009301) . . . . . . . . . . . 86. I/O Drawer Power Supply Cable Arm Locations (s009466) . . . . . . 87. I/O Drawer Power Supply Locations (s009282) . . . . . . . . . . . 88. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89. SSA Device Card Locations (s009181) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90. I/O Drawer Card Retention Bar Location (s009310) . . . . . . . . . 91. SSA Card Locations (s009472) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93. NVS/IOA Card Locations (s009309) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94. I/O Drawer Card Retention Bar Location (s009310) . . . . . . . . . 95. NVS/IOA Card Locations (s009473) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97. NVS Battery Charger Card Removal (s009313) . . . . . . . . . . 98. I/O Drawer Card Retention Bar Location (s009311) . . . . . . . . . 99. NVS Battery Charger Card Locations (s009474) . . . . . . . . . . 100. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101. NVS Battery Assembly Locations (s009314) . . . . . . . . . . . . 102. NVS Battery Assembly Locations (s009475) . . . . . . . . . . . . 103. NVS Battery Assembly Locations (s009476) . . . . . . . . . . . . 104. Date of First Charge Label Location (s009552) . . . . . . . . . . . 105. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106. Cluster, I/O Drawer Fan Controller Card Locations (s009467) . . . . . 107. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108. RIO Card Removal (s009259) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109. RIO Card Locations (s009520) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 50 . 50 . 51 . 52 . 53 . 54 . 54 . 55 . 56 . 57 . 58 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 63 . 64 . 65 . 65 . 66 . 67 . 68 . 69 . 70 . 71 . 73 . 73 . 74 . 75 . 76 . 77 . 78 . 79 . 80 . 81 . 82 . 83 . 84 . 85 . 86 . 86 . 87 . 88 . 89 . 90 . 91 . 92 . 93 . 93 . 94 . 95 . 96 . 97 . 97 . 99 . 99 . . . . . . . . . 100

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xii

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

110. RIO Card Locations (s009519) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111. RIO Card Locations (s009521) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113. I/O Drawer RJ45 Card Locations (s009316) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114. RJ45 Card Locations (s009481) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116. Cluster I/O Drawer Cable Connector Locations (s009598) . . . . . . . . . . . . 117. Host Bay Locations (s009455) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118. CPI Cable Routing (s009645) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119. Host Bay and Card Locations (s009482) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120. Removing Host Card from Host Bay (s009550) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121. CPI Cable Routing (s009649) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122. Host Bay Power Supply Locations (s009264) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123. Host Bay Power Supply Locations (s009435) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124. Host Bay Drawer Backplane Locations (s009581) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125. Host Bay Drawer Backplane Locations (s009580) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126. Host Bay and ESCON Card Locations (s009456) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127. Host Bay Locations (s009139) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128. Host Bay CPI Cable Connector Locations (s009551) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129. Host Bay Card and Planar Locations (s009463) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130. CPI Cable Routing (s009650) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131. 2105 Model 800 ESD Discharge Pad Locations (s009395) . . . . . . . . . . . . 132. 2105 Model 800 Operator Panel Location (s009423) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133. 2105 Model 800 Operator Panel Location (s009423) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134. 2105 Low-/High-Voltage Primary Power Supply Identification (s009542) . . . . . . . 135. Primary Power Supply Locations (S009442) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136. PPS Line Cord Bracket (S009443) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137. PPS Line Cord Bracket (s009543) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138. PPS Mounting Hardware Locations (s009544) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139. PPS Micro-Processor Switch Location (s009545) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140. Mainline Power Cable Locations (S009444) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141. Primary Power Supply Locations (S009445) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142. Primary Power Supply Fan Locations (s009446) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143. 390 V Battery Set Locations (s009447) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144. Cable Routing Bracket Removal (S008250m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145. PPS 1, 390 V Battery Set Connector (s009448) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146. Date of First Charge Label (S009205) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147. Date of First Charge Label Location (s009582) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148. 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure Rack Operator Panel Removal (s009449) 149. Rack Power Control Card Locations (s009401) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150. Rack Power Control Card Removal (s009402) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151. Rack Power Control Card Replacement (s009403) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152. RPC Switch Card Locations (s009398) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153. RPC Switch Card Cable Locations (s009457) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154. RPC Switch Card and Cover Removal (s009400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155. RPC Switch Card Removal (s009458) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156. Remote Power Control Card (s009450) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157. Storage Cage Power Supply Locations (s009451) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158. Storage Cage Power Supply Locations (s009534) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159. Storage Cage Fan Locations (s009193) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160. Storage Cage Fan Replacement (s009549) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161. Storage Cage Fan (Center) Locations (s009194) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162. Storage Cage Fan (Center) Replacement (s009452) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163. 2105 Model 800 Operator Panel Location (s009423) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164. Storage Cage Power Planar Locations (s009197) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165. Storage Cage Fan Plate Removal (s009453) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

101 102 103 104 105 106 107 110 111 112 113 114 115 115 117 118 119 121 121 122 123 123 124 125 126 127 128 128 129 131 132 132 134 135 136 137 138 138 140 141 142 142 144 145 145 146 147 148 149 151 151 152 153 154 155 156

Figures

xiii

166. Storage Cage Power Planar Removal (S008084m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167. Power Planar to DDM Bay Power Cable Access (s008085l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168. Power Planar to DDM Bay Power Cable Details (s009460) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169. Storage Cage Fan/Power Sense Card Locations (s009454). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170. 2105 Model 800 Installation Process Flowchart (s009639) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171. Cluster Communications Cable Location (S009120) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172. Caster Wedge Chocks (S008406m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173. Top Hat Installation (s009553) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174. 2105 Model 800 Mainline Power Cable Installation (S009121) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175. Primary Power Supply Mainline Circuit Breaker (S008099l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176. Line Cord Bracket Connectors (S009122) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177. Ground Continuity Check, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009626) . . . . . . . . 178. Male Plug on the Mainline Power Cable (s009633) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179. Checking the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power Off, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009628) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable and Customer AC (S009634) . . . . . . 181. Checking the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power Off, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009629) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable and Customer AC (S009634) . . . . . . 183. Check the Three-Phase AC Power Cable Outlet, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009630) 184. Three Phase Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable and Customer AC (S009635) 185. Checking the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power On, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009632 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S009636) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187. Primary Power Supply Mainline Circuit Breaker (S008099l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188. Line Cord Bracket Connectors (S009122) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189. Ground Continuity Check with Wired Mainline, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009405) 190. Line Cord Bracket Connectors (S009123) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191. Check the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power Off, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009407) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S008046l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193. Check the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power Off, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009408) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S008046l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195. Check the Three-Phase AC Power Cable, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009627) . . . 196. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S009636) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197. Checking the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power On, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009631) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S009636) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199. Line Cord Bracket Connectors (S009124) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200. 2105 Model 800 Operator Panel Locations (s009422) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201. Electronics and Storage Cage Power Supply Switches (s009169) . . . . . . . . . . . 202. Primary Power Supply Circuit Breaker Locations (S007627l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203. Rack Power Control Card Switch Locations (S009127) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204. 2105 Model 800 390 V Battery Circuit Breaker (s009128) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205. Primary Power Supply (s009616) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206. Cluster Communications Cable Location (S009120) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207. 2105 Model 800 Operator Panel Locations (s009421) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208. 2105 Model 800 Operator Panel Locations (s009421) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209. CEC Drawer, I/O Drawer, and Host Bay Power Supply Indicators (s009209) . . . . . . . 210. Host Bay Power Supply Indicators (s009417) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211. Primary Power Supply (s009129) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212. Accessing the Service Terminal Table (s009131) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213. Cluster Connectors for Service Terminal (s009132) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214. MSA and Modem Expander Attachment Diagram (s009415) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215. Multiport Serial Adapter Attachment Diagram (S009424) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

156 157 157 158 163 173 175 176 177 180 181 182 182

. 183 . 184 . 185 . 185 187 187 . . . . 189 189 191 192 193 . 194

. 195 . 196 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 197 198 199 200 200 202 203 204 204 205 206 206 207 209 210 211 212 213 215 216 220 222

xiv

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

216. Modem Configuration Switch Settings (S007457l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217. Modem Rear View (s009711) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218. Modem Front Panel Locations (S008412l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219. Multiport Serial Adapter Top View (S009175) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220. Cluster to Modem Connectors (S009133) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221. Ethernet Hub Locations (s009615) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222. Cluster to Cluster Communication Cable Location (S009120) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223. Ethernet Hub Locations (s009615) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224. MSA and Modem Expander Diagram (s009415) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225. Cluster Connectors for Service Terminal (S009132) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226. 2105 Model 800 ESD Discharge Pad Locations (S009141) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227. 2105 Model 800 Host Bay Connector Locations (S009135) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228. Tailgate Cable Strain Relief Clamps (S009143) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229. Tailgate Cable Strain Relief Clamps (S009145) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230. RPC Card Local/Remote Switch Locations (S009146) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231. Storing the Service Terminal Table (S009144) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232. Installation of 2105 Rack Spacers (S008671q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233. Rack Spacer Service Panel Removal (S008672p) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234. 2105 Expansion Enclosure Ground Strap Location (S008670m) . . . . . . . . . . . . 235. Caster Wedge Chocks (S009050) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236. Top Hat Installation (s009554) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237. Date of First Charge Label Location (S009205) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238. 390 V Battery Locations (s009589) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239. 2105 Expansion Enclosure Mainline Power Cable Installation (S008662m) . . . . . . . . 240. Primary Power Supply Mainline Circuit Breaker (S008099l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241. Line Cord Bracket Connectors (S008663m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242. Ground Continuity Check, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009626) . . . . . . . . 243. Male Plug on the Mainline Power Cable (s009633) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244. Checking the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power Off, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009628) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable and Customer AC (S009634) . . . . . . 246. Checking the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power Off, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009629) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable and Customer AC (S009634) . . . . . . 248. Check the Three-Phase ac Power Cable Outlet, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009630) 249. Three-Phase Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable and Customer AC (S009635) 250. Checking the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power On, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009632 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S009636) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252. Primary Power Supply Mainline Circuit Breaker (S008099l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253. Line Cord Bracket Connectors (S008663m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254. Ground Continuity Check with Wired Mainline, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009405) 255. Line Cord Bracket Connectors (S008661m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256. Check the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power Off, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009407) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S008046l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258. Check the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power Off, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009408) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S008046l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260. Check the Three-Phase ac Power Cable, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009627). . . . 261. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S009636) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262. Checking the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power On, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009631) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S009636) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264. Line Cord Bracket Connectors (S008664m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265. 2105 Expansion Enclosure Operator Panel Locations (S008656m) . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

222 223 225 225 227 229 234 236 244 249 254 256 257 259 260 261 268 269 270 270 271 272 272 273 276 277 278 278

. 279 . 280 . 281 . 281 283 283 . . . . 285 285 287 288 289 . 290

. 291 . 292 . . . . . . . . 293 293 294 295 296 296 298 299

Figures

xv

266. Storage Cage Power Supply Switches (s009535) . . . . . . . . . . . 267. Primary Power Supply Circuit Breaker Locations (S009051) . . . . . . . 268. Primary Power Interconnect Cable Installation (S009211) . . . . . . . . 269. 2105 Model 800 DDM bay Locations (S009136) . . . . . . . . . . . . 270. DDM bay SSA Connector Locations (S007703l) . . . . . . . . . . . . 271. DDM Bay Short Cable SSA Connector Locations (s009608) . . . . . . . 272. Primary Power Supply (S009108) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273. 2105 Expansion Enclosure 390 V Battery Circuit Breaker (S008667m) . . . 274. 2105 Expansion Enclosure Operator Panel Locations (S009420) . . . . . . 275. Primary Power Supply (S008668n) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276. SSA DASD DDM Bay Indicators (S008021l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277. Location Codes for DDM bays in a 2105 Expansion Enclosure (S007741s) . . 278. Storing the Service Terminal Table (S009161) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279. 2105 Model 800 Cluster Locations (S009154) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280. 2105 Model 800 Tailgate Configurations (S009155) . . . . . . . . . . . 281. Tailgate Bar Removal (S009156) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282. Tailgate Clamp Removal (S008275n) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283. SCSI Cable Grounding Braid Position in Tailgate (S008525m) . . . . . . . 284. Cluster SCSI Cable Tailgate Clamps (S009152) . . . . . . . . . . . . 285. Cluster Communication Cable Tailgate Clamps (S009151) . . . . . . . . 286. Cluster 1, Tailgate Cable and Cable Clamp Locations (S008270m) . . . . . 287. Cluster 2, Tailgate Cable and Cable Clamp Locations (S008271m) . . . . . 288. Cluster Fibre Channel or ESCON Cable Installation (S009153) . . . . . . 289. Tailgate Bar Removal (S009157) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290. ESCON and ESCON/fibre Strain Relief Hardware (S009012S) . . . . . . 291. ESCON Cable Strain Relief Hardware (S008276p) . . . . . . . . . . . 292. Fibre/ESCON Cable Strain Relief Cover Removal (S009014M) . . . . . . 293. Fibre/ESCON Cable Strain Relief Bracket Hardware (S009013M) . . . . . 294. Cluster Fibre/ESCON Cable Tailgate Clamps (S008259p) . . . . . . . . 295. DDM Bay Installation Parts (S007694m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296. DDM Bay Air Door and Power Cable (S007697L) . . . . . . . . . . . 297. DDM Bay Front Power Cable Locations (s009349) . . . . . . . . . . . 298. DDM Bay Rear Power Cable Locations (s009350) . . . . . . . . . . . 299. DDM Bay Locations (s009555) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300. DDM Bay Frame Installation (s009556) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301. DDM Bay Card Locations (s009594) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302. Disk Drive Module Installation (S007701m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303. 2105 Model 800 SSA Loop Configurations (s009419) . . . . . . . . . . 304. 2105 Expansion Enclosure SSA Loop Configurations (s009346) . . . . . . 305. Cluster SSA Device Card Connector Locations (s009166) . . . . . . . . 306. DDM Bay SSA Connector Locations (S007703l) . . . . . . . . . . . . 307. DDM bay Indicator Locations (S007704l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308. R1- Location Codes for DDM Bays in a 2105 Model 800 (s009134) . . . . . 309. DDM Bay Storage Cage Air Door (s009555) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310. DDM Bay Frame Installation (s009556) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311. DDM Bay SSA Connector Locations (S007703l) . . . . . . . . . . . . 312. DDM Bay Short Cable SSA Connector Locations (S007703l) . . . . . . . 313. R2- Location Codes for DDM Bays in a 2105 Expansion Enclosure (s007741s) 314. DDM Bay Storage Cage Air Door (s009555) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315. DDM Bay Frame Installation (s009556) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316. DDM Bay SSA Connector Locations (S007703l) . . . . . . . . . . . . 317. Locating a Host Bay (s009139) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318. Host Bay Card Locations (s009142) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319. Host Card Installation Locations (s009351) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320. Host Card Installation Locations (s009557) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321. Host Bay Card Connectors Locations (s009142) . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

299 300 301 302 303 303 304 304 306 308 310 312 314 316 317 318 319 319 321 321 322 322 323 324 325 326 328 328 329 331 332 333 334 335 335 335 336 338 339 339 340 341 344 345 345 345 346 348 349 349 349 351 352 353 353 358

xvi

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

322. Locating a Host Bay (s009139) . . . . . . . . . . . . 323. Host Bay Card Locations (s009142) . . . . . . . . . . 324. Host Card Removal Locations (s009558) . . . . . . . . 325. Host Card Removal Locations (s009352) . . . . . . . . 326. Service Terminal Interface Connection (s009132) . . . . . 327. 2105 Model 800 Operator Panel Switch Locations (s009421) . 328. 350 Volt Battery Locations (s009159) . . . . . . . . . . 329. Primary Power Supply Locations (s009579) . . . . . . . 330. Primary Power Supply System Power CB Location (S008689l) 331. Cluster Communications Cable Location (S009120) . . . . 332. Mainline Power Cable Locations (s009150). . . . . . . . 333. Rack Spacer Service Panel Removal (S008695p) . . . . . 334. Primary Power Supply Control Cable Locations (s009212) . . 335. 2105 Expansion Enclosure Ground Strap Location (S008696m) 336. DDM bay SSA Connector Locations (S007703l) . . . . . . 337. 2105 Model 800 Host Bay Connector Locations (s009142) . . 338. Cluster Connector Locations (s009160) . . . . . . . . . 339. Caster Wedge Locks (S008406m) . . . . . . . . . . . 340. Installation of 2105 Rack Spacers (S008699q) . . . . . . 341. 2105 Model 800 ESD Discharge Pad Location (s009395) . . 342. 2105 Model 800 Host Bay Connector Locations (s009142) . . 343. 2105 Model 800 DDM bay Locations (s009136) . . . . . . 344. DDM bay SSA Connector Locations (S007703l) . . . . . . 345. Cluster Communications Cable Location (S009120) . . . . 346. Cluster Ethernet Connectors (s009132) . . . . . . . . . 347. ESSNet Hub Port Connector Locations (S008603p) . . . . 348. 2105 Model 800 390 V Battery Circuit Breaker (s009128) . . 349. Primary Power Supply (s009616) . . . . . . . . . . . 350. Cluster Communications Cable Location (S009120) . . . . 351. Service Terminal Interface Connection (s009132) . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

360 361 362 362 365 366 366 367 367 368 369 370 371 372 372 373 374 374 375 378 379 380 381 381 382 383 384 384 385 386

Figures

xvii

xviii

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Notices
References in this manual to IBM products, programs, or services do not imply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM operates. Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product, program, or service may be used. Subject to IBMs valid intellectual property or other legal protectable rights, any functionally equivalent product, program, or service may be used instead of the IBM product, program, or service. The evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, except those expressly designated by IBM, are the responsibility of the user. IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to: IBM Director of Licensing IBM Corporation North Castle Drive Armonk, NY 10504-1785 USA

Safety Notices
Safety notices are printed throughout this manual. Danger notices warn you of conditions or procedures that can result in death or severe personal injury. Caution notices warn you of conditions or procedures that can cause personal injury that is neither lethal nor extremely hazardous. Attention notices warn you of conditions or procedures that can cause damage to machines, equipment, or programs.

Laser Safety and Compliance


These products contain components that comply with performance standards that are set by the U. S. Food and Drug Administration (Part 21CFR, 1040.10/11). This means that these products belong to a class of laser products that do not emit hazardous laser radiation. This classification was accomplished by providing the necessary protective housing and scanning safeguards to ensure that laser radiation is inaccessible during operation or is within Class I limits. External safety agencies have reviewed these products and have obtained approvals to the latest standards as they apply to this product type.

Translated Safety Notices


Several countries require that caution and danger safety notices be shown in their national languages. Translations of the caution and danger safety notices are provided in a separate document, IBM Storage Solution Safety Notices manual, form number GC26-7229.

Environmental Notices
This section contains information about: v Product recycling for this product v Environmental guidelines for this product

Copyright IBM Corp. 2004, 2005

xix

Product Recycling
This unit contains recyclable materials. These materials should be recycled where processing sites are available and according to local regulations. In some areas, IBM provides a product take-back program that ensures proper handling of the product. Contact your IBM representative for more information.

Product Disposal
This unit contains several types of batteries. Return all Pb-acid (lead-acid) batteries to IBM for proper recycling, according to the instructions received with the replacement batteries.

Electronic Emission Notices Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement


Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Industry Canada Compliance Statement


This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Avis de conformit la rglementation dIndustrie Canada


Cet appareil numrique de la classe A est conform la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

European Community Compliance Statement


This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council Directive 89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. IBM cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification of the product, including the fitting of non-IBM option cards.

xx

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Conformity with the Council Directive 73/23/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits is based on compliance with the following harmonized standard: EN60950.

Germany Only
Zulassungsbescheinigung laut Gesetz ueber die elektromagnetische Vertraeglichkeit von Geraeten (EMVG) vom 30. August 1995. Dieses Geraet ist berechtigt, in Uebereinstimmung mit dem deutschen EMVG das EG-Konformitaetszeichen - CE - zu fuehren. Der Aussteller der Konformitaetserklaeung ist die IBM Deutschland. Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraph 3 Abs. (2) 2: Das Geraet erfuellt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 50082-1 un EN 55022 Klasse A. EN 55022 Klasse A Geraete beduerfen folgender Hinweise: Nach dem EMVG: Geraete duerfen an Orten, fuer die sie nicht ausreichend entstoert sind, nur mit besonderer Genehmigung des Bundesministeriums fuer Post und Telekommunikation oder des Bundesamtes fuer Post und Telekommunikation betrieben werden. Die Genehmigung wird erteilt, wenn keine elektromagnetischen Stoerungen zu erwarten sind. (Auszug aus dem EMVG, Paragraph 3, Abs.4) Dieses Genehmigungsverfahren ist nach Paragraph 9 EMVG in Verbindung mit der entsprechenden Kostenverordnung (Amtsblatt 14/93) kostenpflichtig. Nach der EN 55022: Dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann im Wohnbereich Funkstoerungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber verlangt werden, angemessene Massnahmen durchzufuehren und dafuer aufzukommen. Anmerkung: Um die Einhaltung des EMVG sicherzustellen, sind die Geraete wie in den Handbuechern angegeben zu installieren und zu betreiben.

Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) Class A Statement

Korean Ministry of Information and Communication (MIC) Statement


Please note that this device has been certified for business use with regard to electromagnetic interference. If you find this is not suitable for your use, you may exchange it for one of residential use.

Notices

xxi

Taiwan Class A Compliance Statement

Chinese Class A Electronic Emission Statement

Figure 1. Chinese EMI Statement (s009679)

Trademarks
The following terms are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or other countries or both: AIX AS/400 DB2 DFSMS/MVS DFSMS/VM e (logo) Enterprise Storage Server Enterprise Systems Architecture/390 ESCON ES/9000 FICON FlashCopy IBM MVS MVS/ESA Netfinity NetVista NUMA-Q Operating System/400 OS/390 OS/400 RETAIN RS/6000 S/390 Seascape SP StorWatch System/360 System/370 System/390 TotalStorage

xxii

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Versatile Storage Server VM/ESA VSE/ESA xSeries z/Architecture z/OS zSeries z/VM Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other counties, or both. Java and all Java-based trademarks are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States, other counties, or both. UNIX, is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries. Other company, product, and service names, may be trademarks or service marks of others.

Notices

xxiii

xxiv

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Using This Service Guide


This guide is for service representatives who are taught to install and repair the IBM 2105 TotalStorage ESS. Internal components of this machine are designed and certified to be serviced by trained personnel only.

Where to Start
Start all service actions at Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of the Volume 1. Note: 2105 Model 750 information v The 2105 Model 750 is fully supported by the service information in this manual when following guided procedures. However, the service information will only reference the 2105 Model 800. v The 2105 Model 750 supports limited configuration options when compared to the 2105 Model 800. For further information, reference the IBM TotalStorage ESS Introduction and Planning Guide (form number SC267246). Attention: When performing any service action on the IBM 2105 TotalStorage ESS, follow the directions given in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of the Volume 1, or from the service terminal. This ensures that you use the correct remove, replace, or repair procedure, including the correct power on/off procedure, for this machine. Failure to follow these instructions can cause damage to the machine and might or might not also cause an unexpected loss of access to customer data.

Limited Vocabulary
This manual uses a specific range of words so that the text can be understood by IBM service representatives in countries where English is not the primary language.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2004, 2005

xxv

Publications
This section describes the TotalStorage ESS library and publications for related products. It also gives ordering information.

TotalStorage ESS Product Library


The TotalStorage ESS is an IBM Enterprise architecture-based product. See the following publications for more information on the TotalStorage ESS: v IBM TotalStorage ESS: Service Guide, 2105 Model 750/800 and Expansion Enclosure, Volume 1 manual, SY277635 v IBM TotalStorage ESS: Service Guide, 2105 Model 750/800 and Expansion Enclosure, Volume 2 manual, SY277636 v IBM TotalStorage ESS: Service Guide, 2105 Model 750/800 and Expansion Enclosure, Volume 3 manual, SY277637 v IBM TotalStorage ESS: Parts Catalog, 2105 Model /750/800 and Expansion Enclosure manual, S127-0978 v IBM TotalStorage ESS: Safety Notices manual, GC26-7229 This manual provides translations of the Danger and Caution notices used in the TotalStorage ESS publications. v Maintenance Information for S/390 Fiber Optic Links (ESCON, FICON, Coupling Links, and Open System Adapters) manual, form number SY27-2597 v Enterprise Systems Link Fault Isolation manual, form number SY22-9533 (Available online in CORE) v IBM TotalStorage ESS: Configuration Planner for Open Systems Hosts manual, SC26-7475 (See Note) This guide provides guidelines and work sheets for planning the logical configuration of an ESS that attaches to open-system hosts. v IBM TotalStorage ESS: Configuration Planner for S/390 and IBM eserver zSeries Hosts manual, SC26-7476 (See Note) This guide provides guidelines and work sheets for planning the logical configuration of an ESS that attaches to either the IBM S/390 and IBM eserver zSeries host systems. v IBM TotalStorage ESS: Host Systems Attachment Guide manual, SC26-7446 This guide provides guidelines for attaching the ESS to your host system and for migrating to fibre-channel attachment from either a small computer system interface (SCSI) or from the IBM San Data Gateway. v IBM TotalStorage ESS: DFSMS Software Support Reference manual, SC26-7440 This publication provides an overview of the ESS capabilities. It also describes Data Facility Storage Management Subsystems (DFSMS) software support for the ESS, including support for large volumes. v IBM TotalStorage ESS: Introduction and Planning Guide manual, GC267444 This guide introduces the ESS product and lists the features you can order. It also provides guidelines for planning the installation and configuration of the ESS. v IBM TotalStorage ESS: Quick Configuration Guide manual, SC26-7354 This manuallet provides flow charts for using the TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server Specialist (ESS Specialist). The flow charts provide a high-level view of the tasks that the IBM service support representative performs during initial logical configuration. You can also use the flow charts for tasks that you might perform when you are modifying the logical configuration.

xxvi

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

v IBM TotalStorage ESS: S/390 Command Reference manual, SC26-7298 This publication describes the functions of the ESS and provides reference information, such as channel commands, sense bytes, and error recovery procedures for IBM S/390 and zSeries hosts. v IBM TotalStorage ESS: SCSI Command Reference manual, SC26-7297 This publication describes the functions of the ESS. It provides reference information, such as channel commands, sense bytes, and error recovery procedures for UNIX , IBM Application System/400 (AS/400), and eserver iSeries 400 hosts. v IBM TotalStorage ESS: Subsystem Device Driver manual, SC26-7478 This publication describes how to use the IBM TotalStorage ESS Subsystem Device Driver (SDD) on open-systems hosts to enhance performance and availability on the ESS. SDD creates redundant paths for shared logical unit numbers. SDD permits applications to run without interruption when path errors occur. It balances the workload across paths, and it transparently integrates with applications. For information about the SDD, go to the following Web site: www.ibm.com/storage/support/techsup/swtechsup.nsf/support/sddupdates/ v IBM TotalStorage ESS: Users Guide manual, SC26-7445 This guide provides instructions for setting up and operating the ESS and for analyzing problems. v IBM TotalStorage ESS: Web Interface Users Guide manual, SC26-7448 This guide provides instructions for using the two ESS Web interfaces, ESS Specialist and ESS Copy Services. Note: No hardcopy manual is produced for this publication. However, a PDF file is available from the following Web site: www.storage.ibm.com/hardsoft/products/ess/refinfo.htm

Ordering Publications
All of the above publications are available on a CD-ROM that comes with the TotalStorage ESS. You can also order a hard copy of some of the publications. For additional CD-ROMs, order: v ESS Service Documents CD-ROM, SK2T-8822 v ESS Customer Documents CD-ROM, SK2T-8803

Web Sites
v IBM Storage home page: http://www.storage.ibm.com/ v IBM Enterprise Storage Server home page: http://www.ibm.com/storage/ess http://www.storage.ibm.com/hardsoft/product/refinfo.htm

Other Related Publications


The following is a list of other related manuals. IBM Input/Output Equipment, Installation ManualPhysical Planning, GC22-7064 Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers, S229-8124

Using This Service Guide

xxvii

xxviii

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Chapter 4: FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures


Entry for Repair
Select the correct FRU replacement entry table: v DDM bay FRU replacement, go to Table 1 v CEC drawer FRU replacement, go to Table 2 v I/O drawer FRU replacement, go to Table 3 on page 2 v Host bay FRU replacement, go to Table 4 on page 2 v Rack FRU replacement, go to Table 5 on page 2 Note: 2105 Model 750 information v The 2105 Model 750 is fully supported by the service information in this chapter when following guided procedures. However, the service information will only reference the 2105 Model 800. v The 2105 Model 750 supports limited configuration options when compared to the 2105 Model 800. For further information, reference the IBM TotalStorage ESS Introduction and Planning Guide manual, (form number SC267246).

DDM Bay FRU Replacement Procedures


Table 1. DDM Bay FRU Replacement Procedures DDM Bay FRU: Disk Drive Module Locations Disk Drive Module Bypass and Passthrough Card Controller Card Frame Assembly SSA Cable Go to: Page 7 Page 7 Page 11 Page 13 Page 14 Page 17

CEC Drawer FRU Replacement Procedures


Table 2. CEC Drawer FRU Replacement Procedures CEC Drawer FRU: Cluster Power On and Off CEC Drawer to Service Position CEC Drawer Top Service Access CEC Drawer Operator Panel CD-ROM Drive and Hard Disk Drive CEC Drawer Planar Assembly CEC Drawer Power Supply Processor Card Memory Riser Card Memory DIMM CEC Drawer Fan
Copyright IBM Corp. 2004, 2005

Go to: Page 20 Page 23 Page 25 Page 26 Page 28 Page 35 Page 41 Page 44 Page 46 Page 48 Page 51

Repair
Table 2. CEC Drawer FRU Replacement Procedures (continued) CEC Drawer FRU: Fan Controller Card and LED Card CEC Drawer Cables Go to: Page 53 Page 56

I/O Drawer FRU Replacement Procedures


Table 3. I/O Drawer FRU Replacement Procedures I/O Drawer FRU: Cluster Power On and Off I/O Drawer to Service Position I/O Drawer Top Service Access Diskette Drive I/O Drawer Planar Assembly Battery I/O Drawer Planar Assembly I/O Drawer Power Supply SSA Device Card NVS/IOA Card NVS Battery Charger Card NVS Battery Assembly Fan Controller Card RIO Card RJ45 Card I/O Drawer Cables Go to: Page 61 Page 64 Page 66 Page 67 Page 69 Page 72 Page 78 Page 81 Page 85 Page 88 Page 92 Page 96 Page 98 Page 102 Page 105

Host Bay FRU Replacement Procedures


Table 4. Host Bay FRU Replacement Procedures Host Bay FRU: Host Bay to Service Position Host Card Host Bay Power Supply Host Bay Drawer Backplane ESCON and Fibre Tools Host Bay Planar Go to: Page 109 Page 111 Page 114 Page 116 Page 118 Page 120

Rack FRU Replacement Procedures


Table 5. Rack FRU Replacement Procedures Rack FRU: Rack Power On and Off Primary Power Supply Mainline Power Cable Go to: Page 124 Page 125 Page 131

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Repair
Table 5. Rack FRU Replacement Procedures (continued) Rack FRU: Primary Power Supply Fan 390 V Battery Operator Panel Rack Power Control Card (RPC Card) RPC Switch Card Remote Power Control Card Storage Cage Power Supply Storage Cage Fan (center) Storage Cage Power Planar Storage Cage Fan/Power Sense Card ESCON and Fibre Tools Cables, Rack Go to: Page 133 Page 135 Page 139 Page 140 Page 143 Page 147 Page 148 Page 151 Page 153 Page 157 Page 118 Page 159

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

Repair

Overview of Repair Chapter


This chapter describes FRU removal and replacement procedures and ESD procedures. Refer to Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts before you work with any logic cards, logic board, or cables connected to FRUs that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Because these instructions describe 2105 Model 800, 2105 Expansion Enclosure racks, and DDM bays, some diagrams might not specifically show the rack or drawer you are repairing.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures


Select the field replaceable unit (FRU) you want to repair from and go to the page shown. If you were not sent here from the service terminal, go to Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of the Volume 1, to replace a FRU.

Using the Repair Chapter


This chapter describes how to remove and replace field-replaceable units (FRUs) from SSA DASD DDM bays and 2105 units. Each FRU has its own removal and replacement procedure. When a step in a procedure refers to another procedure, a reference to that procedure is given. The references show you where to find more information, if you need it. Always return to the original procedure after referring to the information.

Standard Tools Needed


The following is a list of standard tools needed to service the 2105. v Number 2 Supadriv screwdriver (P/N 4760542) v Number 2 Supadriv bit (P/N 9900767) v Screwdriver, 7-inch ratchet magnetic tipped bits (P/N 9900712) v TORX kit (P/N 93F2830) v TORX 1/4-inch adapter (P/N 93F2838) v 4-mm socket wrench, 1/4-inch drive (P/N 73G1479) v 7-mm socket wrench, 1/4-inch drive (P/N 73G1464) v 8-mm socket wrench, 1/4-inch drive (P/N 73G1458) v ESD handling kit (P/N 73G5518) v SSA tool, screwdriver (P/N 32H7059) v ESCON wrap tool (large), (P/N 5605670) v ESCON wrap tool (small), (P/N 05N6767) v Fibre channel long (SW2 and LW2) wrap tool (P/N 11P3847) Note: For a list of Special Tools needed, refer to Chapter 1 in Volume 1 of this book.

Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

ESD
Attention: Always wear an electrostatic discharge (ESD) wrist strap properly connected to the ESD ground bracket when you service this machine. This prevents possible damage to the 2105 rack and DDM bay, and decreases any possible impact to customer operations. Following is a list of the ESD-sensitive parts in the 2105 rack. Always wear the ESD wrist strap when you work on or touch any of these parts. v All logic cards v All logic boards v All drawer FRUs v All DDM bay FRUs v Any cables connected to ESD-sensitive parts

How to Attach the ESD Wrist Strap


Before you touch any ESD-sensitive part, place the ESD wrist strap on either wrist. This strap has a high resistance (>1 megohm) resistor in series with the grounding clip so there is no danger to you. It discharges the static electricity from your body. Connect the clip on the flexible grounding cord to an unpainted frame ground point on the 2105 rack. Keep the strap on and connected while you touch, insert, or remove any ESD-sensitive part. Attention: When you wear the ESD wrist strap, ensure the flexible grounding cord remains connected to you and to the frame of the machine.

ESD Precautions
To prevent damage when you work with ESD-sensitive parts, perform these instructions carefully. v Keep the ESD-sensitive part in a special ESD bag until you are ready to install the part into the machine. v Make the fewest possible movements with your body to prevent an increase of static electricity from clothing, fibers, carpets, and furniture. v If instructed to do so, switch off the machine power before you remove ESD-sensitive parts. v Just before touching the ESD-sensitive part, discharge to the machine any static electricity in your body by touching the metal frame or cover of the machine. If possible, keep one hand on the frame when you install or remove an ESD-sensitive part. v Never touch or work on any electronic circuits without wearing the ESD wrist strap. Touching the logic board pins without wearing the ESD wrist strap (for example, while counting the pins) can cause logic card failures. Touching the voltmeter leads when you measure board pins or cable connections can also cause ESD damage. v Do not place any ESD-sensitive parts on the machine cover or on a metal table because large metal objects can become discharge paths if they are not grounded. If you must set aside an ESD-sensitive part, first place it into the special ESD bag. v Prevent ESD-sensitive parts from being accidentally touched by other personnel such as service support representatives or customers. Reinstall all covers when you are not working on the machine. v If possible, keep all ESD-sensitive parts in a grounded metal case.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

ESD
v Be very careful when you work with ESD-sensitive parts in cold weather. Low humidity and heating increase static electricity.

Replacing a FRU Using the Service Terminal


Use the following service terminal procedure to select and replace a FRU not listed in a repair procedure. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1.

Replacing a Non-Cluster FRU


1. Select Repair Menu from the Main Service Menu. 2. Select Replace a FRU from the Repair Menu 3. Move the cursor to the desired FRU Category and press Enter on the Select a FRU Category menu. 4. Move the cursor to the FRU being replaced and press Enter on the Select a FRU to Replace menu. 5. Follow the instructions displayed on the service terminal to complete the repair process.

Replacing a Cluster FRU


1. Go to MAP 4700: Cluster FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1.

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

DDM Bay FRU Remove and Replace Procedures

DDM BAY FRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES:


The FRU remove and replace procedures for the DDM bay follow:

Disk Drive Module Locations, DDM Bay


Use the following information to locate a DDM bay and disk drive module in a 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure rack. This procedure is for DDM bays. v For DDM bay locations in a 2105 Model 800, or a 2105 Expansion Enclosure, see Locating a DDM Bay in a 2105 Rack in chapter 7 of the Volume 3. v Use Figure 2 to determine the position of the disk drive modules in a DDM bay.

Front View DDM Bay


Figure 2. Disk Drive Module Locations in a DDM bay (S007706l)

SSA Disk Drive Module Removal and Replacement, DDM Bay


This procedure is for DDM bays only. A disk drive module (DDM) is one FRU. Always replace it as a complete FRU. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4.

Removing a Disk Drive Module


Notes: 1. Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 2. If you are removing all DDMs as part of a DDM bay frame removal, carefully mark the locations of all DDMs before removing them. This ensures that you will reinstall the DDMs into their original slots. Attach identifying labels to the DDMs if you want to. Attention: Disk drive modules (DDMs) are fragile. Handle them with care, and keep them well away from strong magnetic fields. 1. Locate the DDM bay with the DDM you will be removing, see Locating a DDM Bay in a 2105 Rack in chapter 7 of the Volume 3.
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

SSA Disk Drive Module, DDM Bay


2. Open the front or rear cover of the 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure rack you are working on. v Disk drive module (Rx-Ux-Wx-Dx) 3. Find the DDM you are replacing see Disk Drive Module Locations, DDM Bay on page 7. Note: The amber Check indicator 1 on the DDM you are replacing should be on. With some failures, the Check indicator 1 will not turn on. If this is the case, verify again that you are working on the correct DDM, then continue with the next step.

Figure 3. Disk Drive Module Check Indicator (S007715m)

4. Do the following steps only on the DDM you are removing. 5. Open the DDM handle, press the blue latch 3 , and pull the handle down 4 . This action pulls the DDM partly out of its slot. Allow the DDM to spin down for at least three seconds before continuing with the next step.

Figure 4. Drive Removal (S007718m)

6. Grip the handle, and carefully pull the DDM module out of the drawer. As the drive comes out, put one hand under it to prevent it from falling.

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

SSA Disk Drive Module, DDM Bay


Always handle a defective DDM as carefully as you would a new one. Damage to defective DDMs, through rough handling, can have a negative affect on failure analysis test results and warranty recovery.

Figure 5. Disk Drive Removal (S007719m)

7. Lay the DDMs down so they rest on their supports 5 .

Figure 6. Placing a DDM in a Safe Position (S007720m)

8. Install a new DDM into the empty slot, go to Replacing a Disk Drive Module

Replacing a Disk Drive Module


Attention: If you bring a DDM into the operating environment from an area that is outside the normal operating temperature of 20 - 25 degrees C (66 - 77 degrees F), allow the DDM time to acclimate to the operating environment. Remove the DDM from any shipping package, leave the DDM in the sealed plastic bag (if present) to prevent condensation from forming. 1. Remove the factory-sealed wrapping from the new DDM only when you are ready to install it. 2. Open the DDM handle before installation, press the blue latch 1 , and pull the handle down 2 .

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

SSA Disk Drive Module, DDM Bay

Figure 7. Disk Drive Module Replacement (S007721m)

3. With one hand under the DDM, align the DDM with the groove, and push it into its slot 3 . The drive stops before it is fully seated.

Figure 8. Drive Module Installation (S007722m)

4. Push the disk drive DDMs handle up until it latches closed: 4 .

10

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

SSA Disk Drive Module, DDM Bay

Figure 9. Drive Lock Installation (S007723m)

5. Verify that the front of the new DDM is aligned with the other DDMs. 6. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

Bypass and Passthrough Card Removal and Replacement, DDM Bay


This procedure is for DDM bays only. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front or rear cover of the 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure rack and locate the DDM bay with the bypass or passthrough card you will be removing, see Locating a DDM Bay in a 2105 Rack in chapter 7 of the Volume 3. v Bypass card, upper left (Rx-Ux-Wx-C1) 1 v Passthrough card, upper right (upper) (Rx-Ux-Wx-C2) 2 v Passthrough card, upper right (lower) (Rx-Ux-Wx-C4) 3

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

11

Bypass and Passthrough Cards, DDM Bay

Figure 10. DDM bay Bypass and Passthrough Card Locations (S007732l)

2. Do the following steps only on the bypass or passthrough card you are replacing. 3. Disconnect all SSA device cable or cables from the bypass or passthrough card you are removing. Notes: a. To prevent damage to cables with plastic connector screws, always use the special screwdriver (SSA tool, P/N 32H7059). This screwdriver is in the 2105 ship group. b. For concurrent repairs, remove and replace only one bypass or passthrough card at a time. 4. Unscrew the captive screw or screws on the bypass or passthrough card you are replacing and pull the card out of the DDM bay: v Bypass card, unscrew two screws until free 4 Remove the bypass card then continue with step 5. v Passthrough card, unscrew one screw till free 5 or 6 Remove the passthrough card then continue with step 6 on page 13.

Figure 11. Bypass and Passthrough Card Removal (S007733l)

5. Verify that the jumpers on the bypass card 7 are set correctly. Jumper pins 2 to 3 at both 8 and 9 . Continue with step 6 on page 13.

12

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Bypass and Passthrough Cards, DDM Bay

7 DDM Bay Bypass Card

3 21

3 21

9
Figure 12. DDM bay Bypass Card Jumper Settings (S008524l)

6. Replace parts in the reverse order, remember to reconnect the SSA device cables. Notes: a. When installing a bypass or passthrough card, insure that you push it in until it is seated. b. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

Controller Card Removal and Replacement, DDM Bay


This procedure is for DDM bay only. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front or rear cover of the 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure rack and locate the DDM bay with the controller card you will be removing, see Locating a DDM Bay in a 2105 Rack in chapter 7 of the Volume 3. v Controller card (DDM bay) (Rx-Ux-Wx-C5) 1 2. Do the following steps only on the DDM bay controller card you are removing. 3. Unscrew the two captive screws 2 and 3 , on the controller card. 4. Pull the controller card 1 , out of the DDM bay.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

13

Controller Card, DDM Bay

Figure 13. DDM bay Controller Card Removal (S007735l)

5. Replace parts in the reverse order. Notes: 1. When installing a controller cards, insure that you push it in until it is seated. 2. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

Frame Assembly Removal and Replacement, DDM Bay


This procedure is for DDM bays only. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 when removing the frame assembly, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front or rear cover of the 2105 rack and locate the DDM bay you will be removing, see Locating a DDM Bay in a 2105 Rack in chapter 7 of the Volume 3. v Frame assembly (Rx-Ux-Wx-P1) 1

Figure 14. DDM Bay Frame Assembly Location (S007731l)

14

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Frame Assembly, DDM Bay


2. Carefully make a note of the locations of the disk drive modules (DDMs) that are in the DDM bay. This will aid in the reinstall of the DDMs into their original slots. Attach identifying labels to the DDMs. Attention: Data will be lost if the DDMs are not reinstalled in the same positions they were removed from. 3. Remove all the disk drive modules. See SSA Disk Drive Module Removal and Replacement, DDM Bay on page 7. 4. Make a note of which SSA cables are connected to each bypass and passthrough card, see SSA Cable Removal and Replacement, DDM Bay on page 17. 5. Disconnect the external SSA cables from the DDM bay bypass and passthrough cards. To prevent damage to the SSA connector screws, use the special screwdriver (SSA tool, part 32H7059) to unscrew them. The screwdriver is supplied with the DDM bay ship group. See SSA Cable Removal and Replacement, DDM Bay on page 17. 6. Remove the bypass card and the passthrough cards, see Bypass and Passthrough Card Removal and Replacement, DDM Bay on page 11. 7. Remove the controller card assembly from the front of the DDM bay, see Controller Card Removal and Replacement, DDM Bay on page 13. 8. Observe the SSA cables next to the DDM bay being removed. Temporarily relocate any SSA cables that restrict the removal of the bay. This may require temporarily removing that velcro straps that securing the SSA cables. 9. Remove the four DDM bay mounting screws, 3 in Figure 15, from the front of the frame assembly.
DDM Bay Frame

3
(4 Screws)

Front View
Figure 15. DDM bay Serial Number Plate Location (s009541)

10. Pull the frame assembly forward and remove it from the 2105. 11. Pull the storage bay air door, 2 in Figure 16 on page 16, down until it latches closed.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

15

Frame Assembly, DDM Bay

2
Figure 16. DDM Bay Locations (s009540)

12. Replace parts in the reverse order. 13. When you reinstall the frame assembly into the rack, reinstall the front mounting screws in the following sequence: a. Install the lower left-hand front mounting screw. This screw locates the DDM bay laterally. Do not fully tighten the screw yet. b. Install the other three front mounting screws. Do not fully tighten the screws yet. c. Fully tighten the lower left-hand front mounting screw. d. Fully tighten the other three front mounting screws. 14. When you reinstall the external SSA cables, use the special screwdriver (SSA tool, part 32H7059) to tighten the SSA connector screws. 15. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

16

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

DDM Bay SSA Cable FRU Remove and Replace Procedures

DDM BAY SSA CABLE FRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES:


The SSA FRU remove and replace procedures for the DDM bay follow:

SSA Cable Removal and Replacement, DDM Bay


This procedure is for DDM bays. Note: An SSA Cable FRU Kit is not available for individual SSA cable replacement. Order the SSA Cable bundle with the cable you are replacing and then remove the FRU cable, or cables, from the bundle. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Determine which SSA cable, or cable bundle, you are replacing using the location information that was provided by the service terminal. Use Locating an SSA Cable and Locating a DDM Bay in a 2105 Rack, both in chapter 7 of the Volume 3, to locate the SSA cables and DDM bay. The SSA device cable connector location codes for the cluster and the DDM bay are v Cluster SSA card connectors (R1-Tx-Kx-yy) to v DDM bay SSA connectors (Rx-Ux-Wx/Jx) Record the connector location/number and the color of the loop bands of both ends of the SSA cable being replaced. See Figure 17 on page 18 and Figure 18 on page 18 for SSA cable connector locations.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

17

SSA Cables, DDM Bay

I/O Drawer 1/2 SSA Device Card Connectors B2 B1 A2 A1

Front View
I/O DRAWER 1 (R1-T1) I/O DRAWER 2 (R1-T2) Tx-u0.1-P1-I1 Tx-u0.1-P1-I2 SSA Device Cards Tx-u0.1-P1-I11 Tx-u0.1-P1-I12

Figure 17. 2105 Model 800 Cluster SSA Device Card Connectors (s009166)

Figure 18. DDM bay SSA Connectors (S007693l)

2. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 and locate the cluster and the SSA device card with the SSA cable you will be removing. See 2105 Model 800 SSA Device Card Location Codes and Locating an SSA Cable in chapter 7 of the Volume 3. Note: From the front of the 2105 Model 800, cluster 1 (T1) is on the left and cluster 2 (T2) is on the right. 3. Do the following steps only on the SSA device cable you are removing. 4. Disconnect the end of the SSA cable (source) identified in the location code and connect the new SSA cable to the same connector. Note: To prevent damage to cables with plastic connector screws, always use the special screwdriver (SSA tool, P/N 32H7059). This screwdriver is in the 2105 ship group. 5. Locate the correct DDM bay. See Locating a DDM Bay in a 2105 Rack in chapter 7 of the Volume 3. 6. Disconnect the other end of the old SSA cable from the DDM bay, and connect the new SSA cable to the same connector. Note: Allow the new cable to hang free until testing is complete.

18

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

SSA Cables, DDM Bay


7. Return to the service terminal and complete the repair procedure. Did repair verification show that the problem is resolved? v Yes, go to step 9. v No, go to step 8. 8. Remove the new SSA cable and reinstall the original cable, resolve the displayed problem. 9. Remove the old SSA cable from the rack and drawer retention while routing the new SSA cable in the same position using the same retention. Label the new cable with the same color loop bands and cable position information. The labels and colored tape are supplied with the SSA Cable FRU Kit. 10. Go to the service terminal Machine Checkout Menu and select SSA Loops Menu. Select the SSA loop being repaired and press Enter to test. Did the SSA loop test run without error? v Yes, the problem is resolved. v No, resolve the displayed problem.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

19

Cluster CEC Drawer, 2105 Model 800, FRU Remove and Replace Procedures

CLUSTER CEC DRAWER REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES:


The FRU remove and replace procedures for the 2105 Model 800 CEC drawers follow:

Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1.

Cluster Power Off and On Using the Service Terminal


Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Go to MAP 4700: Cluster FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1.

Cluster Power Off Using RPC Card Switches


Note: Use this only if directed by the next level of support, otherwise customer impact may occur. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the cluster you will be powering off: v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), (T1) - CEC drawer, (T1-U1.1) - I/O drawer, (T1-U0.1) Cluster 2 (right), (T2) - CEC drawer, (T2-U1.1) - I/O drawer, (T2-U0.1)

20

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Cluster Power, CEC Drawer

(R1-)

Cluster 1 (T1) CEC Drawer (T1-U1.1) I/O Drawer (T1-U0.1)

Cluster 2 (T2) CEC Drawer 2 (T2-U1.1) I/O Drawer (T2-U0.1)

Front View
Figure 19. 2105 Model 800 Cluster Locations (s009294)

2. Ensure that the cluster you are powering off is quiesced to prevent interruption of customer operation. Attention: If the cluster being powered off is not quiesced, connect the service terminal to the other cluster. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Repair Menu Alternate Cluster Repair Menu Quiesce the Alternate Cluster 3. Open the rear cover of the 2105 Model 800 and locate the RPC cards 1 . 4. Power off cluster 1 or cluster 2: Attention: The RPC card switches initiate a software shutdown that takes two to three minutes to complete. v Cluster 1, press the top switch 2 and 4 on both RPC cards at the same time. v Cluster 2, press the bottom switch 3 and 5 on both RPC cards at the same time.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

21

Cluster Power, CEC Drawer

RPC-1 Card

2 3

1 4
RPC-2 Card

Rear View
Figure 20. RPC Card Cluster Power Switches (s009228)

5. Wait up to 4 minutes for the CEC drawer operator panel to display OK, the cluster is powered off. Sometimes it may still display READY. Press the CD-ROM Drive eject button. If the CD tray does not open, the cluster has powered off. 6. Return to the cluster procedure that sent you here to power the cluster off.

Cluster Power On Using RPC Card Switches


Note: Use this only if directed by the next level of support, otherwise customer impact may occur. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the cluster you will be powering on. v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), (T1) - CEC drawer, (T1-U1.1) - I/O drawer, (T1-U0.1) Cluster 2 (right), (T2) - CEC drawer, (T2-U1.1) - I/O drawer, (T2-U0.1) 2. Open the rear cover of the 2105 Model 800 and locate the RPC cards 1 . 3. Power on cluster 1 or cluster 2: v Cluster 1, press the top switch 2 or 4 on either RPC card. v Cluster 2, press the bottom switch 3 or 5 on either RPC card.

22

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Cluster Power, CEC Drawer

RPC-1 Card

2 3

1 4
RPC-2 Card

Rear View
Figure 21. RPC Card Cluster Power Switches (s009228)

4. Wait about 30 seconds for the cluster to power on. The cluster is powered on when the Line Cord indicators on the 2105 operator panel stop blinking. 5. Return to the cluster procedure that sent you here to power the cluster on.

CEC Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800


Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 rack and locate the CEC drawer you will be moving to its service position: v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), (T1) - CEC drawer, (T1-U1.1) Cluster 2 (right), (T2) - CEC drawer, (T2-U1.1 )

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

23

CEC Drawer Service Position

(R1-)

Cluster 1 (T1) CEC Drawer (T1-U1.1-)

Cluster 2 (T2) CEC Drawer (T2-U1.1-)

Front View
Figure 22. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009227)

2. Do the following steps only on the CEC drawer you are moving to its service position. 3. Are you here to replace a SCSI hard drive? v Yes, the cluster remains powered on and available for customer use. Go to step 5. v No, continue with the next step. 4. Verify the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using the Alternate Cluster Repair Menu options. 5. Do not remove any CEC drawer cables unless instructed to do so. 6. Remove the four CEC drawer retaining screws 1 and 2 . Save the screws for installation. 7. Pull the CEC drawer out slowly until it latches at its service position. Release any cable ties that restrict the movement of the cables attached to the CEC drawer. If the drawer does not move freely, check that the cable arms are not binding.

24

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

CEC Drawer Service Position

Cluster 1 CEC Drawer

Cluster 2 CEC Drawer

Front View
Figure 23. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009229)

8. Return to the procedure that sent you here to remove the CEC drawer. After the CEC drawer repair activity is complete, return to step 9 to install the CEC drawer into the 2105 Model 800. 9. Replace parts in the reverse order. Notes: 1. Release the latches on the side of each rail to slide the CEC drawer into the 2105. 2. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

CEC Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800


Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. 1. Remove the two CEC drawer top cover screws 1 and 3 . Save the screws for installation.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

25

CEC Drawer Top Servicing

Cluster 1 CEC Drawer

Cluster 2 CEC Drawer

Front View
Figure 24. CEC Drawer Top Cover Removal (s009230)

2. Raise the front of the top cover 2 and remove it from the drawer. 3. Return to the cluster CEC drawer FRU replacement procedure that sent you here to open the CEC drawer top cover for service. After the CEC drawer repair activity is complete, return to step 4 to install the CEC drawer cover. 4. Replace parts in the reverse order. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

CEC Drawer Operator Panel and EEPROM Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the CEC drawer with the drawer operator panel you are replacing. v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1, CEC drawer 1, (T1-U1.1): - CEC drawer operator panel, (T1-U1.1-OPPAN) 1 - CEC drawer operator panel EEPROM, (T1-U1.1-OPEE) 7 Cluster 2, CEC drawer 2, (T2-U1.1): - CEC drawer operator panel, (T2-U1.1-OPPAN) 2 - CEC drawer operator panel EEPROM, (T2-U1.1-OPEE) 7

26

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Operator Panel, CEC Drawer

(R1-)

Cluster 1 (T1) CEC Drawer (T1-U1.1-)

Cluster 2 (T2) CEC Drawer (T2-U1.1-)

Front View
Figure 25. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009227)

1
Cluster 1 CEC Drawer Cluster 2 CEC Drawer

Front View
Figure 26. CEC Drawer Operator Panel Location (s009232)

2. Do the following steps only on the cluster and CEC drawer with the drawer operator panel you are replacing. 3. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing. 4. Loosen the two drawer operator panel mounting screws 3 and 4 remove the operator panel from the CEC drawer. 5. Disconnect the cable from the bottom of the drawer operator panel 8 .

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

27

Operator Panel, CEC Drawer

Cluster 1 CEC Drawer

Cluster 2 CEC Drawer

Front View
Figure 27. CEC Drawer Operator Panel Removal (s009231)

6. Move the VPD module 7 (U2 on the operator panel card) from the old CEC drawer operator panel to the new one. Insert a small screw driver through the hole 6 on the top of the enclosure to remove the module. If the old VPD module is the problem, install the new VPD module and call technical support for recovery instructions. Note: Install the VPD module with the dot 5 to the top left when viewed from the rear.
6 5

8
Figure 28. CEC Drawer Operator Panel VPD Module Swap (s009233)

7. Replace parts in the reverse order. 8. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

CD-ROM and Hard Disk Drive Removals and Replacements, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure.

28

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Drives, CEC Drawer


Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the cluster with the CEC drawer CD-ROM drive or the hard disk drive you are replacing: v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), CEC drawer, (T1-U1.1) : - Hard disk drive 1, (T1-U1.1-HDD1) 1 (or U1.1-P1-Z1-A0.0 from an SMS error log) - Hard disk drive 2, (T1-U1.1-HDD2) 2 (or U1.1-P1-Z1-A2.0 from an SMS error log) - CD-ROM drive, (T1-U1.1-CDROM) 3 (or U1.1-P1-Z1-A3.0 from an SMS error log) Cluster 2 (right), CEC drawer, (T2-U1.1) : - Hard disk drive 1, (T2-U1.1-HDD1) 1 (or U1.1-P1-Z1-A0.0 from an SMS error log) - Hard disk drive 2, (T2-U1.1-HDD2) 2 (or U1.1-P1-Z1-A2.0 from an SMS error log) - CD-ROM drive, (T2-U1.1-CDROM) 3 (or U1.1-P1-Z1-A3.0 from an SMS error log)

(R1-)

Cluster 1 (T1) CEC Drawer (T1-U1.1-)

Cluster 2 (T2) CEC Drawer (T2-U1.1-)

Front View
Figure 29. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009227)

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

29

Drives, CEC Drawer

2 (Tx-U1.1-HDD2)

(Tx-U1.1-HDD1) 1

(Tx-U1.1-CDROM) 3

FR

ON

Figure 30. 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer Drive Locations (s009265)

2. Do the following steps only on the cluster CEC drawer and the CD-ROM drive or hard disk drive you are replacing. 3. Pull the CEC drawer out to the service position, and remove the top cover. See CEC Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 23 and CEC Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 25. 4. Locate the drive you will be removing: v Hard disk drive 1 (Tx-U1.1-HDD1) 1 (or U0.1-P1-Z1-A0.0 from an SMS error log) v Hard disk drive 2 (Tx-U1.1-HDD2) 2 (or U0.1-P1-Z1-A2.0 from an SMS error log) v CD-ROM drive (Tx-U1.1-CDROM) 3 (or U0.1-P1-Z1-A3.0 from an SMS error log) 5. Go to the step for the drive you are replacing: v Hard disk drive (HD), go to Hard Disk Drive Removal and Replacement on page 33. v CD-ROM drive, go to CD-ROM Drive Removal and Replacement.

CD-ROM Drive Removal and Replacement


1. Disconnect the power cable 7 from the rear of the CD-ROM drive. 2. Remove the two CD-ROM mounting screws 4 from the front of the drawer.

30

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Drives, CEC Drawer

Front View
Figure 31. CEC Drawer Drive Mounting Screws (s009266)

3. Push the CD-ROM to the rear until its front bezel clears the front panel of the drawer. Lift the CD-ROM out, cable end first, and lay it on its side on top of the hard disk drives. 4. Remove the screw 5 from the bottom of the CD-ROM cable connector retainer 6 . Disconnect the cable from the CD-ROM drive.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

31

Drives, CEC Drawer

Front

N RO

T
7

Figure 32. CEC Drawer Drive Removal (s009267)

5. Transfer all mounting brackets and guides to the new CD-ROM drive. 6. Transfer the jumpers, as needed, to the new CD-ROM drive. Note: When replacing the CD-ROM (SCSI ID=3) drive, verify that the three jumpers on the option block (pins 1, 2, and 4) on the rear of the new drive are in the same position, 8 in Figure 33, as on the drive you are replacing.
CD-ROM Drive

12 4 12 4

8 8 (3 Jumpers)
Figure 33. CD-ROM Drive Jumpers (s009268)

32

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Drives, CEC Drawer


7. Replace parts in the reverse order. Note: Extend the CD-ROM tray and push the two lower tabs out (toward each other). These tabs will hold the bottom of the CD disk when the CD-ROM operates in the vertical position. 8. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

Hard Disk Drive Removal and Replacement


1. Disconnect the power and signal cables 9 and 11 (HDD1 shown) from the top of the hard disk drive. 2. Loosen the hard disk drive mounting screw 10 until it is free. 3. Lift the drive out of the cluster CEC drawer.

10 11

N RO

HDD2 (Hard Disk Drive 2) HDD1 (Hard Disk Drive 1)


Figure 34. CEC Drawer Drive Removal (s009269)

N RO

4. Transfer all mounting brackets and guides to the new hard disk drive. 5. Transfer the jumpers, as needed, to the new CD-ROM drive.
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

33

Drives, CEC Drawer


Notes: a. When replacing a hard disk drive, verify that the correct jumpers are installed: v Original type with jumpers at the rear of the drive, see Figure 35. Hard disk drive 1, HDD1, (SCSI ID=0) no jumper 2 12 Hard disk drive 2, HDD2, (SCSI ID=2) install jumper 2 12 v New type with jumpers on the bottom of the drive, see Figure 36 on page 35. Hard disk drive 1, HDD1, (SCSI ID=0) no jumpers 13 Hard disk drive 2, HDD2, (SCSI ID=2) install jumper 3 only 13 b. If the new drive does not match the one shown, call technical support. 6. Replace parts in the reverse order. 7. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

Pin 6

Pin 1

Rear View

12 Pin 2 Jumper Position 9


HDD1, No Jumper HDD2, Jumper

Figure 35. Hard Disk Drive Jumpers (s009464)

34

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Planar Assembly, CEC Drawer

A B C DE F G

Jumper Block

Pin 1 Pin 7
7 6 5 4 3 2 1

13 Pin 3 Jumper Position 9


HDD1, No Jumper HDD2, Jumper

Figure 36. New 18 GB Hard Disk Drive Jumpers (s009709)

Planar Assembly, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer


Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the cluster CEC drawer with the CEC drawer planar assembly you are replacing: v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), CEC drawer, (T1-U1.1) : - CEC drawer planar assembly, (T1-U1.1-P1) 1 Cluster 2 (right), CEC drawer, (T2-U1.1) : - CEC drawer planar assembly, (T2-U1.1-P1) 1

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

35

Planar Assembly, CEC Drawer

(R1-)

Cluster 1 (T1) CEC Drawer (T1-U1.1-)

Cluster 2 (T2) CEC Drawer (T2-U1.1-)

Front View
Figure 37. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009227)

Top View

1 (Tx-U1.1-P1)

Front
Figure 38. CEC Drawer Planar Assembly Locations (s009295)

2. Do the following steps only on the cluster CEC drawer with the CEC drawer planar assembly you are replacing. 3. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing.

36

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Planar Assembly, CEC Drawer


4. Go to the rear of the CEC drawer and find the two CEC drawer power supplies for the CEC drawer you are servicing: v CEC drawer 1 power supplies 2 v CEC drawer 2 power supplies 3

Cluster 2 CEC Drawer Power Supplies

Cluster 1 CEC Drawer Power Supplies

Rear View
Figure 39. CEC Drawer Power Supply Locations (s009251)

5. Verify that the four power input cables to the two CEC drawer power supplies have been unplugged before continuing. (This should already have been done in MAP 4700: Cluster FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before coming here.) 6. Pull each power supply out only until it unplugs and is free from the CEC power planar. 7. At the front of the rack, pull the CEC drawer out to the service position, see CEC Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 23. 8. Open the CEC drawer top cover and remove it, see CEC Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 25. 9. Remove the following cards from the CEC drawer: v CEC processor card 4 , see CEC Processor Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 on page 44 v CEC memory riser card 1 5 , see Memory Riser Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer on page 46 v CEC memory riser card 2 (may not be present) 6 , see Memory Riser Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer on page 46

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

37

Planar Assembly, CEC Drawer

5 6

O FR
Figure 40. CEC Processor and Memory Card Locations (s009270)

NT

10. Disconnect all logic cables from the planar assembly. Do not remove the three large power bus cables 16 [Figure 43] screwed to the planars. 11. Loosen the two safety guard plate mounting screws 8 , then remove the plate 7 [Figure 40].

38

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Planar Assembly, CEC Drawer

9
Figure 41. CEC Drawer Locations (s009271)

12. Remove the card cage assembly mounting screws, two front 14 [Figure 42] and three rear 13 [Figure 42]. Remove the CEC card cage assembly 10 from the drawer. Note the alignment pin on the card cage 15 for reassembly. 13. Remove the card shield 11 from the planar assembly.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

39

Planar Assembly, CEC Drawer

10
Top View

13

11

14

Front

12 15

FR

ON

Figure 42. CEC Drawer Locations (s009272)

14. Remove the three screws 9 [Figure 41] from the front of the drawer. Loosen the four keyed nuts 17 [Figure 43] and lift the to the CEC drawer planar assembly 12 [Figure 42] out of the drawer.

40

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Planar Assembly, CEC Drawer

16

17
(4 NUTS)
Figure 43. CEC Drawer Locations (s009273)

15. Replace parts in the reverse order: Notes: a. Transfer any connector covers to the new planar. b. When you install the CEC drawer planar assembly, install and tighten the three front screws 9 [Figure 41], before you tighten the four keyed nuts 17 [Figure 43]. c. When you install the CEC card cage 10 [Figure 42], verify that the pin on the front of the card cage 15 [Figure 42] is seated in the planar board. 16. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

CEC Drawer Power Supply Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800
The CEC drawer power supply is one FRU. Always replace it as a complete FRU. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the rear cover of the 2105 rack and locate the CEC drawer power supply you will be removing:
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

41

CEC Drawer Power Supply


v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), CEC drawer, (T1-U1.1): - CEC drawer power supply 1, (T1-U1.1-V1) - CEC drawer power supply 2, (T1-U1.1-V2) Cluster 2 (right), CEC drawer, (T2-U1.1): - CEC drawer power supply 1, (T2-U1.1-V1) - CEC drawer power supply 2, (T2-U1.1-V2)

1 2 3 4

(R1-)

3 T2-U1.1-V1 1 T1-U1.1-V1

4 T2-U1.1-V2 2 T1-U1.1-V2

Rear View
Figure 44. CEC Drawer Power Supply Locations (s009236)

2. Do the following steps only on the CEC drawer power supply you are removing. 3. Locate the cable arm assembly with the power supply cables. Loosen the cable arm retaining bracket screw 8 . Rotate the bracket until the cable arm is free, then rotate the cable arm assembly out.

42

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

CEC Drawer Power Supply

7 6 8 5

Rear View

Figure 45. CEC Drawer Power Supply Cable Arm Locations (s009465)

4. Remove the velcro 6 and/or the cable clamps 5 , 7 , and 9 from the cable arms as needed to allow the power supply to be removed. 5. THE CLUSTER WILL POWER OFF IF A POWER SUPPLY IS REMOVED FOR MORE THAN FOUR MINUTES. Be sure the replacement power supply is ready for installation. When the power supply is removed, a power supply (working or not) must be reinstalled within 4 minutes. Note: The cluster firmware checks if the power supply FRUs are physically installed. If it detects a power supply as missing, it waits four minutes and then powers off the the cluster. A power supply that is not installed, creates a problem with the cooling air flow, that can cause components to overheat. As long as the firmware detects the power supply, it does not matter if the power supply is working, the firmware will not power off the cluster. 6. Disconnect the cables 10 from the CEC drawer power supply. Attention: This attention applies only to the CEC drawer power supply replacement. When the first cable is connected to the newly installed power supply, an electric arc may result. This arc is caused by the charging of a large capacitor in the power supply and is normal.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

43

CEC Drawer Power Supply

(R1-)

10

11 12 13

1
PWR 1 2 J1 J2

ON CHK/ PWR-GOOD

OFF

Rear View

14

Figure 46. CEC Drawer Power Supply Locations (s009281)

7. Remove the CEC drawer power supply mounting screw 11 . Loosen the cam latch locking screw until it is free 12 . Note: The power supply plugs into the CEC drawer power planar. 8. Pull the cam latch 13 down. (This lever cams the power supply assembly out and in.) Pull the power supply 14 out of the rack. 9. Replace parts in the reverse order. Attention:If the new CEC drawer power supply has a power switch, make sure that its power switch is set to the On (Up) position before installation. Note: Later versions of the power supply may have the switch removed or covered up. 10. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

CEC Processor Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800


Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the cluster with the CEC processor card you are replacing. v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), CEC Drawer, (T1-U1.1) :

44

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

CEC Processor Card


- Processor card, (T1-U1.1-P1-C1) 1 Cluster 2 (right), CEC Drawer, (T2-U1.1) : - Processor card, (T2-U1.1-P1-C1) 1

(R1-)

Cluster 1 (T1) CEC Drawer (T1-U1.1-)

Cluster 2 (T2) CEC Drawer (T2-U1.1-)

Front View
Figure 47. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009227)

1 (Tx-U1.1-P1-C1)

Figure 48. CEC Drawer, Processor Card Location (s009255)

2. Do the following steps only on the cluster CEC bay with the CEC processor card 5 you are replacing. 3. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing. 4. Pull the CEC drawer out to the service position, and remove the top cover. See Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer on page 20, CEC Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 23, and CEC Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 25. 5. Open open and remove the CEC drawer top cover, see CEC Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 25.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

45

CEC Processor Card


6. Release the two card locking levers 2 and 4 , at the same time, move them to the vertical position. These levers cam the card assembly out and in. 7. Use the handle 3 to remove the CEC processor card 6 .

4 3 2

5 (Tx-U1.1-P1-C1)

FR

ON

Figure 49. CEC Drawer, Processor Card Location (s009296)

8. Replace parts in the reverse order. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

Memory Riser Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the cluster with the CEC memory riser card you are replacing. v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), CEC drawer, (T1-U1.1) : - Memory riser card 1, (T1-U1.1-M1) 1 - Memory riser card 2, (T1-U1.1-M2) 2 Cluster 2 (right), CEC drawer, (T2-U1.1) : - Memory riser card 1, (T2-U1.1-M1) 1 - Memory riser card 2, (T2-U1.1-M2) 2

46

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

CEC Memory Riser Card, CEC Drawer

(R1-)

Cluster 1 (T1) CEC Drawer (T1-U1.1-)

Cluster 2 (T2) CEC Drawer (T2-U1.1-)

Front View
Figure 50. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009227)

1 (Tx-U1.1-P1-M1) 2 (Tx-U1.1-P1-M2)

Figure 51. CEC Drawer, Memory Riser Card Locations (s009256)

2. Do the following steps only on the cluster CEC bay with the CEC memory riser card you are replacing. 3. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing. 4. Pull the CEC drawer out to the service position, and remove the top cover. See Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer on page 20, CEC Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 23, and CEC Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 25. 5. Locate the memory riser card you are removing: v Memory riser card 1, (T2-U1.1-M1) 5 v Memory riser card 2, (T2-U1.1-M2) 6

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

47

CEC Memory Riser Card, CEC Drawer


6. Release the two card locking levers 3 and 4 , at the same time, move them to the vertical position. These levers cam the card assembly out and in. 7. Remove the CEC memory riser card 7 .

5 Tx-U1.1-P1-M1 4 6 Tx-U1.1-P1-M2

FR

ON

Figure 52. CEC Drawer, Memory Riser Card Locations (s009297)

8. Replace parts in the reverse order. Transfer the memory card modules to the new card or replace the failing memory card module, see Memory Riser Card, Memory DIMM Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

Memory Riser Card, Memory DIMM Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Remove the cluster CEC drawer memory riser card with memory DIMM you are servicing, see Memory Riser Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer on page 46. 2. Locate the memory DIMM connectors and determine which module you are replacing, see Figure 53 on page 49: v 2105 Model 800:

48

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Memory Riser Card, Memory DIMM, CEC Drawer


Cluster 1 (left), CEC drawer, (T1-U1.1) or Cluster 2 (right), CEC drawer, (T2-U1.1) - Memory riser card v Memory DIMM 1 (Tx-U1.1-P1-Mx.1) 1 v Memory DIMM 2 (Tx-U1.1-P1-Mx.2) 2 v Memory DIMM 3 (Tx-U1.1-P1-Mx.3) 3 v Memory DIMM 4 (Tx-U1.1-P1-Mx.4) 4 v Memory DIMM 5 (Tx-U1.1-P1-Mx.5) 5 v Memory DIMM 6 (Tx-U1.1-P1-Mx.6) 6 v Memory DIMM 7 (Tx-U1.1-P1-Mx.7) 7 v Memory DIMM 8 (Tx-U1.1-P1-Mx.8) 8 v Memory DIMM 9 (Tx-U1.1-P1-Mx.9) 9 v Memory DIMM 10 (Tx-U1.1-P1-Mx.10) v Memory DIMM 11 (Tx-U1.1-P1-Mx.11) v Memory DIMM 12 (Tx-U1.1-P1-Mx.12) v Memory DIMM 13 (Tx-U1.1-P1-Mx.13) v Memory DIMM 14 (Tx-U1.1-P1-Mx.14) v Memory DIMM 15 (Tx-U1.1-P1-Mx.15) v Memory DIMM 16 (Tx-U1.1-P1-Mx.16)

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

(R1-)

Cluster 1 (T1) CEC Drawer (T1-U1.1-)

Cluster 2 (T2) CEC Drawer (T2-U1.1-)

Front View
Figure 53. 2105 Model 800 Cluster CEC Drawer Locations (s009227)

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

49

Memory Riser Card, Memory DIMM, CEC Drawer

15 SLOT (15)A 13
SLOT (13)B 11 SLOT (11)C 9 SLOT (9)D

SLOT (16)A 16 SLOT (14)B 14 SLOT (12)C 12 SLOT (10)D 10 SLOT (8)D SLOT (6)C SLOT (4)B SLOT (2)A

7 SLOT (7)D 5 1
SLOT (5)C 3 SLOT (3)B SLOT (1)A

8 6 4 2

DIMM INSTALLATION
Figure 54. 2105 Model 800 Memory Riser Card Memory DIMM Locations (s009241)

3. Do the following steps only on the cluster CEC drawer memory riser card with the memory DIMM you are replacing. 4. Remove the memory DIMM by pushing the locking tabs 17 out on the memory connector. Then pull the memory DIMM straight out of the connector.

Figure 55. Memory DIMM Removal (S008408m)

5. Replace parts in the reverse order. Align the slots in the memory DIMM with the keys in the connector 18 . Then push the module down until the connector locking tabs move in and hold the module. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

50

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Drawer Fan, CEC Drawer

Figure 56. Memory DIMM Installation (S008409m)

Drawer Fan Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. Attention During the removal, note the position of all cables so they can be positioned correctly during the replacement. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the cluster with the cluster fan you are replacing: v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), CEC drawer, (T1-U1.1): - Cluster CEC drawer fan (left), (T1-U1.1-F7) 1 - Cluster CEC drawer fan (right), (T1-U1.1-F8) 2 Cluster 2 (right), CEC drawer, (T2-U1.1): - Cluster CEC drawer fan (left), (T2-U1.1-F7) 3 - Cluster CEC drawer fan (right), (T2-U1.1-F8) 4

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

51

Drawer Fan, CEC Drawer

(R1-)

Cluster 1 (T1)

Cluster 2 (T2)

1 (T1-U1.1-F7)

3 (T2-U1.1-F7)

2 (T1-U1.1-F8)

4 (T2-U1.1-F8)

Front View
Figure 57. 2105 Model 800 Cluster Locations (s009235)

2. Do the following steps only on the CEC drawer cluster fan you are replacing. Attention: Be sure that the replacement drawer fan is ready to install, if the drawer fan is removed for longer than 4 minutes, a shutdown command will be issued to the cluster. 3. Unplug the fan from its connector on the front of the CEC drawer: v Cluster CEC drawer fan (left), connector FAN 7 6 v Cluster CEC drawer fan (right), connector FAN 8 7 4. Remove the two fan mounting screws 5 or 8 . Remove the fan guard and fan from the cluster. 5. Observe the fan and fan guard you are removing so you can mount the new fan in exactly the same position. Note the airflow and rotation arrows and the location of the fan power cable.

52

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Drawer Fan, CEC Drawer

FAN 7 FAN 8

5 (2 Screws)

8 (2 Screws)

Figure 58. Cluster CEC Drawer Fan Removal (s009283)

6. Remove the original fan from the fan guard and install the new fan into the fan guard. 7. Replace parts in the reverse order. Install the new fan with its power lead and airflow and rotation arrows in the same positions as on the fan you removed. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

Drawer Fan Controller and LED Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the cluster with the CEC fan controller or LED card you are replacing. v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), CEC drawer, (T1-U1.1) : - CEC fan controller card, (T1-U1.1-X2) 1 - CEC LED card, (T1-U1.1-L1) 2 Cluster 2 (right), CEC drawer, (T2-U1.1) :

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

53

Fan Controller and LED Card, CEC Drawer


- CEC fan controller card, (T2-U1.1-X2) 1 - CEC LED card, (T2-U1.1-L1) 2

(R1-)

Cluster 1 (T1) CEC Drawer (T1-U1.1-)

Cluster 2 (T2) CEC Drawer (T2-U1.1-)

Front View
Figure 59. CEC Drawer Service Position (s009227)

1 (Tx-U1.1-X2)

2 (Tx-U1.1-L1)

FR

ON

Figure 60. Cluster, CEC Drawer Fan Controller and LED Card Locations (s009240)

2. Do the following steps only on the cluster CEC bay with the CEC fan controller or LED card you are replacing. 3. Go to the correct step for the FRU you are replacing: v Replacing CEC fan controller card, continue with the next step. v Replacing CEC LED card, go to step 9 on page 55.

54

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Fan Controller and LED Card, CEC Drawer


4. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing. 5. Pull the CEC drawer out to the service position and remove the top cover. See Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer on page 20, CEC Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 23, and CEC Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 25. 6. Disconnect the cable from the top of the fan controller card (SPINNER CD) 4 . 7. Pull the locking plunger 3 out and pull the fan controller card 5 straight up.

N RO

T
3 4

Figure 61. CEC Fan Controller Card Removal (s009278)

8. Replace parts in the reverse order. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here. 9. Power off the cluster, then loosen the two LED card mounting screws 7 . See Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer on page 20. 10. Remove the cable tie securing the excess cable (LED) 6 behind the CD-ROM. 11. Lift the LED card 8 off of the mounting screws and pull it out of the CEC. Disconnect the cable (LED) 6 from the rear of the LED card.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

55

Fan Controller and LED Card, CEC Drawer

FR
7
(2 Screws)

ON

Figure 62. CEC LED Card Removal (s009277)

12. Replace parts in the reverse order. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

Cable Removals and Replacements, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer


Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the cluster CEC drawer with the cluster CEC drawer cable you are replacing, see Figure 63 on page 57.

56

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Cables, CEC Drawer


v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), CEC drawer, (T1-U1.1) or Cluster 2 (right), CEC drawer, (T2-U1.1) - Power distribution card to LED card cable - System planar to power distribution cable - Power distribution card to system planar cable - Power distribution card to fans cable - Front plate to media SCSI cable - SCSI devices power cable - Power distribution card to fan controller card

(R1-)

Cluster 1 (T1) CEC Drawer (T1-U1.1-)

Cluster 2 (T2) CEC Drawer (T2-U1.1-)

Front View
Figure 63. CEC Cable Locations (s009227)

2. Do the following steps only on the cluster CEC drawer with the cluster CEC drawer cable you are replacing. 3. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing. 4. Pull the CEC drawer out to the service position, and remove the top cover. See Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer on page 20, CEC Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 23, and CEC Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 25. 5. Locate the cable you are replacing in Table 6 on page 58. 6. Locate the cables connectors, from Table 6 on page 58, in the following figures: v Cluster CEC Drawer Planar Connector Locations 1, see figure 58 v Cluster CEC Drawer Planar Connector Locations 2, see figure 59 v Cluster CEC Drawer Planar Connector Locations 3, see figure 60

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

57

Cables, CEC Drawer


Table 6. Cluster CEC drawer Cable and Connector Locations Cluster CEC drawer Cable Name Cluster CEC drawer Cable Connector Names and Locations: From: Power distribution card to LED card cable To: To: To:

PDC/P6, Power Card LED, LED Card

System planar to power PDC/P5, Power Card GHPR, Gopher Card distribution cable Power distribution card to system planar cable Power distribution card to fans cable Front plate to media SCSI cable SCSI devices power cable Power distribution card to fan controller card PDC/P4, Power Card GOPHER CD, Gopher Card PDC/P7, Power Card AMD7, Chassis Front BULKHEAD, Chassis HDD1, Hard Disk Front Drive 1 BULKHEAD, Chassis HDD1, Hard Disk Front Drive 1 PDC/P3, Power Card SPINNER CARD, Fan Controller Card AMD8, Chassis Front HDD1, Hard Disk Drive 2 HDD1, Hard Disk Drive 2 CD-ROM, CD-ROM Drive CD-ROM, CD-ROM Drive

FR

T ON

LED

P6

Figure 64. Cluster CEC Drawer Planar Connector Locations 1 (s009274)

58

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Cables, CEC Drawer


HDD1 HDD2 CD-ROM BULKHEAD

F
AMD8

N RO

AMD7 SPINNER CD PDC/P3 PDC/P4

GOPHER CD GHPR PDC/P7 PDC/P5


Figure 65. Cluster CEC Drawer Planar Connector Locations 2 (s009275)

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

59

Cables, CEC Drawer


BULKHEAD

HDD1 CD-ROM

T ON FR

HDD2

Figure 66. Cluster CEC Drawer Planar Connector Locations 3 (s009276)

7. Use these drawings to locate all of the cables connectors and how the cable is routed and retained. 8. Attention: Carefully note the routing and retention of the cable you are removing, so you can position it correctly during the replacement. Remove the cable from the cluster CEC drawer. 9. Replace parts in the reverse order. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

60

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Cluster I/O Drawer, 2105 Model 800, FRU Remove and Replace Procedures

CLUSTER I/O DRAWER REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES:


The FRU remove and replace procedures for the 2105 Model 800 I/O drawers follow:

Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1.

Cluster Power Off Using the Service Terminal


Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Go to MAP 4700: Cluster FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1.

Cluster Power Off Using RPC Card Switches


Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the cluster you will be powering off: v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), (T1) - CEC drawer, (T1-U1.1) - I/O drawer, (T1-U0.1) Cluster 2 (right), (T2) - CEC drawer, (T2-U1.1) - I/O drawer, (T2-U0.1)

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

61

Cluster Power, I/O Drawer

(R1-)

Cluster 1 (T1) CEC Drawer (T1-U1.1) I/O Drawer (T1-U0.1)

Cluster 2 (T2) CEC Drawer 2 (T2-U1.1) I/O Drawer (T2-U0.1)

Front View
Figure 67. 2105 Model 800 Cluster Locations (s009294)

2. Ensure that the cluster you are powering off is quiesced to prevent interruption of customer operation. Attention: If the cluster being powered off is not quiesced, connect the service terminal to the other cluster. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Repair Menu Alternate Cluster Repair Menu Quiesce the Alternate Cluster 3. Open the rear cover of the 2105 Model 800 and locate the RPC cards 1 . 4. Power off cluster 1 or cluster 2: Attention: The RPC card switches initiate a software shutdown that takes two to three minutes to complete. v Cluster 1, press the top switch 2 and 4 on both RPC cards at the same time. v Cluster 2, press the bottom switch 3 and 5 on both RPC cards at the same time.

62

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Cluster Power, I/O Drawer

RPC-1 Card

2 3

1 4
RPC-2 Card

Rear View
Figure 68. RPC Card Cluster Power Switches (s009228)

5. Wait up to 4 minutes for the CEC drawer operator panel to display OK, the cluster is powered off. Sometimes it may still display READY. Press the CD-ROM Drive eject button. If the CD tray does not open, the cluster has powered off. 6. Return to the cluster procedure that sent you here to power the cluster off.

Cluster Power On Using RPC Card Switches


1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the cluster you will be powering on. v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), (T1) - CEC drawer, (T1-U1.1) - I/O drawer, (T1-U0.1) Cluster 2 (right), (T2) - CEC drawer, (T2-U1.1) - I/O drawer, (T2-U0.1) 2. Open the rear cover of the 2105 Model 800 and locate the RPC cards 1 . 3. Power on cluster 1 or cluster 2: v Cluster 1, press the top switch 2 or 4 on either RPC card. v Cluster 2, press the bottom switch 3 or 5 on either RPC card.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

63

Cluster Power, I/O Drawer

RPC-1 Card

2 3

1 4
RPC-2 Card

Rear View
Figure 69. RPC Card Cluster Power Switches (s009228)

4. Wait about 30 seconds for the cluster to power on. The cluster is powered on when the Line Cord indicators on the 2105 operator panel stop blinking. 5. Return to the cluster procedure that sent you here to power the cluster on.

I/O Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800


Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 rack and locate the I/O drawer you will be moving to its service position: v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), (T1) - I/O drawer, (T1-U0.1) Cluster 2 (right), (T2) - I/O drawer, (T2-U0.1 )

64

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

I/O Drawer Service Position

(R1-)

Cluster 1 (T1) I/O Drawer (T1-U0.1-)

Cluster 2 (T2) I/O Drawer (T2-U0.1-)

Front View
Figure 70. I/O Drawer Service Position (s009284)

2. Do the following steps only on the I/O drawer you are moving to its service position. 3. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using the Alternate Cluster Repair Menu options. 4. Do not remove any I/O drawer cables unless instructed to do so. 5. Remove the four I/O drawer retaining screws 1 and 2 . Save the screws for installation. 6. Pull the I/O drawer out slowly until it latches at its service position. Release any cable ties that restrict the movement of the four CPI cables attached to the I/O drawer. Note: Later level CPI cables have been lenghtened to avoid removing cable ties.

Front View
Figure 71. I/O Drawer Service Position (s009302)

7. Return to the procedure that sent you here to remove the I/O drawer. After the I/O drawer repair activity is complete, return to step 8 on page 66 to install the I/O drawer into the 2105 Model 800.
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

65

I/O Drawer Service Position


8. Replace parts in the reverse order. Notes: 1. Release the latches on the side of each rail to slide the I/O drawer into the 2105. 2. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

I/O Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800


Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. 1. Remove the two I/O drawer top cover screws 1 and 3 . Save the screws for installation.

2 1

3
Figure 72. I/O Drawer Top Cover Removal (s009303)

2. Raise the front of the top cover 2 and remove it from the drawer. 3. Return to the cluster I/O drawer FRU replacement procedure that sent you here to open the I/O drawer top cover for service. After the I/O drawer repair activity is complete, return to the next step to install the I/O drawer cover. 4. Replace parts in the reverse order.

66

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

I/O Drawer Top Servicing


When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

Diskette Drive Removals and Replacements, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the cluster with the I/O drawer diskette drive you are replacing: v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), I/O drawer, (T1-U0.1) : - Diskette drive, (T1-U0.1-P1-D1) 1 Cluster 2 (right), I/O drawer, (T2-U0.1) : - Diskette drive, (T2-U0.1-P1-D1) 1

(R1-)

Cluster 1 (T1) I/O Drawer (T1-U0.1-)

Cluster 2 (T2) I/O Drawer (T2-U0.1-)

Front View
Figure 73. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284)

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

67

Diskette Drive, I/O Drawer

1 Tx-U0.1-P1-D1

Front View
Figure 74. I/O Drawer Diskette Drive Location (s009304)

2. Do the following steps only on the cluster I/O drawer diskette drive you are replacing. 3. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing. 4. Pull the I/O drawer out to the service position, and remove the top cover. See Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 61, I/O Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 64, and I/O Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 66. 5. Locate the drive you will be removing: v Diskette drive (Tx-U0.1-P1-D1) 1

68

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Diskette Drive, I/O Drawer

4 3

Re

ar

Figure 75. I/O Drawer Diskette Drive Location (s009480)

6. Disconnect the cables 3 from the rear of the diskette drive. 7. Remove the two disk mounting screws 2 from the front of the drawer. 8. Push the disk to the rear until it clears the front panel of the drawer. Lift the disk out, cable end first. 9. Transfer all mounting brackets and guides 4 and 5 to the new diskette drive 6 . 10. Replace parts in the reverse order. 11. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

I/O Drawer Planar Assembly Battery Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4.
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

69

I/O Drawer Planar Assembly Battery, I/O Drawer


CAUTION: A lithium battery can cause fire, explosion, or a severe burn. Do not recharge, disassemble, heat above 100C (212F), solder directly to the cell, incinerate, or expose cell contents to water. Keep away from children. Replace only with the part number specified for your system. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery connector is polarized; do not attempt to reverse polarity. Dispose of the battery according to local regulations. (1056) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of the Volume 3. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Replacing the I/O drawer planar assembly battery will require that the NVS battery cables be disconnected from the NVS battery charger cards. When these cables are reconnected, the cluster power on may take up to two hours to display Ready for Login or light the cluster Ready LED. The NVS charger card needs this time to rebuild its profile of the battery capacity. 2. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the cluster I/O drawer with the I/O drawer planar assembly battery (lithium manganese dioxide battery) you are replacing. v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), I/O drawer, (T1-U0.1) : - I/O Drawer Planar Assembly Battery, (T1-U0.1-P1-V3) 1 Cluster 2 (right), I/O drawer, (T2-U0.1) : - I/O Drawer Planar Assembly Battery, (T2-U0.1-P1-V3) 1

(R1-)

Cluster 1 (T1) I/O Drawer (T1-U0.1-)

Cluster 2 (T2) I/O Drawer (T2-U0.1-)

Front View
Figure 76. I/O Drawer Planar Assembly Battery Location (s009284)

70

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

I/O Drawer Planar Assembly Battery, I/O Drawer

1 (Tx-U0.1-P1-V3)

Top View

Front
Figure 77. I/O Drawer Planar Assembly Battery Location (s009299)

3. Do the following steps only on the cluster I/O drawer with the I/O drawer planar assembly battery you are replacing. 4. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing. 5. Pull the I/O drawer out to the service position, and remove the top cover. See Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 61, I/O Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 64, and I/O Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 66. 6. Open the I/O drawer top cover to the service position, see I/O Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 66. 7. Locate the I/O drawer planar assembly battery you are removing: v I/O drawer planar assembly battery (V3) 1 8. Remove the NVS battery assembly, see NVS Battery Assembly Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 92. The I/O drawer planar assembly battery is accessed through a hole in the bottom of the NVS battery tray. 9. Remove the I/O drawer planar assembly battery by sliding it out of the opening in the mounting socket. Attention: Dispose of the I/O drawer planar assembly battery according to local regulations. Lithium manganese dioxide batteries are not returned to IBM. 10. Before you install the new battery, drain the charge on the NVRAM by doing one of the following: v Briefly short the planar battery mounting socket plus (+) and minus (-) contacts together with a metal tool. This will quickly drain the charge. v Wait 15 minutes for the charge to drain off. 11. Replace parts in the reverse order.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

71

I/O Drawer Planar Assembly Battery, I/O Drawer


Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here. Always install the battery with the + symbol up.

I/O Drawer Planar Assembly, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer


Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. Note: The I/O drawer planar assembly 12 [Figure 83], which includes the surrounding sheet metal, is replaced as a single FRU. Disassembly is not required. 1. Replacing the I/O drawer planar assembly will require that the NVS battery cables be disconnected from the NVS battery charger cards. When these cables are reconnected, the cluster power on may take up to two hours to display Ready for Login or light the cluster Ready LED. The NVS charger card needs this time to rebuild its profile of the battery capacity. 2. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the cluster I/O drawer with the I/O drawer planar assembly you are replacing: v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), I/O drawer, (T1-U0.1) : - I/O drawer planar assembly, (T1-U0.1-P1) 1 Cluster 2 (right), I/O drawer, (T2-U0.1) : - I/O drawer planar assembly, (T2-U0.1-P1) 1

72

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

I/O Drawer Planar Assembly, I/O Drawer

(R1-)

Cluster 1 (T1) I/O Drawer (T1-U0.1-)

Cluster 2 (T2) I/O Drawer (T2-U0.1-)

Front View
Figure 78. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284)

Front

1 (Tx-U0.1-P1)

Top View
Figure 79. 2105 Model 800 Cluster I/O Drawer Locations (s009300)

3. Do the following steps only on the cluster I/O drawer with the I/O drawer planar assembly you are replacing.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

73

I/O Drawer Planar Assembly, I/O Drawer


4. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing. 5. Go to the rear of the I/O drawer and find the two I/O drawer power supplies for the I/O drawer you are servicing: v I/O drawer 1 power supplies 2 v I/O drawer 2 power supplies 3

Cluster 2 I/O Drawer Power Supplies

Cluster 1 I/O Drawer Power Supplies

Rear View
Figure 80. I/O Drawer Power Supply Locations (s009394)

6. Remove both of the I/O drawer power supplies for the I/O drawer you are servicing. See I/O Drawer Power Supply Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 on page 78. Return here and continue with the next step. 7. Pull the I/O drawer out to the service position, see I/O Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 64. 8. Open the I/O drawer top cover and remove it, see I/O Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 66. 9. Remove the NVS battery assembly 4 from the I/O drawer, see NVS Battery Assembly Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 92.

74

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

I/O Drawer Planar Assembly, I/O Drawer

Fr

on

Figure 81. I/O Drawer Locations (s009525)

10. Remove all of the following cards from the I/O drawer: v SSA device cards 5 and 11 , see SSA Device Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 81 v NVS/IOA cards 6 and 9 , see NVS/IOA Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 85 Note: The CPI cable connector can be easily damaged during a FRU replacement. Temporarily use a velcro cable tie to secure the loose cable end where it will not be damaged. The velcro cable tie can be removed from elsewhere on the 2105. Return the tie when finished. v NVS battery charger cards 7 and 10 , see NVS Battery Charger Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 88 v RIO card assembly 8 , see RIO Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 98

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

75

I/O Drawer Planar Assembly, I/O Drawer

10 11

Front View
Figure 82. I/O Drawer Card Locations (s009397)

11. Do not remove the diskette drive, RJ45 card, or the fan controller card from the I/O drawer, they come with the new I/O drawer planar assembly. 12. Disconnect any remaining cables from the front of the I/O drawer. 13. Push the drawer in, from the rear, reach in through the power supply area and remove the two rear mounting screws, shown in 15 . Attention: When installing the mounting screws for the new planar assembly, install and tighten the two rear screws 15 first. 14. Pull the drawer out to the service position, remove the two screws 13 from the front of the drawer. 15. Slide the I/O drawer planar assembly 12 out of the I/O drawer chassis 14 . Note: The I/O drawer planar assembly 12 [Figure 83], which includes the surrounding sheet metal, is replaced as a single FRU. Disassembly is not required.

76

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

I/O Drawer Planar Assembly, I/O Drawer

13 (2 screws)

Front View Front


13 (2 screws)

14 12
(FRU Assembly, do not disassemble)

15 (2 screws)

Rear

15 (2 screws)

Rear View
Figure 83. I/O Drawer Locations (s009523)

16. Transfer the cluster ID jumper 16 from the old I/O drawer planar assembly to the new one.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

77

I/O Drawer Planar Assembly, I/O Drawer

16

o Fr
Figure 84. I/O Drawer Locations (s009524)

nt

v Cluster 1, jumper assembly fence network I/O-1 (P/N 18P3209) v Cluster 2, jumper assembly fence network I/O-2 (P/N 18P3210) 17. Replace parts in the reverse order: Notes: a. When installing the mounting screws for the new planar assembly, install and tighten the two rear screws 15 first. This is critical for correct alignment. b. Transfer any connector covers to the new planar. c. Verify the I/O drawer planar assembly battery is installed, see I/O Drawer Planar Assembly Battery Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 69. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

I/O Drawer Power Supply Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800
The I/O drawer power supply is one FRU. Always replace it as a complete FRU. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the rear cover of the 2105 rack and locate the I/O drawer power supply you will be removing: v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), I/O drawer, (T1-U0.1)

78

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Power Supply, I/O Drawer


- I/O drawer power - I/O drawer power Cluster 2 (right), I/O - I/O drawer power - I/O drawer power supply 1, (T1-U0.1-V1) supply 2, (T1-U0.1-V2) drawer, (T2-U0.1) supply 1, (T2-U0.1-V1) supply 2, (T2-U0.1-V2) 1 2 3 4

(R1-)

Cluster 2 (T2)

3 (T2-U0.1-V1)

Cluster 1 (T1)

1 (T1-U0.1-V1)

4 (T2-U0.1-V2) 2 (T1-U0.1-V2)

Rear View
Figure 85. I/O Drawer Power Supply Locations (s009301)

2. Do the following steps only on the cluster I/O drawer power supply you are removing. 3. Locate the cable arm assembly with the power supply cables. Loosen the cable arm retaining bracket screw 8 . Rotate the bracket until the cable arm is free, then rotate the cable arm assembly out.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

79

Power Supply, I/O Drawer

7 6 8 5

Rear View

Figure 86. I/O Drawer Power Supply Cable Arm Locations (s009466)

4. Remove the velcro 6 and/or the cable clamps 5 , 7 , and 9 from the cable arms as needed to allow the power supply to be removed. 5. THE CLUSTER WILL POWER OFF IF A POWER SUPPLY IS REMOVED FOR MORE THAN FOUR MINUTES. Be sure that the replacement power supply is ready to install. When the power supply is removed, a power supply (working or not) must be reinstalled within 4 minutes. Note: The cluster firmware checks if the power supply FRUs are physically installed. If it detects a power supply as missing, it waits four minutes and then powers off the the cluster. A power supply that is not installed, creates a problem with the cooling air flow, that can cause components to overheat. As long as the firmware detects the power supply, it does not matter if the power supply is working, the firmware will not power off the cluster. 6. Disconnect the cables 10 from the I/O drawer power supply. Attention: This attention applies only to the I/O drawer power supply replacement. When the first cable is connected to the newly installed power supply, an electric arc may result. This arc is caused by the charging of a large capacitor in the power supply and is normal.

80

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Power Supply, I/O Drawer

(R1-)
10 11 12 13 1
J1 PWR 1 2 J2

ON CHK/ PWR-GOOD

OFF

14

Rear View
Figure 87. I/O Drawer Power Supply Locations (s009282)

7. Remove the I/O drawer power supply mounting screw 11 . Loosen the cam latch locking screw until it is free 12 . Note: The power supply plugs into the I/O drawer power planar. 8. Pull the cam latch 13 down. (This lever cams the power supply assembly out and in.) Pull the power supply 14 out of the rack. 9. Replace parts in the reverse order. Attention:If the new I/O drawer power supply has a power switch, make sure that its power switch is set to the On (Up) position before installation. Note: Later versions of the power supply may have the switch removed or covered up. 10. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

SSA Device Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Replacing the SSA device cards in slots 11 or 12 require that the NVS battery cable be disconnected from the NVS battery charger card. When this cable is reconnected, the cluster power on may take up to two hours to display Ready
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

81

SSA Device Card, I/O Drawer


for Login or light the cluster Ready LED. The NVS charger card needs this time to rebuild its profile of the battery capacity. 2. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the I/O drawer with the SSA device card you are replacing, see Figure 89 on page 83: v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), I/O drawer, (T1-U0.1) : - SSA device card, (T1-U0.1-P1-I1) 1 - SSA device card, (T1-U0.1-P1-I2) 2 - SSA device card, (T1-U0.1-P1-I11) 3 - SSA device card, (T1-U0.1-P1-I12) 4 Cluster 2 (right), I/O drawer, (T2-U0.1) : - SSA device card, (T2-U0.1-P1-I1) 1 - SSA device card, (T2-U0.1-P1-I2) 2 - SSA device card, (T2-U0.1-P1-I11) 3 - SSA device card, (T2-U0.1-P1-I12) 4

(R1-)

Cluster 1 (T1) I/O Drawer (T1-U0.1-)

Cluster 2 (T2) I/O Drawer (T2-U0.1-)

Front View
Figure 88. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284)

82

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

SSA Device Card, I/O Drawer


I/O Drawer

(R1- )

SSA Device Card Connectors B2 B1 A2 A1

Front View Cluster 2 Cluster 1 I/O DRAWER I/O DRAWER

SSA Device Cards

1 (Tx-U0.1-P1-I1) 2 (Tx-U0.1-P1-I2)

3 (Tx-U0.1-P1-I11) 4 (Tx-U0.1-P1-I12)

Figure 89. SSA Device Card Locations (s009181)

3. Do the following steps only on the cluster I/O drawer and the SSA device card you are replacing. 4. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing. 5. Pull the I/O drawer out to the service position, and remove the top cover. See Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 61, I/O Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 64, and I/O Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 66. 6. Loosen the two card retention bar screws 5 until they are free, then remove the bar 6 .

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

83

SSA Device Card, I/O Drawer

5 6

F
Figure 90. I/O Drawer Card Retention Bar Location (s009310)

N RO

7. Locate the SSA device card you are removing: v SSA device card (Tx-U0.1-P1-I1) 1 v SSA device card (Tx-U0.1-P1-I2) 2 v SSA device card (Tx-U0.1-P1-I11) 3 v SSA device card (Tx-U0.1-P1-I12) 4 8. Disconnect the SSA cables 9 from the connectors on the front of the SSA device card connectors, card slot I2 shown. Notes: a. Label the SSA cables, before disconnecting them, so they can be reconnected to their original connectors. b. To prevent damage to cables with plastic connector screws, always use the special screwdriver (SSA tool, P/N 32H7059). This screwdriver is in the 2105 ship group. 9. Do this step only if you are replacing the SSA device card in slot 11 3 (Tx-U0.1-P1-I11) or slot 12 5 (Tx-U0.1-P1-I12). Disconnect the cable from the top card connector 7 on the rear of the NVS battery charger card in slot 6 (T2-U0.1-P1-I6). Move the cable out of the way. 10. Remove the two front SSA device card mounting screws 8 and 10 . 11. Remove the SSA device card from the I/O drawer planar assembly by pulling it straight up.

84

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

SSA Device Card, I/O Drawer

10

11

12
Figure 91. SSA Card Locations (s009472)

12. Replace parts in the reverse order. When you install the SSA card, make sure it is correctly plugged into the connector on the I/O drawer planar assembly. Verify the cables to NVS battery charger cards in slots 6 and 10 are connected correctly. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

NVS/IOA Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Replacing the NVS/IOA card in slot 9 requires that the NVS battery cable be disconnected from the NVS battery charger card. When this cable is reconnected, the cluster power on may take up to two hours to display Ready for Login or light the cluster Ready LED. The NVS charger card needs this time to rebuild its profile of the battery capacity. 2. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the I/O drawer with the NVS/IOA card you are replacing, see Figure 93 on page 86: v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), I/O drawer, (T1) : - NVS/IOA card, (T1-U0.1-P1-I3) 1 - NVS/IOA card, (T1-U0.1-P1-I4) 2
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

85

NVS/IOA Card, I/O Drawer


- NVS/IOA card, (T1-U0.1-P1-I5) - NVS/IOA card, (T1-U0.1-P1-I9) Cluster 2 (right), I/O drawer, (T2) : - NVS/IOA card, (T2-U0.1-P1-I3) - NVS/IOA card, (T2-U0.1-P1-I4) - NVS/IOA card, (T2-U0.1-P1-I5) - NVS/IOA card, (T2-U0.1-P1-I9) 3 4 1 2 3 4

(R1-)

Cluster 1 (T1) I/O Drawer (T1-U0.1-)

Cluster 2 (T2) I/O Drawer (T2-U0.1-)

Front View
Figure 92. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284)

(R1- )

I/O Drawer

Front View Cluster 1 I/O DRAWER Cluster 2 I/O DRAWER 1 (Tx-U0.1-P1-13)


NVS/IOA Cards

2 (Tx-U0.1-P1-14) 3 (Tx-U0.1-P1-15) 4 (Tx-U0.1-P1-19)


Figure 93. NVS/IOA Card Locations (s009309)

86

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

NVS/IOA Card, I/O Drawer


3. Do the following steps only on the cluster I/O drawer and the NVS/IOA card you are replacing. 4. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing. 5. Pull the I/O drawer out to the service position, and remove the top cover. See Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 61, I/O Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 64, and I/O Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 66. 6. Loosen the two card retention bar screws until they are free 5 then remove the bar 6 .

5 6

F
Figure 94. I/O Drawer Card Retention Bar Location (s009310)

N RO

7. Locate the NVS/IOA card you are removing: v NVS/IOA card (Tx-U0.1-P1-I3) 1 v NVS/IOA card (Tx-U0.1-P1-I4) 2 v NVS/IOA card (Tx-U0.1-P1-I5) 3 v NVS/IOA card (Tx-U0.1-P1-I9) 4 8. Disconnect the cable from the connector 9 on the front of the NVS/IOA card. Label the cable as required. Note:

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

87

NVS/IOA Card, I/O Drawer


Note: The CPI cable connector can be easily damaged during a FRU replacement. Temporarily use a velcro cable tie to secure the loose cable end where it will not be damaged. The velcro cable tie can be removed from elsewhere on the 2105. Return the tie when finished. 9. Do this step only if you are replacing the NVS/IOA card in slot 9 4 (Tx-U0.1-P1-I9). Disconnect the cable from the top card connector 7 on the rear of the NVS battery charger card in slot 6 (T2-U0.1-P1-I6). 10. Remove the two front NVS/IOA card mounting screws 8 and 11 and the cable support bracket 10 . 11. Remove the NVS/IOA card from the I/O drawer planar assembly by pulling it straight up.

9 10

11
Figure 95. NVS/IOA Card Locations (s009473)

12. Replace parts in the reverse order. When you install the SAS card, make sure its front and rear connectors are correctly plugged into the connectors on the I/O drawer planar assembly. Verify the cables to NVS battery charger cards in slots 6 and 10 are connected correctly. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

NVS Battery Charger Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1.

88

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

NVS Battery Charger Card, I/O Drawer


Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Replacing the NVS battery charger card will require that the NVS battery cables be disconnected from them. When these cables are reconnected, the cluster power on may take up to two hours to display Ready for Login or light the cluster Ready LED. The NVS charger card needs this time to rebuild its profile of the battery capacity. 2. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the I/O drawer with the NVS battery charger card you are replacing, see Figure 97 on page 90: v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), I/O drawer, (T1-U0.1) : - NVS battery charger card, (T1-U0.1-P1-I6) 1 - NVS battery charger card, (T1-U0.1-P1-I10) 2 Cluster 2 (right), I/O drawer, (T2-U0.1) : - NVS battery charger card, (T2-U0.1-P1-I6) 1 - NVS battery charger card, (T2-U0.1-P1-I10) 2

(R1-)

Cluster 1 (T1) I/O Drawer (T1-U0.1-)

Cluster 2 (T2) I/O Drawer (T2-U0.1-)

Front View
Figure 96. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284)

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

89

NVS Battery Charger Card, I/O Drawer

(R1- )

I/O Drawer

Front View Cluster 1 I/O DRAWER Cluster 2 I/O DRAWER NVS Battery Charger Cards

1 (Tx-U0.1-P1-13) 2 (Tx-U0.1-P1-14)
Figure 97. NVS Battery Charger Card Removal (s009313)

3. Do the following steps only on the cluster I/O drawer with the NVS battery charger card you are replacing. 4. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing. 5. Pull the I/O drawer out to the service position, and remove the top cover. See Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 61, I/O Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 64, and I/O Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 66. 6. Loosen the two card retention bar screws until they are free 3 then remove the bar 4 .

90

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

NVS Battery Charger Card, I/O Drawer

3 4 5 6

F
Figure 98. I/O Drawer Card Retention Bar Location (s009311)

N RO

7. Locate the NVS battery charger card you are removing: v NVS battery charger card (T2-U0.1-P1-I6) 1 v NVS battery charger card (T2-U0.1-P1-I10) 2 8. Disconnect the cable from the top card connector on the rear of the NVS battery charger card: v If replacing NVS battery charger card (T2-U0.1-P1-I6), disconnect the cable from the card you are removing (-I6) 5 . v If replacing NVS battery charger card (T2-U0.1-P1-I10), disconnect the cable from both battery cards (-I6) 5 and (-I10) 6 . 9. Remove the two front NVS battery charger card mounting screws 7 and the cable support bracket. 10. Remove the NVS battery charger card 8 from the I/O drawer planar assembly by pulling straight up.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

91

NVS Battery Charger Card, I/O Drawer

8
Figure 99. NVS Battery Charger Card Locations (s009474)

11. Replace parts in the reverse order. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

NVS Battery Assembly Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. This procedure replaces the NVS battery assembly, both NVS battery FRU codes are packaged in one (unserviceable) assembly. 1. Replacing the NVS battery assembly will require that the NVS battery cables be disconnected from the NVS battery charger cards. When these cables are reconnected, the cluster power on may take up to two hours to display Ready for Login or light the cluster Ready LED. The NVS charger card needs this time to rebuild its profile of the battery capacity. 2. Locate the NVS battery assembly you are replacing, see Figure 101 on page 93: v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), I/O drawer, (T1-U0.1) : - NVS battery assembly, (T1-U0.1-P1-I6-V9) and (T1-U0.1-P1-I10-V9) 1

92

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

NVS Battery Assembly, I/O Drawer


Cluster 2 (right), I/O drawer, (T2-U0.1) : - NVS battery assembly, (T2-U0.1-P1-I6-V9) and (T2-U0.1-P1-I10-V9) 1 Note: FRU codes (T1-U0.1-P1-I6-V9) and (T1-U0.1-P1-I10-V9) are packaged in one FRU assembly. This single assembly replaces both FRU codes.

(R1-)

Cluster 1 (T1) I/O Drawer (T1-U0.1-)

Cluster 2 (T2) I/O Drawer (T2-U0.1-)

Front View
Figure 100. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284)

1 (Tx-U0.1-P1-I6-V9 and Tx-U0.1-P1-I10-V9) Batteries are packaged in one FRU.

Figure 101. NVS Battery Assembly Locations (s009314)

3. Do the following steps only on the cluster I/O drawer with the NVS battery assembly you are replacing. 4. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing. 5. Pull the I/O drawer out to the service position, and remove the top cover. See Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 61
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

93

NVS Battery Assembly, I/O Drawer


61, I/O Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 64, and I/O Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 66. 6. Loosen the two card retention bar screws until they are free 2 then remove the bar 3 .

2 3

F
Figure 102. NVS Battery Assembly Locations (s009475)

N RO

7.

Disconnect the cables from the top card connector on the rear of the NVS battery charger cards in slot 6 (T2-U0.1-P1-I6) 4 and slot 10 (T2-U0.1-P1-I10) 5 . 8. Loosen the two NVS battery assembly mounting screws 6 until they are free. Lift the NVS battery assembly 7 out of the I/O drawer. Attention, Battery Disposal Information:This product contains a nickel metal hydride battery. The battery must be recycled or disposed of properly. In the United States, IBM has established a collection process for reuse, recycling, or proper disposal of used IBM nickel metal hydride batteries. For information on proper disposal of these batteries, please contact IBM at 1-800-426-4333. Please have the IBM part number listed on the battery available prior to your call. For information on disposal of nickel metal hydride batteries outside the United States, contact your local waste disposal facility.

94

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

NVS Battery Assembly, I/O Drawer

4 5 6

Figure 103. NVS Battery Assembly Locations (s009476)

9. Replace parts in the reverse order. Attention: Before installing a new NVS battery assembly, carefully inspect the pins in the connector on the card for damage. Notes: a. The NVS battery assembly has information on a Date of First Charge label that needs to be entered into the functional code any time the batteries are replaced. Record the date indicated on this label. b. There may be an additional label indicating the last charge date. Information from labels, other than the Date of First Charge label, should only be used when this label is missing.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

95

NVS Battery Assembly, I/O Drawer

Figure 104. Date of First Charge Label Location (s009552)

10.

After a successful replacement, use the service terminal Main Menu, Utility Menu, Battery Menu, Update Battery Installation Date option to reflect the new NVS Battery Installation Date. (This information is used to create error logs in the future to replace the NVS batteries before they exceed their expected life.) Follow the battery disposal procedure described in step 8 on page 94. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

Fan Controller Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the I/O drawer with the fan controller card you are replacing. v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), I/O drawer, (T1-U0.1) : - I/O fan controller card, (T1-U0.1-X2) 1 Cluster 2 (right), I/O drawer, (T2-U0.1) : - I/O fan controller card, (T2-U0.1-X2) 1

96

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

I/O Fan Controller Card, I/O Drawer

(R1-)

Cluster 1 (T1) I/O Drawer (T1-U0.1-)

Cluster 2 (T2) I/O Drawer (T2-U0.1-)

Front View
Figure 105. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284)

1 2

Re

ar

Figure 106. Cluster, I/O Drawer Fan Controller Card Locations (s009467)

2. Do the following steps only on the cluster I/O drawer and the I/O fan controller card you are replacing. 3. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing. 4. Pull the I/O drawer out to the service position, and remove the top cover. See Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 61
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

97

I/O Fan Controller Card, I/O Drawer


61, I/O Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 64, and I/O Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 66. 5. Disconnect the cable from the top of the fan controller card (SPINNER CD) 3 . 6. Turn the locking screw 2 until it is free, then pull the fan controller card 1 straight up. 7. Replace parts in the reverse order. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

RIO Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Replacing the RIO card will require that the NVS battery cable be disconnected from the NVS battery charger card. When this cable is reconnected, the cluster power on may take up to two hours to display Ready for Login or light the cluster Ready LED. The NVS charger card needs this time to rebuild its profile of the battery capacity. 2. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the I/O drawer with the RIO card you are replacing, see Figure 108 on page 99: v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), I/O drawer, (T1-U0.1): - RIO card, (T1-U0.1-P1.1) 1 Cluster 2 (right), I/O drawer, (T2-U0.1) : - RIO card, (T2-U0.1-P1.1) 1

98

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

RIO Card, I/O Drawer

(R1-)

Cluster 1 (T1) I/O Drawer (T1-U0.1-)

Cluster 2 (T2) I/O Drawer (T2-U0.1-)

Front View
Figure 107. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284)

(R1- )

I/O Drawer

Front View
Cluster 1 I/O DRAWER Cluster 2 I/O DRAWER

1 (Tx-U0.1-P1.1)
Figure 108. RIO Card Removal (s009259)

3. Do the following steps only on the cluster I/O drawer and the RIO card you are replacing. 4. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing. 5. Pull the I/O drawer out to the service position, and remove the top cover. See Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 61, I/O Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 64, and I/O Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 66. 6. Locate the RIO card you are removing: v RIO card (T1-U0.1-P1.1) 7

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

99

RIO Card, I/O Drawer


7. Loosen the two cable support bracket mounting screws 2 , then remove the bracket 3 . 8. Disconnect the cables from the connectors on the front of the RIO card. Notes: a. Label the cables, before disconnecting them, so they can be reconnected to their original connectors.

2 (2 screws)

4
Figure 109. RIO Card Locations (s009520)

9. Loosen the two card retention bar screws until they are free 5 then remove the bar 6 . 10. Disconnect the cable from the top card connector 8 on the rear of the NVS battery charger card in slot 6 (T2-U0.1-P1-I6).

100

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

RIO Card, I/O Drawer

5 6

8 7

F
Figure 110. RIO Card Locations (s009519)

N RO

11. Release the two card locking levers 9 and 10 at the same time, move them to the vertical position. These levers cam the RIO card out and in. 12. Remove the RIO card 11 from the I/O drawer planar assembly by pulling straight up.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

101

RIO Card, I/O Drawer

10 11

F
Figure 111. RIO Card Locations (s009521)

N RO

13. Replace parts in the reverse order. Verify the cables to NVS battery charger cards in slots 6 and 10 are connected correctly. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

RJ45 Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4.

102

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

RJ45 Card, I/O Drawer


Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the I/O drawer with the RJ45 card you are replacing. v 2105 Model 800: 2105 Model 800: - Cluster 1 (left), I/O drawer, (T1-U0.1) : v RJ45 card, (no location code) 1 - Cluster 2 (right), I/O drawer, (T2-U0.1) : v RJ45 card, (no location code) 1

(R1-)

Cluster 1 (T1) I/O Drawer (T1-U0.1-)

Cluster 2 (T2) I/O Drawer (T2-U0.1-)

Front View
Figure 112. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284)

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

103

RJ45 Card, I/O Drawer

Front View
3
Figure 113. I/O Drawer RJ45 Card Locations (s009316)

2. Do the following steps only on the cluster I/O bay with the I/O RJ45 card you are replacing. 3. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing. 4. Pull the I/O drawer out to the service position, and remove the top cover. See Cluster Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 61, I/O Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 64, and I/O Drawer Top Service Access Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 66. 5. Disconnect the cable from the back of the RJ45 card (Tx-U0.1-??) 4 . 6. Disconnect any cables from the front of the RJ45 card 1 . 7. Remove the four screws 2 and 3 that mount the RF45 card to the front of the I/O drawer. Remove the RJ45 card 5 out the front of the drawer.

104

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

RJ45 Card, I/O Drawer

Re

ar

Figure 114. RJ45 Card Locations (s009481)

8. Replace parts in the reverse order. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

Cable Removals and Replacements, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer


Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 rack and locate the cluster I/O drawer with the cable you are replacing, see Figure 115 on page 106. v 2105 Model 800: Cluster 1 (left), I/O drawer, (T1-U0.1) or Cluster 2 (right), I/O drawer, (T2-U0.1) Attention: Most internal I/O drawer cables are not individually replaceable. These cables are part of the I/O drawer planar assembly FRU, see I/O Drawer Planar Assembly, 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer on page 72. Only the following I/O drawer cables can be individually replaced: - NVS to bottom card to bulkhead cable
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

105

I/O Drawer Cables


- I/O drawer 1 fence network jumper (cluster 1 only) - I/O drawer 2 fence network jumper (cluster 2 only) - I/O drawer RJ45 card to interlagos cable

(R1-)

Cluster 1 (T1) I/O Drawer (T1-U0.1-)

Cluster 2 (T2) I/O Drawer (T2-U0.1-)

Front View
Figure 115. I/O Drawer Locations (s009284)

2. Do the following steps only on the cluster I/O drawer with the cluster I/O drawer cable you are replacing. 3. Verify that the cluster has already been quiesced and powered off using MAP 4700: Cluster Bay FRU Replacement in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 before continuing. 4. Pull the cluster bay out to the service position, see CEC Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 23. 5. Open the cluster bay top cover to the service position, see I/O Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 64. 6. Locate the cable you are replacing in Table 7. 7. Locate the cables connectors in Table 7, then find the connectors in figure 107. 8. Replace parts in the reverse order. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.
Table 7. Cluster I/O Drawer Cable and Connector Locations Cluster I/O Drawer Cable Name Cluster I/O Drawer Cable Connector Names and Locations: From: NVS to bottom card to bulkhead cable I/O drawer 1 fence network jumper (cluster 1 only) I/O drawer 2 fence network jumper (cluster 2 only) BC/P6, I/O drawer planar P1/Q5, I/O drawer planar P1/Q5, I/O drawer planar To: (no label), planar standoff

106

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

I/O Drawer Cables


Table 7. Cluster I/O Drawer Cable and Connector Locations (continued) Cluster I/O Drawer Cable Name Cluster I/O Drawer Cable Connector Names and Locations: From: I/O drawer RJ45 card to interlagos cable U0.1-RJ/P1, I/O drawer chassis front To: U0.1-P1/P14, I/O drawer chassis front

U0.1-RJ/P1

U0.1-P1/P14

P1/Q5

Front

BC/P6

(NO LABEL)

Top View

Front

Figure 116. Cluster I/O Drawer Cable Connector Locations (s009598)

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

107

I/O Drawer Cables


9. Use this drawing to locate all of the cables connectors and how the cable is routed and retained. 10. Attention: Carefully note the routing and retention of the cable you are removing, so you can position it correctly during the replacement. Remove the cable from the cluster I/O drawer. 11. Replace parts in the reverse order. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

108

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Host Bay FRU Remove and Replace Procedures

HOST BAY REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES:


The FRU remove and replace procedures for the host bay follow:

Moving the Host Bay to Its Service Position, 2105 Model 800
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 rack and locate the host bay with the card or planar you will be removing: Note: All cards shown may not be installed. v 2105 Model 800: Host bay 1, (R1-B1-) 1 Host bay 2, (R1-B2-) 2 Host bay 3, (R1-B3-) 3 Host bay 4, (R1-B4-) 4

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

109

Host Bay Service Position, 2105 Model 800


(R1- )

Front View

Host Bays 1 2 3 4

(2 Screws)

Figure 117. Host Bay Locations (s009455)

2. Do the following steps only on the host bay you are moving to its service position. 3. Do not remove any bay cables unless instructed to do so. Note: The CPI cable connector can be easily damaged during a FRU replacement. Temporarily use a velcro cable tie to secure the loose cable end where it will not be damaged. The velcro cable tie can be removed from elsewhere on the 2105. Return the tie when finished. Loosen the tailgate cable clamps that are clamping the host cables that go to the host bay being serviced. See 2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation on page 316. Pull enough of the host cables from under the floor to allow the host bay to be moved to its service position (about 1 meter or 3 feet). On host bays 1, 3, and 4 only, remove the CPI cable tie on the I/O drawer 6 above the host bay. Cable tie for host bay 4 shown. Release the two cable ties (velcro) 7 and 8 that restrict the movement of the two CPI cables attached to the host bay. Note: Some CPI cable brackets have slots for two velcro ties per cable, one upper 7 and one lower 8 . Do not reinstall the lower velcro tie in slot 8 , discard it. This allows the CPI cable to have a larger radius bend when the service action is completed.

4.

5. 6. 7.

110

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Host Bay Service Position, 2105 Model 800

Side View
Figure 118. CPI Cable Routing (s009645)

8. Loosen the two host bay retaining screws 5 until they are free (bay 4 shown). 9. Pull the host bay out slowly to the service position. 10. Return to the procedure that sent you here to remove the host bay. 11. Replace parts in the reverse order. Notes: 1. Release the latches on the side of each rail to slide the host bay into the 2105. 2. Some CPI cable brackets have slots for two velcro ties per cable, one upper 7 and one lower 8 . Do not reinstall the lower velcro tie in slot 8 , discard it. This allows the CPI cable to have a larger radius bend when the service action is completed. 3. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

Host Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800


Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Move the host bay 1 , with the host card you are replacing to its service position, see Moving the Host Bay to Its Service Position, 2105 Model 800 on page 109. 2. Locate the host card or cards you will be removing 2 , 4 , or 6 :
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

111

Host Card, 2105 Model 800


Note: The service terminal will allow single or multiple host card removals in the same host bay. v 2105 Model 800: Host card 1, (R1-Bx-H1) Host card 2, (R1-Bx-H2) Host card 3, (R1-Bx-H3) Host card 4, (R1-Bx-H4)

1
Host Bays R1-B1 R1-B2 R1-B3 R1-B4

Front View

2 Ultra SCSI Host Cards


Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4

4 ESCON Host Cards


Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4

SCSI Connectors

5 ESCON Link
Connectors

ZA ZB

ZA/LINK 00 ZB/LINK 01

6 Fibre Channel Host Cards


Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4 Fibre Channel Card Type LW2 (Long Wave Card) SW2 (Short Wave Card) Fibre Link Connectors

7 Link A

Figure 119. Host Bay and Card Locations (s009482)

Note: There are two types of Fibre channel cards:

112

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Host Card, 2105 Model 800


v Short Wave (SW2) v Long Wave (LW2) 3. Do the following steps only on the host card you are replacing. 4. Disconnect both SCSI, ESCON, or Fibre host cables 3 , 5 , or 7 from the host bay card. Attention: Before disconnecting/connecting any host cables, ask the customer to remove host I/O activities to all devices on the affected cables The customer should refer to the host documentation to determine if host power also needs to be off. 5. Remove the two host card connector mounting screws 8 . Note: All cards shown may not be installed. 6. Remove the host card, rear locking pin 10 from the rear of the host card. 7. Unplug the host card 9 from the host bay planar. Note: Note the position of the card for reinstallation.

10
Front View
Figure 120. Removing Host Card from Host Bay (s009550)

Front View

8. Replace parts in the reverse order. Attention: To prevent electrostatic discharge, ensure you discharge all SCSI host cables to the ESD discharge pad, before you plug them into the 2105 Model 800. The ESD discharge pads are mounted on the front right and left corners of the 2105 Model 800 frame, next to each tailgate. See Figure 131 on page 123 for the location of the ESD discharge pads. Notes: a. Fibre host card FRUs have a combination dust cover and wrap tool installed on each port. Leave the wrap tool installed until connecting the host cables. b. When a fibre channel host card is installed or replaced, the world-wide port name (WWPN) of the new card may be displayed during the service terminal Install or Repair process. Provide the customer with the new WWPN(s) that were indicated. c. Some CPI cable brackets have slots for two velcro ties per cable, one upper 11 and one lower 12 . Do not reinstall the lower velcro tie in slot 12 , discard it. This allows the CPI cable to have a larger radius bend when the service action is completed.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

113

Host Card, 2105 Model 800

11

12

Side View
Figure 121. CPI Cable Routing (s009649)

d. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

Host Bay Power Supply Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800
The host bay power supply is one FRU. Always replace it as a complete FRU. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the rear cover of the 2105 rack and locate the host bay power supply you will be removing: v 2105 Model 800: Host bay power supply 1, (R1-B1-V1) 1 Host bay power supply 2, (R1-B1-V2) 2 Host bay power supply 1, (R1-B3-V1) 3 Host bay power supply 2, (R1-B3-V2) 4

114

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Power Supply, Host Bay

(R1-)

3 R1-B3-V1

1 R1-B1-V1

4 R1-B3-V2

2 R1-B1-V2

Rear View
Figure 122. Host Bay Power Supply Locations (s009264)

2. Do the following steps only on the host bay power supply you are removing. 3. Set the host bay power supply power switch 9 to Standby (down) position.

R1

7 8

11

10

Rear View
Figure 123. Host Bay Power Supply Locations (s009435)

4. Disconnect the cables 5 and 7 from the host bay power supply. Note: If you have difficulty accessing the cable connectors, the I/O drawer (located above the power supply that you are removing) can be moved
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

115

Power Supply, Host Bay


forward a couple of inches until the connectors can be accessed (refer to steps 4 on page 65 to step 6 on page 65 in the I/O Drawer Service Position Procedure, 2105 Model 800 on page 64. Attention: This attention applies only to the host bay power supply replacement. When the first cable is connected to the newly installed power supply, an electric arc may result. This arc is caused by the charging of a large capacitor in the power supply and is normal. 5. Remove the host bay power supply mounting screw 10 . Pull the cam latch locking pin out 6 . Note: The power supply plugs into the host bay power planar. 6. Pull the cam latch 8 down. (This lever cams the power supply assembly out and in.) Pull the power supply 11 out of the rack. Note: A power supply that is not installed, creates a problem with the cooling air flow, that can cause components to overheat. Install the new FRU quickly! 7. Replace parts in the reverse order. Attention: Before installing the new host bay power supply, make sure that its power switch is set to Standby (down) position. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

Host Bay Drawer Backplane Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800
The host bay drawer backplane is one FRU. Always replace it as a complete FRU. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the rear cover of the 2105 rack and locate the host bay drawer backplane you will be removing: v 2105 Model 800: Host bay drawer backplane 1, (R1-B1-P2) 1 Host bay drawer backplane 2, (R1-B3-P2) 2

116

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Backplane, Host Bay Drawer

(R1-)

2 R1-B3-P2
(Behind Power Supplies)

1 R1-B1-P2
(Behind Power Supplies)

Rear View
Figure 124. Host Bay Drawer Backplane Locations (s009581)

2. Do the following steps only on the host bay drawer backplane, host bay power supplies, and host bays you are removing. 3. Move the two host bays 5 associated with the backplane you are replacing out until they are free of the host bay drawer backplane, seeMoving the Host Bay to Its Service Position, 2105 Model 800 on page 109. v Host bay drawer backplane 1, (R1-B1-P2), cluster 1, host bays 1 and 2 v Host bay drawer backplane 2, (R1-B3-P2), cluster 2, host bays 3 and 4 4. Remove the host bay power supplies 3 associated with the backplane you are replacing, seeHost Bay Power Supply Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 on page 114. v Host bay drawer backplane 1, (R1-B1-P2), cluster 1, host bay power supplies 1 and 2 v Host bay drawer backplane 2, (R1-B3-P2), cluster 2, host bay power supplies 1 and 2 5. Remove the six host bay drawer backplane mounting screws 4 . Remove the host bay drawer backplane cover 7 and backplane 6 .

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

117

Backplane, Host Bay Drawer

(6 Screws)

7 6

5
Figure 125. Host Bay Drawer Backplane Locations (s009580)

6. Replace parts in the reverse order. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

ESCON and Fibre Channel Wrap Tools, 2105 Model 800


Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4.

Installing the ESCON or Fibre Channel Wrap Tool


To install a wrap tool, perform the following procedure: 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800. 2. At cluster 1 or 2, identify the ESCON or Fibre channel cable that you are testing. Note: There are two types of Fibre channel cards: v Short Wave (SW2) v Long Wave (LW2)

118

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

ESCON and Fibre Channel Wrap Tools, 2105 Model 800


(R1- ) Cluster 1 Host Bays 1(-B1) 2(-B2) Cluster 2 3(-B3) 4(-B4)

Front View

Fibre Channel Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4

ESCON Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4

Fibre Channel Card Type LW2 (Long Wave Card) SW2 (Short Wave Card) Fibre Link Connectors Link A

ESCON Link Connectors

ZA/LINK 00 ZB/LINK 01

Figure 126. Host Bay and ESCON Card Locations (s009456)

3. Unplug the ESCON or Fibre channel cable from the ESCON or Fibre channel host card. Press the locking clips on the cable connector and pull the connector out of the host card. 4. On ESCON cables only, install an ESCON cable connector cover (P/N 7333186) onto the free ESCON cable connector. 5. Clean the wrap tool before you install it into the host card: v ESCON wrap tool (large), (P/N 5605670) v ESCON wrap tool (small), (P/N 05N6767) v Fibre channel (SW2 and LW2) wrap tool, P/N 11P3847 See Fiber and ESCON Optic Tools on page 120. Use the fiber optic cleaning procedure in the Fiber Optic Connector Cleaning Kit (New P/N 46G6844 or Old P/N 5453521). 6. Insert the clean wrap tool into the host card. Push the wrap tool in carefully until its latches click, locking the tool in place. 7. Return to the service terminal and follow the instructions on the SMIT screens.

Removing the ESCON or Fibre Channel Wrap Tool


To remove a wrap tool, perform the following procedure: 1. Remove the wrap tool from the host card when the service terminal instructs you to do so. Press the locking clips on the wrap tool and pull the wrap tool out of the host card. 2. On ESCON cables only, remove the ESCON cable connector cover (P/N 7333186) from the ESCON cable connector.
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

119

ESCON and Fibre Channel Wrap Tools, 2105 Model 800


3. Clean the ESCON or Fibre channel cable connector end faces before you install it into the host card. Use the fiber optic cleaning procedure in the Fiber Optic Connector Cleaning Kit (New P/N 46G6844 or Old P/N 5453521). 4. Insert the ESCON or Fibre channel cable connector into the host card. Push the cable connector in carefully until its latches click, locking the cable connector in place. 5. Determine if you have other ESCON or Fibre channel ports to test: v If you have more ports to test, follow the instructions on the SMIT screens to test the other port. v If this is the last port being tested, follow the instructions on the SMIT screens to exit this diagnostic. 6. Ensure that the customer resources are varied online at the completion of this call.

Fiber and ESCON Optic Tools


The following tools are needed to service and maintain the fiber optic cables and connectors: v ESCON Fiber Optic Wrap Tool, P/N 5605670 (large) or P/N 05N6767 (small), this tool allows you to perform a machine checkout during installation and repair. This tool is in the ship group. v ESCON Optic Protective plug, P/N 18F6979, are used to protect host card connectors. These plugs are used during shipment, relocation, returning cards, and or when a cable is not connected to a port. This tool is shipped plugged into the ESCON cards. v ESCON Cable Connector Cover, P/N 7333186, this cover protects the free end of the ESCON cable during maintenance or repair. v ESCON and Fiber optic connector cleaning kit, New P/N 46G6844 or old P/N 5453521, is used to clean the fiber optic connectors and tools. Cleaning instructions are in the kit. v Fibre Optic Wrap Tool, P/N 11P3847, this tool allows you to perform a machine checkout during installation and repair. Fibre host cards have a combination dust cover and wrap tool installed on each port. To prevent optical contamination, leave the wrap tool installed until the host cables are connected.

Host Bay Planar Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800


Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Move the host bay with the host bay planar you will be removing to its service position, see Moving the Host Bay to Its Service Position, 2105 Model 800 on page 109.

120

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Host Bay Planar, 2105 Model 800


v 2105 Model 800: Host bay planar Host bay planar Host bay planar Host bay planar

1, 2, 3, 4,

(R1-B1) (R1-B2) (R1-B3) (R1-B4)

(R1-)

Host Bays

Cluster 1 1(-B1) 2(-B2)

Cluster 2 3(-B3) 4(-B4)

Front View

Figure 127. Host Bay Locations (s009139)

2. Do the following steps only on the host bay with the planar you are replacing. 3. Disconnect both CPI cables from the two lower connectors on the front of the host bay 4 .

Front View

Figure 128. Host Bay CPI Cable Connector Locations (s009551)

4. Remove all of the host cards from the host bay, use Host Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 on page 111. Note: Note the position of each cable and card for reinstallation. 5. Loosen the two screws 8 and 9 under the host bay drawer handle 7 until the front of the drawer 6 can be lifted clear of the slides.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

121

Host Bay Planar, 2105 Model 800


6. With the front of the drawer up, push the drawer to the rear 5 until the clips on the bottom of the drawer come out of the rear of the slides.

2 5 6

7 8 5 9
Figure 129. Host Bay Card and Planar Locations (s009463)

7. Remove the host bay drawer assembly from the rack. 8. Replace parts in the reverse order. Attention: To prevent electrostatic discharge, ensure you discharge all SCSI host cables to the ESD discharge pad, before you plug them into the 2105 Model 800. The ESD discharge pads are mounted on the front right and left corners of the 2105 Model 800 frame, next to each tailgate. See Figure 131 on page 123 for the location of the ESD discharge pads. Notes: 1. After the CPI cables are connected, and before the cable ties are installed, adjust the host bay drawer handle. Push the host bay drawer handle 7 up until it supports the CPI cables, then tighten the handles mounting screws 8 and 9 . When the handle is adjusted correctly the CPI connector and cable should be level, see Side View in 123. 2. Some CPI cable brackets have slots for two velcro ties per cable, one upper 10 and one lower 11 . Do not reinstall the lower velcro tie in slot 11 , discard it. This allows the CPI cable to have a larger radius bend when the service action is completed.

122

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Host Bay Planar, 2105 Model 800

10

11

Side View
Figure 130. CPI Cable Routing (s009650)

3. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

Cluster 1

Cluster 2

ESD Discharge Pad

Top View Tailgate

ESD Discharge Pad

Front View
Figure 131. 2105 Model 800 ESD Discharge Pad Locations (s009395)

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

123

2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure FRU Remove and Replace Procedures

2105 Model 800 and EXPANSION ENCLOSURE FRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES:


The FRU remove and replace procedures for the 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure follow:

Rack, Subsystem Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1.

Subsystem Power Off


Note: When the subsystem is powered off, it goes into a power standby mode. In power standby mode, both primary power supplies are active and supply power to the RPC cards and operator panel switches. 1. Instruct the system operator to vary all of the devices in the subsystem offline. 2. Inform the customer that the complete storage facility subsystem will be unavailable. 3. Locate the subsystem operator panel on the front of the 2105 Model 800 for the subsystem you are powering off.
2105 Model 800 Unit Emergency

Local Power

Ready Cluster 1 Cluster 2 Power Complete Line Cord 1 Line Cord 2 Messages Cluster 1 Cluster 2 Front View

Front View

Figure 132. 2105 Model 800 Operator Panel Location (s009423)

4. Set the Local Power switch to Off (down). 5. Wait for the Power Complete indicators for Line Cords 1 and 2 to go off.

Subsystem Power On
1. Locate the subsystem operator panel on the front of the 2105 Model 800 you will be powering on.

124

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Rack, Subsystem Power, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure

2105 Model 800 Unit Emergency

Local Power

Ready Cluster 1 Cluster 2 Power Complete Line Cord 1 Line Cord 2 Messages Cluster 1 Cluster 2 Front View

Front View

Figure 133. 2105 Model 800 Operator Panel Location (s009423)

2. Set the Local Power switch to On (up). 3. Wait for the Power Complete indicators for Line Cords 1 and 2 to go on.

Primary Power Supply Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
The primary power supply (PPS) is one FRU. Always replace it as a complete FRU. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Unless you have a particular reason, do not power off the 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure rack when removing the primary power supply. 1. Open the rear cover of the 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure rack and locate the primary power supply you will be removing: Note: 2105 Model 800 rack shown. v 2105 Model 800: Primary power supply 1, right (R1-V1) 1 Primary power supply 2, left (R1-V2) 2 v 2105 Expansion Enclosure: Primary power supply 1, right (R2-V1) 1 Primary power supply 2, left (R2-V2) 2 2. Determine the part number of the failing primary power supply by reading the bar-code label on the left side of the power supply, see Figure 134 on page 126.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

125

Primary Power Supply, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure


Note: The bar-code label may be mounted, on the side of the bracket shown, facing the connectors.
Primary Power Supply

Bar-Code Labels

Low-Voltage

High-Voltage
Figure 134. 2105 Low-/High-Voltage Primary Power Supply Identification (s009542)

3. Select the latest available, low voltage or high voltage, replacement primary power supply that meets the racks requirements for input voltage. Notes: a. Always use the latest available primary power supply P/N. b. When an auto-ranging primary power supply is replaced with a power supply with a low-voltage or high-voltage designation, a new power information label is required. The new label replaces the label on the top corner of the right rear cover: v 2105 Model 800, power rating label, 18P5456 v 2105 Expansion Enclosure, power rating label, 18P5456 Attention: Do not install a low voltage primary power supply in a high voltage 2105. A low-voltage primary power supply will be damaged if connected to a high voltage ac input. 4. Do the following steps only on the primary power supply you are replacing: v If you are replacing primary power supply 1 (Rx-V1), go to step 5. v If you are replacing primary power supply 2 (Rx-V2), go to step 6. 5. Set the 390 V battery 1 5 MASTER circuit breaker 4 to Off (down), then go to step 6. Attention: If the 390 V battery MASTER circuit breaker is not set to off, false battery failure errors will occur when the new PPS is powered on. 6. Press the PPS system power MAIN LINE circuit breaker (CB00), 7 to Off (down). 7. Attention: Logic voltages are present on the cable being removed in this step. Use caution when disconnecting all cables 6 . Unplug the cables by pulling the connector straight back from the primary power supply. Disconnect the J3 cable from the PPS.

126

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Primary Power Supply, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure

PPS 1/2

Rear View

Figure 135. Primary Power Supply Locations (S009442)

8. Disconnect the following cables from the PPS in the order shown: J7-5, J7-4, J7-3, J7-2, J7-1, J6, J4, then J2 (cable J2 is only present on PPSs in rack R2). 9. Disconnect cable J5A then J5B from the PPS. 10. Instruct the customer to switch off the circuit breaker that supplies mainline ac voltage to the power receptacle for the primary power supply you are replacing. 11. Attention: Attach a Do Not Operate tag, S229-0237, and the safety lockout padlock to the customers ac voltage circuit breaker. Refer to the Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers book. 12. Open the front cover of the 2105 rack. Disconnect the mainline power cable, for the PPS you are replacing, from the connector on the line cord bracket: v Primary Power Supply 1 8 v Primary Power Supply 2 9 Note: The mainline power cables are connected to the line cord bracket next to the PPS being removed. 2105 Model 800 rack shown. 13. Remove the mainline power cable connector mounting plate screw 10 . Remove the mounting plate 11 . Move the cable and connector so they are free of the line cord bracket.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

127

Primary Power Supply, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure

11 10
Front View

Figure 136. PPS Line Cord Bracket (S009443)

14. PPS 1 only, loosen the two cable routing bracket screws 14 and slide the bracket 15 out the rear of the frame. Move the mainline power cable so it is not behind the bracket. 15. Remove the velcro straps on the cable bracket 18 . Lift the power cables out of the bracket and move the cables aside to allow the PPS to be removed. 16. Disconnect any cable retention then push the PPS mainline power cable out the back of the 2105. 17. Remove the screw and star washer that mounts the PPS ground wire to the frame: v Primary Power Supply 1 16 v Primary Power Supply 2 13 Note: Save the screw and any star washer for reassembly.

Figure 137. PPS Line Cord Bracket (s009543)

18. Remove the four primary power supply mounting screws 17 and 19 , and the cable bracket 18 .

128

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Primary Power Supply, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure

18

17

19

Figure 138. PPS Mounting Hardware Locations (s009544)

19. Read the following Caution notice before continuing. CAUTION: This unit weighs between 32 kg (70.5 pounds) and 55 kg (121.2 pounds). Three persons are required to safely move it. Using less than three persons to move it can result in injury. (1055) Determine if a replacement cart/extension assembly came in the FRU packaging material. Does the FRU packaging contain a replacement cart/extension assembly? v Yes, remove and replace the primary power supply using the Return Procedure and cart assembly that comes with the replacement FRU. Continue with step 23 when the primary power supply has been replaced. v No, continue with the next step. Slide the primary power supply out of the frame. Locate the 2105 information label on the top corner of the right rear cover. Verify that the machine input voltage information on this label matches the voltage of the primary power supply being installed. Install the PPS into the rear of the frame. Install the four PPS mounting screws, and the cable bracket 18 . After installing the new PPS into the frame do the following: a. Set PPS switch S1 (micro-processor switch) 20 to the DIS (disable) position. b. Set PPS system power MAIN LINE circuit breaker (CB00) to Off (down). c. PPS 2 only, move the ground wire to the left side of the new PPS 12 . d. Connect the PPS ground wire to the frame using the screw and star washer. Install the mainline power cable connector into the line cord bracket. Install the mainline power cable mounting plate 11 and screw 10 . PPS 1 only, install the cable routing bracket 15 with the mainline power cable behind it. Tighten the two cable routing bracket screws 14 . Reinstall any cable retention. Connect the mainline power cable to the connector on the line cord bracket: v Primary Power Supply 1 8 v Primary Power Supply 2 9 Note: The mainline power cables are connected to the line cord bracket next to the PPS being replaced.
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

20.

21.

22. 23.

24. 25.

26.

129

Primary Power Supply, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure


27. Instruct the customer to switch on the mainline circuit breaker that supplies mainline ac voltage to the power receptacle for the primary power supply you are replacing. 28. Determine if you are replacing PPS 1 1 or PPS 2 2 : v If you are replacing PPS 1, continue with the next step. v If you are replacing PPS 2, go to 31 29. Connect cable J5B then J5A to the PPS. 30. Set the 390 V battery MASTER circuit breaker 4 to On (up). 31. Connect the following cables to the PPS in the order shown: J2 (cable J2 is only present on PPSs in rack R2), J4, J6, J7-1, J7-2, J7-3, J7-4, then J7-5. 32. Observe the pins in the J3 connector on the PPS. Are they straight? v Yes, read the Attention below and then carefully connect the J3 cable to the PPS. Do not force the connector, it should plug in easily. v No, read the Attention below. It is not recommended to attempt to straighten the pins as they may easily bend again. Replace the PPS. Attention: Logic voltages are present on the J3 cable from the other PPS. If the PPS J3 connector pins are bent and shorted when the J3 cable is being plugged, the other PPS may drop power. 33. Verify that all other circuit protectors (CB01 to CB05) are set to On (up). 34. Set the PPS system power MAIN LINE circuit breaker (CB00) to On (up). Note: When the battery circuit breaker is off, PPS 1 may display a status code of 03 or 04. Do not take any action to repair the 03 or 04 status code, continue with the replacement and verification of PPS 1. If the 03 or 04 status code is still displayed when this procedure is completed, repair the problem using MAP2470: Battery Set Detection Problem in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 book. 35. Observe the five LED indicators at the front of the PPS between the two cooling fans. Is the PWR GOOD indicator lit solid? v Yes, go to step 37. v No, go to the next step. 36. Press the operator panel Local Power switch momentarily to On (up). Note: Early levels of the PPS firmware would not automatically power on the PPS when input power was restored to the PPS. 37. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

| | | | | | | |

130

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Mainline Power Cable, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure

EN DIS SI
20

EN DIS SI

Front View
Figure 139. PPS Micro-Processor Switch Location (s009545)

Mainline Power Cable Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure rack and locate mainline power cable you will be removing: Note: The mainline power cables are connected to the line cord bracket next to the PPS they feed. 2105 Model 800 rack shown. v 2105 Model 800: Mainline power cable 1, (R1-V1-Jx.x) Mainline power cable 2, (R1-V2-Jx.x) v 2105 Expansion Enclosure: Mainline power cable 1, (R2-V1-Jx.x) Mainline power cable 2, (R2-V2-Jx.x) 1 2 1 2

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

131

Mainline Power Cable, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure

Front View

3 (2 Screws)

Figure 140. Mainline Power Cable Locations (S009444)

2. Set the 390 V battery 1 7 MASTER circuit breaker (CB, S2) 6 to Off (down), then go to step 3. 3. Do the following steps only on the mainline power cable you are replacing and the PPS it is attached to. v Mainline power cable 1 1 , connects to PPS 1 8 v Mainline power cable 2 2 , connects to PPS 2 4 4. Press the PPS System Power MAIN LINE circuit breaker (CB00), 9 to Off (down).

9
PPS 1/2

Rear View

Figure 141. Primary Power Supply Locations (S009445)

132

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Mainline Power Cable, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure


5. Instruct the customer to switch off the circuit breaker that supplies mainline ac voltage to the power receptacle for the primary power supply you are replacing. 6. Attention: Attach a Do Not Operate tag, S229-0237, and the safety lockout padlock to the customers ac voltage circuit breaker. Refer to the Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers book. 7. Disconnect the mainline power cable from the customers AC power outlet: v Plug in connectors, you can disconnect. v Wired connection, instruct the customer to call a licensed electrician to disconnect the wired mainline power cable from the customers mainline power source. 8. Remove the two center tailgate bar mounting crews 3 and remove the bar. 9. Release the top and bottom line cord latches, then disconnect the mainline power cable 1 or 2 from the line cord bracket. 10. Remove the mainline power cable from the 2105. With some installations you may have to remove the tailgate bar for additional clearance. 11. Replace parts in the reverse order. 12. Set the customer mainline AC circuit breaker to on. 13. Set the 390 V battery MASTER circuit breaker (CB, S2) to On (up). 14. Set the PPS System Power MAIN LINE circuit breaker (CB00) to On (up). Note: When the battery circuit breaker is off, PPS 1 may display a status code of 03 or 04. Do not take any action to repair the 03 or 04 status code, continue with the replacement and verification of PPS 1. If the 03 or 04 status code is still displayed when this procedure is completed, repair the problem using MAP2470: Battery Set Detection Problem in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 book. 15. Observe the five LED indicators at the front of the PPS between the two cooling fans. Is the PWR GOOD indicator lit solid? v Yes, go to step 17. v No, go to the next step. 16. Press the operator panel Local Power switch momentarily to On (up). Note: Early levels of the PPS firmware would not automatically power on the PPS when input power was restored to the PPS. 17. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

Primary Power Supply Fan Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
The primary power supply (PPS) fan is one FRU. Always replace it as a complete FRU. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

133

Primary Power Supply Fan, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure rack and locate the primary power supply fan you will be removing: 2105 Model 800 rack shown. v 2105 Model 800: Primary Power Supply 1, Fan 1, (R1-V1-F1) 1 Primary Power Supply 1, Fan 2, (R1-V1-F2) 2 Primary Power Supply 2, Fan 1, (R1-V2-F1) 3 Primary Power Supply 2, Fan 2, (R1-V2-F2) 4 v 2105 Expansion Enclosure: Primary Power Supply 1, Fan 1, (R2-V1-F1) 1 Primary Power Supply 1, Fan 2, (R2-V1-F2) 2 Primary Power Supply 2, Fan 1, (R2-V2-F1) 3 Primary Power Supply 2, Fan 2, (R2-V2-F2) 4

5
PPS 1/2
.

J8 J9

6 (2 Screws)

Front View

Figure 142. Primary Power Supply Fan Locations (s009446)

2. Do the following steps only on the primary power supply (PPS) fan you are replacing. 3. Unplug the fan from its J8 or J9 connector 5 on the PPS. 4. Observe the fan you are removing so you can mount the new fan in exactly the same position. Note the airflow and rotation arrows and the location of the fan power cable. 5. Remove the two fan mounting screws 6 and remove the fan from the PPS 6. Transfer the wire fan guard to the new fan. 7. Replace parts in the reverse order. Install the new fan with its power lead and airflow and rotation arrows in the same positions as on the fan you removed. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

134

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

390 V Battery Set, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure

390 V Battery Set Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
The 390 V battery set is one FRU. Always replace battery 1 and 2 at the same time. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the rear cover of the 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure rack and locate the 390 V battery set you will be removing: 2105 Model 800 rack shown. Attention: Both batteries in a 390 V battery set are always replaced at the same time. The FRU is always both batteries. v 2105 Model 800: 390 V Battery 1, (R1-V3) 1 390 V Battery 2, (R1-V4) 2 and v 2105 Expansion Enclosure: 390 V Battery 1, (R2-V3) 1 390 V Battery 2, (R2-V4) 2 and

(R1- )

4 (4 Screws)
Battery 2

5 (4 Screws)
Battery 1

2
Rear View
Figure 143. 390 V Battery Set Locations (s009447)

2. Do the following procedures only on the 2105 with the battery set you are replacing. 3. Disconnect any cable fastened to the rear cable routing brackets 6 and 9 .

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

135

390 V Battery Set, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure


4. Loosen the two cable routing bracket screws 7 and 8 on each bracket, and slide the brackets 6 and 9 out the rear of the frame.

Figure 144. Cable Routing Bracket Removal (S008250m)

5. On 390 V battery set 1, set the BATTERY MASTER circuit breaker (CB06) 3 to Off (down). Note: On early batteries, CB06 is labeled S2. 6. Read the following DANGER notice before continuing: DANGER Greater than 300 V dc present on the bulk P.S. to 390 V battery cable connector. To prevent a possible electrical shock, always disconnect this cable at the bulk power supply Battery Power connector before servicing the 390 V battery. (1011) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of the Volume 3. Attention: When removing the battery, always disconnect J5A first, then J5B. When installing the battery always connect J5B first, then J5A. a. Disconnect the 390 V battery set 1 cable from PPS 1 connector J5A 13 . b. Disconnect the 390 V battery set 1 cable from PPS 1 connector J5B 12 . c. Press the PPS 1 system power MAIN LINE circuit breaker (CB00) 11 , to off (down). d. Disconnect the PPS 1 to PPS 2 communication cable from PPS 1 connector J3 10 .

136

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

390 V Battery Set, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure

J3

10
PPS 1

CB00

11

13
J5A

12
J5B

Rear View
Figure 145. PPS 1, 390 V Battery Set Connector (s009448)

7. Disconnect the cable between battery set 1 (J2) 20 and battery set 2 (J1) 23 . 8. Read the following Caution notice before continuing: CAUTION: Each of the 390 V batteries in the battery set weighs >45 kg (>100 pounds). Two or more persons are required to safely move it. Using less than two persons to move it can result in injury. (1059) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of the Volume 3. 9. Remove screws 4 and 5 to remove and replace the 390 V batteries. Replace one battery at a time, using the Return Procedure and cart assembly that comes with the replacement FRUs. Continue with the next step when both batteries have been replaced. 10. Locate the Date of First Charge label. a. Before installing the 390 V battery set, look for the Date of First Charge label under the right handle 14 of each set of batteries. Each 390 V battery set has information on a Date of First Charge label that needs to be entered into the functional code whenever batteries are replaced. Record the date indicated on this label. b. If the label is not under the handle, it may be on the top cover of the battery. c. Information from labels other than the Date of First Charge label should only be used when this label is missing. Note: The 390V Battery FRU initial charge date must be entered so that a battery end of life problem will be correctly generated. The service login FRU replacement process should prompt you to enter the date. If you are not prompted, use the Main Service Menu, Utility Menu, Battery Menu, Update Battery Initialization Date option.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

137

390 V Battery Set, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure

(12D) Date of First Charge (Year Month Day):19990214

Figure 146. Date of First Charge Label (S009205)

14
Figure 147. Date of First Charge Label Location (s009582)

| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

11. Dispose of the battery set by returning it to IBM: This product contains a SEALED LEAD BATTERY. The BATTERY MUST BE RECYCLED. Attention: The 2105 390 V battery set assembly contains lead-acid-gel rechargeable batteries. Whenever the 390 V battery set assembly is replaced, the used battery set assembly must be returned to IBM by following the instructions that are shipped with the new battery set assembly. 12. Replace parts in the reverse order. 13. Set the customer mainline AC circuit breaker to on. 14. Set the 390 V battery MASTER circuit breaker (CB, S2) to On (up). 15. Set the PPS System Power MAIN LINE circuit breaker (CB00) to On (up). Note: When the battery circuit breaker is off, PPS 1 may display a status code of 03 or 04. Do not take any action to repair the 03 or 04 status code, continue with the replacement and verification of PPS 1. If the 03 or 04 status code is still displayed when this procedure is completed, repair the problem using MAP2470: Battery Set Detection Problem in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 book. 16. Observe the five LED indicators at the front of the PPS between the two cooling fans. Is the PWR GOOD indicator lit solid? v Yes, go to step 18. v No, go to the next step. 17. Press the operator panel Local Power switch momentarily to On (up). Note: Early levels of the PPS firmware would not automatically power on the PPS when input power was restored to the PPS. 18. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

138

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Operator Panel,2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure

Operator Panel Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure and locate the operator panel card you will be removing. v 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure: UEPO operator panel card, (R1-L1) 1 ON / OFF operator panel card, (R1-L2) 2 2. The entire subsystem must be powered off to replace the UEPO or ON/OFF operator panel card, see Rack, Subsystem Power On and Off Procedures, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure on page 124. 3. Turn the screw on the operator panel until it releases, then open the gate. 4. Pull the operator panel gate pins and move the operator panel to the vertical (shipping) position. 5. Release the three retaining clips and remove the cover from the rear of the operator panel. 6. Do the following steps only on the operator panel card you are replacing. 7. Disconnect all cables from rack operator panel card. 8. Press out on the clips that hold the operator panel card until the card is free. Remove the operator panel card from the housing.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

139

Operator Panel,2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure


(R1- )

LOCAL
L/R SWITCH

REMOTE

1
Clips

Front View

Rear View

Figure 148. 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure Rack Operator Panel Removal (s009449)

9. Replace parts in the reverse order. Note: After the repair is complete: a. Set the UEPO switch on the 2105 operator panel to On (up). b. Locate the hidden local/remote (L/R) switch on the back side of the UEPO operator panel card. Set the switch to the same position as it was on the original card. Set the switch by pulling up on it and moving it to the left (local) or right (remote) position. c. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

Rack Power Control Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800
The rack power control card is one FRU. Always replace it as a complete FRU. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the rear cover of the 2105 rack and locate the rack power control card you will be removing: v 2105 Model 800: Rack power control-1 card, RPC-1 (R1-G1) 1 Rack power control-2 card, RPC-2 (R1-G2) 2

140

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Rack Power Control Card, 2105 Model 800


Note: For concurrent repairs, remove and replace only one rack power control (RPC) card at a time.

(R1-)
1

Rear View

Figure 149. Rack Power Control Card Locations (s009401)

2. Set the Power Select switches 3 on both RPC switch cards to the Local position (down). Note: This will prevent any power disruptions during service. Do the following steps only on the RPC card you are replacing. Attention: Logic voltages are present on the cable being removed in this step. Use caution when disconnecting all cables. Disconnect the RPC power cable connector J2-6 first 5 . Disconnect the following cables, if present, from the J2- connectors 5 in the following order: J2-5 (if Expansion Enclosure is present), J2-3, J2-8, J2-9, J2-10, J2-11, J2-13, J2-14, and J2-15. Disconnect the operator panel cable connector RPC-J1 4 . Loosen the two bottom RPC card mounting screws 7 , then remove the two top mounting screws 6 and 9 . Lift the rack power control card 8 out of the rack.

3. 4.

5.

6. 7.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

141

Rack Power Control Card, 2105 Model 800

4 9
J1 RPC - 1

5 6
J2
SEE SERVICE MANUAL FOR USE OF SWITCHES

CL1 POWER

CL2 POWER

7
Figure 150. Rack Power Control Card Removal (s009402)

8. Remove the nine RPC card stiffener mounting screws 11 from the back of the RPC card. Remove the card 12 from the metal stiffener 10 .
Address Switches 0 1 1 0 1 2 0 1 3 0 1 4 1 5 0 1 6 0 0 1

10
(9 Screws)

RPC-1 Card

11

13

RPC-2 Card

14 12
Figure 151. Rack Power Control Card Replacement (s009403)

9. Install the new RPC card 12 onto the metal stiffener 10 . 10. Install the RPC card assembly into the rack. 11. Set the address switches 13 or 14 on the new RPC card to the same positions as they were on the old card. 12. Connect the following cables, if present, to the RPC card in the following order: J2-5 (if Expansion Enclosure is present), J2-3, J2-8, J2-9, J2-10, J2-11, J2-13, J2-14, J2-15, J1, and always last J2-6. 13. Reconnect the operator panel cable connector RPC-J1 4 . 14. Attention: Logic voltages are present on the cables being connected in this step. Use caution when connecting these cables. Connect these cables by pushing the cable connector straight into the RPC card connector until it is firmly seated. 15. Set the Power Select switches 4 on both RPC cards to the same position they were in before FRU replacement. 16. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

142

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

RPC Switch Card, 2105 Model 800

RPC Switch Card (Local and Remote) Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800
The RPC local and remote switch card is one FRU. Always replace it as a complete FRU. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the rear cover of the 2105 rack and locate the RPC local and remote switch card you will be removing: Note: There are two types of RPC switch cards: local and remote. v If no remote power control card is installed (without FC 1011), two RPC local switch cards are installed. v If a remote power control card is installed (with FC 1011), two RPC remote switch cards are installed. Always replace the switch card with the same type of card, local or remote, that was removed. v 2105 Model 800: Local power control, no remote power control card (without FC 1011) - RPC-1 local switch card, RPC 1 (R1-G5) 1 - RPC-2 local switch card, RPC 2 (R1-G6) 2 Remote power control, with remote power control card (with FC 1011) - RPC-1 remote switch card, RPC 1 (R1-G3) 3 - RPC-2 remote switch card, RPC 2 (R1-G4) 4 Note: For concurrent repairs, remove and replace only one RPC switch card at a time.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

143

RPC Switch Card, 2105 Model 800


(R1- )

Rear View
CL1 POWER CL1 POWER

CL2 POWER

CL2 POWER

POWER SELECT 2

POWER SELECT 1

POWER SELECT 2

POWER SELECT 1

2
(R1-G6)

RPC Local Switch Cards

1
(R1-G5)

4
(R1-G4)

RPC Remote Switch Cards

3
(R1-G3)

Figure 152. RPC Switch Card Locations (s009398)

2. Set the LOCAL and REMOTE or AUTO switch 5 on both RPC switch cards to the LOCAL position (down). Note: This will prevent any power disruptions during service. 3. Do the following steps only on the RPC switch card you are replacing and its RPC card. 4. Attention: Logic voltages are present on the cable being removed in this step. Use caution when disconnecting all cables. Unplug the cables by pulling the connector straight out of their sockets. v RPC-1 switch card: Disconnect cable J2-3 6 from RPC-1 card Disconnect all cables from the RPC-1 switch card 8 and if present 9 v RPC-2 switch card: Disconnect cable J2-3 7 from RPC-2 card. Disconnect all cables from the RPC-2 switch card 11 and if present 10

144

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

RPC Switch Card, 2105 Model 800


Top View J2 Connectors RPC-1 2105 Model 800
RPC-1 Card
J2

16

1 RPC-2 2

15

6
16

RPC-2 Card

J2

15

11
Rear View

8 9

RPC-2 Switch Card

RPC-1 Switch Card

10

Figure 153. RPC Switch Card Cable Locations (s009457)

5. Pinch the top and bottom tabs of the RPC switch card cover in 12 and remove the cover.

12

FR

ON

RE

AR

Figure 154. RPC Switch Card and Cover Removal (s009400)

6. Remove the two RPC switch card mounting screws 13 , then remove the card 14 .

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

145

RPC Switch Card, 2105 Model 800

13 (2 screws)

14
Figure 155. RPC Switch Card Removal (s009458)

7. Replace the parts in the reverse order: v Set the Power Select switches 5 on the new RPC switch card to the LOCAL position (down). Note: This will prevent any power disruptions during service. v Attention: Logic voltages are present on the cables being connected in this step. Use caution when connecting these cables. Connect these cables by pushing the cable connector straight into the RPC switch card connector until it is firmly seated. Connect the RPC and RPC switch card cables as follows: RPC-1 switch card: - Connect all cables to RPC-1 switch card - Connect cable J2-3 to RPC-1 switch card RPC-2 switch card: - Connect all cables to RPC-2 switch card - Connect cable J2-3 to RPC-2 switch card v Set the LOCAL and REMOTE or AUTO switches on both RPC switch card to the same position they were in before replacement. v When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

146

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Remote Power Control Card, 2105 Model 800

Remote Power Control Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 rack and locate the remote power control card you will be removing: v 2105 Model 800: Remote power control card, (R1-G3) 1

(R1- )

2 3 1

Front View
Figure 156. Remote Power Control Card (s009450)

2. Open the rear cover of the 2105 Model 800. Set the local/remote switches on both RPC cards to the local position, 4 in Figure 149 on page 141. 3. Disconnect all cables, and their ground jumpers, from the remote power control card. 4. Remove the remote power control card mounting screw 2 . 5. Remove the remote power control card 3 from the rack. 6. Replace parts in the reverse order. Set the local/remote switches on both RPC cards to their original positions. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

147

Storage Cage Power Supply, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure

Storage Cage Power Supply Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
The storage cage power supply is one FRU. Always replace it as a complete FRU. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 rack and locate the storage cage power supply you will be removing: v 2105 Model 800: Storage cage 1 and 2: - Storage cage 1 and 2, power supply 1, (R1-Q1-V1) 1 - Storage cage 1 and 2, power supply 2, (R1-Q1-V2) 2 - Storage cage 1 and 2, power supply 3, (R1-Q1-V3) 3 - Storage cage 1 and 2, power supply 4, (R1-Q1-V4) 4 - Storage cage 1 and 2, power supply 5, (R1-Q1-V5) 5 - Storage cage 1 and 2, power supply 6, (R1-Q1-V6) 6

(R1- )

(R1-Q1-Vx)

1 2 3 4 5 6

Rear View

Figure 157. Storage Cage Power Supply Locations (s009451)

v 2105 Expansion Enclosure: Storage cage 1 and 2: - Storage cage 1 and 2, power supply 1, (R2-Q1-V1) 7 - Storage cage 1 and 2, power supply 2, (R2-Q1-V2) 8 - Storage cage 1 and 2, power supply 3, (R2-Q1-V3) 9 - Storage cage 1 and 2, power supply 4, (R2-Q1-V4) 10 - Storage cage 1 and 2, power supply 5, (R2-Q1-V5) 11

148

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Storage Cage Power Supply, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
- Storage cage 1 and Storage cage 3 and 4: - Storage cage 3 and - Storage cage 3 and - Storage cage 3 and - Storage cage 3 and - Storage cage 3 and 2, power supply 6, (R2-Q1-V6) 12 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, power power power power power supply supply supply supply supply 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, (R2-Q2-V1) (R2-Q2-V2) (R2-Q2-V3) (R2-Q2-V4) (R2-Q2-V5) 13 14 15 16 17

- Storage cage 3 and 4, power supply 6, (R2-Q2-V6) 18

(R2-Q1-Vx)

7
2105 Expansion Enclosure

8 9 10 11 12
(R2-Q2-Vx)

19 35 40

13 14 15 16
Rear View

21

20

17 18

Figure 158. Storage Cage Power Supply Locations (s009534)

2. Do the following steps only on the storage cage power supply you are replacing. 3. Set the storage cage power supply switch 20 to off (down). 4. Disconnect all of the cables from the storage cage power supply. 5. Remove the two storage cage power supply mounting screws 19 . 6. Pull the power supply latch handle 21 up, then slide the storage cage power supply out of the rack. Note: The handle should be in the released (up) position when installing the power supply. 7. Replace parts in the reverse order. Attention: The storage cage power supply switch 20 must be set to off (down) before the new supply is installed. 8. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

| | |

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

149

Storage Cage Fan, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure

Storage Cage Fan (Top) Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
The storage cage fan is one FRU. Always replace it as a complete FRU. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the front or rear cover of the 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure and locate the storage cage fan you will be removing: See Figure 159 on page 151. Note: Storage cage fans are not installed in 2105 Model 800 positions: 2 , 5 , 8 , and 11 . v 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure (Top Fans): Storage cage 1 (U1): Storage Storage Storage Storage cage cage cage cage 1 1 1 1 fan fan fan fan 1, 2, 3, 4, front (R1-, R2-U1-F1) front (R1-, R2-U1-F2) front (R1-, R2-U1-F3) rear (R1-, R2-U1-F4) 1 2 3 4

- Storage cage 1 fan - Storage cage 1 fan Storage cage 2 (U2): - Storage cage 2 fan - Storage cage 2 fan - Storage cage 2 fan - Storage cage 2 fan

5, rear (R1-, R2-U1-F5) 5 6, rear (R1-, R2-U1-F6) 6 1, 2, 3, 4, front (R1-, R2-U2-F1) front (R1-, R2-U2-F2) front (R1-, R2-U2-F3) rear (R1-, R2-U2-F4) 7 8 9 10

- Storage cage 2 fan 5, rear (R1-, R2-U2-F5) 11 - Storage cage 2 fan 6, rear (R1-, R2-U2-F6) 12

150

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Storage Cage Fan, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure

Storage Cage 1 (U1) F4 F5 F6

Storage Cage 2 (U2) F4 F5 F6 Top F1 F2 F3 View

(R1- )

(R2- )
F1 F2 F3

Front

Front View

Front View

Figure 159. Storage Cage Fan Locations (s009193)

2. Perform the following steps only on the storage cage fan you are replacing. 3. Disconnect the fans power connector 13 from the 2105. 4. Press the storage cage fan latch 14 up, and pull the fan out of the 2105. Attention: Do not remove a fan unless you have a new fan ready to install immediately. Rack cooling is reduced while the fan is removed.

13 14
Figure 160. Storage Cage Fan Replacement (s009549)

5. Replace parts in the reverse order. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

Storage Cage Fan (Center) Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
The storage cage fan is one FRU. Always replace it as a complete FRU. Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure.
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

151

Storage Cage Fan (Center), 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Do not power off the 2105 Model 800 to replace this FRU, unless instructed to by the next level of support. 1. Open the cover of the 2105 rack and locate the storage cage fan you will be removing: Note: Open the operator panel gate in front of the storage cage fans. v 2105 Model 800: Storage cage 1, fan 1, (R1-Q1-F1) 1 Storage cage 1, fan 2, (R1-Q1-F2) 2 v 2105 Expansion Enclosure: Storage cage 1, fan 1, (R2-Q1-F1) 3 Storage cage 1, fan 2, (R2-Q1-F2) 4 Storage cage 2, fan 1, (R2-Q2-F1) 5 Storage cage 2, fan 2, (R2-Q2-F2) 6

(R1- )

(R2- )

Front View

Front View

Figure 161. Storage Cage Fan (Center) Locations (s009194)

2. Perform the following steps only on the storage cage fan you are replacing. Note: If you are replacing a storage cage 1 fan, open the operator panel gate for access. 3. Disconnect the fans power connector from the top of the storage cage power planar: v Fan 1 (J43 FAN TOP), 8 v Fan 2 (J44 FAN BOTTOM), 7

152

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Storage Cage Fan (Center), 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
Note: 2105 Model 800 frame shown. 4. Release any cable ties holding the fan power cable. 5. Observe the fan you are removing so you can mount the new fan in exactly the same position. Note the airflow and rotation arrows and the location of the fan power cable. 6. Remove the two fan mounting screws 9 or 10 , and remove the fan from the 2105.

7
J44 FAN BOTTOM

8
J43 FAN TOP

FAN 1

FAN 2

10

Front View
Figure 162. Storage Cage Fan (Center) Replacement (s009452)

7. Transfer the wire fan guard to the new fan. 8. Replace parts in the reverse order. Install the new fan with its power lead and airflow and rotation arrows in the same positions as on the fan you removed. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

Storage Cage Power Planar Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. 1. Instruct the system operator to vary all of the devices in the subsystem offline. 2. Inform the customer that the complete storage facility subsystem will be unavailable.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

153

Storage Cage Power Planar, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
3. Locate the subsystem operator panel on the front of the 2105 Model 800 for the subsystem you are powering off.
2105 Model 800 Unit Emergency

Local Power

Ready Cluster 1 Cluster 2 Power Complete Line Cord 1 Line Cord 2 Messages Cluster 1 Cluster 2 Front View

Front View

Figure 163. 2105 Model 800 Operator Panel Location (s009423)

4. Set the Local Power switch to Off (down). Note: When the subsystem is powered off, it goes into a power standby mode. In power standby mode, both primary power supplies are active and supply power to the RPC cards and operator panel switches. 5. Wait for the Power Complete indicators for Line Cords 1 and 2 to go off. 6. Open the front cover of the 2105 rack and locate the storage cage power planar you will be removing: v 2105 Model 800: Storage cage power planar 1, (R1-Q1-P1) 1 v 2105 Expansion Enclosure: Storage cage power planar 1, (R2-Q1-P1) 2 Storage cage power planar 2, (R2-Q2-P1) 3

154

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Storage Cage Power Planar, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure

(R1- )

(R2- )

Front View

Front View

Figure 164. Storage Cage Power Planar Locations (s009197)

7. Do the following steps only on the storage cage assemblies associated with the planar you are removing. 8. Go to the rear of the 2105 and locate the storage cage power supplies, plugged into the rear of the storage cage power planar. See Storage Cage Power Supply Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure on page 148. Note: All of the storage cage power supplies may not be installed. Unplug all of the storage cage power supplies from the storage cage planar. Follow the storage cage power supply removal instructions on Storage Cage Power Supply Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure on page 148. Do not completely remove the power supplies from the 2105, pull them out only about 5 cm (2 inches). 9. Locate the storage cage fan/power sense card, 1 , 2 , or 3 in Figure 169 on page 158, mounted just above the top storage cage power supply you just unplugged. Remove the storage cage fan/power sense card, see Storage Cage Fan/Power Sense Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and 2105 Expansion Enclosure on page 157. 10. Go to the front of the 2105 and locate the storage cage fan plate 8 in front of the power planar you are removing. Note: If you are replacing a storage cage power planar 1, open the operator panel gate for access. Disconnect both fan power connectors 4 and 6 from the top of the power planar. 11. Loosen the two left fan plate mounting screws 5 then remove the two right fan plate mounting screws 7 . Remove the storage cage fan plate 8 from the 2105.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

155

Storage Cage Power Planar, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure

6 7
(2 Screws)

5
Front View (2 Screws)

Figure 165. Storage Cage Fan Plate Removal (s009453)

12. Loosen the three right and left power cage bracket mounting screws 12 and 15 . Remove both power cage brackets. 13 and 16 .

Figure 166. Storage Cage Power Planar Removal (S008084m)

13. Disconnect all of the storage cage fan connectors from the top of the storage cage power planar 9 . If any fans are not installed, there will be fan jumper plugs on the unused fan connectors. Transfer these jumper plugs to the same connector positions on the new storage cage power planar. 14. Disconnect all of the storage cage DDM bay power cable connectors 10 and 11 from the power planar. Note: You may have to access the power planar to DDM bay power cables by reaching in through the DDM bay bay opening 17 . You can reach into an unused DDM bay position, or remove the right and left DDM bays

156

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Storage Cage Power Planar, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
that give you the best access to the cables and connectors. See Frame Assembly Removal and Replacement, DDM Bay on page 14.

Figure 167. Power Planar to DDM Bay Power Cable Access (s008085l)

Front
Figure 168. Power Planar to DDM Bay Power Cable Details (s009460)

15. Remove the 13 storage cage power planar mounting screws 14 then remove the planar. 16. Replace parts in the reverse order. Notes: a. Make sure that all cables are connected to their original positions and are firmly seated. b. When you have completed this procedure, power the 2105 subsystem on. After the subsystem has powered on completely, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

Storage Cage Fan/Power Sense Card Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and 2105 Expansion Enclosure
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure.

FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

157

Storage Cage Fan/Power Sense Card, 2105 Model 800 and 2105 Expansion Enclosure
Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. 1. Open the rear cover of the 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure and locate the storage cage fan/power sense card you will be removing: v 2105 Model 800: Storage cage fan/power sense card 1, (R1-Q1-C1) 1 v 2105 Expansion Enclosure: Storage cage fan/power sense card 1, (R2-Q1-C1) 2 Storage cage fan/power sense card 1, (R2-Q2-C1) 3

(R1- )

(R2- )

1 2
Storage Cage Fan/Power Sense Card

3 4

Rear View

Rear View

Figure 169. Storage Cage Fan/Power Sense Card Locations (s009454)

2. Do the following steps only on the storage cage fan/power sense card you are replacing. 3. Loosen the two fan/power sense card screws 4 until they are free. 4. Pull the storage cage fan/power sense card out. Do NOT plug the new sense card in. Note: The card is plugged into the rear of the storage cage power planar. Do NOT plug the new sense card in. 5. Check if there is an external jumper or cable plugged into the sense card you just removed. If there are, connect them to the same position on the new sense card before plugging the card into the 2105 Model 800. 6. Replace parts in the reverse order. Note: When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

158

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Cables, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure

Cable Removals and Replacements, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure
Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. Customer disruption may occur if microcode and power boundaries are not in the proper conditions for this service action. Ensure that you start all service activities in Entry MAP for All Service Actions in chapter 2 of Volume 1. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Attention: To prevent electrostatic discharge, ensure you discharge all SCSI host cables to the ESD discharge pad, before you plug them into the 2105 Model 800. The ESD discharge pads are mounted on the front right and left corners of the 2105 Model 800 frame, next to each tailgate. See Figure 131 on page 123 for the location of the ESD discharge pads. This procedure removes and replaces the following 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure cables: v PPS to Elec Cage PS Cable (R1-Vx-J7x.x) v PPS to 390 V Battery Cable (Rx-Vx-J3.x) v 390 V Battery 1 to 2 Cable (Rx-Vx-Jx.x) v RPC to Operator Panel Cable (R1-Gx-Jx.x) v Primary P.S. to EPO Panel Cable (R1-G1-Jx.x) RPC Interconnect Cable (R1-G1-J6.x) RPC to Electronics Cage Cable (R1-Gx-J3.x) Storage Cage Fan Cable Assembly (Rx-Ux-P1-Jx) Power Planar to DDM Bay Planar Cable (Rx-Qx-P1/Jx) SCSI Cable (R1-Bx-Hx/ZA.x) CPI Local Cable (R1Tx-P2Ix/JB.1) Lower IOA connector (Read the Attention: at the end of this list.) v CPI Remote Cable (R1Tx-P2Ix/JA.1) Upper IOA connector (Read the Attention: at the end of this list.) v SSA Device Cables (Rx-Bww-Kx), go to page 17 v Mainline Power Cables (Rx-Vx-Jx.x), go to page 131 v v v v v v Attention: To prevent damage to the I/O attachment card connectors, use caution when re-installing the CPI cables. The CPI cable connectors should be inserted, as straight as possible, into the connectors on the I/O attachment cards. The screws on the CPI cable connectors should only be tightened finger-tight, do not use a screwdriver to tighten. Note: The CPI cable connector can be easily damaged during a FRU replacement. Temporarily use a velcro cable tie to secure the loose cable end where it will not be damaged. The velcro cable tie can be removed from elsewhere on the 2105. Return the tie when finished. 1. Open the rear cover of the 2105 Model 800. Set the local/remote switches on both RPC cards to the local position, 3 in Figure 149 on page 141. 2. Get the 2105 parts catalog, Enterprise Storage Serve Parts Catalog 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure book, S127-0977.
FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures, CHAPTER 4

159

Cables, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure


a. Look up the 2105 cable you are replacing in the parts catalog. b. Use the parts catalog to locate the cable in the 2105, where it connects, and how it is routed. 3. Open the front or rear cover of the 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure rack and find the cable you are replacing. 4. Disconnect the cables connectors. Attention: Failure to follow this attention could result in multiple, unnecessary power supply replacements. When replacing any power cables that attach to the rear of a primary power supply (PPS), observe the following rules: v Disconnect the PPS end of the cable first when removing the cable. v Attach the PPS end of the cable last when installing the cable. 5. Remove cable retention, tailgate hardware, and tailgate cable clamps as required: Attention: Carefully note the routing and retention of the cable you are removing, so you can position it correctly during the replacement. v 2105 Model 800, see 2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation on page 316 v 2105 Expansion Enclosure, does not have a tailgate Note: When replacing an individual storage cage fan cable, cut the cable bundle ties and remove the cable being replaced from the cable bundle. 6. Remove the cable from the 2105. 7. Replace parts in the reverse order. Reinstall cable retention, cable ties, and tailgate hardware. (CPI cables only, read the Attention: at the end of this step.) Note: Before replacing an individual storage cage fan cables, fill out and install a connector location label on both ends of the cable. These labels come with the new cable. Attention: To prevent damage to the I/O attachment card connectors, use caution when re-installing the CPI cables. The CPI cable connectors should be inserted, as straight as possible, into the connectors on the I/O attachment cards. The screws on the CPI cable connectors should only be tightened finger-tight, do not use a screwdriver to tighten. 8. Set the local/remote switches on both RPC cards to their original positions. After the replacement, press the operator panel Local Power switch momentarily to On (up). Note: Pressing the Local Power switch clears power error conditions that have been repaired, it does not affect 2105 power. 9. When you have completed this procedure, continue the repair by returning to the service guide or service terminal procedure that sent you here.

160

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Chapter 5: Install and Remove


Note: 2105 Model 750 information v The 2105 Model 750 is fully supported by the service information in this chapter when following guided procedures. However, the service information will only reference the 2105 Model 800. v The 2105 Model 750 supports limited configuration options when compared to the 2105 Model 800. For further information, reference the IBM TotalStorage ESS Introduction and Planning Guide manual, (form number SC267246).
Table 8. Install and Remove Entries If you are here to: Install the 2105 Subsystem, 2105 Model 800 and 2105 Expansion Enclosure Install the ESSNet ( Master Console or ESSNet 1 ) Go to: Installing and Testing the 2105 Subsystem on page 162 Begin Installation and Connection to the ESSNet on page 220 Entry for 2105 Expansion Enclosure with 2105 Model 800 on page 264 Entry for 2105 Expansion Enclosure MES on page 264 Installing a DDM Bay on page 330 2105 Model 800 DDM Bay Installation with FC 0970 on page 343 2105 Expansion Enclosure DDM Bay Installation with FC 0970 on page 347 Installing a Host Card on page 350 Removing a Host Card on page 359 Relocating a 2105 Model 800 Subsystem on page 363 Installing a Relocated 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure Subsystem on page 377 Discontinuing a 2105 Model 800 Subsystem on page 386 Test Master Console Configuration and Communication Status on page 388 Duplicating the Configuration of a 2105 ESS Subsystem on page 391

Install the 2105 Expansion Enclosure

Install the 2105 Expansion Enclosure using an MES Install a DDM bay Install a DDM bay (Model 800) with FC 0970

Install a DDM bay (Expansion Enclosure) with FC 0970

Install a Host Card Remove a Host Card Relocate a 2105 Subsystem Install a Relocated 2105 Subsystem

Discontinue a 2105 Subsystem Test Master Console Configuration and Communication Status

Duplicating the Configuration of a 2105 ESS Subsystem

Copyright IBM Corp. 2004, 2005

161

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

Installing and Testing the 2105 Subsystem


These instructions assume that you have access to completed worksheets: v Preinstallation planning and subsystem communication configuration information from the Communication Resources Worksheets found in the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server Introduction and Planning Guide manual, form number GC26-7444. v Logical configuration information from the Configuration Worksheets found in either the IBM Enterprise Storage Server Configuration Planner for S/390 and eServer zSeries manual, form number SC26-7476 or IBM Enterprise Storage Server Configuration Planner for Open-System manual, form number SC26-7477

162

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

2105 Model 800 Installation Process and Checkpoints


The following flowchart provides an overview of the ESS Install process separated into six installation phases and a Code Load phase.

2105 Model 800 Installation Process w/o ISA


(Service code 20) PHASE 1 Pre-checks, physical positioning, safety checks and switch settings

2105 Model 800 Installation Process with ISA


(Service code 20) PHASE 1 Pre-checks, physical positioning, safety checks and switch settings

PHASE 2 Power on, enter basic Install information (TCP/IP, date/time etc) and reboot

PHASE 2 Power on, enter basic Install information (TCP/IP, date/time etc) and reboot

PHASE 3 Install ESSNet, hub, modem. Configure master console and backup. Configure 2105 customer options, connect ESSNet to customer network and activate LIC features Test call home /Retain Configure copy services,

PHASE 3 Install ESSNet, hub, modem. Configure master console and backup. Configure 2105 customer options, connect ESSNet to customer network and activate LIC features Test call home /Retain Configure copy services,

LOAD LATEST CODE (as required) Install Latest Microcode. (Service code 33)

LOAD LATEST CODE (as required) Install Latest Microcode. (Service code 33) Start PHASE 5 in parallel

PHASE 4 Certify DDMs, Additional RETAIN testing Route/connect host cables

PHASE 4 Start 'Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration'.

PHASE 5 Additional RETAIN testing Route/connect host cables Complete Install Tracking Report Finish, Tidy up. CE leaves site. (SC20 Complete)

PHASE 5 Logical configuration

PHASE 6 Comple Install Tracking Report Finish, Tidy up.

PHASE 6 Logical config completes. ESS calls home. Support Center Inform customer / SSR of completion.

Figure 170. 2105 Model 800 Installation Process Flowchart (s009639)

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

163

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

Target Times for Installation Phases


The two following tables show target times to complete each phase of the installation based on the two different methods available: v Install without ISA, see Table 9 v Install with ISA using the Background Certify and Build Logical Config from ISA Process, see Table 10 These times assume that no significant problems are encountered and they do not include time for breaks. At the end of the install you will be asked to complete an Install report to provide feedback on the actual times taken for each phase and any problems that caused delays.
Table 9. 2105 Model 800 Install Without ISA Installation Phase 1 2 3 Model 800 Only 1 hour 15 minutes (without FC 0970) 1 hour 2 hours 30 minutes (with ESSNet) 1 hour 15 minutes (without ESSNet) Code Load (SC 33) 3 hours (AutoLIC) 1 hour (QuickLIC) 4 5 1 hour 30 minutes Batch, 1 hour 30 minutes ESS Specialist, 4 hours (Time includes Fixed Block Autoformat) 6 1 hour Model 800 with Expansion Enclosure 2 hour 15 minutes (without FC 0970) 1 hour 2 hours 30 minutes (with ESSNet) 1 hour 15 minutes (without ESSNet) 3 hours (AutoLIC) 1 hour (QuickLIC) 1 hour 30 minutes Batch, 2 hours ESS Specialist, 6 hours (Time includes Fixed Block Autoformat) 1 hour

Table 10. 2105 Model 800 Install With ISA Using the Background Certify and Build Logical Config from ISA Process Installation Phase 1 2 3 Model 800 Only 1 hour 15 minutes (without FC 0970) 1 hour 2 hours 30 minutes (with ESSNet) 1 hour 15 minutes (without ESSNet) Code Load (SC 33) 3 hours (AutoLIC) 1 hour (QuickLIC) 4 5 6 45 minutes 30 minutes 1 hour Model 800 with Expansion Enclosure 2 hour 15 minutes (without FC 0970) 1 hour 2 hours 30 minutes (with ESSNet) 1 hour 15 minutes (without ESSNet) 3 hours (AutoLIC) 1 hour (QuickLIC) 45 minutes 30 minutes 1 hour

164

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

Installation With Multiple Service Representatives


The installation of the 2105 should normally be performed by a single Service Representative (SR) since that makes best use of total SR time. In some circumstances there may be a customer requirement to minimize the installation time. Table Table 11 provides guidance on how to do that with two Service Representatives working in parallel. Both SRs should work down their separate lists, doing their checked activities, until they reach a step where they can not proceed. They should assist each other when routing cables. In summary, SR #2 should install the Expansion Enclosure, ESSNet, and run the external cables while SR #1 does the remaining activities. After SR #2 has finished all his assigned activities, he should leave SR #1 to complete the installation.
Table 11. Multiple SR Installation Activities Description of Installation Activity Before You Install the 2105 Subsystem on page 166 Begin the Physical Install of the 2105 Subsystem on page 174 to 2 on page 177 Installing and Testing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure on page 264 Checking the Customer Power on page 177 Checking the Customer Power on page 273 Checking the 2105 Model 800 Switch Settings on page 202 Checking the 2105 Expansion Enclosure Switch Settings on page 298 Setting 390 V Battery and Primary Power Supplies to On on page 206 through step 4 on page 236 Pages 166 to 174 174 to 177 264 to 273 177 to 202 273 to 298 202 to 206 298 to 305 206 to 236 U U U U U U U SR #1 Activity U U U SR #2 Activity U

Step 3 on page 221 through Call Home Settings on 221 to 233 page 232 Serial Port Configuration, Master Console to Cluster on page 233 through Certify DDMs on page 252 Routing Host System cables and Connecting the 2105 Model 800 to the Host System on page 254 Completing the Installation of the 2105 on page 251 through Finish the Install on page 259 233 to 253

254 to 257 251 to 259 U

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

165

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

Before You Install the 2105 Subsystem


START OF INSTALL PHASE 1:

Start of Install Phase 1:


This section verifies the following: v Communication and Configuration worksheets are available and completed v LIC code levels v Customer preparation (installation planning) v Unpack 2105 and check ship group v Do safety check and shipping damage check v Label and route external cables __ 1. You must use one of the following methods to install the 2105 subsystem: v If you are familiar with procedures listed in Table 12, you can use the table as a checklist and source of further reference information. v If you are not familiar with the procedures, continue with Checking Communications Worksheets on page 168. Note: If you are also installing a 2105 Expansion Enclosure, do the following procedures for both racks.
Table 12. Before You Install the 2105 Subsystem Step Required Preparations for Install (For 2105 Model 800 and 2105 Expansion Enclosure) If the customer requires IBM Service to build the logical configuration. Verify that you have been provided with either an ISA diskette or the Logical Configuration Worksheets. Verify that you have been provided with properly filled out Communications Worksheets. For Reference Information, Go to: Checking Availability of Logical Configuration Information on page 168

__ 2.

__ 3.

Checking Communications Worksheets on page 168

__ 4.

You must fill out the service representative Worksheet Fields to be Completed fields on the worksheets from step 2 by Service Representative on page above in this table. 169 Determine if there is a required level of microcode available for your 2105 Model 800 by visiting the Shark Engineering Website: http://snjlnt01.sanjose.ibm.com/ lez9/SharkPE.nsf/wvhome. If there is, use the reference information for this step. v Checking for Required Microcode on page 169 and

__ 5.

__ 6.

Check if LIC features have been ordered for this machine.

Check On ViewBlue If LIC Features Have Been Ordered For This Machine on page 170

__ 7.

Check RETAIN for 2105 Model 800 Install Check RETAIN for 2105 Model 800 Tips Install Tips on page 171

166

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


Table 12. Before You Install the 2105 Subsystem (continued) Step __ 8. Required Preparations for Install (For 2105 Model 800 and 2105 Expansion Enclosure) Verify that the customer has: For Reference Information, Go to:

Checking Customer Preparation v AC power from two different sources for on page 171 each rack being installed. v Raised floor can support the weight: 2105 Model 800, maximum 1204 kilograms (2650 pounds) 2105 Model 800 and 2105 Expansion Enclosure, maximum 2545 kilograms (5600 pounds)

v Correct cooling airflow and temperature v Host system connection cables (SCSI, ESCON, or Fibre) v Ethernet LAN cable if attaching ESSNet console to customer network v Analog telephone line connection for Call Home/Remote Service v AC service outlet for the service terminal v AC service outlets for each ESSNet console components __ 9. v Unpack the 2105 and use the ship group parts list to verify all items were received. v Verify the cluster to cluster ethernet cable (RJ45) is installed. v Give the CUSTOMER SOFTWARE ENCLOSED envelope to the customer. Attention: If you are installing a 2105 Expansion Enclosure, do the following checks. The serial number shown on the Expansion Enclosure packaging material and the Expansion Enclosure operator panel must be the same as the 2105 Model 800. Do not continue with the installation if the serial numbers are different. __ 10. __ 11. Inspect for shipping damage. Perform the Safety Inspection if the 2105 subsystem was previously installed and not leased from or maintained by IBM. Inspect for Shipping Damage on page 173 Safety Inspection on page 174 Verify the Ship Group is Complete on page 173

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

167

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


Table 12. Before You Install the 2105 Subsystem (continued) Step __ 12. Required Preparations for Install (For 2105 Model 800 and 2105 Expansion Enclosure) Label and route the following cables as needed: v Ethernet LAN cable to ESSNet console ethernet hub location v Analog telephone line cable to the ESSNet console modem location v Utility power cords to the ESSNet console component location v Remote power control cables if customer will use the Remote Power Control feature (FC 1011) __ 13. Continue with Begin the Physical Install of the 2105 Subsystem on page 174. For Reference Information, Go to: Labeling and Routing the Cables for a 2105 Subsystem on page 174

Checking Availability of Logical Configuration Information


__ 1. To avoid delays during the install process, verify that the IBM Marketing Representative or the IBM Business Partner has worked with the customer to define the Logical Configuration. Verify that you have been provided with one of the following: a. An ISA file already copied to a diskette. b. An ISA file stored on an IBM repository which can be downloaded and copied to a DOS formatted diskette. c. Logical Configuration worksheets. For the Configuration Worksheets, refer to: v IBM Enterprise Storage Server Configuration Planner for S/390 and eServer zSeries manual, form number SC26-7476 or v IBM Enterprise Storage Server Configuration Planner for Open-System manual, form number SC26-7477 Note: The process for obtaining the ISA file or Worksheets may differ over time and between countries or geographies. Please consult the Shark Engineering Website for guidance: http://snjlnt01.sanjose.ibm.com/lez9/SharkPE.nsf/wvhome. __ 2. Continue with Checking Communications Worksheets.

Checking Communications Worksheets


__ 1. To avoid confusion and delays during the install process, verify that the IBM Marketing Representative or the IBM Business Partner has worked with the customer to fill out the Communications and Configuration Worksheets. Verify that the customer has filled out the Communication Resources Worksheets and the Configuration Worksheets for the 2105 Model 800 being installed. For the Communication Resources worksheets, refer to the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server Introduction and Planning Guide manual, form number GC26-7444. For the Configuration Worksheets, refer to:

168

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


Notes: a. This information may be provided from the ISA tool in softcopy (HTML) format. b. The process for obtaining the Worksheets or softcopy file may differ over time and between countries or geographies. Please consult the Shark Engineering Website for guidance: http://snjlnt01.sanjose.ibm.com/lez9/SharkPE.nsf/wvhome. __ 2. Continue with Worksheet Fields to be Completed by Service Representative.

Worksheet Fields to be Completed by Service Representative


__ 1. The following Communication Resource Worksheet information, must be filled in by the service representative: v Remote telephone numbers (RETAIN) Refer to the Guidelines for completing the Communications Resources work sheet in the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server Introduction and Planning Guide manual, form number GC26-7444, v Do not wait for dial tone before dialing Refer to the Guidelines for completing the Communications Resources work sheet in the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server Introduction and Planning Guide manual, form number GC26-7444, v HB and MRPD record destination Refer to of the Guidelines for completing the Communications Resources work sheet in the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server Introduction and Planning Guide manual, form number GC26-7444, v Support Catcher telephone number Refer to of the Guidelines for completing the Communications Resources work sheet in the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server Introduction and Planning Guide manual, form number GC26-7444, Note: The Modem Expander Port Information fields will be filled out during the installation of the modem and multiport serial adapter or modem expander. __ 2. Continue with Checking for Required Microcode.

Checking for Required Microcode


Attention: Determine if there is a new microcode requirement for this machine. You should order any required microcode prior to starting this installation to avoid delays in completing this installation. __ 1. Determine if there is a required level of microcode available for your 2105 Model 800 by visiting the Shark Engineering Website: http://snjlnt01.sanjose.ibm.com/lez9/SharkPE.nsf/wvhome. Note: There is a need to differentiate between required an recommended code loads. When a code level is defined by the website as required, it means that the machine must never be given to the customer without the indicated code level installed. When the website wording is recommended, it means that the SR can either: v Give the machine to the customer when the installation is complete or v Can negotiate with the customer for a more convenient time to update the microcode

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

169

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


Note: If this machine is being installed non-IBM personnel, they may not have access to the engineering website. Non-IBM installers should go through their own support structure to obtain microcode requirements. __ 2. Is there a level of microcode that is specified on the website as required for your machine? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to Check On ViewBlue If LIC Features Have Been Ordered For This Machine. __ 3. Remove the Product Feature Codes card from the CE envelope taped to the front of the 2105 Model 800. Determine if the Functional Microcode Level indicated on the Product Feature Codes card is the same as the required microcode level specified on the PE website. Is the required level of microcode already installed on your machine? v Yes, go to Check On ViewBlue If LIC Features Have Been Ordered For This Machine. v No, order the new microcode, using the instructions on the website, and then go to Check On ViewBlue If LIC Features Have Been Ordered For This Machine. Note: The required microcode must be updated after this installation is complete, using service code 33 (refer to Installing Required Microcode on page 250).

Check On ViewBlue If LIC Features Have Been Ordered For This Machine
This procedure will guide you to determine if LIC Features have been ordered for this machine and, if needed, make a LIC Feature Control diskette. Notes: 1. LIC feature diskettes may have been provided in the ship group or in a separate MES. You should always use the following procedure to download the latest version from ViewBlue. 2. The LIC Feature Control Records diskette will be used at a later time during installation configuration. Requirements: v PC with WEB Browser and diskette drive v DOS formatted 1.44 MB, 3.5 inch diskette Attention: the ESS diskette drive only reads 1.44 MB formatted diskettes that were formatted by a 1.44 MB drive. Procedure: __ 1. Bring up IBM ViewBlue with the following URL: http://w3.viewblue.ibm.com __ 2. At the IBM ViewBlue Information and Services Logon screen, do the following. a. Select your Country b. Enter your IBM employee Serial Number. c. Click the Logon box __ 3. If you get an informational screen, click on Continue. __ 4. At the IBM Public Information and Services Main Menu, do the following.

170

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


a. Scroll down to Technical b. Click FCDB - Feature Code Database __ 5. At the Feature Code Database - Main Menu screen, click on Extract Machine Data. __ 6. At the Feature Code Database - Select Machine screen, do the following: a. Select your Machine Type/Model b. Enter the two character Plant of Manufacture Code from the box serial number, for example, 13-xxxxx. 1) 13 = San Jose, USA 2) 75 = Vac, Hungary 3) 82 = Sumare, Brazil 4) 97 = Fujisawa, Japan c. Enter the five character Machine Serial Number d. Click the Submit box If a file name of FEA#####.BIN is displayed, a LIC Feature Control diskette is required. Was file name FEA#####.BIN displayed? v Yes, go to step 7. v No, continue with Checking Communications Worksheets on page 168. __ 7. At the Feature Code Database - Download Control File screen, do the following: a. Click on the Download Filename displayed in the format of FEA#####.BIN b. At the Save as... pop up screen, do the following 1) At the Save In folder, select 3.5 inch Floppy (A:) 2) Click the Save box __ 8. The file is now saved on the 3.5 inch DOS diskette. Close all browser windows. __ 9. Label the Diskette and save it for later use with Installation Configuration. __ 10. Continue with Checking Customer Preparation. Note: If you take the option to Display Model 800 Configuration on ViewBlue, you will see a unique Machine Type Model and Serial Number for each Advanced Function feature. It is normal that the serial number will be different from that of the 2105.

Check RETAIN for 2105 Model 800 Install Tips


Sign on to RETAIN, select HSF and search for 2105 Model 800 Install (n:t/p;2105 800 Install). Read the 2105 800 Install Tip and note any problems or help that is supplied. RETAIN may have information that corrects problems that are not yet addressed by the install instructions.

Checking Customer Preparation


__ 1. Verify the customer has two ac power sources for each rack in the 2105 subsystem. For maximum fault tolerance, these should be from two separate ac power sources. Note: The IBM 2105 Model 800 is designed for connection to an IT power distribution system. An IT power distribution system is one where the neutral conductor is isolated from earth (ground) by an impedance
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

171

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


with exposed conductive parts in the installation tied directly to earth. No service support representative action is needed, information is for compliance with international Electrotechnical Commission standard 950 for the safety of information technology equipment, and electrical business equipment. __ 2. When the 2105 Model 800 will be installed on a raised floor, verify the customer has adequate support. Attention: The weight of each rack should be reviewed with the customer to verify that their raised floors have adequate support: v 2105 Model 800, maximum 1204 kilograms (2650 pounds) v 2105 Expansion Enclosure, maximum 1341 kilograms (2950 pounds) v 2105 Model 800 and 2105 Expansion Enclosure, maximum 2545 kilograms (5600 pounds) __ 3. To correctly cool a 2105 Model 800, place two floor tiles that have holes for airflow, directly in the front and rear of the 2105 Model 800. Also provide tiles with holes, for cable entry, under the three front tailgates. Notes: a. The temperature operating environment requirements for 2105 are found in the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server Introduction and Planning Guide manual. b. The 2105 Model 800 rack cooling airflow comes in through the front and rear covers and leaves through the top and rear covers. The bottom of the 2105 Model 800 is sealed. __ 4. Verify that the customer has ordered and supplied the following: v SCSI host cables from the host to the 2105 host adapter. v ESCON host cables from the host to the 2105 host adapter. v Fibre host cables from the host to the 2105 host adapter. v An ethernet LAN signal cable (when used, allows the customer to connect to the ESSNet hub). v A functional analog telephone line to the ESSNet modem within 15 meters (50 feet) of the first 2105 Model 800 installed. v AC service outlet for the service terminal within 2.5 meters (8 feet) of the 2105 Model 800. v AC service outlet for each component of the ESSNet console: Master Console (uses a Multiport Serial Adapter) - Personal Computer (PC) - Monitor - Modem - Ethernet Hub ESSNet 1 (uses a Modem Expander) - PC - Monitor - Modem - Modem Expander - Ethernet Hub

172

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


Note: The ESSNet is installed with the initial ESS installation and provides service to the next six ESS subsystems installed. If an eighth ESS is installed at an account, a new ESSNet feature must be ordered. __ 5. Continue with Verify the Ship Group is Complete.

Verify the Ship Group is Complete


Place a check mark next to each completed step. __ 1. Remove the CE Unpacking Instructions from the CE envelope taped to the front of the bagged 2105 Model 800. Use the CE Unpacking Instructions to unpack the 2105 Model 800 and prepare it for installation. Attention: If you are installing a 2105 Expansion Enclosure, do the following checks. The serial number shown on the Expansion Enclosure packaging material and the Expansion Enclosure operator panel must be the same as the 2105 Model 800. Do not continue with the installation if the serial numbers are different. __ 2. Verify that all items in the ship group were received. See the parts list (B/M 18P2617) in the ship group box. __ 3. Remove the Customer Software Enclosed envelope from the ship group box and give it to the customer. This envelope contains customer documents and the host driver code diskette. __ 4. Verify that the cluster to cluster communication Ethernet (RJ45) cable, P/N 18P5211. is installed between the Ethernet 10/100 BaseT connectors on I/O drawer 1 and I/O drawer 2 1 [Figure 171]. Attention: The cluster to cluster communication Ethernet (RJ45) cable must be installed, as described, before the installation of the 2105 Model 800 can continue. Note: This cable is installed on new 2105 Model 800 subsystems shipped from IBM manufacturing. The cable may have been removed, and stored in the ship group, if the 2105 Model 800 was previously installed at another location. A standard ethernet cable will not work.

I/O Drawer 1

I/O Drawer 2

Front View

Figure 171. Cluster Communications Cable Location (S009120)

__ 5. Place the ship group parts list at the end of this manual for use during removal of the 2105 Model 800. __ 6. Continue with Inspect for Shipping Damage.

Inspect for Shipping Damage


__ 1. Inspect the 2105 Model 800 for any damage that might have occurred during shipping.
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

173

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


If you observe shipping damage or missing items, do not install the 2105 Model 800 without IBM management approval. Report all observed damage immediately, following existing procedures. __ 2. Continue with Safety Inspection.

Safety Inspection
__ 1. Perform the safety inspection if the 2105 Model 800 was previously installed and was not previously leased from IBM or maintained by IBM service support representatives. See Safety Inspection in chapter 12 of Volume 3, to perform this inspection. __ 2. Continue with Labeling and Routing the Cables for a 2105 Subsystem.

Labeling and Routing the Cables for a 2105 Subsystem


Label and route cables from their source to where the 2105 Model 800 will be positioned, using available customer-supplied labels and methods. __ 1. Label and route the customer provided Ethernet LAN cable to the ESSNet Hub location. Note: The Ethernet LAN cable is not required if the customer chooses not to connect to the ESSNet. Label and route the analog telephone line to the modem. Route the utility power cords, provided with the ESSNet feature, from the customers convenience outlets to the ESSNet components listed in step 4 on page 172. If the customer will use the Remote Power Control feature, FC 1011, label and route the cables for remote power. Continue with Begin the Physical Install of the 2105 Subsystem.

__ 2. __ 3.

__ 4. __ 5.

Begin the Physical Install of the 2105 Subsystem


This section describes positioning the 2105 Model 800 racks and preparation for customer power checks.

Position the 2105 Model 800 Rack


If you have any questions about floor loading and service clearances of the ESS racks, review the Site Requirements for the ESS section in the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server Introduction and Planning Guide manual, form number GC26-7444. CAUTION: A fully configured unit in the crate can weigh up to 1500 kilograms (3305 pounds). Using less than three persons to move it can result in injury. (1060) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3. __ 1. Verify that the new location meets the necessary service clearances for the 2105 Model 800 and any attached racks, refer to the Site Requirements for the ESS section in IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server Introduction and Planning Guide manual. __ 2. Move the 2105 Model 800 rack to its permanent location with the cutout floor tiles beneath the front tailgates of the 2105 Model 800. Position the cutouts for access to the left, center, and right tailgate areas.

174

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


__ 3. Install the wedge chocks 1 [Figure 172] (located in the ship group) on all four casters or, if caster locks are available, engage the caster locks on all casters.

Figure 172. Caster Wedge Chocks (S008406m)

__ 4. Install the decorative top hat onto the top of the 2105 Model 800: a. Lift the top hat onto the top of the 2105 Model 800, position it with IBM logo placed to the front left of the machine 2 [Figure 173]. b. Open the front and rear covers of the 2105 Model 800. c. Install the six screws (three on each side) 3 up through the holes in the frame 4 into the threaded holes in the top hat.

s008406m

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

175

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

Front

4
(6 holes)

3
(6 screws)

Front
Figure 173. Top Hat Installation (s009553)

__ 5. Unroll the mainline power cables from the ship group. __ 6. Verify that all front and rear internal power and signal cables are connected. Attention: Do not connect any external cables to the 2105 Model 800 until you are instructed to do so. __ 7. Go to the front of the 2105 Model 800. Remove the two tailgate bar mounting screws 6 [Figure 174] then remove the bar 5 . __ 8. Feed both mainline power cables down through the center of the 2105 Model 800 5 [Figure 174] to the customers power connectors. CAUTION: Do not connect the mainline power cables until instructed to do so. (1053) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3.

176

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

(2 Screws)

Front View
Figure 174. 2105 Model 800 Mainline Power Cable Installation (S009121)

__ 9. Continue with Checking for Feature Code 0970 (Weight Reduction).

Checking for Feature Code 0970 (Weight Reduction)


1. Using the Product Feature Codes card from the CE envelope taped to the front of the 2105 Model 800, determine if FC 0970 (weight reduction) was ordered for this machine. Was FC 0970 ordered? Attention: With FC 0970, DDM bays were removed during manufacturing and shipped on separate pallets to reduce the shipping weight required at the customers account. DDM bays must be reinstalled before continuing this installation. v Yes, go to 2105 Model 800 DDM Bay Installation with FC 0970 on page 343. Return to next step when all DDM bays are installed. v No, continue with the next step. 2. Continue with Checking the Customer Power.

Checking the Customer Power


DANGER Lethal voltages are present in this area of the machine. (1007) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3. The fault-tolerant system on the 2105 Model 800 has two power systems. If one power system fails, the other will supply all required power. You will perform power checks, cabling, and preparation on power system 1 and on power system 2. Always perform power safety checks with the recommended analog meter. Do not use a digital meter when you perform power checks. A digital meter is sensitive to external electrical currents on the low-range scale.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

177

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


You will need these tools to perform the power safety checks: v IBM analog ohmmeter P/N 00P7029, Mastech Model 7040 v IBM analog multimeter P/N 9900167, or a substitute meter approved by IBM for this check. v High voltage test probe tips (or equivalent): Red (P/N 1749249) Black (P/N 1749250) This section describes the power and safety checks that must be done before you power on the 2105 Model 800. v Conduct safety power checks. v Complete ac input power checks. __ 1. You must use one of the following methods to do each of the required customer power safety checks: v If you are familiar with the customer power check procedures, you can use Table 13 as a checklist and source of further reference information. v If you are not familiar with the customer power check procedures, continue with Determine Mainline Power Cable Type (Plug In or Wired) on page 179. Attention: You must do each required customer power safety check listed in Table 13. If you are unfamiliar with a required procedure, or the check fails, use the Go to: column for complete reference information and diagrams. Note: If you are also installing a 2105 Expansion Enclosure, do the following procedures for both racks.
Table 13. Checking the Customers Power Step __ 2. Required Customer Power Safety Check Procedures (for 2105 Model 800 For Reference Information, Go to: and 2105 Expansion Enclosure) Determine the Mainline Power Cable Type Determine Mainline Power Cable (Plug In or Wired). Type (Plug In or Wired) on page 179 Continue with the appropriate steps below for: v Plug In, continue with step A in this table. v Wired, continue with step B in this table.

__ A. __ 3.

Plug In - Customer Power Connections

Checking Customer Power, Plug In Mainline Power Cable on page 179

Check the ground continuity of the 2105 Check 2105 Mainline Power Cable plug in mainline power cables. Ground Continuity (Plug in) on Note: Measurement of 1.0 ohm or less is page 180 good. Check the customer receptacles ground pin voltage and continuity, with the customers CB off (plug in). Note: Voltage measurement of less than 1.0 V ac is good. Resistance measurement of 1.0 ohm or less is good. Check Customer Receptacle Ground Pin Continuity With Customer CB Off (Plug in) on page 182

__ 4.

178

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


Table 13. Checking the Customers Power (continued) Step __ 5. Required Customer Power Safety Check Procedures (for 2105 Model 800 For Reference Information, Go to: and 2105 Expansion Enclosure) Check the customer receptacles voltage pins, with the customers CB off (plug in). Note: Voltage measurement of less than 1.0 V ac is good. Check Customer Receptacle Voltage Pins with Customer CB Off (Plug in) on page 185

__ 6.

Check the customer receptacles voltage Check Customer Receptacle pins, with the customers CB on (plug in). Voltage Pins with Customer CB On Note: Measured voltages must match the (Plug in) on page 188 voltage on the 2105 information label. Continue with Checking the 2105 Model 800 Switch Settings on page 202.

__ 7.

__ B. __ 3.

Wired - Customer Power Connections

Checking Customer Power, Wired Mainline Power Cable on page 191

Check the ground continuity of the 2105 Check 2105 Mainline Power Cable wired mainline power cables. Ground Continuity (Wired) on page Note: Measurement of 1.0 ohm or less is 191 good. Check the customer receptacles ground pin voltage and continuity, with the customers CB off (wired). Note: Voltage measurement of less than 1.0 V ac is good. Resistance measurement of 1.0 ohm or less is good. Check the customer receptacles voltage pins, with the customers CB off (wired). Note: Voltage measurement of less than 1.0 V ac is good. Check Customer Ground Continuity with Customer CB Off (Wired) on page 194

__ 4.

__ 5.

Check Customer Voltage with Customer CB Off (Wired) on page 197

__ 6.

Check the customer receptacles voltage Check Customer Voltage with pins, with the customers CB on (wired). Customer CB On (Wired) on page Note: Measured voltages must match the 199 voltage on the 2105 information label. Continue with Checking the 2105 Model 800 Switch Settings on page 202.

__ 7.

Determine Mainline Power Cable Type (Plug In or Wired)


__ 1. Locate the customer end of the mainline power cables (MPC) from the 2105. Determine if the customer end of the mainline power cables are for plug in or wired installations: v Plug In: The mainline power cable has a plug at both ends. Go to Checking Customer Power, Plug In Mainline Power Cable. v Wired: The mainline power cable has a plug at one end and loose wires at the other end. Go to Checking Customer Power, Wired Mainline Power Cable on page 191.

Checking Customer Power, Plug In Mainline Power Cable


Do this procedure to verify correct customer power with plug in mainline power cables (MPC).

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

179

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

Check 2105 Mainline Power Cable Ground Continuity (Plug in)


Attention: Use an IBM-approved analog multimeter. Do not use a digital meter. Attention: The 2105 Model 800 features two mainline power cables. Complete all steps of this section for both power sources and receptacles and for both power plugs, mainline power cables, and primary power supplies (PPS). __ 1. Switch off each 2105 Model 800 customer circuit breaker that supplies ac voltage to the mainline power cables. CAUTION: Do not connect the mainline power cables until instructed to do so. (1053) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3. __ 2. Attention: Attach a Do Not Operate tag (S229-0237) and the safety lockout padlock to each 2105 Model 800 customer circuit breaker. Refer to the Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers manual. __ 3. Verify the system power MAIN LINE circuit breaker (CB00) 1 [Figure 175] on the rear of both primary power supplies is set to Off (down).

CB1 CB2 CB3 CB4 CB5

J1 J2 J3 J4 CB00

J5A

J5B J6

J7-1 J7-2 J7-3 J7-4 J7-5 Rear View

Figure 175. Primary Power Supply Mainline Circuit Breaker (S008099l)

__ 4. Go to the front of the 2105 Model 800. Connect each mainline power cable to its input connector on the line cord bracket connector: Note: The mainline power cables are connected to the line cord bracket connector next to the PPS they feed. v PPS 1, 2 [Figure 176] v PPS 2, 3 [Figure 176]

180

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

PPS-2 PPS-1 Front View


Figure 176. Line Cord Bracket Connectors (S009122)

__ 5. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 ohm or less resistance. For connection information, see Figure 177 on page 182. Place one lead of the multimeter on each ground pin of the male plug on the mainline power cable. Place the other lead on the conductive metal of each primary power supply enclosure. v Good: If there is 1.0 ohm or less resistance, go to Check Customer Receptacle Ground Pin Continuity With Customer CB Off (Plug in) on page 182. v Bad: If there is more than 1.0 ohm resistance, go to MAP 2031: Repairing Ground Continuity in chapter 3 of Volume 1.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

181

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

2105

Primary Power Supply

Mainline Power Cable

Metal PPS Ground Ground Customer Male Connector

Meter

Ohm

3 30/50 A

3 60 A

Good: 1.0 Ohm or less Fail: More than 1.0 Ohm

Customer AC Power

CB OFF

Figure 177. Ground Continuity Check, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009626)

Ground Three-Phase 30/50 amp Three-Phase 60 amp

Figure 178. Male Plug on the Mainline Power Cable (s009633)

Check Customer Receptacle Ground Pin Continuity With Customer CB Off (Plug in)
This procedure verifies that both customer outlet receptacles are grounded correctly and that there is no voltage present at either outlet when both outlet circuit breakers are off. __ 1. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 V ac or less. For connection information, refer to Figure 179 on page 183.

182

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


DANGER Do not touch the pins of either mainline power cable plugs with anything except high voltage probes until you complete this step. (1004) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3. Measure the voltage at the customers ac power outlet between the ground pin and the building ground. v Good: If the measured voltage is less than 1.0 V ac, go to step 3 on page 184. v Bad: If the measured voltage is 1.0 V ac or greater, continue with step 2 on page 184.

2105

Primary Power Supply

Not Connected Mainline Power Cable

Meter

Ground Customer Female Connector

Vac

3 30/50 A

3 60 A

Good: Less than 1.0 Vac Fail: 1.0 Vac or more

Customer AC Power

CB OFF

Metal Building Ground


Figure 179. Checking the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power Off, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009628)

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

183

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

Ground Three-Phase 30/50 amp (customer AC) Three-Phase 60 amp (customer AC)

Figure 180. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable and Customer AC (S009634)

__ 2. Voltage is present at a customer outlet with both outlet circuit breakers off. DANGER Inform the customer that, even though the circuit breaker is off, voltage higher than 1.0 V ac is measured at the failing customer voltage outlet pins. Do not continue until the voltage is less than 1.0 V ac. (1003) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3. Inform the customer that voltage higher than 1.0 V ac is measured at the ground pin of the failing customer voltage outlet. Do not continue until the voltage is less than 1.0 V ac. __ 3. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 ohm or less of resistance. For connection information, refer to Figure 181 on page 185. Measure the resistance between the customer ac power outlet ground pin on each mainline power cable and the building ground. A reading of 1.0 ohm or less shows a safe, continuous grounding conductor. v Good: If the measured resistance at the ground pin is 1.0 ohm or less, continue with Check Customer Receptacle Voltage Pins with Customer CB Off (Plug in) on page 185. v Bad: If the measured resistance is more than 1.0 ohm on the connector, inform the customer. Do not continue until the resistance is 1.0 ohm or less.

184

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

2105

Primary Power Supply

Not Connected Mainline Power Cable

Meter

Ground Customer Female Connector

Ohm

3 30/50 A

3 60 A

Good: 1.0 Ohm or less Fail: More than 1.0 Ohm

Customer AC Power

CB OFF

Metal Building Ground


Figure 181. Checking the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power Off, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009629)

Ground Three-Phase 30/50 amp (customer AC) Three-Phase 60 amp (customer AC)

Figure 182. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable and Customer AC (S009634)

Check Customer Receptacle Voltage Pins with Customer CB Off (Plug in)
__ 1. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 V ac or less. For connection information, refer to Figure 183 on page 187.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

185

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


Measure ac voltages at the customers ac power outlet (female), see Table 14.
Table 14. Measuring Points for Three-Phase AC Voltages Phase-to-phase V ac between A and B V ac between B and C V ac between A and C Phase-to-ground V ac between A and ground V ac between B and ground V ac between C and ground

v Good: If all measured voltages (phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground) at the voltage pins on the female connector or at the customers ac power outlet (female) are less than 1.0 V ac, continue with Check Customer Receptacle Voltage Pins with Customer CB On (Plug in) on page 188. v Bad: If any measured voltage is 1.0 V ac or greater, inform the customer that, even though the circuit breaker is off, voltage higher than 1.0 V ac is measured at the failing wired ac mainline power cable voltage pins or the failing customer voltage outlet pins. Do not continue until the voltage is less than 1.0 V ac.

186

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

2105

Primary Power Supply

Not Connected Mainline Power Cable

Volts AC Customer Female Connector Meter

A
Vac
3 30/50 A

B C B C
3 60 A

Good: Less than 1.0 Vac Fail: 1.0 Vac or more

Customer AC Power

CB OFF

Metal Building Ground


Figure 183. Check the Three-Phase AC Power Cable Outlet, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009630)

B A C A

B C

Ground Three-Phase 30/50 amp (customer AC) Three-Phase 60 amp (customer AC)

Figure 184. Three Phase Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable and Customer AC (S009635)

__ 2. Continue with Check Customer Receptacle Voltage Pins with Customer CB On (Plug in) on page 188.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

187

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

Check Customer Receptacle Voltage Pins with Customer CB On (Plug in)


This procedure verifies that both customer outlet receptacles are grounded correctly and that the correct voltages are present at both outlets when the outlet circuit breakers are on. Always perform power checks with the recommended analog meter. Do not use a digital meter. __ 1. Remove the Do Not Operate tag and the lockout padlock from each customer mainline ac voltage circuit breaker. __ 2. Switch on each customer circuit breaker to supply mainline ac voltage to the 2105 Model 800. __ 3. Prepare the multimeter to read line voltage AC. For connection information, refer to Figure 185 on page 189. DANGER Dangerous voltages may be present. Do not touch the internal parts (pins and connectors) of the mainline power cable plugs. (1006) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3. Measure the ac voltage at the voltage pins of each customers ac power outlet when both 2105 Model 800 customer circuit breakers are on. See Table 15, record the measurements in Table 16 on page 190. Record the measured ac voltages in step 4 on page 189 then continue from there.
Table 15. Measuring Points for Three-Phase AC Voltages Phase-to-phase V ac between A and B V ac between B and C V ac between A and C Phase-to-ground V ac between A and ground V ac between B and ground V ac between C and ground

188

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

2105

Primary Power Supply

Not Connected Mainline Power Cable

Volts AC Customer Female Connector Meter

A
Vac
3 30/50 A

B C B C
3 60 A

Good: Correct Input Voltage Fail: Incorrect Input Voltage

Customer AC Power

CB ON

Metal Building Ground


Figure 185. Checking the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power On, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009632

Ground Vac A Vac B Ground

C Vac

Three-Phase (line cord)


Figure 186. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S009636)

__ 4. Record the voltages measured, record the voltages in Table 16 on page 190.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

189

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


Table 16. Three-Phase AC Line Voltages Measure the ac Voltages Between A and B Between B and C Between A and C Power Outlet Voltage Connector 1 (PPS-1) Power Outlet Voltage Connector 2 (PPS-2)

__ 5. Continue with the next step. __ 6. Verify ac input voltages from Table 16 are correct. Locate the 2105 information label on the top corner of the right rear cover. Verify that the ac input voltage just measured matches the machine input voltage information on this label. Does the voltage measured match the voltage on the 2105 information label? v Yes, continue with step 7. v No, inform the customer if the voltage is outside this range. When the problem is resolved, continue with the next step. __ 7. Switch OFF each 2105 Model 800 customer circuit breaker that supplies ac voltage to the mainline power cables. __ 8. Attention: Attach a Do Not Operate tag (S229-0237) and the safety lockout padlock to each 2105 Model 800 customer circuit breaker. Refer to the Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers manual. __ 9. Connect the mainline power cables: Note: Determine if the customer will be providing an UPS (uninterruptable power system) and how many UPS connections (one or two) will be available for this frame: v If only one UPS connection is available for this frame, verify the UPS is connected to mainline power cable 1. The 390 V batteries are only charged by the primary power supply attached to mainline power cable 1. v If two UPS connections are available for this frame, connect each UPS to a mainline power cable (1 or 2). v Connect each plug in mainline power cable to each customer ac power outlet. __ 10. Go to step 10 on page 202.

190

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

Checking Customer Power, Wired Mainline Power Cable


Do this procedure to verify correct customer power with wired mainline power cables (MPC).

Check 2105 Mainline Power Cable Ground Continuity (Wired)


Attention: Use an IBM-approved analog multimeter. Do not use a digital meter. Attention: The 2105 Model 800 features two mainline power cables. Complete all steps of this section for both power sources and receptacles and for both power plugs, mainline power cables, and primary power supplies (PPS). __ 1. Switch off each 2105 Model 800 customer circuit breaker that supplies ac voltage to the mainline power cables. CAUTION: Do not connect the mainline power cables until instructed to do so. (1053) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3. __ 2. Attention: Attach a Do Not Operate tag (S229-0237) and the safety lockout padlock to each 2105 Model 800 customer circuit breaker. Refer to the Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers manual. __ 3. Verify the system power MAIN LINE circuit breaker (CB00) 1 [Figure 187] on the rear of both primary power supplies is set to Off (down).

CB1 CB2 CB3 CB4 CB5

J1 J2 J3 J4 CB00

J5A

J5B J6

J7-1 J7-2 J7-3 J7-4 J7-5 Rear View

Figure 187. Primary Power Supply Mainline Circuit Breaker (S008099l)

__ 4. Go to the front of the 2105 Model 800. Connect each mainline power cable to its input connector on the line cord bracket connector: Note: The mainline power cables are connected to the line cord bracket connector next to the PPS they feed. v PPS 1, 2 [Figure 188] v PPS 2, 3 [Figure 188]

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

191

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

PPS-2 PPS-1 Front View


Figure 188. Line Cord Bracket Connectors (S009122)

__ 5. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 ohm or less resistance. For connection information, refer to Figure 189 on page 193. Place one lead of the multimeter on the green and yellow wire at the customer end of each mainline power cable. Place the other lead on the conductive metal of each primary power supply enclosure. v Good: If there is 1.0 ohm or less resistance, continue with step 6 on page 193. v Bad: If there is more than 1.0 ohm resistance, go to MAP 2031: Repairing Ground Continuity in chapter 3 of Volume 1.

192

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

2105

Primary Power Supply

Mainline Power Cable

Metal PPS Ground


Ground Customer Connection Green/Yellow wire

Meter

Ohm

Good: 1.0 Ohm or less Fail: More than 1.0 Ohm

Customer AC Power

CB OFF

Figure 189. Ground Continuity Check with Wired Mainline, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009405)

__ 6. Disconnect each wired mainline power cable 4 [Figure 190] from the line cord bracket.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

193

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

Front View

Figure 190. Line Cord Bracket Connectors (S009123)

__ 7. Instruct the customer to call a licensed electrician to connect each wired mainline power cable to the customer mainline power source. Attention: For EMEA installations, review the information in EMEA Electrician Information on page 194, then return here and continue. __ 8. Continue with Check Customer Ground Continuity with Customer CB Off (Wired).

EMEA Electrician Information


THE MAINLINE POWER CORD OF THIS MACHINE MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE CUSTOMERS MAINLINE POWER SOURCE BY A LICENSED ELECTRICIAN. THE MAINLINE POWER CABLE CANNOT BE MODIFIED IN ANY WAY. v FOR 3 PHASE MACHINES: This machine must be connected to a 3 phase ac power net. The mainline power cable is a four conductor cable with the following color code: L1 (phase 1) = black L2 (phase 2) = blue L3 (phase 3) = brown PE (ground) = green/yellow The connection to the ac power net must be made without neutral, the blue wire must be used as a phase. The machine is designed for a connection to a TN power system.

Check Customer Ground Continuity with Customer CB Off (Wired)


This procedure verifies that both customer outlet receptacles are grounded correctly and that there is no voltage present at either outlet when both outlet circuit breakers are off. __ 1. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 V ac or less. For connection information, refer to Figure 191 on page 195.

194

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


DANGER Do not touch the pins of either mainline power cable plugs with anything except high voltage probes until you complete this step. (1004) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3. Measure the voltage between the female ground pin on each mainline power cable and the building ground. v Good: If the measured voltage is less than 1.0 V ac, go to step 3 on page 196. v Bad: If the measured voltage is 1.0 V ac or greater, continue with the next step.

2105

Primary Power Supply

Do Not Connect to 2105

Meter

Ground 2105 Female Connector

Vac

Good: Less than 1.0 Vac Fail: 1.0 Vac or more

Customer AC Power

CB OFF

Metal Building Ground


Figure 191. Check the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power Off, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009407)

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

195

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

Ground

Figure 192. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S008046l)

__ 2. Voltage is present at a customer outlet with both outlet circuit breakers off. DANGER Inform the customer that, even though the circuit breaker is off, voltage higher than 1.0 V ac is measured at the failing customer voltage outlet pins. Do not continue until the voltage is less than 1.0 V ac. (1003) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3. Inform the customer that voltage higher than 1.0 V ac is measured at the ground pin of the failing wired ac mainline power cable. Do not continue until the voltage is less than 1.0 V ac. __ 3. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 ohm or less of resistance. For connection information, see Figure 193 on page 197. Measure the resistance between the female connector ground pin and the building ground. A reading of 1.0 ohm or less shows a safe, continuous grounding conductor. v Good: If the measured resistance at the ground pin is 1.0 ohm or less, continue with Check Customer Voltage with Customer CB Off (Wired) on page 197. v Bad: If the measured resistance is more than 1.0 ohm on the connector, inform the customer. Do not continue until the resistance is 1.0 ohm or less.

196

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

2105

Primary Power Supply

Do Not Connect to 2105

Meter

Ground 2105 Female Connector

Ohm

Good: 1.0 Ohm or less Fail: More than 1.0 Ohm

Customer AC Power

CB OFF

Metal Building Ground


Figure 193. Check the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power Off, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009408)

Ground

Figure 194. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S008046l)

Check Customer Voltage with Customer CB Off (Wired)


__ 1. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 V ac or less. For connection information, see Figure 195 on page 198. Measure ac voltages at the female connector on each mainline power cable, see Table 17 on page 198.
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

197

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


Table 17. Measuring Points for Three-Phase AC Voltages Phase-to-phase V ac between A and B V ac between B and C V ac between A and C Phase-to-ground V ac between A and ground V ac between B and ground V ac between C and ground

v Good: If all measured voltages (phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground) at the voltage pins on the female connector or at the customers ac power outlet (female) are less than 1.0 V ac, continue with Check Customer Voltage with Customer CB On (Wired) on page 199. v Bad: If any measured voltage is 1.0 V ac or greater, inform the customer that, even though the circuit breaker is off, voltage higher than 1.0 V ac is measured at the failing wired ac mainline power cable voltage pins or the failing customer voltage outlet pins. Do not continue until the voltage is less than 1.0 V ac.

2105

Primary Power Supply

Do Not Connect to 2105

Meter Volts AC Vac 2105 Female Connector

Good: Less than 1.0 Vac Fail: 1.0 Vac or more

A B

Customer AC Power

CB OFF

Metal Building Ground


Figure 195. Check the Three-Phase AC Power Cable, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009627)

198

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

Ground Vac A Vac B Ground

C Vac

Three-Phase (line cord)


Figure 196. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S009636)

__ 2. Continue with Check Customer Voltage with Customer CB On (Wired).

Check Customer Voltage with Customer CB On (Wired)


This procedure verifies that both customer outlet receptacles are grounded correctly and that the correct voltages are present at both outlets when the outlet circuit breakers are on. Always perform power checks with the recommended analog meter. Do not use a digital meter. __ 1. Remove the Do Not Operate tag and the lockout padlock from each customer mainline ac voltage circuit breaker. __ 2. Switch on each customer circuit breaker to supply mainline ac voltage to the 2105 Model 800. __ 3. Prepare the multimeter to read line voltage AC. For connection information, refer to Figure 197 on page 200. DANGER Dangerous voltages may be present. Do not touch the internal parts (pins and connectors) of the mainline power cable plugs. (1006) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3. Measure the ac voltage at the voltage pins of each female connector on both mainline power cables when both 2105 Model 800 customer circuit breakers are on. See Table 18, record the measurements in Table 19 on page 201. Record the measured ac voltages in step 4 on page 200 then continue from there.
Table 18. Measuring Points for Three-Phase AC Voltages Phase-to-phase V ac between A and B V ac between B and C V ac between A and C Phase-to-ground V ac between A and ground V ac between B and ground V ac between C and ground

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

199

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

2105

Primary Power Supply

Do Not Connect to 2105

Meter

Volts AC 2105 Female Connector

Vac

A
Good: Correct Input Voltage Fail: Incorrect Input Voltage

Customer AC Power

CB ON

Metal Building Ground


Figure 197. Checking the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power On, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009631)

Ground Vac A Vac B Ground

C Vac

Three-Phase (line cord)


Figure 198. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S009636)

__ 4. Record the voltages measured, record the voltages in Table 19 on page 201.

200

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


Table 19. Three-Phase AC Line Voltages Measure the ac Voltages Between A and B Between B and C Between A and C Power Outlet Voltage Connector 1 (PPS-1) Power Outlet Voltage Connector 2 (PPS-2)

__ 5. Continue with the next step. __ 6. Verify ac input voltages from Table 19 are correct. Locate the 2105 information label on the top corner of the right rear cover. Verify that the ac input voltage just measured matches the machine input voltage information on this label. Does the voltage measured match the voltage on the 2105 information label? v Yes, continue with step 7. v No, inform the customer if the voltage is outside this range. When the problem is resolved, continue with the next step. __ 7. Switch OFF each 2105 Model 800 customer circuit breaker that supplies ac voltage to the mainline power cables. __ 8. Attention: Attach a Do Not Operate tag (S229-0237) and the safety lockout padlock to each 2105 Model 800 customer circuit breaker. Refer to the Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers manual. __ 9. Connect the mainline power cables: Note: Determine if the customer will be providing an UPS (uninterruptable power system) and how many UPS connections (one or two) will be available for this frame: v If only one UPS connection is available for this frame, verify the UPS is connected to mainline power cable 1. The 390 V batteries are only charged by the primary power supply attached to mainline power cable 1. v If two UPS connections are available for this frame, connect each UPS to a mainline power cable (1 or 2). v Connect each wired mainline power cable to each connector on the line cord bracket. Note: The mainline power cables are connected to the line cord bracket connector next to the PPS they feed. v PPS 1, 1 [Figure 199] v PPS 2, 2 [Figure 199]

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

201

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

PPS-2 PPS-1 Front View

Figure 199. Line Cord Bracket Connectors (S009124)

__ 10. Reinstall the frame tailgate bar (center) removed earlier, see 5 [Figure 174]. __ 11. Do you have a 2105 Expansion Enclosure to install to this 2105 Model 800? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, continue with Checking the 2105 Model 800 Switch Settings. __ 12. MES instructions are required if the 2105 Expansion Enclosure and 2105 Model 800 were not built/configured as a subsystem by IBM manufacturing. Was this 2105 Expansion Enclosure and the 2105 Model 800 built and shipped together from IBM manufacturing? v Yes, go to Entry for 2105 Expansion Enclosure with 2105 Model 800 on page 264. v No, the MES guided install of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure cannot be done now. The MES install can be started at either of the following 2105 Model 800 install steps: After the 2105 Model 800 install is complete and turned over to customer use. Just before Certify DDMs on page 252, as you continue with the 2105 Model 800 install. Delay the MES install and continue with Checking the 2105 Model 800 Switch Settings.

Checking the 2105 Model 800 Switch Settings


__ 1. Go to the front of the 2105 Model 800. Set the 2105 Model 800 rack operator panel switches [Figure 200] to the positions shown in Table 20 on page 203.

202

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


Table 20. 2105 Model 800 Rack Operator Panel Switches Switch Name Unit Emergency UEPO Local/Remote Switch (inside door) Position Off (down) Push to the Left (Local)

Note: To access the UEPO Local/Remote switch, you will need to loosen the single screw on the left side of the operator panel and swing the operator panel out. Pull the Local/Remote switch out before changing its position.
2105 Model 800 Unit Emergency

LOCAL L/R SWITCH

REMOTE

Local Power

Ready Cluster 1 Cluster 2 Power Complete Line Cord 1 Line Cord 2 Messages Cluster 1 Cluster 2 Front View Rear View

Front View

Figure 200. 2105 Model 800 Operator Panel Locations (s009422)

__ 2. Go to the rear of the 2105 Model 800. Verify that the power switches on all eight CEC and I/O drawer power supplies and the four host bay power supplies 2 [Figure 201] and 3 are set to On (up). Note: Later versions of the CEC and I/O drawer power supplies may have the switch removed or covered up. __ 3. Verify that the power switches on all of the installed storage cage power supplies 1 [Figure 201] are set to On (up).

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

203

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


Storage Cage Power Supply

1 1

Power Switch

CHK/PWR GOOD Indicator CEC and I/O Drawer Power Supply


PWR 1 2 J1 J2

ON CHK/ PWR-GOOD

OFF

Power Switch (If Present) CHK/PWR-GOOD Indicator

Rear View Host Bay Power Supply

Power Switch

Figure 201. Electronics and Storage Cage Power Supply Switches (s009169)

__ 4. Verify that the five circuit breakers (CB01 to CB05) on each primary power supply 4 [Figure 202] are set to On (up). __ 5. The main circuit breakers 5 [Figure 202] on each primary power supply should be set to Off (down).

Rear View

Figure 202. Primary Power Supply Circuit Breaker Locations (S007627l)

__ 6. Set the Power Select switch 8 [Figure 203] and 9 on each RPC switch card to the Local position (down).

204

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


__ 7. Verify that the address switches on both RPC cards are set as follows: v Cluster 1, RPC-1 card 6 [Figure 203] or Cluster 2, RPC-2 card 7 Switch 1: - RPC-1 card = On (push switch to right ) - RPC-2 card = Off (push switch to left ) Switch 2: - RPC-1 card = Off (push switch to left ) - RPC-2 card = On (push switch to right ) Switch 3: - With remote power feature installed, switch 3 = On (push switch to right ) - Without remote power feature installed, switch 3 = Off (push switch to left ) Note: Determine if the remote power feature will be used: - Check for FC 1011 on the Product Feature Code card in the CE envelope. - Check with the customer to see if they will be using the remote power control feature. Switch 4 = Off (push switch to left ) Switch 5 = Off (push switch to left ) Switch 6 = Off (push switch to left )

RPC-1 Card

RPC-2 Card

AUTO or REMOTE

Address Switches 0 1 1 0 1 2 0 1 3 0 1 4 0 1 5 1 6 0 0 1 RPC Power Select Switch

7
LOCAL

Rear View

RPC-2 Switch Card

RPC-1 Switch Card

Figure 203. Rack Power Control Card Switch Locations (S009127)

__ 8. Remove the Do Not Operate tag and the lockout padlock from each customer mainline ac voltage circuit breaker. __ 9. Instruct the customer to switch on each circuit breaker that supplies the mainline ac power to each customer ac power outlet or wired mainline power cable. __ 10. Verify that all the 390 V battery cables are connected at battery 1 (three cables) 2 [Figure 204] and battery 2 (one cable) 1 : v Battery 1, J1A to PPS 1, J5A v Battery 1, J1B to PPS 1, J5B
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

205

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


v Battery 2, J1 to Battery 1, J2 Notes: a. If battery cables are disconnected set the MASTER circuit breaker (CB06) on 390 V battery 1 3 [Figure 204] to Off (down) before connecting any 390 V battery cable. b. On early batteries, CB06 is labeled S2. __ 11. Continue with Setting 390 V Battery and Primary Power Supplies to On.

Setting 390 V Battery and Primary Power Supplies to On


__ 1. Set the MASTER circuit breaker (CB06) on 390 V battery 1 3 [Figure 204] to On (up). Attention: This circuit breaker is normally set to off by manufacturing to conserve battery power. The circuit breaker must be set to On (up) to prevent an entry into the problem.

Battery 2

Battery 1

Rear View

Figure 204. 2105 Model 800 390 V Battery Circuit Breaker (s009128)

__ 2. Switch the System Power CB 4 [Figure 205] on the rear of each primary power supply to On (up).

Rear View
Figure 205. Primary Power Supply (s009616)

__ 3. Continue with How to Power on and Test the 2105 Subsystem on page 207.

206

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

END OF INSTALL PHASE 1:

How to Power on and Test the 2105 Subsystem


START OF INSTALL PHASE 2:

This section does the following: v Checks that the cluster to cluster ethernet jumper cable is installed v Checks the 2105 UEPO and power supplies v Connects the service terminal to the 2105 v Installs the 2105 subsystem using the service terminal

Check That The Cluster to Cluster Ethernet Jumper Cable is Installed


Attention: The following step verifies that the ESS is NOT connected to the ethernet hub until the TCP/IP addresses have been set. This avoids the possibility of problems due to TCP/IP address conflicts. 1. Verify that the cluster to cluster communication Ethernet (RJ45) cable 1 is connected between the I/O drawers (10/100 connectors).

I/O Drawer 1

I/O Drawer 2

Front View

Figure 206. Cluster Communications Cable Location (S009120)

2. Continue with Check the 2105 UEPO and Power Supplies.

Check the 2105 UEPO and Power Supplies


Attention: Do not install any cables until you are instructed to do so. __ 1. You must use one of the following methods to install the required power checks: v If you are familiar with doing the 2105 UEPO and power supply checks, you can use Table 21 on page 208 as a checklist and and source of further reference information. v If you are not familiar with the procedures, continue with 2 on page 209. Note: If you are also installing a 2105 Expansion Enclosure, do the following procedures for both racks.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

207

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


Table 21. Check the 2105 UEPO and Power Supplies Power Check Procedure (You must do each power check listed.) Set the operator panel Unit Emergency (UEPO) switch to OFF (also on Expansion Enclosure (EE)). Attempt to power on the 2105 Subsystem (operator panel Local Power switch). Observe the operator panel Power Complete, Line Cord LEDs (EE also). Set UEPO switch to ON (EE also). Attempt to power on the 2105 Wait up to 4 minutes for Subsystem (operator panel the final state. Local Power switch). Observe the operator panel Power Complete, Line Cord LEDs (EE also). LEDs ON LEDs OFF Good Condition (If this condition is not good, use the Reference column Information.) For Reference Information, Go to: Step 2 on page 209

Step

__ 2.

__ 3.

Step 3 on page 209

__ 4.

Step 4 on page 209

__ 5. __ 6.

Step 5 on page 210 Step 6 on page 210

__ 7.

Step 7 on page 210

__ 8.

Observe each 2105 Model LEDs ON 800 CEC drawer power supplies CHK/PWR-GOOD LED (left and right sets of two power supplies). Observe each 2105 Model LEDs ON 800 I/O drawer power supplies CHK/PWR-GOOD LED (left and right sets of two power supplies). LEDs ON

Step 8 on page 211

__ 9.

Step 9 on page 211

__ 10. Observe each 2105 Model 800 host bay power supplies three green power LEDs (left and right sets of two power supplies) . __ 11. Observe each storage cage power supplies CHK/PWR-GOOD LED (EE also). __ 12. Observe each primary power supplies PWR Good LED (front of 2105 subsystem, EE also). __ 13. Observe each primary power supplies digital status display (EE also). __ 14. Continue with Connect the Service Terminal to the 2105 Subsystem on page 214.

Step 10 on page 212

LEDs ON (green)

Step 11 on page 213

LEDs ON

Step 12 on page 213

Each display is blank.

Step 13 on page 214

208

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


__ 2. Verify that the 2105 Model 800 operator panel Unit Emergency switch is set to Off (down). If you are also installing a 2105 Expansion Enclosure, verify that its operator panel Unit Emergency switch is also set Off (down). __ 3. Set the 2105 Model 800 Local Power switch to On (up), then release it. Note: This testing is to verify that the 2105 will not power on with the UEPO switch set to Off (down).
2105 Model 800 Unit Emergency

Local Power

Ready Cluster 1 Cluster 2 Power Complete Line Cord 1 Line Cord 2 Messages Cluster 1 Cluster 2

Figure 207. 2105 Model 800 Operator Panel Locations (s009421)

__ 4. Observe the 2105 Model 800 operator panel Power Complete indicators for Line Cords 1 and 2 and perform the action described in Table 22. If you are also installing a 2105 Expansion Enclosure, observe the 2105 Expansion Enclosure operator panel Power Complete indicators for Line Cords 1 and 2 using Table 49 on page 307. Then return here and continue. Attention: If the 2105 powers on, the Unit Emergency switch is not working. You must repair the problem before continuing, see MAP 2360: UEPO in chapter 3 of Volume 1.
Table 22. 2105 Model 800 Rack Operator Panel Power Complete Indicators Power Complete, Line Cord 1 Off Blinking Power Complete, Line Cord 2 Off Blinking Action

Normal, go to step 5 on page 210 Go to MAP 2360: UEPO in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step. Go to MAP 2360: UEPO in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step. Go to MAP 2360: UEPO in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step.

On

On

On

Off

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

209

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


Table 22. 2105 Model 800 Rack Operator Panel Power Complete Indicators (continued) Power Complete, Line Cord 1 Off Power Complete, Line Cord 2 On Action

Go to MAP 2360: UEPO in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step.

__ 5. Set the 2105 Model 800 operator panel Unit Emergency switch to On (up). If you are also installing a 2105 Expansion Enclosure, set the 2105 Expansion Enclosure operator panel Unit Emergency switch to On (up). __ 6. Set the 2105 Model 800 operator panel Local Power switch to On (up), then release it. You may have to wait up to four minutes for the final state of the Power Complete and Line Cord indicators (indicators stop blinking and remain on). Note: This power sequence testing does not require waiting for IML to complete.
2105 Model 800 Unit Emergency

Local Power

Ready Cluster 1 Cluster 2 Power Complete Line Cord 1 Line Cord 2 Messages Cluster 1 Cluster 2

Figure 208. 2105 Model 800 Operator Panel Locations (s009421)

__ 7. Observe the 2105 Model 800 operator panel Power Complete indicators for Line Cords 1 and 2 [Figure 208] and perform the action described in Table 23 on page 211. If you are also installing a 2105 Expansion Enclosure, observe the 2105 Expansion Enclosure operator panel Power Complete indicators for Line Cords 1 and 2 using Table 50 on page 307. Then return here and continue.

210

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


Table 23. 2105 Model 800 Rack Operator Panel Power Complete Indicators Power Complete, Line Cord 1 On On Power Complete, Line Cord 2 On Off Action

Normal, go to step 8. Go to MAP 2400: Local Power On in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step. Go to MAP 2400: Local Power On in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step. Go to MAP 2400: Local Power On in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step.

Off

On

Off or blinking

Off or blinking

__ 8. Go to the rear of the 2105 Model 800. Observe the CHK/PWR-GOOD indicator on the right two CEC drawer power supplies 3 [Figure 209] and the left two CEC drawer power supplies 2 . Perform the action described in Table 24 for each set of two power supplies.
Power Switch

Storage Cage Power Supply

1 2

Electronics Cage Power Supply


PWR 1 2 J1 J2

6 CHK/PWR
GOOD Indicator

3 4

5
ON CHK/ PWR-GOOD

OFF

Power Switch

Rear View

7 CHK/PWR-GOOD Indicator

Figure 209. CEC Drawer, I/O Drawer, and Host Bay Power Supply Indicators (s009209) Table 24. 2105 Model 800 CEC Drawer Power Supply CHK/PWR-GOOD Indicators Power Supply Action CHK/PWR-GOOD Indicators 2 on 1 on, 1 off 2 off Normal, go to step 9. Delay repair, go to 9. Go to MAP 1320: Visual Symptoms in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step.

__ 9. Go to the rear of the 2105 Model 800. Observe the CHK/PWR-GOOD indicator on the right two I/O drawer power supplies 4 [Figure 209] and
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

211

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


the left two I/O drawer power supplies 5 . Perform the action described in Table 25 for each set of two power supplies.
Table 25. 2105 Model 800 I/O Drawer Power Supply CHK/PWR-GOOD Indicators Power Supply Action CHK/PWR-GOOD Indicators 2 on 1 on, 1 off 2 off Normal, go to step 10. Delay repair, go to 10. Go to MAP 1320: Visual Symptoms in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step.

__ 10. Go to the rear of the 2105 Model 800. Observe the four green power indicators 10 on the right two host bay power supplies 9 [Figure 210] and the left two host bay power supplies 8 . Verify that for each set of two power supplies, that at least one POWER ON HA1 and one POWER ON HA2 indicator is On. Perform the action described in Table 26 on page 213 for each set of two power supplies. Note: These indicators are labeled, POWER ON HA1, POWER ON HA2, and INPUT 11, and INPUT 12.
R1

Host Bay Power Supply

Rear View

10 Power On
Indicators Power Switch

Figure 210. Host Bay Power Supply Indicators (s009417)

212

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


Table 26. 2105 Model 800 Host Bay Power Supply CHK/PWR-GOOD Indicators Host Bay Power Supply, Power Indicators 2 on 1 on, 1 off 2 off Action

Normal, go to step 11 Delay repair, go to 11. Go to MAP 1320: Visual Symptoms in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step.

__ 11. Observe the CHK/PWR-GOOD (check/power) indicator 6 [Figure 209], on the installed storage cage power supplies 1 . Perform the action described in Table 27. Note: The label above the supplies may read Storage Bay Power Supply instead of Storage Cage Power Supply (which is the real FRU name).
Table 27. 2105 Model 800 Storage Cage Power Supply CHK/PWR-GOOD Indicators Power Supply Action CHK/PWR-GOOD Indicators all on (green) only 1 off/amber 2 or more off/amber Normal, go to step 12 Delay repair, go to 12. Go to MAP 1320: Visual Symptoms in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step.

__ 12. Go to the front of the 2105 Model 800. Observe the PWR Good indicator 12 [Figure 211], on the front of both primary power supplies 1 and 2 11 and perform. Perform the action described in Table 28 on page 214. If you are also installing a 2105 Expansion Enclosure, go to the front of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. Observe the PWR Good indicator on the front of both primary power supplies 1 and 2 using Table 52 on page 308. Then return here and continue.

PPS 1/2
.

J8 J9

Front View

12
PWR GOOD Indicator

13
PPS Digital Status Display

Front View

11

Figure 211. Primary Power Supply (s009129)

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

213

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


Table 28. 2105 Model 800 Primary Power Supply PPS Good Indicators Power Supply PWR Good Indicators Both on 1 on, 1 off, or Both off Action

Normal, go to step 13 Go to MAP 1320: Visual Symptoms in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step.

__ 13. Go to the front of the 2105 Model 800 11 . Observe the PPS digital status display 13 [Figure 211], on primary power supplies 1 and 2. v If both digital displays are blank, go to step 14. Note: A blank digital status display may appear as an 88 due to the back-lighting of the LCDs. v If one or both status display is NOT blank, go to MAP 1320: Visual Symptoms in chapter 3 of Volume 1, to isolate the problem. Note: When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step. If you are also installing a 2105 Expansion Enclosure, repeat the above for its primary power supplies. __ 14. Continue with Connect the Service Terminal to the 2105 Subsystem.

Connect the Service Terminal to the 2105 Subsystem


Attention: The 2105 and cables in this procedure are ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap during this procedure. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. This section does the following: v Connects the service terminal v Checks that both clusters display READY FOR LOGIN v Checks that you can login to both clusters __ 1. You must use one of the following methods to connect the service terminal: v If you are familiar with the service terminal connection, you can use Table 29 as a checklist and and source of further reference information. v If you are not familiar the service terminal connection, continue with step 2 on page 215.
Table 29. Connect the Service Terminal to the 2105 Subsystem Service Terminal Login Check Procedure Place service terminal on the service terminal table, power it on, and connect it to cluster 2 (right), S2 connector. Good Condition (If this condition is not good, use the Reference column Information.) For Reference Information, Go to: Steps 2 on page 215 to 6 on page 216

Step

__ 2.

214

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


Table 29. Connect the Service Terminal to the 2105 Subsystem (continued) Service Terminal Login Check Procedure Observe each CEC drawer operator panel display. Good Condition (If this condition is not good, use the Reference column Information.) After 20 minutes, each cluster displays READY FOR LOGIN. Note: If the display shows NVS BAT x CHARGING or other messages then please see the reference information. Copyright Screen displayed. Copyright Screen displayed. For Reference Information, Go to: Step 7 on page 216

Step

__ 3.

__ 4. __ 5. __ 6.

Login to cluster 2 (right). Login to cluster 1 (left). Continue with Installing the 2105 Subsystem Using the Service Terminal on page 218.

Step 8 on page 216 to 11 on page 217 Step 12 on page 217

__ 2. Press the latches on the front service terminal table 1 [Figure 212] and pull the table out until it stops.

41

Front View
Figure 212. Accessing the Service Terminal Table (s009131)

__ 3. Place the service terminal on the service terminal table. __ 4. Connect the service terminal to the customers power outlet. Note: Always operate the service terminal from ac power because the duration of the service activity may exceed the capacity of the service terminal battery. __ 5. Connect the service terminal null modem cable (P/N 08L8045, in the ship group), to cluster 2 (right):

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

215

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


a. Connect the service terminal interface cable to the serial port connector (9 pin) on the service terminal. b. Connect the other end of the cable to S2 [Figure 213] on the front of cluster 2 (right).

I/O Drawer 1/2

CLUSTER 1 CLUSTER 2 Cluster Connectors S1 S2 S3 Front View

Front View

Figure 213. Cluster Connectors for Service Terminal (s009132)

__ 6. Power the service terminal on and verify that the service terminal has been configured for use on the 2105 subsystem, see Service Terminal Setup in chapter 8 of Volume 3. __ 7. Wait for both cluster 1 and cluster 2 to complete the IML and for the Cluster LCD panel to display: READY FOR LOGIN. This will typically take 15 to 20 minutes for the first IML during install. Notes: a. You may notice an LCD display which says NVS Battery Test is turned off. This is normal for the first IML during install and is done to save time. The test will be turned back on automatically for subsequent IMLs. b. The READY FOR LOGIN display may be overwritten by NVS x BATTERY CHARGING. This is normal and you should continue with the next step. c. The READY FOR LOGIN display may be overwritten by a blank. You should continue with the next step. d. If the rack has been powered on for just a short time, then you could start unpacking and installing the ESSNet hardware to make use of this waiting time (refer toBegin Installation and Connection to the ESSNet on page 220). Return to this step as soon as both clusters 1 and 2 display READY FOR LOGIN. Did both cluster 1 and 2 display READY FOR LOGIN, NVS BAT x CHARGING or remain blank? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, if the rack has been powered on more then 45 minutes, go to MAP 4360: CEC Drawer Operator Panel Codes in chapter 3 of Volume 1. __ 8. Verify that the Copyright and Login screen is displayed for cluster 2: v If the copyright screen is displayed for cluster 2, continue with the next step.

216

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


v If the copyright screen is not displayed for cluster 2, the repair may be delayed, unless cluster 1 is also not operational. Continue with the next step. From the service terminal toolbar, click on toolbar option Disconnect. Move the service terminal interface cable from the S2 connector on cluster 2 to the S2 connector on cluster 1 (left). From the service terminal toolbar, click on toolbar option Connect. Verify that the Copyright and Login screen is displayed for cluster 1: v If the copyright screen is displayed for cluster 1, continue with the next step. v If the copyright screen was only missing from one cluster, the repair will be delayed. Connect the service terminal to the cluster that displayed the Copyright and Login screen. Continue with the next step. v If the copyright screen was not displayed for both clusters, go to MAP 6060: Service Terminal Login in chapter 3 of Volume 1. After the repair, return here and continue with the next step. Enter the Login ID of service (lower case) and press Enter. When asked for the Password, enter the information indicated on the operator panel display that the service terminal is attached to. Continue with Installing the 2105 Subsystem Using the Service Terminal on page 218.

__ 9. __ 10. __ 11. __ 12.

__ 13.

__ 14.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

217

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

Installing the 2105 Subsystem Using the Service Terminal


The service terminal will guide you through the physical installation and testing of the 2105 Model 800. __ 1. Verify that you have copies of the Communications and Configuration Worksheets and the customer and service representative fields are filled in. Refer to Checking Communications Worksheets on page 168. __ 2. Do the Communications Resources Worksheets have customer network TCP/IP information filled in? v Yes, use the TCP/IP information from the worksheets, Go to step 5. v No, continue with the next step. __ 3. Is this 2105 Model 800 being attached to an ESSNet console that is already attached to the customer network? Note: The term ESSNet is generic and can mean any type of ESSNet Console. v Yes, before continuing with the next step, to avoid LAN conflicts, the customer must provide 2105 TCP/IP information. Stop the installation until this information is available! When TCP/IP information is available, go to step 5. v No, do one of the following: If the ESSNet console is not installed yet, use the defaults from Table 30 on page 219 and record the information on the worksheets, then go to step 5. If the ESSNet console is installed but not attached to the customer network, continue with the next step. __ 4. Is the ESSNet Console configured with default TCP/IP network information? v Yes, the 2105 must also be configured with default TCP/IP network information. Use the defaults from Table 30 on page 219 and record them on the worksheets. Then continue with step 5. v No, The customer must provide TCP/IP network information for the 2105 being installed. Record them on the worksheets, then go to step 5. __ 5. Read this step completely (including steps a, b, and c) before using the service terminal to continue the 2105 install. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Install/Remove Menu Enterprise Storage Service Menu Install/Re-install/Relocate Enterprise Storage Server __ a. The service terminal will guide you through the logical installation of the 2105 Model 800 subsystem. There is no attempt by the service guide to direct you through this process. The service terminal screens will provide all the direction that you will need. If additional Help is needed, use the F1 (Help) key. __ b. When the service terminal prompts for TCP/IP information: 1) Select Minimum Configuration & Startup and then en0 Standard Ethernet Network Interface. 2) Enter the TCP/IP information provided on the worksheets. Attention: The TCP/IP Addresses and Hostnames must be entered correctly on both clusters to avoid cluster-to-cluster

218

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


communication errors. These errors will cause cluster-to-cluster communication timeouts, and much longer IML times. Attention: If the customer provided Nameserver or Gateway information do one of the following: v If you will be connecting to the customer network during install and testing, enter the Nameserver or Gateway information now. v If you will NOT be connecting to the customer network during install and testing, do NOT enter the Nameserver or Gateway information at this time. Entering this information without making the network connection may cause problems when using the ESS Specialist from the ESSNet1 or Master Console. __ c. The service terminal will return you to the next procedure in the service guide when testing and IML is complete.
Table 30. Default TCP/IP Settings 2105 Subsystem on ESSNet First First Second Second Third Third Fourth Fourth Fifth Fifth Sixth Sixth Seventh Seventh Cluster HOST NAME Internet Address 172.31.1.1 172.31.1.2 172.31.1.3 172.31.1.4 172.31.1.5 172.31.1.6 172.31.1.7 172.31.1.8 172.31.1.9 172.31.1.10 172.31.1.11 172.31.1.12 172.31.1.13 172.31.1.14 Network Mask

1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2

ess1c1 ess1c2 ess2c1 ess2c2 ess3c1 ess3c2 ess4c1 ess4c2 ess5c1 ess5c2 ess6c1 ess6c2 ess7c1 ess7c2

255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

[ESSNet1 Console] [Master Console]

[essnet1] [essnet2]

[172.31.1.250] [172.31.1.250]

255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

END OF INSTALL PHASE 2:

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

219

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

Complete the Physical Install of the 2105


START OF INSTALL PHASE 3:

This section describes the actions that will be done after you complete the installation using the service terminal.

Begin Installation and Connection to the ESSNet


Attention:You MUST follow the procedures and steps in the order given to successfully install the ESSNet Console. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: The term ESSNet is generic and can mean any type of ESSNet Console. __ 1. Are you attaching this ESS to an existing ESSNet Console? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to step 3. __ 2. Determine how many 2105s are already connected to the ESSNet Console. v Less than seven 2105s are connected, continue at the next step. v Seven 2105s are connected, STOP this installation and have the customer order an additional ESSNet Console. __ 3. Locate the ESSNet console being connected to this 2105. If the ESSNet console is not already installed: v Unpack the ship group. v Verify that the ship group is complete using the provided bill of materials. __ 4. Determine if the ESSNet is a Master Console or an ESSNet1 console, see Figure 214.
EQUINOX
MultiPort Serial Adapter

SST
SuperSerial Technology

Multiport Serial Adapter (Master Console-FC 2717)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON LINE

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
15 16 13 14 11 12 9 10 7 8 5 6 3 4 1 2

Modem Expander (ESSNet1)

Rear View
Figure 214. MSA and Modem Expander Attachment Diagram (s009415)

v If the console has a Multiport Serial Adapter (MSA), you have a Master Console, continue with the next step. v If the console has a modem expander, you have an ESSNet1. To install the ESSNet1, go to MAP 1610: ESSNet1 Console Modem and Modem Expander in chapter 3 of Volume 1. __ 5. Is the Master Console already installed

220

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


v Yes, go to step Routing and Connecting the Cables to the Master Console on page 226. v No, continue with the next step. __ 6. Continue with Begin Install of the Master Console.

Begin Install of the Master Console


__ 1. Is this installation being performed by two service representatives (SRs)? v Yes, SR #2 should continue with steps 2 on page 221 to 12 on page 233. v No, continue with the next step. __ 2. You must use one of the following methods to continue the installation of the 2105 subsystem: v If you are familiar with procedures listed in Table 31, you can use the table as a checklist and source of further reference information. v If you are not familiar with the procedures, continue with step 3.
Table 31. Begin Install of the Master Console Step __ 2. __ 3. __ 4. __ 5. __ 6. Master Console Install Check Procedures Unpack and position the Master console, modem and MSA. Install the Master Console PC but do not power on. Install the Modem Install the MSA Continue with Routing and Connecting the Cables to the Master Console on page 226. For Reference Information, Go to: Steps 3 and 4 Steps 5 on page 222 and 6 on page 222 Steps 1 on page 222 to 13 on page 225 Steps 1 on page 225 to6 on page 226

__ 3. Place all of the following components together within 12 meters (40 feet) of the 2105 being installed: v MSA 8 [Figure 215] v Master Console PC 6 [Figure 215] v Modem 1 [Figure 215] v Ethernet hub (Newer version may use an Ethernet switch instead of an Ethernet hub.) __ 4. Verify that the components are within 2 meters (6 feet) of the AC service outlets. Verify that the MSA is within 1 meter (3 feet) of the PC.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

221

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

Customer AC Service

1
Modem Line DTE

8 4
Power Power S1 Master Console Port 2 Port 1 S3

2105 Model 800

MSA

10 S3

Cluster 1 (I/O Drawer 1) Cluster 2 (I/O Drawer 2)

11

12

Telephone Line

Figure 215. Multiport Serial Adapter Attachment Diagram (S009424)

__ 5. Install the Master Console PC (monitor, mouse, and keyboard) using the documentation that came with the hardware being used as the Master Console. Do not power the Master Console on. __ 6. Check that the voltage setting for the input power (115V or 230V) is correct for the Master Console. The switch is above the power connector on the rear of the PC. Do not power the Master Console on. __ 7. Continue with Install the Modem.

Install the Modem


__ 1. Is the modem you are attaching a Microcom DeskPort? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to step 3. __ 2. Verify that the Modem Configuration Switches [Figure 216] are set correctly, all switches down. Note: To access the switches, use a thin blade screwdriver to lift off the modem nameplate on the left side of the front panel. The two banks of switches are located behind the nameplate.
Microcom DeskPorte Modem T/D O/A ON/OFF

TST DCD DTR TXD RXD

Front View

Modem Configuration Switches


Figure 216. Modem Configuration Switch Settings (S007457l)

__ 3. Plug the 25-pin end of the data cable 3 [Figure 215], into the DTE connector 14 [Figure 217] on the back of the modem. __ 4. Plug the 9-pin end of the data cable into Serial Port 1 (S1) on the back of the Master Console PC 6 [Figure 215]. Tighten the cable connector retention screws.

222

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


Note: If the Master console is an X-series 305 (8480-23G), the S1 port is the lower serial port. __ 5. Plug the RJ-11 telephone cable 2 [Figure 215], into the LINE connector, 15 [Figure 217] on the back of the modem. Plug the other end of the cable into the customers telephone line connector. __ 6. Plug the modem power adapter 4 [Figure 215], into the POWER connector 13 [Figure 217] on the rear of the modem.

13
Microcom DeskPorte Modem Parallel Port Power DTE

14

15

Line

Phone

Rear View

13
MultiTech MultiModem-V90
PHONE LINE EIA RS232C

VOLUME

Rear View

15

14 13

MultiTech MultiModem-V92
PHONE LINE LEASED EIA RS232C

VOLUME

POWER

Rear View

15
Figure 217. Modem Rear View (s009711)

14

Plug the other end of the modem power adapter cable into the customers AC service outlet. __ 8. Is the modem you are attaching a Microcom DeskPorte Modem? v Yes, go to step 12 on page 224. v No, continue with the next step. __ 9. Use figure Figure 217 to determine which type of MultiTech MultiModem was supplied (V-90 or V-92). v If you have a MultiTech MultiModem - V90, go to step 10 on page 224. v If you have a MultiTech MultiModem - V92, go to step 11 on page 224.
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

__ 7.

223

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


__ 10. Switch on the modem 21 [Figure 218] using the on/off switch located on the front panel. Note: When you apply power, the modem performs a diagnostic self-test, indicated by the TM indicator lighting for a few seconds after which the LCD should light. If this does not happen, check that the power switch is on, the power supply is solidly connected correctly and the AC outlet voltage is present. If these checks do not work, see Chapter 8 of the Users Guide supplied with the modem, Solving Problems. Go to Install the MSA on page 225. __ 11. Do the following steps: a. Switch on the modem 21 [Figure 218] using the on/off switch located on the front panel. Note: When you apply power, the modem performs a diagnostic self-test, indicated by the TM indicator lighting for a few seconds after which the LCD should light. If this does not happen, check that the power switch is on, the power supply is solidly connected correctly and the AC outlet voltage is present. If these checks do not work, see Chapter 7 of the User Guide supplied with the modem, Troubleshooting. The User Guide (S000276C.pdf) is supplied on the CD shipped with the modem. b. Configure the Modem for the correct country. See the card labeled Read This First - MT5600BA for IBM or the Quick Start Guide shipped with the modem. c. Go to Install the MSA on page 225. __ 12. Power on the modem. At the front of the modem press the ON/OFF switch, 21 [Figure 218]. The light in the switch comes on when the modem is powered on. Note: Pressing the ON/OFF switch is the same as unplugging the modem from its AC power source and plugging it back in. Each time you power the modem off then on, it performs its power-up diagnostics. These tests take about 5 seconds and the modem ignores all commands while diagnostics are running. If the TST light is on steady (not blinking) for more then 5 seconds after the test, the modem has detected an error. Repair the problem using the trouble shooting section of the user guide supplied with the modem.

224

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

Microcom DeskPorte Modem T/D O/A ON/OFF

TST DCD DTR TXD RXD

Front View

21

MultiTech MultiModem

Power

Front View

21
Figure 218. Modem Front Panel Locations (S008412l)

__ 13. Continue with Install the MSA

Install the MSA


__ 1. Plug the MSA connect cable 7 [Figure 215] into the MSA PCI card installed in the back of the Master Console PC 6 [Figure 215]. Plug the other end of the cable into the side of the MSA 16 [Figure 219].
TOP
EQUINOX
MultiPort Serial Adapter

16
1

SuperSerial Technology

SST
9

17
2

ON LINE 10

18
3 11 4 12

13

14

15

16

Figure 219. Multiport Serial Adapter Top View (S009175)

__ 2. Continue with Install the Ethernet Hub or Switch.

Install the Ethernet Hub or Switch


Attention: Connecting to a customer network without the use of the ethernet hub is not supported by IBM. The use of the ethernet hub is not optional.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

225

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


Note: Newer versions of the ESSNet may use an Ethernet switch instead of an Ethernet hub, refer to Figure 221 on page 229. The following procedures will use the term hub, but may refer to either a hub or switch. __ 1. Is this the first 2105 to be installed on this Ethernet hub? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, the Ethernet hub is already installed, go to Routing the Ethernet Cables to the Ethernet Hub on page 228. __ 2. Locate the Ethernet hub next to the MSA. __ 3. Verify that the power cord supplied matches your input power. You may have to obtain a power converter or adapter locally. __ 4. Connect the power cord to the customer power outlet to power on the hub. __ 5. Verify that the Ethernet hub Power LED is lit after the hub is powered on. Note: If the Power LED is not lit, there is a problem with the Ethernet hub or the power source. Repair or replace, as required, then continue with the next step. __ 6. Continue with Routing and Connecting the Cables to the Master Console.

Routing and Connecting the Cables to the Master Console


__ 1. You must use one of the following methods to continue the installation of the 2105 subsystem: v If you are familiar with procedures listed in Table 32, you can use the table as a checklist and source of further reference information. v If you are not familiar with the procedures, continue with Connecting the 2105 to the MSA.
Table 32. Begin Install of the Master Console Step __ 2. Routing and Connecting the Cables to For Reference Information, Go to: the Master Console Check Procedures Connect the 2105 clusters to the MSA. Note: Cluster 1 of first 2105 must be connected to MSA port 1. Route the ethernet cables to the ethernet hub. Connecting the 2105 to the MSA Note: Ensure that the ferrite cores are located inside the 2105 frame. Routing the Ethernet Cables to the Ethernet Hub on page 228 Note: Ensure that the ferrite cores are located inside the 2105 frame. Power on, and Connect the Master Console to the Ethernet Hub on page 229

__ 3.

__ 4.

Power on and connect the Master Console to the ethernet hub. Note: Verify the LIC code installed on the Master Console is at the same level as the Master Console LIC CD-ROM in the ship group. Continue with Configuring the Master Console on page 231.

__ 5.

__ 2. Continue with Configuring the Master Console on page 231.

Connecting the 2105 to the MSA


__ 1. Locate the two null-modem cables (P/N 34L7144, length 15 meters, 50 feet) in the ship group. __ 2. Route the null modem cables up through the 2105 front center tailgate. Ensure that the Ferrite cores on the cables are located inside the 2105

226

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


frame. This is needed to minimize RFI and to provide a loop to allow the I/O drawer to be moved to the service position. The additional cable length can be stored in the area between the AC input connectors __ 3. Determine if this is the first 2105 Model 800 being installed on the MSA: v If this is the first 2105 Model 800 being installed on the MSA, go to step 7. v If this is not the first 2105 Model 800 being installed on the MSA, continue with the next step. __ 4. Connect cluster 1 11 [Figure 215] to the next available MSA port: v Plug the null-modem cable connector labeled CLUSTER S3 10 [Figure 215], into the cluster 1, S3 connector 19 [Figure 220], on the front of cluster 1. v Plug the other end of the cable labeled MODEM EXPANDER into the lowest numbered port on the top of the MSA, see Figure 219 on page 225. __ 5. Connect cluster 2 12 [Figure 215] to the next available MSA port: v Plug the null-modem cable connector labeled CLUSTER S3 9 [Figure 215] to the S3 connector 20 [Figure 220] on the front of cluster 2. v Plug the other end of the cable labeled MODEM EXPANDER into the lowest numbered port on the top of the MSA, see Figure 219 on page 225.

I/O Drawer 1

I/O Drawer 2

19
Front View

20

Figure 220. Cluster to Modem Connectors (S009133)

__ 6. Go to Routing the Ethernet Cables to the Ethernet Hub on page 228. __ 7. Connect cluster 1 11 [Figure 215] to MSA port 1: v Plug the null-modem cable connector labeled CLUSTER S3 10 [Figure 215], into the cluster 1, S3 connector 19 [Figure 220], on the front of cluster 1. v Plug the other end of the cable labeled MODEM EXPANDER into Port 1 17 [Figure 219], on the top of the MSA. __ 8. Connect cluster 2 12 [Figure 215] to MSA port 2: v Plug the null-modem cable connector labeled CLUSTER S3 9 [Figure 215] to the S3 connector 20 [Figure 220] on the front of cluster 2. v Plug the other end of the cable labeled MODEM EXPANDER into Port 2 18 [Figure 219], on the top of the MSA. Attention: Both clusters must be connected to the MSA for the 2105 service strategy to work.
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

227

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


__ 9. Continue with Routing the Ethernet Cables to the Ethernet Hub.

Routing the Ethernet Cables to the Ethernet Hub


__ 1. Locate the three Ethernet (RJ45) cables (PN 18P1896) in the ESSNet ship group. v Two RJ45 cables go between the I/O drawers and the ethernet hub. v One RJ45 cable goes between the Master Console and the ethernet hub. __ 2. Label and route one RJ45 cable between the 10/100 Base T (RJ45) connector on each the I/O drawer and the ethernet hub. Ensure that the Ferrite cores on the cables are located inside the 2105 frame. This is needed to minimize RFI and to provide a loop to allow the I/O drawer to be moved to the service position. The additional cable length can be stored in the area between the AC input connectors. Do not connect the cables to the I/O drawers at this time. __ 3. Label and route one RJ45 cable between the Master Console and the ethernet hub. Note: Label each cable using available customer-supplied labels and methods. __ 4. Connect the other end of each cable to the recommended port (1X to 15X) on the hub in Figure 221 on page 229, do not connect to either hub port 16MDI-X or 16MDI. See Table 33 for the recommended 2105 Model 800 I/O drawer hub port connection sequence. Label all RJ45 cables. Note: Label each cable using available customer-supplied labels and methods.
Table 33. 2105 Model 800 Recommended Ethernet Hub Connection Sequence 2105 Subsystem Being Installed 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I/O Drawer 1, Hub Connector 1X 2X 3X 4X 5X 6X 7X I/O Drawer 2, Hub Connector 9X 10X 11X 12X 13X 14X 15X

228

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

2105 Subsystem #1 Cluster 1 I/O Drawer

Ethernet 10/100 Base T (RJ45) connector 10/100 ESSNET* Ethernet RJ45 cable Ethernet Hub 1X 2X 3X 4X 5X 6X 7X

Master Console

Master Console RJ45 cable 8X

IBM

9X

10X

11X

12X 13X

14X

15X 16 MDI-X 16 MDI MDI PORT Customer Port (non-crossover) Customer Port (crossover)

MDI-X PORTS Front View 2105 Subsystem #1 Cluster 2 I/O Drawer 10/100

Ethernet 10/100 Base T (RJ45) connector * Note: See table for recommended plugging of additional 2105 subsystem connections to the Ethernet Hub

8X
Crossover

16 Ethernet Switch
Figure 221. Ethernet Hub Locations (s009615)

__ 5. Continue with Power on, and Connect the Master Console to the Ethernet Hub.

Power on, and Connect the Master Console to the Ethernet Hub
__ 1. Is the Master Console already installed? v Yes, go to Configuring the Master Console on page 231. v No, continue with the next step. __ 2. Check that the voltage setting for the input power (115V or 230V) is correct for the Master Console. The switch is above the power connector on the rear of the PC. __ 3. Power on the Master Console PC (monitor, mouse, and keyboard) using the documentation that came with the hardware being used as the Master Console. Note: If the Master Console fails to power on and boot, go to MAP 1600: ESSNet Console Problem in chapter 3 of Volume 1.
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

229

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


__ 4. Verify that the code installed on the Master Console is at the same level as the latest LIC CD-ROM in the ship group: v If it is the same level, continue with the next step. v If it is not the same level, do this step to update the code. a. Locate the latest Master Console LIC CD-ROM included in the Master Console ship group. b. Determine the code level installed on the Master Console. Power on the Master Console and observe the monitor during the boot process. After several screens of boot information, the code level will be displayed in the format: console code level 2-1.12 ### code rpm level: turs-1219b just before the message: Press ENTER to continue, time-out in 30 seconds. c. Is the Master Console code at the same level as the LIC CD-ROM? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, use the hardcopy readme instructions that are included with the LIC CD-ROM to update the code. When the update is complete, then return here and continue with the next step. __ 5. Wait for the Master Console to power up and display the Linux Welcome to IBM TotalStorage ESS Master Console login prompt. __ 6. Connect one end of an Ethernet RJ45 cable to port 8 of the ethernet hub. Connect the other end to the ethernet port on the Master Console PC. __ 7. Verify that the Port 8 Link LED is lit. Note: If there is an LED on the PC Ethernet card, this LED should also be on. Is the Port 8 Link LED lit? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, there is a problem with the ethernet hub, ethernet cable, or Master Console. Repair or replace as required, and then continue with the next step. __ 8. Continue with Configuring the Master Console on page 231.

230

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

Configuring the Master Console


Note: The IBM TotalStorage ESS Master Console will be referred to as the Master Console in this document.

Login
__ 1. At the Master Console Login window, log in using the userid of service and the default password of service (or the locally assigned password). __ 2. Close the Message of the Day window. __ 3. At the Master Console desktop screen, double click the Console Launcher icon. __ 4. At the Master Console Launcher screen, type in the password service and then click the Connect button. Note: It will take a few seconds until it comes up. __ 5. At the Localhost: Hardware Management Console screen, click on Console Actions in the Views frame. __ 6. Is the Master Console already installed ? v Yes, go to step Serial Port Configuration, Master Console to Cluster on page 233. v No, continue with the next step. __ 7. Continue with Initial Network Settings.

Initial Network Settings


__ 1. At the Console Actions frame, double click on Console Settings. __ 2. At the Console Settings screen, enter the Master Console TCP/IP Information in the displayed fields using the Communications Resources Worksheets for Master Console (appendix B). Notes: a. If the customer did not provide this information, use the default values of essnet2, IP address of 172.31.1.250, and a Subnet Mask of 255.255.255.0. b. Please verify that any leading zeros are deleted from the IP address. __ 3. After all the information has been entered, click the OK button. __ 4. At the Warning pop-up screen, click the Yes button. The PC will reboot. Note: The reboot activates the network interface and allows network communication to all of the attached ESS subsystems. Re-login as service. Double click the Console Launcher icon. At the Master Console Launcher screen, type in the password service and then click the Connect button. At the Localhost: Hardware Management Console screen, click on Console Actions in the Views frame. Continue with Date and Time Settings.

__ 5. __ 6. __ 7. __ 8. __ 9.

Date and Time Settings


__ 1. At the Console Actions frame, double click on Customize Console Date Time icon.
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

231

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


__ 2. At the Customize Console Date Time screen, update the console clock with the current Time and Date. Note: Changing the date and time may activate the screen saver. Update the Time-Zone. Click the OK button. At the Customize Console pop-up screen, click OK. Click Cancel to return to the Console Actions frame. Continue with Remote Service Settings.

__ 3. __ 4. __ 5. __ 6. __ 7.

Remote Service Settings


Note: Use the information from the Communications Resources Worksheets for Master Console (appendix B) for the following procedure. __ 1. At the Console Actions frame, double click on Remote Service Settings icon. __ 2. Using the worksheets, set the Remote Service Setting screen options that the customer has selected. __ 3. Click on the OK button. __ 4. Continue with Call Home Settings.

Call Home Settings


Note: Use the Communications Resources worksheets for Master Console (appendix B) to set the Call Home settings that the customer has indicated. __ 1. At the Console Actions frame, double click on Call Home Settings icon. __ 2. At the Call Home Settings screen, click on Call Home Settings tab. __ 3. Verify that the customer has selected to Enable Call Home. Did the customer select Enable Call Home? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, verify that the Enable Call Home box is not checked. Click the OK button, and then go Serial Port Configuration, Master Console to Cluster on page 233. __ 4. Place a check in the Enable Call Home box. __ 5. Select one of the following delivery methods (Select Call Home Interface) that the customer has indicated: v Modem v IBM Intranet v Autoselect __ 6. Under Dumps and Traces, select the delivery method to be used for dumps and traces as indicated by the customer: v Use the same Setup as Call Home v Use the IBM FTP Data Repository Server Note: If the option Use the IBM FTP data repository server was selected, fill in the Destination information that is provided by the IBM product support organization. Usually the default values can be used. Then select the kind of FTP firewall to be used as indicated by the customer:

232

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


a. If the customer provides no FTP firewall, select the option Use No Firewall. Make sure that the customer is aware that using no firewall is a possible security risk. b. If the customer provides a passive FTP firewall, select the option Use Passive FTP Firewall and fill in the firewall information as provided by the customer. c. If the customer provides a relay FTP firewall, select the option Use Relay FTP Firewall and fill in the firewall information as provided by the customer. __ 7. Click on the Phone Settings tab. __ 8. Enter the Dial Out Settings that the customer has indicated. Where possible, please provide four different phone numbers. Notes: a. Be sure and read the instructions under phone list selection before you start entering phone number information. b. The Dial Out Settings must be entered even if the IBM Intranet has been selected as delivery method in step 5 on page 232. c. The Dial Out prefix will be automatically inserted during dialling. d. US and Canada. Select local numbers as the first three phone numbers to dial and then Nationwide Toll as the fourth selection. Click on the Machine Information tab. At the RETAIN Machine Settings screen, enter the 2105 machine information for the 2105 Model 800 being installed. Click the OK button. Is this installation being performed by two service representatives (SRs)? v Yes, SR #2 should continue with Routing Host System cables and Connecting the 2105 Model 800 to the Host System on page 254. v No, continue with Serial Port Configuration, Master Console to Cluster.

__ 9. __ 10. __ 11. __ 12.

Serial Port Configuration, Master Console to Cluster


Attention: Do not continue with this procedure unless the 2105 subsystem has successfully completed the IML following a service terminal subsystem install. The service terminal will then instruct you to return to the service guide and Complete the Physical Install of the 2105. __ 1. At the Console Actions frame, double click on Communication Adapter Configuration icon. __ 2. At the Communications Adapter Configuration screen, verify that Multiport Serial Adapter has been selected. Also verify that Disable Terminal Emulation on All Ports has not been selected. __ 3. Enable each new Port ID for terminal emulation: a. At the Communication Adapter Configuration screen, select the Port ID that matches the port cable installed on the Multiport Serial Adapter. b. Click on the Port ID and when the Port ID is highlighted, click Edit. c. Click the Yes button at the Terminal Emulator Enabled entry. Leave the Terminal Emulator Speed at its default value of 38400 and click Autodiscover. Note: Autodiscover will attempt to discover information from the port connection to the 2105. If information is not discovered (the port

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

233

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


may be busy), the SR can edit these fields manually. The editable fields are not required for the port to be functional. d. At the Autodiscover pop-up screen, click Yes. e. At the Edit Port window, click OK. f. Repeat steps 3a on page 233 through 3e for each new Port ID that is connected to a 2105 cluster. At the Communications Adapter Configuration screen, click OK to return to the Console Actions screen. Verify that you can access each cluster. Double click the ESS Terminal Selector icon on the desktop. Select the configured Port (cluster) and verify that the Home/Login screen is displayed for each cluster. Close both login screens by pressing the following keys: a. Press and release the Ctrl and A keys. b. Press and release the X key. c. Enter Yes to leave the minicom session. Close the ESS Terminal Selector window. Continue with Connect the 2105 to the Ethernet Hub and Configure Cluster and Master Console IP Addresses.

__ 4. __ 5. __ 6. __ 7.

__ 8. __ 9.

Connect the 2105 to the Ethernet Hub and Configure Cluster and Master Console IP Addresses
Attention: The 2105 and cables in this procedure are ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap during this procedure. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: Use the Communication Resources Worksheets (appendix A) to set the ESS configuration settings that the customer has indicated. __ 1. Disconnect the cluster to cluster communication Ethernet (RJ45) cable 1 [Figure 222] from both I/O drawers. Leave the cable in the 2105. Note: Cluster to cluster communication will be restored in the following steps.

I/O Drawer 1

I/O Drawer 2

Front View

Figure 222. Cluster to Cluster Communication Cable Location (S009120)

__ 2. Connect an Ethernet RJ45 cable to the 10/100 BaseT (RJ45) connector on each I/O drawer, see Figure 221 on page 229.

234

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


Connect the other end of each cable to the recommended port (1X to 15X) on the hub in Figure 223 on page 236, do not connect to either hub port 16MDI-X or 16MDI. See Table 34 for the recommended 2105 Model 800 I/O drawer hub port connection sequence. Label all RJ45 cables. Note: Label each cable using available customer-supplied labels and methods.
Table 34. 2105 Model 800 Recommended Ethernet Hub Connection Sequence 2105 Subsystem Being Installed 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I/O Drawer 1, Hub Connector 1X 2X 3X 4X 5X 6X 7X I/O Drawer 2, Hub Connector 9X 10X 11X 12X 13X 14X 15X

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

235

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

2105 Subsystem #1 Cluster 1 I/O Drawer

Ethernet 10/100 Base T (RJ45) connector 10/100 ESSNET* Ethernet RJ45 cable Ethernet Hub 1X 2X 3X 4X 5X 6X 7X

Master Console

Master Console RJ45 cable 8X

IBM

9X

10X

11X

12X 13X

14X

15X 16 MDI-X 16 MDI MDI PORT Customer Port (non-crossover) Customer Port (crossover)

MDI-X PORTS Front View 2105 Subsystem #1 Cluster 2 I/O Drawer 10/100

Ethernet 10/100 Base T (RJ45) connector * Note: See table for recommended plugging of additional 2105 subsystem connections to the Ethernet Hub

8X
Crossover

16 Ethernet Switch
Figure 223. Ethernet Hub Locations (s009615)

__ 3. Verify that the Port Link LED is lit when each Ethernet cable is connected to the Ethernet hub. Are both Link LEDs lit when the two cables are connected? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, there is a problem with the Ethernet hub, Ethernet cables, or the I/O drawer planar assembly FRU in the cluster. Repair or replace, as required, and then continue with the next step. Note: Verify that the 2105 cluster is powered on. __ 4. Configure the 2105 for the Master Console attachment. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu Call Home / Remote Services Menu Change / Show Master Console Host Name and IP Address

236

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


After the warning screen is presented: __ a. Enter the information from the Communications Resources Worksheet for the ESS Master Console (appendix B) for the ESSNet TCP/IP host name and internet address. Note: The customer must provide this information if the Master Console is already attached, or will be attached, to the customer network. If the customer did not provide this information, use the default values of 172.31.1.250 and essnet2. __ b. After the information is entered, using the Command Status screen, verify that the changes were activated and completed successfully. Return to the Master Console. Is the Hardware Management Console screen displayed? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, double click the Console Launcher icon. At the Master Console Launcher screen, type in the password service and then click the Connect button. Continue with the next step. At the Views frame, click on the Groups icon. At the Groups frame, double click on the ESS Networks icon. At the ESS Networks frame, select (single click) the ESS Network 1 icon. At the ESS Networks Tasks frame, double click on ESS Configurations. At the ESS Configurations screen, click on the Add button.

__ 5.

__ 6. __ 7. __ 8. __ 9. __ 10.

__ 11. Enter the Cluster IP Address for each cluster of the ESS that you are attaching to this Master Console. Note: It is recommended that the IP Addresses be entered in the same sequence that the cables are attached to the MSA ports. Future isolation will be much easier if the sequence is the same. __ 12. Click the OK button. __ 13. Verify that steps 10 through 12 have been done for each ESS subsystem attached to the Ethernet hub. __ 14. Click the Apply button. Was N/A returned in one or more columns? v Yes, this indicates that the Master Console cannot communicate with the subsystem. Check the network settings for both the ESS and Master Console. For additional diagnostic tests and help, go to Test Subsystem Communication on page 388. When the problem is resolved, continue with the next step. v No, continue with the next step. __ 15. Click the OK button. __ 16. Continue with Verifying the Master Console Network Setup

Verifying the Master Console Network Setup


__ 1. Will the ESSNet be connected to the Customer Network as part of this installation?

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

237

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


v Yes, go to step Master Console Backup and Restore Configuration Data. v No, continue with the next step. __ 2. Double click on the ESS Specialist Launcher icon on the desktop. __ 3. Accept any COPYRIGHT and informational message displayed while the browser is starting. __ 4. Click on the 2105 Model 800 cluster (or enter the cluster hostname or the IP address) that you want to connect to. This will start a new browser window and start the ESS Specialist on the selected cluster. __ 5. Exchange the New Site Certificate by clicking the Next button until the Finish button appears. Click the Finish button to finalize the exchange process. Note: If you get a Certificate Name Check, click the Continue button. Click OK on the Netscape: Secure Document pop-up screen. If the title Welcome to IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server was displayed, the web browser has connected correctly to the selected cluster. Close the web browser. Repeat steps 4 through 7 for the other cluster. Did the web browser connect correctly to each selected cluster? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to MAP 5000: TotalStorage ESS Specialist Cannot Access Cluster in chapter 3 of Volume 1. Close all Netscape windows. Continue with Master Console Backup and Restore Configuration Data.

__ 6. __ 7. __ 8. __ 9.

__ 10. __ 11.

Master Console Backup and Restore Configuration Data


Note: A DOS formatted diskette, previously formatted with Windows, is required to perform this procedure. You can not create a DOS formatted diskette using the LINUX Master Console. __ 1. At the Console Actions frame, double click on Backup/Restore Console Configuration Data. Note: If this procedure is being done out of the normal install sequence, you may need to double click on the ESS Specialist Launcher icon on the desktop to get to the Console Actions frame. Select the Backup tab. Click on the Backup Console Configuration Data to Diskette button. Follow the directions given to install a diskette and backup the configuration data. When the backup is successful, continue with the next step. Close the Backup/Restore Console Configuration Data window. At the views frame, click on the Console Actions icon. At the Console Actions frame, double click on the Logoff icon. At the Localhost: Hardware Management Console pop-up screen, click the Cancel button. Continue with Configuring the 2105 on page 239.

__ 2. __ 3. __ 4. __ 5. __ 6. __ 7.

__ 8.

238

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

Configuring the 2105


This procedure will perform the communication configuration of the 2105 Model 800. Logical configuration will be done during a later procedure. Use the Communications Resources Worksheets (Appendix A) that the customer has supplied to perform the following tasks.

Configure Customer Information


__ 1. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu Change / Show Customer Information Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet __ 2. Continue with Configure SIM Reporting Options (System/390 only).

Configure SIM Reporting Options (System/390 only)


Note: If the 2105 subsystem is not attached to a System/390 host, skip to Configure Maximum Overall Problem Presentation Count. __ 1. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu Change/Show SIM Reporting Options Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet. __ 2. Continue with Configure Maximum Overall Problem Presentation Count.

Configure Maximum Overall Problem Presentation Count


__ 1. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu Change/Show Maximum Overall Problem Presentation Count Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet. __ 2. Continue with Enable or Disable ESS Specialist.

Enable or Disable ESS Specialist


__ 1. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu ESS Specialist Menu Enter Enable / Disable ESS Specialist information as indicated in the Communication Resources Worksheet __ 2. Continue with Configure Call Home and Remote Services.

Configure Call Home and Remote Services


Note: Configuring call home and remote services before the modem is physically installed, will result in an error in the problem. __ 1. Do you have a Master Console?
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

239

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to step 3. __ 2. Do the following configuration based on Master Console hardware (MSA): From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu Call Home / Remote Services Menu Change / Show Call Home via Master Console or via Modem Expander After the warning screen is presented: a. Select Change / Show Call Home via Master Console or via Modem Expander. b. Verify that Call Home is set to [via MasterConsole] c. After the information is entered, using the command status screen, verify that the changes were activated and completed successfully. d. Go to step 5. __ 3. Do the following configuration based on ESSNet 1 hardware (Modem Expander): From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu Call Home / Remote Services Menu Change / Show Call Home via Master Console or via Modem Expander After the warning screen is presented: a. Select Change / Show Call Home via Master Console or via Modem Expander. b. Verify that Call Home is set to [via Modem Expander]. c. After the information is entered, using the Command Status screen verify that the changes were activated and completed successfully. __ 4. Do the following configuration based on ESSNet 1 hardware (Modem Expander): From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu Call Home / Remote Services Menu Change / Show Modem Configuration Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet. When entering modem information, always select the Microcom DeskPorte modem (even if you are installing a Multitech MultiModem). __ 5. Configure the remaining Call Home / Remote Services: From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu

240

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


Configure Communication Resources Menu Call Home / Remote Services Menu Change / Show Call Home / Remote Services Enter information from the Communications Resources Worksheets. Notes: a. When all of the Call Home/Remote Service information has been entered, verify that both is selected for the Update settings for which cluster? option. b. The following numbers do not have to be entered if the ESS is connected to a Master console: Remote Phone Number 1, Remote Phone Number 2, Support Catcher number. All other information must be entered. __ 6. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu Call Home / Remote Services Menu Change / Show Call Home Heartbeat Interval Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet. a. The default interval is seven days. If the customer has selected seven days as the interval, no change is required. b. The length of time between call-home heartbeat calls, from the ESS clusters to IBM, can be set from zero to 15 days. It is recommended that this be left at 7 days. IBM uses this record to monitor the health of the call-home process for each cluster and send error recovery summaries. If you enter zero, the ESS does not send a call-home heartbeat. c. If you have step-ahead storage feature (FC 9500), you must not set the call-home interval to zero. __ 7. Continue with Configure E-Mail.

Configure E-Mail
Note: The following actions must be performed on both clusters. __ 1. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu E-Mail Menu Change / Show Error Notification Count Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet then return to the Configure E-Mail Menu and select one of the following: Smart-Host Relay Menu - Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet then return to the Configure E-Mail Menu and select: - Change Local E-Mail Configuration

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

241

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


- Enter information from the Communication Resources worksheet. Note: Local E-Mail and Smart-Host Relay can not be enabled at the same time. Add E-Mail Destination - Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet then return to the Configure E-Mail Menu and select: - Change / Show E-Mail Destination Settings - Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet. __ 2. Continue with Configure SNMP.

Configure SNMP
__ 1. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu SNMP Menu Change / Show SNMP Configuration Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet. Add SNMP Trap Destination Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet. __ 2. Continue with Configure Pager Users.

Configure Pager Users


Note: This menu will allow both the customer and the service personnel to enter pager information. __ 1. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu Pager Menu Change / Show Maximum Pager Problem Presentation Count Enter the information from the Communications Resources worksheet. Pager Users Menu Add a Pager User Enter the information from the Communications Resources worksheet. __ 2. Continue with Configure Fibre Channel Port Topology.

Configure Fibre Channel Port Topology


Note: Control switches will need to be set if this ESS has fibre channel host connections.

242

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


__ 1. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Systems Attachment Resources Menu Configure Fibre Channel Port Configure all fibre channel ports on the ESS. Select the desired host port and then set the Network Topology Type to either Point-to-Point_FCP, Point-to-Point_FICON, or FCAL (arbitrated loop) as indicated in the Communications Resources Worksheets. __ 2. Continue with Configure Control Switches.

Configure Control Switches


Note: Control switches only need to be set for any of the following conditions: v Fibre-channel FCP host connections are installed (Fibre Channel LUN Access Control) v CUIR is installed (Allow CUIR to Automatically Vary Paths OFF/ON) v WEB Copy Services enable for S/390 (WEB Copy Services commands for S/390 volumes) __ 1. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Change / Show Control Switches Fibre Channel LUN Access Control Enter information from the Communications Resources Worksheet. Note: Control switches cannot be set by the customer using the ESS Specialist. You, the field service representative, must set the control switches correctly for fibre channel operation. AS/400 LUN Serial Number Suffix Enter information from the Communications Resources Worksheet. WEB Copy Services commands for S/390 volumes Enter the Enabled/Disabled information from the Communications Resources Worksheet for ESS Copy Services (Appendix C). Allow CUIR to Automatically Vary Paths OFF/ON Enter the Enabled/Disabled information from the Communications Resources Worksheet. __ 2. Continue with Connecting an ESSNet1 or Master Console to a Customer Network.

Connecting an ESSNet1 or Master Console to a Customer Network


Note: The IBM TotalStorage ESS Master Console will be referred to as the Master Console in this document. __ 1. Is the ESSNet already attached to the customers network? v Yes, go to Testing Customer E-Mail and SNMP on page 248. v No, continue with the next step. __ 2. Will the ESSNet be attached to the customer network at this time? v Yes, continue with the next step.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

243

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


v No, go to Testing Modem Communications on page 248. Determine the ESSNet console type, see Figure 224: v If the console has a Multiport Serial Adapter (MSA), you have a Master Console. Continue with the next step. v If the console has a modem expander, you have an ESSNet1, go to MAP 1620: Connecting the ESSNet1 Console to a Customer Network in chapter 3 of Volume 1.

__ 3.

EQUINOX

MultiPort Serial Adapter

SST
SuperSerial Technology

Multiport Serial Adapter (Master Console-FC 2717)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON LINE

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
15 16 13 14 11 12 9 10 7 8 5 6 3 4 1 2

Modem Expander (ESSNet1)

Rear View
Figure 224. MSA and Modem Expander Diagram (s009415)

__ 4. Have you already used customer supplied TCP/IP information to configure the ESS clusters and Master Console? v Yes, go to step 5. v No, go to Master Console Configuration for Customer Network. __ 5. Did the customer supply Gateway or Nameserver information? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to Connect and Test the Customer Network Connection on page 247. __ 6. Are you sure that the Gateway or Nameserver information was entered on both ESS clusters and the Master Console? v Yes, go to Connect and Test the Customer Network Connection on page 247. v No, go to Master Console Configuration for Customer Network.

Master Console Configuration for Customer Network


Note: The IBM TotalStorage ESS Master Console will be referred to as the Master Console in this document. __ 1. Verify that the Master Console is configured with the customer network settings from the Communications Resources Worksheets before continuing with the next step. __ a. At the Master Console desktop, double click on the Console Launcher icon, then type in the password service and click the Connect button. Note: It will take a few seconds to start. __ b. At the Localhost: Hardware Management Console screen, click on Console Actions in the Views frame.

244

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


__ c. At the Console Actions frame, double click on Console Settings. __ d. At the Console Settings screen, verify or enter the ESSNet TCP/IP information in the displayed fields using the Communications Resources Worksheets (appendix B). Note: Please verify that any leading zeros are deleted from the IP address. __ e. After all the information has been entered, click the OK button. __ f. At the Warning pop-up screen, click the Yes button. The PC will reboot. Re-login as service and double click the Console Launcher icon. Note: The reboot activates the network interface and allows network communication to all of the attached ESS subsystems. __ 2. Continue with 2105 Cluster Configuration for the Customer Network.

2105 Cluster Configuration for the Customer Network


__ 1. Verify that the customer network TCP/IP information is set per the customer provided Communication Resource worksheets. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communication Resources Menu Change / Show TCP/IP Configuration Minimum Configuration & Startup (Dual Cluster Version) __ a. Select en0 and press Enter. Note: If the customer wants to use the et0 Ethernet interface, call your next level of support. Verify the TCP/IP fields are set correctly. Press Enter to save the values. At the Verify Cluster to Cluster Communication screen, select Verify Cluster to Cluster Communication. After OK is displayed, verify the data displayed is correct then press F3.

__ b. __ c. __ d.

__ e.

Note: Pressing F3 will cause the daemons to restart and may take up to 10 minutes to complete. __ 2. Update the Master Console TCP/IP information per the customer provided Communication Resource worksheets. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communication Resources Menu Call Home / Remote Services Menu Change / Show Master Console Host Name and IP Address After the warning screen is presented:

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

245

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


__ a. Enter the information from the Communications Resources Worksheet for the ESS Master Console (appendix B) for the ESSNet TCP/IP host name and internet address. __ b. After the information is entered, using the command status screen, verify that the changes were activated and completed successfully. __ 3. The ESS Specialist Certificate must be regenerated. Disable the ESS Specialist on the local cluster. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu ESS Specialist Menu Enable/Disable the ESS Specialist Select Disabled the ESS Specialist. On the cluster, select Both. __ 4. Create a new ESS Specialist Certificate. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu ESS Specialist Menu Create New Key Files/Certificate Follow the service terminal instructions. __ 5. Enable the ESS Specialist. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu ESS Specialist Menu Enable/Disable the ESS Specialist Select Enabled the ESS Specialist. On the cluster, select Both. __ 6. Press F10 to logout from the cluster. __ 7. You must repeat steps 1 on page 245 through 6 for each 2105 subsystem attached to this Master Console before going to the next step. __ 8. Continue with Verify Cluster IP Address on the Master Console.

Verify Cluster IP Address on the Master Console


Note: Use the Communication Resources Worksheets (appendix A) to set the ESS configuration settings that the customer has indicated. __ 1. At the Master Console desktop, double click on the Console Launcher icon. Then type in the password of service and click the Connect button. __ 2. At the Views frame, click on the Groups icon. __ 3. At the Groups frame, double click on the ESS Networks icon. __ 4. At the ESS Networks frame, select (single click) the ESS Network 1 icon. __ 5. At the ESS Networks Tasks frame, double click on ESS Configurations. __ 6. At the pop-up warning screen, click the OK button.

246

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


__ 7. At the ESS Configurations screen, highlight any cluster that shows an NA, then click the Delete button. At the Delete Confirmation pop-up screen, click the Yes button. Repeat this step for all clusters. __ 8. Click the Add button and enter the Cluster IP Address for each cluster of the first ESS subsystem attached to this Master Console. Note: It is recommended that the IP Addresses be entered in the same sequence that the cables are attached to the MSA ports. __ 9. Click the OK button. __ 10. Verify that steps 8 through 9 have been done for each remaining ESS subsystem attached to this Master Console. __ 11. Click the Apply button. Note: If N/A is returned in one or more columns, the subsystem indicated can not be communicated with. Check the network settings for both the ESS and the Master Console. __ 12. Click the OK button. __ 13. Continue with Connect and Test the Customer Network Connection.

Connect and Test the Customer Network Connection


__ 1. Plug the customers RJ45 cable into the hub or switch. If the customers connector requires a non-crossover port, use port 16MDI. If the customer requires a crossover port, use 16MDI-X, see Figure 221 on page 229. Never connect a cable in both connectors 16MDI-X and 16MDI at the same time. For more information, refer to documentation provided with hub. Note: On an Ethernet hub, Port 16 may be two separate connectors. On an Ethernet switch with a single port 16 connector, a switch will determine if the connector is: 1. a non-crossover port, or 2. a crossover port. Refer to Figure 221 on page 229. __ 2. Verifying the Network Connection by use of ESS Specialist on the Master Console: __ a. Verify that the Master Console is powered on and the web browser is started. __ b. Click on the browsers Home button. This will display the Enterprise Storage Servers network home page. __ c. Click on the ESS Specialist button on the left side of the panel. __ d. Click on each 2105 Model 800 cluster (1 and 2) that you want to connect to. This will start a new browser window and start the ESS Specialist on the selected cluster. __ e. Did the web browser connect correctly to each Cluster? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to MAP 5000: TotalStorage ESS Specialist Cannot Access Cluster in chapter 3 of Volume 1. __ 3. Have the customer verify the connection by bringing up the ESS Specialist to one of the attached 2105 clusters. Did the web browser connect correctly to the selected cluster? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to MAP 5000: TotalStorage ESS Specialist Cannot Access Cluster in chapter 3 of Volume 1.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

247

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


__ 4. Continue with Testing Customer E-Mail and SNMP.

Testing Customer E-Mail and SNMP


__ 1. Use the service terminal to test the network connection with the E-Mail Test to a customer defined E-mail recipient. __ 2. Connect the service terminal interface cable to the S2 connector on the front of cluster 1 and log into cluster 1. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Machine Test Menu Send Test Notification Menu Customer Notification (via E-Mail) Follow the instructions on the service terminal to send E-mail to a customer designated E-mail recipient. __ 3. Use the service terminal to test the network connection with the SNMP test to a customer defined SNMP recipient: From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Machine Test Menu Send Test Notification Menu Customer Notification (via SNMP) Follow the instructions on the service terminal to send a customer notification via SNMP. __ 4. Verify that the E-mail and the SNMP notification were received by the customer. __ 5. When the E-mail and SNMP messages are successful, move the service terminal interface cable to S2 on cluster 2. Repeat the same tests, steps 1 to 4, on cluster 2. __ 6. Continue with Testing Modem Communications.

Testing Modem Communications


__ 1. Connect the service terminal interface cable to the S2 connector [Figure 225] on the front of cluster 1 and log into cluster 1. If the Master Console terminal emulator is enabled, use it not the service terminal. __ 2. Select Machine Test Menu from the Main Service Menu. __ 3. Select Send Test Notification Menu from the Machine Test Menu __ 4. Select Service Notification (via modem) from the Send Test Notification Menu. __ 5. Follow the instructions on the service terminal to test call home problem reporting to IBM. __ 6. Verify that the message was received at the IBM RETAIN system. __ 7. Determine if the Pager User was configured: v If the Pager User WAS configured, go to step 8. v If the Pager User was NOT configured, go to step 13 on page 249. __ 8. Select Machine Test Menu from the Main Service Menu. __ 9. Select Send Test Notification Menu from the Machine Test Menu __ 10. Select Pager Notification (via Pager) from the Send Test Notification Menu. __ 11. Follow the instructions on the service terminal to test call home problem reporting to IBM.

248

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


__ 12. Verify that the page was received. __ 13. When the service notification message from cluster 1 is received by the IBM RETAIN system is successful, move the service terminal interface cable to S2 on cluster 2. Repeat the same test on cluster 2.
I/O Drawer 1/2

CLUSTER 1 CLUSTER 2 Cluster Connectors S1 S2 S3 Front View

Front View

Figure 225. Cluster Connectors for Service Terminal (S009132)

__ 14. Continue with Activating LIC Features.

Activating LIC Features


Note: This procedure requires the LIC Feature Control Records diskette. Even though a diskette may have been provided in the ship group or MES, you should always download the latest version from ViewBlue. See Check On ViewBlue If LIC Features Have Been Ordered For This Machine on page 170. Requirements: Must have the DOS diskette containing the LIC Feature Control Record specifically written for the selected 2105 storage server. The diskette will be labeled FEA#####.BIN, with ##### the serial number of the 2105. Procedure: __ 1. Is a LIC Feature Control Records diskette available? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to Installing Required Microcode on page 250. __ 2. Connect the service terminal interface cable to the S2 connector on the front of cluster 1. __ 3. Log the service terminal into cluster 1. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Licensed Internal Code Maintenance Menu LIC Feature Menu Activate LIC Feature a. Follow all of the screen instructions, they will guide you through the diskette insertion and removal steps.
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

249

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


b. When completed, all LIC features will be enabled per the file record on the diskette. Note: When the LIC features are displayed, a serial number will be listed on the right. This is a unique Serial Number for the LIC feature and it will be different from the 2105 serial number. In some cases this may appear as 00-00000 (no action is required). __ 4. Continue with Configure Copy Services.

Configure Copy Services


__ 1. Have you installed any Copy Services features on this machine? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to Installing Required Microcode. __ 2. Is the customer using Copy Services with the Domain Name Server (DNS) configured? v Yes, go to Configure Copy Services, With DNS on page 410. After Copy Services is configured, return here and continue with the next step. v No, go to Configure Copy Services, Without DNS on page 412. After Copy Services is configured, return here and continue with the next step. Note: Use the Communications Resources Worksheets for Copy Services (Appendix C) information to determine the use of DNS. __ 3. Continue with Installing Required Microcode. END OF INSTALL PHASE 3:

Installing Required Microcode


Note: Although the 2105 Model 800 installation is considered complete, there is one more check that should be made before giving this machine to the customer. To verify the highest level of customer satisfaction, you must install any new microcode that has been determined to be required microcode. __ 1. Determine if there is a required level of microcode available for your 2105 Model 800 by visiting the Shark Engineering Website: http://snjlnt01.sanjose.ibm.com/lez9/SharkPE.nsf/wvhome. __ 2. Is there a level of microcode that is specified on the website as required for your 2105 Model 800? v Yes, this machine should not be given to the customer until the required microcode is installed. Then continue with the next step. v No, go to Completing the Installation of the 2105 on page 251. __ 3. The installation of any new microcode should be charged against the microcode EC (service code 33). Instructions for ordering microcode are included on the website. Follow the microcode loading instructions that come with the new microcode. When the new microcode is loaded, continue with the next step. __ 4. Continue with Completing the Installation of the 2105 on page 251.

250

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

Completing the Installation of the 2105


START OF INSTALL PHASE 4:

This section describes the actions that you will do to complete the installation of the 2105. That includes DDM certification, logical configuration, install reporting, final checks and customer hand-over. Determine the process to be used to complete the installation of the 2105. Use Table 35 to determine the steps required to complete the installation.
Table 35. Install Completion Process Conditions The logical configuration will not be built by the IBM service representative or no logical configuration information was provided. The logical configuration was supplied on an ISA diskette. The logical configuration was produced on a diskette using the Copy Services Option of Duplicating the configuration of an ESS Subsystem. The logical configuration information was supplied on Configuration Planner Worksheets only. Table 36. Logical Configuration will be not be performed by SR Task Certify the DDMs Perform additional testing of retain connection Route and connect host system cables For Reference Information, Go to Certify DDMs on page 252 Additional Testing of Retain Connection for Problem Notification and Data Upload (Master Console only) on page 253 Routing Host System cables and Connecting the 2105 Model 800 to the Host System on page 254 Finish the Install on page 259 Perform the actions in Table Table 36 Table 37 Table 38 on page 252 Table 38 on page 252

Finish the install

Table 37. Logical Configuration Import from ISA Diskette Task Perform Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA Perform additional testing of retain connection Route and connect host system cables For Reference Information, Go to Perform Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA on page 258 Additional Testing of Retain Connection for Problem Notification and Data Upload (Master Console only) on page 253 Routing Host System cables and Connecting the 2105 Model 800 to the Host System on page 254 Finish the Install on page 259

Finish the install

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

251

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


Table 38. Logical Configuration using ESS Specialist or Copy Services Duplication Task Certify the DDMs Build the logical configuration using the ESS Specialist or Duplicating the Configuration of an ESS Subsystem Perform additional testing of retain connection Route and connect host system cables For Reference Information, Go to Certify DDMs Logical Configurations on page 257

Additional Testing of Retain Connection for Problem Notification and Data Upload (Master Console only) on page 253 Routing Host System cables and Connecting the 2105 Model 800 to the Host System on page 254 Finish the Install on page 259

Finish the install

Certify DDMs
__ 1. Check that all DDM drawers are formatted. Connect the service terminal to the working cluster. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Install/Remove Menu DDM Bay (Drawer) Menu Format DDM Bays (Drawers) Did you see the message, There are no device drawers needing format? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, take the option to Format All Drawers Listed. When the format has completed, continue with the next step. __ 2. Will the DDM certify be run overnight or will you be leaving the customer site? v Yes, perform a background certify using the Perform Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA option. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Install/Remove Menu Enterprise Storage Server Menu Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA Menu Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA Set Certify DDMs to Yes and Import and build logical config from ISA to No. When you return to the site, continue with step 7 on page 253. v No, continue with the next step. __ 3. It is recommended that you use the Master Console (MC) instead of the service terminal to certify the DDMs. The certify process requires that the terminal emulator session for service login, stays connected until certify is complete. If you choose to use your service terminal, it will have to stay connected to the 2105 until the certify is completed. This process will normally take between 35 minutes and 2 hours, depending on the machines configuration (number of DDM bays, DDM capacity, and DDM speed).

252

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


Will the MC be used to certify the DDMs? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to step 6. __ 4. Verify that a service terminal is not logged into or connected to either cluster of the ESS. __ 5. Use the Master Console terminal emulator to login to the 2105 Model 800 and perform the ESS Configuration: a. On the Linux desktop, double click on the ESS Terminal Selector icon. b. Select the cluster 1 port for the ESS that you are installing. c. Press Enter, then read the instructions and press Enter again to bring up the Terminal Login screen. d. Login as service. __ 6. Run DDM Certify to verify that all DDMs are free from defects. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Machine Test Menu SSA Devices Certify Menu Select All Drawers/DDMs Listed Below to start Certify on all DDMs. Certify will normally take between 35 minutes and 2 hours, depending on the machine configuration (number of DDM bays, DDM capacity, and DDM speed). Notes: a. Certify time can be reduced by selecting Enable distributed operations. This will spread the workload across both clusters. b. During Certify the service terminal must remain connected and cannot be used for other service functions. __ 7. After the certify is started, continue with the next step. __ 8. Was a Master Console installed during this installation ? v Yes, go to Additional Testing of Retain Connection for Problem Notification and Data Upload (Master Console only). v No, go to Routing Host System cables and Connecting the 2105 Model 800 to the Host System on page 254. .

Additional Testing of Retain Connection for Problem Notification and Data Upload (Master Console only)
Note: Data is sent to RETAIN using two protocols. One for problem notification, and one for data upload (PE packages, dumps or traces). Both protocols should be tested. The data can be sent to Retain via the Modem or the IBM Intranet (Internal IBM accounts). 1. Log into the master console with the user service and the password as previously set (the default is service). 2. At the Master Console desktop screen, double click on the Console Launcher icon. 3. Click on the Console Actions icon. 4. Double-click the Console Status icon on the Console Actions frame. The Console Status window is displayed.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

253

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


5. Click on the Test RETAIN Connection tab. This displays the configured phone numbers, and a network connection. The network connection is only available if the LAN is connected to the IBM intranet. 6. Select the first phone number or the IBM Intranet. 7. Click on the Test Problem Notification button to start the test. 8. The test results are displayed in a window, with information on how to fix any problems if the test was not successful. 9. Click the Test Data Upload button, to start the test. 10. The test results are displayed in a window, with information on how to fix any problems if the test was not successful. 11. Repeat steps 6 through 10 until all specified phone numbers or IBM Intranet have been tested for both protocols. 12. Continue with Routing Host System cables and Connecting the 2105 Model 800 to the Host System.

Routing Host System cables and Connecting the 2105 Model 800 to the Host System
Attention: The 2105 and cables in this procedure are ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap during this procedure. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4.

Cluster 1

Cluster 2

Front View

ESD Discharge Pad

Top View Tailgate

ESD Discharge Pad

Figure 226. 2105 Model 800 ESD Discharge Pad Locations (S009141)

__ 1. Label the SCSI, ESCON, and Fibre host cables from each customer host adapter. Route the cables (referenced in the Configuration Worksheets) to the front of the 2105 Model 800. Note: To allow correct connection and disconnection of external cables, cables should be labeled using the customers current cable-identification plan and the labels provided by your customer. __ 2. Verify that the customer has installed and configured the system software changes at the host that are needed to support the 2105 Model 800 subsystem attachment. __ 3. Identify the 2105 Model 800 host bay that the host cables from the host will be attached to using the Configuration Worksheets from either the: v IBM Enterprise Storage Server Configuration Planner for S/390 and eServer zSeries book, form number SC26-7476 or

254

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


v IBM Enterprise Storage Server Configuration Planner for Open-System book, form number SC26-7477 Attention: To prevent electrostatic discharge, verify you discharge all SCSI host cables to the ESD discharge pad [Figure 226], before you plug them into the 2105 Model 800. The ESD discharge pads are mounted on the front right and left corners of the 2105 Model 800 frame, next to each tailgate. __ 4. Route and connect the host cables to the appropriate host bay [Figure 227]. Allow a loop of about 1 meter (3 feet) under the 2105 or floor, to allow the bays to be moved to their service position. Note: Save the wrap tools removed from each Fibre or Escon host card. The wrap tool can be used as a dust cover and a wrap tool for diagnosis and repair.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

255

Installing the 2105 Subsystem

Host Bays

R1-B1

R1-B2

R1-B3

R1-B4

Front View Ultra SCSI Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4 SCSI Connectors ESCON Link Connectors ESCON Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4

ZA ZB

ZA/LINK 00 ZB/LINK 01

Fibre Channel Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4 Fibre Channel Card Type LW2 (Long Wave Card) SW2 (Short Wave Card) Fibre Link Connectors Link A

Figure 227. 2105 Model 800 Host Bay Connector Locations (S009135)

Note: There are two types of Fibre channel cards: v Short Wave (SW2) v Long Wave (LW2) __ 5. Verify that all of the signal and interface cables that enter the 2105 Model 800 are retained by the tailgate cable clamps: v Cluster 1 tailgate, 1 [Figure 228] v Cluster 2 tailgate, 2 [Figure 228] Verify that the tailgate hardware is installed correctly. See 2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation on page 316.

256

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


Note: The SSA device cables to a attached 2105 Expansion Enclosure do not pass through the tailgate. They are routed up through the top of the frames.

Front View
Figure 228. Tailgate Cable Strain Relief Clamps (S009143)

Are you using the Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA process? v Yes, continue with Finish the Install on page 259. v No, continue with the next step. __ 7. Have you been asked to enter or build the logical configuration for the customer? v Yes, continue with Logical Configurations. v No, continue with Finish the Install on page 259. END OF INSTALL PHASE 4:

__ 6.

Logical Configurations
START OF INSTALL PHASE 5:

Attention: You must wait for the Certify DDMs process to complete, then continue with the next step. __ 1. Do you have a diskette produced on another ESS using Duplicating the Configuration of a 2105 ESS Subsystem? v Yes, go to Duplicating the Configuration of a 2105 ESS Subsystem on page 391. a. Verify that all steps under Source ESS Subsystem Requirements on page 391 and Target ESS Subsystem Requirements on page 392 were done previously. b. Follow Duplicate the Configuration on the Target ESS Subsystem on page 393 to import the logical configuration.
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

257

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


c. Return here and continue with Finish the Install on page 259. v No, continue with the next step. __ 2. Use the provided configuration planner worksheets to build the logical configuration. Please reference the Model 800 Install Tip on Retain for the latest guidance (n:t/p;2105 800 Install). Do the following : v To configure open systems volumes, you must use the ESS Specialist and the IBM Enterprise Storage Server Configuration Planner for Open-System book, form number SC26-7477 v To configure S/390 custom volumes, you must use the ESS Specialist and the IBM Enterprise Storage Server Configuration Planner for S/390 and eServer zSeries book, form number SC26-7476 (Appendix B). __ 3. Continue with Finish the Install on page 259.

Perform Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA


This section will provide instructions on how to use the Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA option. This option will Import an ISA diskette, then start an automatic operation to perform a DDM certify and a build of the logical configuration. While the automatic process is running, you will be asked to complete the remaining install tasks and then leave. The ESS will call home when the operation completes or if a problem is detected. 1. Check that all DDM drawers are formatted. Connect the service terminal to the working cluster. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Install/Remove Menu DDM Bay (Drawer) Menu Format DDM Bays (Drawers) Did you see the message, There are no device drawers needing format? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, take the option to Format All Drawers Listed. When the format has completed, continue with the next step. 2. Create a PE password. This will be needed by your next level of support if a problem occurs while the ESS is performing the automated operation. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Install/Remove Menu Enterprise Storage Server Menu Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA Menu Create a PE password Write the password here: ______________________ 3. Start the process. Press F3 to return to the Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA Menu: a. Select Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA b. On the Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA panel, take all the defaults of Yes. Provide details of a Customer or SR who can be contacted by the Support Center when the process has completed. c. Follow the on screen guidance to Import the supplied ISA diskette. 4. Is the ESS being attached to open systems fiber channel hosts?

258

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to step 6. 5. Is the WWPN (World Wide Port Name) information available for the attached open system hosts? v Yes, use the on-screen options to update the WWPN information. This enables the ESS volumes to become available without any further action. v No, this information must be entered later by the customer using the ESS specialist. 6. The service terminal will be logged off automatically following successful completion of the ISA diskette import. 7. Did you install a Master Console with this ESS? v Yes, continue with Additional Testing of Retain Connection for Problem Notification and Data Upload (Master Console only) on page 253. v No, continue with Routing Host System cables and Connecting the 2105 Model 800 to the Host System on page 254. END OF INSTALL PHASE 5:

Finish the Install


START OF INSTALL PHASE 6: 1. Has the customer ordered the remote power control feature? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to step 3. 2. Attach the remote power control cable from each host to the remote power control card 2 [Figure 229].
(R1- )

Front View
Figure 229. Tailgate Cable Strain Relief Clamps (S009145)

3. Set the Local/Remote switches on both RPC cards to the power control mode that the customer requires:

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

259

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


v Automatic Power Mode: (RPC card switch 3 is Off, Local/Remote in Remote) The 2105 Model 800 will power on when power is present on one or both mainline power cables. This happens only once after both lines cords have been powered off. The operator panel Local Power switch can still power the subsystem on and off. v Local Power Control Mode: (RPC card switch 3 is Off, Local/Remote in Local) Subsystem power is controlled by the 2105 Model 800 operator panel Local Power switch. v Remote Power Control Mode: (RPC card switch 3 is On, Local/Remote in Remote) Subsystem power is controlled by the host S/370 power control interface connection. The operator panel Local switch can power the subsystem off but not on. Note: For additional information on power control, refer to Switching the ESS power on and off (Local, Automatic or Remote) in chapter 1 of Volume 1. Attention: The remote power control feature is now enabled but it has not been tested. Remind the customer that they need to test that the remote power control feature is operating correctly.
Address Switches 0 1 1 0 1 2 0 1 3 0 1 4 0 1 5 1 6 0 0 1 RPC Power Select Switch

RPC-1 Card

RPC-2 Card

AUTO or REMOTE

LOCAL

Rear View

RPC-2 Switch Card

RPC-1 Switch Card

Figure 230. RPC Card Local/Remote Switch Locations (S009146)

4. Place the following items in the front and rear document enclosures for future reference and use: v Copies of the configuration worksheets v Spare ship group components v CD-ROMs v Spare labels v Cable planning worksheets v Host card wrap tools 5. Reference the pack/unpack instructions for return/discard information. Discard the shipping material locally. 6. Did you use the Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA process? v Yes, continue with Finish the Install (Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA) on page 261.

260

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


v No, continue with the next step. 7. Using the service terminal select End of Call Status option. Complete the Installation Tracking Report and then verify that all problems have been resolved: From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Repair Menu End of Call Status Complete the Installation Tracking Report. Resolve all exception conditions to ensure that all resources will be available for customer use. 8. Disconnect the service terminal cables from the 2105 Model 800 and remove the service terminal from the table. 9. Push the service terminal table 1 [Figure 231] in until the latches on each side engage the frame on both sides.

Front View
Figure 231. Storing the Service Terminal Table (S009144)

10. Complete all installation records. 11. Update the account records to include this installation. Installation is Complete: the installation of the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server is now complete. The 2105 is now ready for the installation of additional features, ECs, MESes, or to give the machine to the customer. Verify that you charge any additional time to the correct service code. Do not charge the additional time to the 2105 installation. END OF INSTALL PHASE 6:

Finish the Install (Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA)
1. Verify that you completed steps 1 on page 259 to 5 on page 260 of Finish the Install. 2. Logon to the service terminal. Were you sent directly to a monitor display panel?
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

261

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, this indicates that either a problem occurred or the automatic process already completed. Continue with stepAdditional Checkout, Monitor Panel was not Displayed. 3. Check the upper part of the monitor display to verify that none of the process steps show failed. Do any of the steps show as failed? v Yes, do the following: a. Logoff from the service terminal. b. Wait 5 minutes. c. Logon to the service terminal. d. The Main Menu should now be displayed. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Repair Menu View / Display Problems Needing Repair e. Use the problems and isolation procedures to repair the problem and then restart or continue as directed. v No, continue with the next step. 4. Complete the Install report. Use option i on the monitor display. Notes: a. For DDM Certify/RETAIN, you should only record the time taken to do the additional Retain Testing (if done). b. For LOGICAL CONFIGURATION, you should record the time to import the ISA diskette and update the WWPN (if done). Quit from the Monitor display. Use option q. Disconnect the service terminal cables from the 2105 Model 800 and remove the service terminal from the table. Push the service terminal table 1 [Figure 231] in until the latches on each side engage the frame on both sides. Complete all installation records. Update the account records to include this installation. Installation is Complete: The on-site part of the installation is now complete. Follow local procedures to contact the support center and inform them that this ESS is running an automated install process. Provide them with the 2105 serial number, PE password generated earlier, and the Retain Test Call PMR number (if available). Note: If you need to return to site to perform additional procedures, verify that you charge any additional time to the correct service code. Do not charge the additional time to the 2105 installation. END OF INSTALL PHASE 6:

5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Additional Checkout, Monitor Panel was not Displayed


1. Determine why the monitor display did not appear. Display problems. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Repair Menu Show / Repair Problems Needing Repair

262

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Subsystem


Were there any Problems to Repair? v Yes, repair the problems. You will be directed to an isolation procedure that provides guidance. v No, continue with the next step. 2. Determine whether all automated Install processes completed successfully. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Install/Remove Menu Enterprise Storage Server Menu Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA Menu Show Status of Certify / Build Process Did all selected Tasks complete successfully? v Yes, go to step 7 on page 261 to complete the installation. v No, this is unexpected without a problem. Call your next level of support.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

263

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure

Installing and Testing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


Attention:A 2105 Expansion Enclosure can only be installed with a 2105 Model 800.

Entry for 2105 Expansion Enclosure MES


These instructions describe: v v v v What to do before you install the 2105 Expansion Enclosure rack. How to install the 2105 Expansion Enclosure rack. How to power on the 2105 Expansion Enclosure and test the installation. How to complete the 2105 Expansion Enclosure installation.

Checking Worksheets
__ 1. To avoid confusion and delays during the install process, verify that the IBM Marketing Representative or the IBM Business Partner has worked with the customer to fill out the Communications and Configuration Worksheets. Verify that the customer has filled out the Communication Resources Worksheets and the Configuration Worksheets for the 2105 Model 800 being installed. For the Communication Resources worksheets, refer to the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server Introduction and Planning Guide book, form number GC26-7444. For the Configuration Worksheets, refer to either the: v IBM Enterprise Storage Server Configuration Planner for S/390 and eServer zSeries book, form number SC26-7476 or v IBM Enterprise Storage Server Configuration Planner for Open-System book, form number SC26-7477 __ 2. Continue with Entry for 2105 Expansion Enclosure with 2105 Model 800.

Entry for 2105 Expansion Enclosure with 2105 Model 800


This section verifies the following: v Customer preparation (installation planning) v Unpack 2105 Expansion Enclosure and check ship group v Perform safety check and shipping damage check Attention: If you are installing a 2105 Expansion Enclosure, do the following checks. The serial number shown on the Expansion Enclosure packaging material and the Expansion Enclosure operator panel must be the same as the 2105 Model 800. Do not continue with the installation if the serial numbers are different. __ 1. You must use one of the following methods to install the 2105 Expansion Enclosure: v If you are familiar with procedures listed in Table 39 on page 265, you can use the table as a checklist and source of further reference information. v If you are not familiar with the procedures, continue with Checking Customer Preparation on page 265.

264

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


Table 39. Before You Install the 2105 Expansion Enclosure Step __ 2. Required Preparations for Install (For 2105 Expansion Enclosure) Verify that the customer has: v AC power from two different sources for each rack being installed. v Raised floor can support the additional weight: 2105 Expansion Enclosure, maximum 1339 kilograms (2950 pounds) 2105 Model 800 and 2105 Expansion Enclosure, maximum 2541 kilograms (5600 pounds) Verify the Ship Group is Complete on page 266 For Reference Information, Go to: Checking Customer Preparation

v Correct cooling airflow and temperature __ 3. Unpack the 2105 Expansion Enclosure and use the ship group parts list to verify all items were received. Attention: If you are installing a 2105 Expansion Enclosure, do the following checks. The serial number shown on the Expansion Enclosure packaging material and the Expansion Enclosure operator panel must be the same as the 2105 Model 800. Do not continue with the installation if the serial numbers are different. __ 4. __ 5. Inspect for shipping damage. Perform the Safety Inspection if the 2105 Expansion Enclosure was previously installed and not leased from or maintained by IBM. Continue with How to Install the 2105 Expansion Enclosure on page 266. Inspect for Shipping Damage on page 266 Safety Inspection on page 266

__ 6.

Checking Customer Preparation


__ 1. Verify the customer has two ac power sources for each rack in the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. For maximum fault tolerance, these should be from two separate ac power sources . Note: The IBM 2105 Expansion Enclosure is designed for connection to an IT power distribution system. An IT power distribution system is one where the neutral conductor is isolated from earth (ground) by an impedance with exposed conductive parts in the installation tied directly to earth. No service support representative action is needed, information is for compliance with international Electrotechnical Commission standard 950 for the safety of information technology equipment, and electrical business equipment __ 2. When the 2105 Expansion Enclosure will be installed on a raised floor, verify the customer has adequate support. Attention: The weight of each rack should be reviewed with the customer to verify that their raised floors have adequate support:
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

265

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


v 2105 Expansion Enclosure, maximum 1339 kilograms (2950 pounds) v 2105 Model 800 and 2105 Expansion Enclosure, maximum 2541 kilograms (5600 pounds) v 2105 Model 800, maximum 1202 kilograms (2650 pounds) __ 3. To correctly cool a 2105 Expansion Enclosure, place two floor tiles that have holes for airflow, directly in the front and rear of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. Also provide tiles with holes, for power cable entry, under the middle tailgate. Note: The 2105 Expansion Enclosure rack cooling airflow comes in through the front and rear covers and leaves through the top and rear covers. The bottom of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure is sealed. __ 4. Continue with Verify the Ship Group is Complete.

Verify the Ship Group is Complete


Place a check mark next to each completed step. __ 1. Remove the CE Unpacking Instructions from the CE envelope taped to the front of the bagged 2105 Expansion Enclosure. Use the CE Unpacking Instructions to unpack the 2105 Expansion Enclosure and prepare it for installation. Attention: If you are installing a 2105 Expansion Enclosure, do the following checks. The serial number shown on the Expansion Enclosure packaging material and the Expansion Enclosure operator panel must be the same as the 2105 Model 800. Do not continue with the installation if the serial numbers are different. __ 2. Verify that all items in the ship group were received. See the parts list (B/M 18P4772) in the ship group box. __ 3. Place the ship group parts list at the end of this manual for use during removal of the 2105 subsystem. __ 4. Continue with Inspect for Shipping Damage.

Inspect for Shipping Damage


__ 1. Inspect the 2105 Expansion Enclosure for any damage that might have occurred during shipping. If you observe shipping damage or missing items, do not install the 2105 Expansion Enclosure without IBM management approval. Report all observed damage immediately, following existing procedures. __ 2. Continue with Safety Inspection.

Safety Inspection
__ 1. Perform the safety inspection if the 2105 Expansion Enclosure was previously installed and was not previously leased from IBM or maintained by IBM service support representatives. See Safety Inspection in chapter 12 of Volume 3, to perform this inspection. __ 2. Continue with How to Install the 2105 Expansion Enclosure.

How to Install the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


This section describes positioning the 2105 Expansion Enclosure, attaching to the 2105 Model 800, and preparation for customer power checks. v If this is a raised floor installation, position the 2105 Expansion Enclosure for installation v Install the rack spacers

266

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


v Lock casters v Install the primary power supply interconnect cables v Install the top hat CAUTION: A fully configured unit in the crate can weigh up to 1500 kilograms (3305 pounds). Using less than three persons to move it can result in injury. (1060) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3.

Position the 2105 Expansion Enclosure Rack


If you have any questions about floor loading and service clearances of the ESS racks, review the Site Requirements for the ESS section in the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server Introduction and Planning Guide book, form number GC26-7444. __ 1. Verify that the location meets the necessary service clearances for the 2105 subsystem, refer to Site Requirements for the ESS section in IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server Introduction and Planning Guide book, form number GC26-7444. __ 2. Position the floor tiles with ventilation hole for cable entry to the front of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure, as shown in the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server Introduction and Planning Guide book, form number GC26-7444. __ 3. Remove the end cover and its mounting hardware from the right side of the 2105 Model 800. Note: If you are installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure by yourself, this step may be easier if the front and rear covers are removed first. Remove the front and rear covers next to the end cover being removed. Lift and remove the hinge pins from the top and bottom hinges of the cover, and then remove and set the cover away from the 2105. End Cover Removal Procedure a. Loosen and remove the two locknuts and washers (near 8 ) that hold the end cover and clamp assembly onto the bottom of the 2105 Model 800. b. Swing the bottom of the end cover out and then lift up, freeing the top of the end cover from the bracket at the top of the 2105 Model 800. Set the end cover away from the 2105. c. Remove the two top brackets from the end of the 2105 Model 800. __ 4. Install the end cover mounting hardware and end cover onto the right side of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure by reversing the above End Cover Removal Procedure. __ 5. Verify that the 2105 Model 800 is in its permanent location. Move the 2105 Expansion Enclosure so it is next to the right side of the 2105 Model 800 from the front of the 2105 subsystem. Allow about 30 cm (12 inches) of space between the two frames. __ 6. Install the rack spacers between the 2105 Model 800 and the 2105 Expansion Enclosure: a. Refer to Figure 232 on page 268.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

267

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


b. Install the top spacer onto the top of the 2105 Model 800 so its studs 2 fit through the holes in the 2105 Model 800 frame 1 . Install the nuts onto the studs loosely so the top spacer can move freely. c. Loosely install the lower two spacer side panel mounting screws 6 into the holes on the front of the lower stiffener. d. Install the bottom spacer onto the bottom of the 2105 Model 800 so its studs 7 fit through the holes in the 2105 Model 800 frame 8 . Install the nuts onto the studs loosely so the bottom spacer can move freely. e. Position the front spacer side panel so its screw slots 5 slide onto the two screws in the front of the lower stiffener 6 . f. Push the front spacer side panel in and install the two top screws 4 . g. Install the rear spacer side panel 3 the same as the front spacer side panel. h. Move the 2105 Expansion Enclosure frame so the studs in the upper and lower spacers fit through the holes in the top and bottom of its frame. i. Install the eight nuts onto the top and bottom spacer mounting studs. Tighten all eight of the spacer nuts in both frames. j. Tighten all eight spacer side panel mounting screws.

2105 Expansion Enclosure

FRONT

6 7 8
FRONT

Figure 232. Installation of 2105 Rack Spacers (S008671q)

268

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


__ 7. Use this step to remove the rack spacer service access panels from the front 11 and rear 9 of the 2105 subsystem. a. Loosen the service panels two lower mounting screws 12 . b. Remove the service panels two upper mounting screws 10 . c. Pull the side spacer out by the handle 11 , and lift off of the lower screws 12 . d. Reinstall the service panels when service access is no longer needed.

2105 Expansion Enclosure

10 9

11
FRONT

FRONT

12

Figure 233. Rack Spacer Service Panel Removal (S008672p)

__ 8. Locate the ground strap 13 on the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. Remove one of the ground strap mounting screws. Feed the loose ground strap through the frame spacer and attach it to the 2105 Model 800 frame.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

269

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


2105 Expansion Enclosure

13

Rear View
Figure 234. 2105 Expansion Enclosure Ground Strap Location (S008670m)

__ 9. Verify the cutout floor tiles beneath the front of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure allow access to the center tailgate area. __ 10. Install the wedge chocks 14 [Figure 172] (located in the ship group) on all four casters or, if caster locks are available, engage the caster locks on all casters.

14

Figure 235. Caster Wedge Chocks (S009050)

__ 11. Install the decorative top hat onto the top of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure: a. Lift the top hat onto the top of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure, position it with IBM logo placed to the front left of the machine 15 . b. Open the front and rear covers of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. c. Install the six screws (three on each side) 17 up through the holes in the frame 16 into the threaded holes in the top hat.

270

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure

Front

15

16
(6 holes)

17
(6 screws)

Front
Figure 236. Top Hat Installation (s009554)

__ 12. Go to the rear of the expansion enclosure and locate the 390 V battery set 18 at the bottom of the frame. There should be a Date of First Charge label under the right handle of each set of batteries. Locate the Date of First Charge label on one of the battery assemblies. If the label is not there, partially remove one of the battery assemblies to expose the label that should be on the battery top cover. See 390 V Battery Set Removal and Replacement, 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure on page 135. Notes: a. Each 390 V battery set has information on a Date of First Charge label that needs to be entered into the functional code whenever batteries are replaced (or may be needed at install if the Expansion Enclosure was not tested with the 2105 Model 800. Record the date indicated on this label. b. Information from labels other than the Date of First Charge label should only be used when this label is missing.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

271

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure

(12D) Date of First Charge (Year Month Day):19990214

Figure 237. Date of First Charge Label Location (S009205)

18
Figure 238. 390 V Battery Locations (s009589)

__ 13. Continue with Checking for Feature Code 0970 (Weight Reduction).

Checking for Feature Code 0970 (Weight Reduction)


1. Using the Product Feature Codes card from the CE envelope taped to the front of the 2105 Model 800, determine if FC 0970 (weight reduction) was ordered for this machine. Was FC 0970 ordered? Attention: With FC 0970, DDM bays were removed during manufacturing and shipped on separate pallets to reduce the shipping weight required at the customers account. DDM bays must be reinstalled before continuing this installation. v Yes, go to 2105 Expansion Enclosure DDM Bay Installation with FC 0970 on page 347. Return to next step when all DDM bays are installed. v No, continue with the next step. 2. Continue with 2105 Expansion Enclosure Install.

2105 Expansion Enclosure Install


__ 1. Unroll the mainline power cables that shipped with the ship group. __ 2. Verify that all front and rear internal power and signal cables are connected and not damaged. Attention: Do not connect any external cables to the 2105 Expansion Enclosure until you are instructed to do so. __ 3. Go to the front of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. Remove the two tailgate bar mounting screws 2 then remove the bar 1 . __ 4. Feed both mainline power cables down through the center of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure 1 to the customers power connectors. CAUTION: Do not connect the mainline power cables until instructed to do so. (1053)

272

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3. v Raised floor installations, route the mainline power cables under the floor and set them next to the customers power connectors. v Non-raised floor installations route the mainline power cables to the rear of the 2105. Then route both mainline power cables and set them next to the customers power connectors.

2105 Expansion Enclosure

1
Front View

2 (2 Screws)

Figure 239. 2105 Expansion Enclosure Mainline Power Cable Installation (S008662m)

__ 5. Continue with Checking the Customer Power.

Checking the Customer Power


DANGER Lethal voltages are present in this area of the machine. (1007) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3. The fault-tolerant system on the 2105 Model 800 has two power systems. If one power system fails, the other will supply all required power. You will perform power checks, cabling, and preparation on power system 1 and on power system 2. Always perform power safety checks with the recommended analog meter. Do not use a digital meter when you perform power checks. A digital meter is sensitive to external electrical currents on the low-range scale. You will need these tools to perform the power safety checks: v IBM analog ohmmeter P/N 00P7029, Mastech Model 7040 v IBM analog multimeter P/N 9900167, or a substitute meter approved by IBM for this check. v High voltage test probe tips (or equivalent):
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

273

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


Red (P/N 1749249) Black (P/N 1749250) This section describes the power and safety checks that must be done before you power on the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. v Conduct safety power checks. v Complete ac input power checks. __ 1. You must use one of the following methods to do each of the required customer power safety checks: v If you are familiar with the customer power check procedures, you can use Table 13 on page 178 as a checklist and source of further reference information. v If you are not familiar with the customer power check procedures, continue with Determine Mainline Power Cable Type (Plug In or Wired) on page 275. Attention: You must do each required customer power safety check listed in Table 40. If you are unfamiliar with a required procedure, or the check fails, use the Go to: column for complete reference information and diagrams.
Table 40. Checking the Customers Power Step __ 2. Required Customer Power Safety Check Procedures (for 2105 Model 800 For Reference Information, Go to: and 2105 Expansion Enclosure) Determine the Mainline Power Cable Type Determine Mainline Power Cable (Plug In or Wired). Type (Plug In or Wired) on page 275 Continue with the appropriate steps below for: v Plug In, continue with step A in this table. v Wired, continue with step B in this table.

__ A. __ 3.

Plug In - Customer Power Connections Check the ground continuity of the 2105 Check 2105 Expansion Enclosure plug in mainline power cables. Mainline Power Cable Ground Note: Measurement of 1.0 ohm or less is Continuity (Plug in) on page 276 good. Check the customer receptacles ground pin voltage and continuity, with the customers CB off (plug in). Note: Voltage measurement of less than 1.0 V ac is good. Resistance measurement of 1.0 ohm or less is good. Check the customer receptacles voltage pins, with the customers CB off (plug in). Note: Voltage measurement of less than 1.0 V ac is good. Check Receptacle Ground Pin Continuity with the Customer CB Off (Plug in) on page 278

__ 4.

__ 5.

Check Customer Receptacle Voltage Pins with Customer CB Off (Plug in) on page 281

__ 6.

Check the customer receptacles voltage Check Customer Receptacle pins, with the customers CB on (plug in). Voltage Pins with the Customer CB Note: Measured voltages must match the On (Plug in) on page 284 voltage on the 2105 information label.

274

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


Table 40. Checking the Customers Power (continued) Step __ 7. Required Customer Power Safety Check Procedures (for 2105 Model 800 For Reference Information, Go to: and 2105 Expansion Enclosure) Continue with Checking the 2105 Expansion Enclosure Switch Settings on page 298.

__ B. __ 3.

Wired - Customer Power Connections Check the ground continuity of the 2105 Check 2105 Expansion Enclosure wired mainline power cables. Mainline Power Cable Ground Note: Measurement of 1.0 ohm or less is Continuity (Wired) on page 287 good. Check the customer receptacles ground pin voltage and continuity, with the customers CB off (wired). Note: Voltage measurement of less than 1.0 V ac is good. Resistance measurement of 1.0 ohm or less is good. Check the customer receptacles voltage pins, with the customers CB off (wired). Note: Voltage measurement of less than 1.0 V ac is good. Check Customer Ground Continuity with the Customer CB Off (Wired) on page 290

__ 4.

__ 5.

Check Customer Voltage with the Customer CB Off (Wired) on page 293

__ 6.

Check the customer receptacles voltage Check Customer Voltage with the pins, with the customers CB on (wired). Customer CB On (Wired) on page Note: Measured voltages must match the 295 voltage on the 2105 information label. Continue with Checking the 2105 Expansion Enclosure Switch Settings on page 298.

__ 7.

Determine Mainline Power Cable Type (Plug In or Wired)


1. Locate the customer end of the mainline power cables (MPC) from the 2105. Determine if the customer end of the mainline power cables are for plug in or wired installations: v Plug In: The cable has a plug at both ends. Go to Checking Customer Power, Plug In Mainline Power Cable on page 276. v Wired: The cable has a plug at one end and loose wires at the other end. Go to Checking Customer Power, Wired Mainline Power Cable on page 287.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

275

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure

Checking Customer Power, Plug In Mainline Power Cable


Do this procedure to verify correct customer power with plug in mainline power cables (MPC).

Check 2105 Expansion Enclosure Mainline Power Cable Ground Continuity (Plug in)
Attention: Use an IBM-approved analog multimeter. Do not use a digital meter. Attention: The 2105 Expansion Enclosure features two mainline power cables. Complete all steps of this section for both power sources and receptacles and for both power plugs, mainline power cables, and primary power supplies (PPS). __ 1. Switch off each 2105 Expansion Enclosure customer circuit breaker that supplies ac voltage to the mainline power cables. CAUTION: Do not connect the mainline power cables until instructed to do so. (1053) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3. __ 2. Attention: Attach a Do Not Operate tag (S229-0237) and the safety lockout padlock to each 2105 Expansion Enclosure customer circuit breaker. Refer to the Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers book. __ 3. Verify the system power MAIN LINE circuit breaker (CB00) 1 [Figure 240] on the rear of both primary power supplies is set to Off (down).

CB1 CB2 CB3 CB4 CB5

J1 J2 J3 J4 CB00

J5A

J5B J6

J7-1 J7-2 J7-3 J7-4 J7-5 Rear View

Figure 240. Primary Power Supply Mainline Circuit Breaker (S008099l)

__ 4. Go to the front of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. Connect each mainline power cable to its input connector on the line cord bracket connector: Note: The mainline power cables are connected to the line cord bracket next to the PPS they feed. v PPS 1, 2 [Figure 241] v PPS 2, 3 [Figure 241]

276

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure

2105 Expansion Enclosure

PPS-1

PPS-2

Front View

Figure 241. Line Cord Bracket Connectors (S008663m)

__ 5. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 ohm or less resistance. For connection information, see Figure 242 on page 278. Place one lead of the multimeter on each ground pin of the male plug on the mainline power cable. Place the other lead on the conductive metal of each primary power supply enclosure. v Good: If there is 1.0 ohm or less resistance, go to Check Receptacle Ground Pin Continuity with the Customer CB Off (Plug in) on page 278. v Bad: If there is more than 1.0 ohm resistance, go to MAP 2031: Repairing Ground Continuity in chapter 3 of Volume 1.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

277

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure

2105

Primary Power Supply

Mainline Power Cable

Metal PPS Ground Ground Customer Male Connector

Meter

Ohm

3 30/50 A

3 60 A

Good: 1.0 Ohm or less Fail: More than 1.0 Ohm

Customer AC Power

CB OFF

Figure 242. Ground Continuity Check, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009626)

Ground Three-Phase 30/50 amp Three-Phase 60 amp

Figure 243. Male Plug on the Mainline Power Cable (s009633)

Check Receptacle Ground Pin Continuity with the Customer CB Off (Plug in)
This procedure verifies that both customer outlet receptacles are grounded correctly and that there is no voltage present at either outlet when both outlet circuit breakers are off. __ 1. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 V ac or less. For connection information, refer to Figure 244 on page 279.

278

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


DANGER Do not touch the pins of either mainline power cable plugs with anything except high voltage probes until you complete this step. (1004) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3. Measure the voltage at the customers ac power outlet between the ground pin and the building ground. v Good: If the measured voltage is less than 1.0 V ac, go to step 3 on page 280. v Bad: If the measured voltage is 1.0 V ac or greater, continue with the next step.

2105

Primary Power Supply

Not Connected Mainline Power Cable

Meter

Ground Customer Female Connector

Vac

3 30/50 A

3 60 A

Good: Less than 1.0 Vac Fail: 1.0 Vac or more

Customer AC Power

CB OFF

Metal Building Ground


Figure 244. Checking the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power Off, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009628)

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

279

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure

Ground Three-Phase 30/50 amp (customer AC) Three-Phase 60 amp (customer AC)

Figure 245. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable and Customer AC (S009634)

__ 2. Voltage is present at a customer outlet with both outlet circuit breakers off. DANGER Inform the customer that, even though the circuit breaker is off, voltage higher than 1.0 V ac is measured at the failing customer voltage outlet pins. Do not continue until the voltage is less than 1.0 V ac. (1003) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3. Inform the customer that voltage higher than 1.0 V ac is measured at the ground pin of the failing customer voltage outlet. Do not continue until the voltage is less than 1.0 V ac. __ 3. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 ohm or less of resistance. For connection information, refer to Figure 246 on page 281. Measure the resistance between the customer ac power outlet ground pin on each mainline power cable and the building ground. A reading of 1.0 ohm or less shows a safe, continuous grounding conductor. v Good: If the measured resistance at the ground pin is 1.0 ohm or less, continue with Check Customer Receptacle Voltage Pins with Customer CB Off (Plug in) on page 281. v Bad: If the measured resistance is more than 1.0 ohm on the connector, inform the customer. Do not continue until the resistance is 1.0 ohm or less.

280

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure

2105

Primary Power Supply

Not Connected Mainline Power Cable

Meter

Ground Customer Female Connector

Ohm

3 30/50 A

3 60 A

Good: 1.0 Ohm or less Fail: More than 1.0 Ohm

Customer AC Power

CB OFF

Metal Building Ground


Figure 246. Checking the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power Off, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009629)

Ground Three-Phase 30/50 amp (customer AC) Three-Phase 60 amp (customer AC)

Figure 247. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable and Customer AC (S009634)

Check Customer Receptacle Voltage Pins with Customer CB Off (Plug in)
__ 1. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 V ac or less. For connection information, refer to Figure 248 on page 283.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

281

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


Measure ac voltages at the customers ac power outlet (female), see Table 41.
Table 41. Measuring Points for Three-Phase AC Voltages Phase-to-phase V ac between A and B V ac between B and C V ac between A and C Phase-to-ground V ac between A and ground V ac between B and ground V ac between C and ground

v Good: If all measured voltages (phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground) at the voltage pins on the female connector or at the customers ac power outlet (female) are less than 1.0 V ac, continue with Check Customer Receptacle Voltage Pins with the Customer CB On (Plug in) on page 284. v Bad: If any measured voltage is 1.0 V ac or greater, inform the customer that, even though the circuit breaker is off, voltage higher than 1.0 V ac is measured at the failing wired ac mainline power cable voltage pins or the failing customer voltage outlet pins. Do not continue until the voltage is less than 1.0 V ac.

282

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure

2105

Primary Power Supply

Not Connected Mainline Power Cable

Volts AC Customer Female Connector Meter

A
Vac
3 30/50 A

B C B C
3 60 A

Good: Less than 1.0 Vac Fail: 1.0 Vac or more

Customer AC Power

CB OFF

Metal Building Ground


Figure 248. Check the Three-Phase ac Power Cable Outlet, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009630)

B A C A

B C

Ground Three-Phase 30/50 amp (customer AC) Three-Phase 60 amp (customer AC)

Figure 249. Three-Phase Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable and Customer AC (S009635)

__ 2. Continue with Check Customer Receptacle Voltage Pins with the Customer CB On (Plug in) on page 284.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

283

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure

Check Customer Receptacle Voltage Pins with the Customer CB On (Plug in)
This procedure verifies that both customer outlet receptacles are grounded correctly and that the correct voltages are present at both outlets when the outlet circuit breakers are on. Always perform power checks with the recommended analog meter. Do not use a digital meter. __ 1. Remove the Do Not Operate tag and the lockout padlock from each customer mainline ac voltage circuit breaker. __ 2. Switch on each customer circuit breaker to supply mainline ac voltage to the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. __ 3. Prepare the multimeter to read line voltage AC. For connection information, refer to Figure 250 on page 285. DANGER Dangerous voltages may be present. Do not touch the internal parts (pins and connectors) of the mainline power cable plugs. (1006) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3. Measure the ac voltage at the voltage pins of each customers ac power outlet when both 2105 Expansion Enclosure customer circuit breakers are on. See Table 42, record the measurements in Table 43 on page 286. Record the measured ac voltages in step 4 on page 285 then continue from there.
Table 42. Measuring Points for Three-Phase AC Voltages Phase-to-phase V ac between A and B V ac between B and C V ac between A and C Phase-to-ground V ac between A and ground V ac between B and ground V ac between C and ground

284

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure

2105

Primary Power Supply

Not Connected Mainline Power Cable

Volts AC Customer Female Connector Meter

A
Vac
3 30/50 A

B C B C
3 60 A

Good: Correct Input Voltage Fail: Incorrect Input Voltage

Customer AC Power

CB ON

Metal Building Ground


Figure 250. Checking the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power On, with Plugged Mainline Power Cable (s009632

Ground Vac A Vac B Ground

C Vac

Three-Phase (line cord)


Figure 251. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S009636)

__ 4. Record the voltages measured, record the voltages in Table 43 on page 286.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

285

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


Table 43. Three-Phase AC Line Voltages Measure the ac Voltages Between A and B Between B and C Between A and C Power Outlet Voltage Connector 1 (PPS-1) Power Outlet Voltage Connector 2 (PPS-2)

__ 5. Continue with the next step. __ 6. Verify ac input voltages from Table 43 are correct. Locate the 2105 information label on the top corner of the right rear cover. Verify that the ac input voltage just measured matches the machine input voltage information on this label. Does the voltage measured match the voltage on the 2105 information label? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, inform the customer if the voltage is outside this range. When the problem is resolved, continue with the next step. __ 7. Switch OFF each 2105 Expansion Enclosure customer circuit breaker that supplies ac voltage to the mainline power cables. __ 8. Attention: Attach a Do Not Operate tag (S229-0237) and the safety lockout padlock to each 2105 Expansion Enclosure customer circuit breaker. Refer to the Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers book. __ 9. Connect the mainline power cables: Note: Determine if the customer will be providing an UPS (uninterruptable power system) and how many UPS connections (one or two) will be available for this frame: v If only one UPS connection is available for this frame, verify the UPS is connected to mainline power cable 1. The 390 V batteries are only charged by the primary power supply attached to mainline power cable 1. v If two UPS connections are available for this frame, connect each UPS to a mainline power cable (1 or 2). v Connect each plug in mainline power cable to each customer ac power outlet. __ 10. Go to 10 on page 298.

286

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure

Checking Customer Power, Wired Mainline Power Cable


Do this procedure to verify correct customer power with wired mainline power cables (MPC).

Check 2105 Expansion Enclosure Mainline Power Cable Ground Continuity (Wired)
Attention: Use an IBM-approved analog multimeter. Do not use a digital meter. Attention: The 2105 Expansion Enclosure features two mainline power cables. Complete all steps of this section for both power sources and receptacles and for both power plugs, mainline power cables, and primary power supplies (PPS). __ 1. Switch off each 2105 Expansion Enclosure customer circuit breaker that supplies ac voltage to the mainline power cables. CAUTION: Do not connect the mainline power cables until instructed to do so. (1053) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3. __ 2. Attention: Attach a Do Not Operate tag (S229-0237) and the safety lockout padlock to each 2105 Expansion Enclosure customer circuit breaker. Refer to the Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers book. __ 3. Verify the system power MAIN LINE circuit breaker (CB00) 1 [Figure 252] on the rear of both primary power supplies is set to Off (down).

CB1 CB2 CB3 CB4 CB5

J1 J2 J3 J4 CB00

J5A

J5B J6

J7-1 J7-2 J7-3 J7-4 J7-5 Rear View

Figure 252. Primary Power Supply Mainline Circuit Breaker (S008099l)

__ 4. Go to the front of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. Connect each mainline power cable to its input connector on the line cord bracket connector: Note: The mainline power cables are connected to the line cord bracket next to the PPS they feed. v PPS 1, 2 [Figure 253] v PPS 2, 3 [Figure 253]

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

287

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure

2105 Expansion Enclosure

PPS-1

PPS-2

Front View

Figure 253. Line Cord Bracket Connectors (S008663m)

__ 5. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 ohm or less resistance. For connection information, refer to Figure 254 on page 289. Place one lead of the multimeter on the green and yellow wire the customer end of each mainline power cable. Place the other lead on the conductive metal of each primary power supply enclosure. v Good: If there is 1.0 ohm or less resistance, continue with the next step. v Bad: If there is more than 1.0 ohm resistance, go to MAP 2031: Repairing Ground Continuity in chapter 3 of Volume 1.

288

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure

2105

Primary Power Supply

Mainline Power Cable

Metal PPS Ground


Ground Customer Connection Green/Yellow wire

Meter

Ohm

Good: 1.0 Ohm or less Fail: More than 1.0 Ohm

Customer AC Power

CB OFF

Figure 254. Ground Continuity Check with Wired Mainline, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009405)

__ 6. Disconnect each wired mainline power cable 4 [Figure 255] from the line cord bracket.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

289

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


2105 Expansion Enclosure

Front View

Figure 255. Line Cord Bracket Connectors (S008661m)

__ 7. Instruct the customer to call a licensed electrician to connect each wired mainline power cable to the customer mainline power source. Attention: For EMEA installations, review the information in EMEA Electrician Information on page 290, then return here and continue. __ 8. Continue with Check Customer Ground Continuity with the Customer CB Off (Wired).

EMEA Electrician Information


THE MAINLINE POWER CORD OF THIS MACHINE MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE CUSTOMERS MAINLINE POWER SOURCE BY A LICENSED ELECTRICIAN. THE MAINLINE POWER CABLE CANNOT BE MODIFIED IN ANY WAY. v FOR 3 PHASE MACHINES: This machine must be connected to a 3 phase ac power net. The mainline power cable is a four conductor cable with the following color code: L1 (phase 1) = black L2 (phase 2) = blue L3 (phase 3) = brown PE (ground) = green/yellow The connection to the ac power net must be made without neutral, the blue wire must be used as a phase. This machine is designed for a connection to a TN power system.

Check Customer Ground Continuity with the Customer CB Off (Wired)


This procedure verifies that both customer outlet receptacles are grounded correctly and that there is no voltage present at either outlet when both outlet circuit breakers are off. __ 1. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 V ac or less. For connection information, refer to Figure 256 on page 291.

290

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


DANGER Do not touch the pins of either mainline power cable plugs with anything except high voltage probes until you complete this step. (1004) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3. Measure the voltage between the female ground pin on each mainline power cable and the building ground. v Good: If the measured voltage is less than 1.0 V ac, go to step 3 on page 292. v Bad: If the measured voltage is 1.0 V ac or greater, continue with the next step.

2105

Primary Power Supply

Do Not Connect to 2105

Meter

Ground 2105 Female Connector

Vac

Good: Less than 1.0 Vac Fail: 1.0 Vac or more

Customer AC Power

CB OFF

Metal Building Ground


Figure 256. Check the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power Off, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009407)

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

291

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure

Ground

Figure 257. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S008046l)

__ 2. Voltage is present at a customer outlet with both outlet circuit breakers off. DANGER Inform the customer that, even though the circuit breaker is off, voltage higher than 1.0 V ac is measured at the failing customer voltage outlet pins. Do not continue until the voltage is less than 1.0 V ac. (1003) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3. Inform the customer that voltage higher than 1.0 V ac is measured at the ground pin of the failing wired ac mainline power cable. Do not continue until the voltage is less than 1.0 V ac. __ 3. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 ohm or less of resistance. For connection information, see Figure 258 on page 293. Measure the resistance between the female connector ground pin and the building ground. A reading of 1.0 ohm or less shows a safe, continuous grounding conductor. v Good: If the measured resistance at the ground pin is 1.0 ohm or less, continue with Check Customer Voltage with the Customer CB Off (Wired) on page 293. v Bad: If the measured resistance is more than 1.0 ohm on the connector, inform the customer. Do not continue until the resistance is 1.0 ohm or less.

292

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure

2105

Primary Power Supply

Do Not Connect to 2105

Meter

Ground 2105 Female Connector

Ohm

Good: 1.0 Ohm or less Fail: More than 1.0 Ohm

Customer AC Power

CB OFF

Metal Building Ground


Figure 258. Check the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power Off, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009408)

Ground

Figure 259. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S008046l)

Check Customer Voltage with the Customer CB Off (Wired)


__ 1. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 V ac or less. For connection information, see Figure 260 on page 294. Measure ac voltages at the female connector on each mainline power cable, see Table 44 on page 294.
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

293

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


Table 44. Measuring Points for Three-Phase AC Voltages Phase-to-phase V ac between A and B V ac between B and C V ac between A and C Phase-to-ground V ac between A and ground V ac between B and ground V ac between C and ground

v Good: If all measured voltages (phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground) at the voltage pins on the female connector or at the customers ac power outlet (female) are less than 1.0 V ac, continue with Check Customer Voltage with the Customer CB On (Wired) on page 295. v Bad: If any measured voltage is 1.0 V ac or greater, inform the customer that, even though the circuit breaker is off, voltage higher than 1.0 V ac is measured at the failing wired ac mainline power cable voltage pins or the failing customer voltage outlet pins. Do not continue until the voltage is less than 1.0 V ac.

2105

Primary Power Supply

Do Not Connect to 2105

Meter Volts AC Vac 2105 Female Connector

Good: Less than 1.0 Vac Fail: 1.0 Vac or more

A B

Customer AC Power

CB OFF

Metal Building Ground


Figure 260. Check the Three-Phase ac Power Cable, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009627)

294

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure

Ground Vac A Vac B Ground

C Vac

Three-Phase (line cord)


Figure 261. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S009636)

__ 2. Continue with Check Customer Voltage with the Customer CB On (Wired).

Check Customer Voltage with the Customer CB On (Wired)


This procedure verifies that both customer outlet receptacles are grounded correctly and that the correct voltages are present at both outlets when the outlet circuit breakers are on. Always perform power checks with the recommended analog meter. Do not use a digital meter. __ 1. Remove the Do Not Operate tag and the lockout padlock from each customer mainline ac voltage circuit breaker. __ 2. Switch on each customer circuit breaker to supply mainline ac voltage to the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. __ 3. Prepare the multimeter to read line voltage AC. For connection information, refer to Figure 262 on page 296. DANGER Dangerous voltages may be present. Do not touch the internal parts (pins and connectors) of the mainline power cable plugs. (1006) Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See Translation of Cautions and Danger Notices in chapter 11 of Volume 3. Measure the ac voltage at the voltage pins of each female connector on both mainline power cables when both 2105 Expansion Enclosure customer circuit breakers are on. See Table 45, record the measurements in Table 46 on page 297. Record the measured ac voltages in step 4 on page 296 then continue from there.
Table 45. Measuring Points for Three-Phase AC Voltages Phase-to-phase V ac between A and B V ac between B and C V ac between A and C Phase-to-ground V ac between A and ground V ac between B and ground V ac between C and ground

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

295

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure

2105

Primary Power Supply

Do Not Connect to 2105

Meter

Volts AC 2105 Female Connector

Vac

A
Good: Correct Input Voltage Fail: Incorrect Input Voltage

Customer AC Power

CB ON

Metal Building Ground


Figure 262. Checking the Customers Circuit Breaker with Power On, with Wired Mainline Power Cable (s009631)

Ground Vac A Vac B Ground

C Vac

Three-Phase (line cord)


Figure 263. Female Connector on the Mainline Power Cable (S009636)

__ 4. Record the voltages measured, record the voltages in Table 46 on page 297.

296

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


Table 46. Three-Phase AC Line Voltages Measure the ac Voltages Between A and B Between B and C Between A and C Power Outlet Voltage Connector 1 (PPS-1) Power Outlet Voltage Connector 2 (PPS-2)

__ 5. Continue with the next step. __ 6. Verify ac input voltages from Table 46 are correct. Locate the 2105 information label on the top corner of the right rear cover. Verify that the ac input voltage just measured matches the machine input voltage information on this label. Does the voltage measured match the voltage on the 2105 information label? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, inform the customer if the voltage is outside this range. When the problem is resolved, continue with the next step. __ 7. Switch OFF each 2105 Expansion Enclosure customer circuit breaker that supplies ac voltage to the mainline power cables. __ 8. Attention: Attach a Do Not Operate tag (S229-0237) and the safety lockout padlock to each 2105 Expansion Enclosure customer circuit breaker. Refer to the Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers manual. __ 9. Connect the mainline power cables: Note: Determine if the customer will be providing an UPS (uninterruptable power system) and how many UPS connections (one or two) will be available for this frame: v If only one UPS connection is available for this frame, verify the UPS is connected to mainline power cable 1. The 390 V batteries are only charged by the primary power supply attached to mainline power cable 1. v If two UPS connections are available for this frame, connect each UPS to a mainline power cable (1 or 2). v Connect each wired mainline power cable to each connector on the line cord bracket. Note: The mainline power cables are connected to the line cord bracket next to the PPS they feed. v PPS 1, 1 [Figure 264] v PPS 2, 2 [Figure 264]

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

297

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure

2105 Expansion Enclosure

PPS-1

PPS-2

Front View

Figure 264. Line Cord Bracket Connectors (S008664m)

__ 10. Reinstall the frame tailgate bar (center) removed earlier, see 5 [Figure 174]. __ 11. Continue with Checking the 2105 Expansion Enclosure Switch Settings.

Checking the 2105 Expansion Enclosure Switch Settings


__ 1. Go to the front of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. Set the 2105 Expansion Enclosure rack operator panel switches to the positions shown in Table 47.
Table 47. 2105 Expansion Enclosure Rack Operator Panel Switches Switch Name Unit Emergency UEPO Local/Remote Switch (inside door) Position Off (down) Push to the Left (Local)

Note: To access the UEPO Local/Remote switch, you will need to loosen the single screw on the left side of the operator panel and swing the operator panel out. Pull the Local/Remote switch out before changing its position.

298

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


2105 Expansion Enclosure Unit Emergency

2105 Expansion Enclosure

LOCAL L/R SWITCH

REMOTE

Power Complete Line Cord 1 Line Cord 2

Front View

Front View

Rear View

Figure 265. 2105 Expansion Enclosure Operator Panel Locations (S008656m)

__ 2. Go to the rear of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. Verify that the power switches on all of the installed storage cage power supplies 1 and 2 , are set to On.
2105 Expansion Enclosure Storage Cage Power Supply

Power Switch CHK/PWR Good Indicator

Rear View
Figure 266. Storage Cage Power Supply Switches (s009535)

__ 3. Verify that the five circuit breakers (CB01 to CB05) on each primary power supply 3 are set to On (up). __ 4. The main circuit breakers 4 on each primary power supply should be set to Off (down).

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

299

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure

Rear View

Figure 267. Primary Power Supply Circuit Breaker Locations (S009051)

__ 5. Each of the two power control cables must be connected to the correct RPC card in the 2105 Model 800, per Figure 268 on page 301. Each cable has two parts, the black cable connects to the PPS in the Expansion Enclosure. The white extension cable connects to the RPC card in the Model 800: v Find the white extension cable that is connected to the black cable labeled: RPC-1 / P3. Connect the white extension cable to 2105 Model 800 RPC-1 card connector J2 position 5 6 . v Find the white extension cable that is connected to the black cable labeled: RPC-2 / P3. Connect the white extension cable to 2105 Model 800 RPC-2 card connector J2 position 5 8 . a. Locate the rolled up control cables connected to the 2105 Expansion Enclosure primary power supply (PPS) J4 connectors 9 (PPS-1) and 12 (PPS-2). b. Unroll the cables. Note: Each cable assembly consists of a power cable, connected to the Expansion Enclosures PPS, and an interposer cable (P/N 18P4495) that allows the power cable to connect to the 2105 Model 800 RPC card. c. Feed the unused connector end of the cables through the rear side of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure, the rack spacer, and into the 2105 Model 800. Note: Do not attempt to route these cable through the 2105 tailgates. d. Connect the cables to the RPC cards as detailed above. Any extra cable length can be coiled in the spacer between the frames.

300

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


Top View J2 Connectors RPC-1 2105 Model 800
RPC-1 Card
J2

16 5

1
~
~

15

53

P/N 18P4495 2 RPC-2 16 5

RPC-2 Card

J2

15

7 5

~
~

P/N 18P4495 15

Rear View

RPC-1 RPC-2 Switch Card Switch Card

1 J2-5

(PPS-2, J4)

12
PPS-2 11

P/N 34L3085 P/N 34L3086

9 (PPS-1, J4)
PPS-1 10

2105 Expansion Enclosure

Rear View

Figure 268. Primary Power Interconnect Cable Installation (S009211)

__ 6. Continue with Checks for 2105 Expansion Enclosure MES.

Checks for 2105 Expansion Enclosure MES


1. Are you using MES instructions to install the 2105 Expansion Enclosure? v Yes, the SSA cables will be installed when the DDM bays are logically installed later in this procedure. Go to step 6 on page 303. v No, you are installing a 2105 Model 800 and 2105 Expansion Enclosure that shipped together and had been connected together prior to being shipped. Continue with the next step. 2. Identify the SSA cable connector label colors on the installed DDM bays in the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. Find the loose ends of each set of four cables for each SSA loop that need to be routed and connected to the 2105 Model 800. Each SSA loop has a unique color. Note: There may be 2105 Expansion Enclosure SSA device cables that have already been cabled to empty DDM bays locations for future capacity upgrades. Do Not route and connect these cables.
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

301

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


3. Route the SSA cables identified in the prior step through the cutouts at the top of each frame. Use the SSA cable connector labels locations codes to make the correct DDM bay connections. See Figure 269 and Figure 270 on page 303. Attention: When routing the new SSA cables, avoid making sharp (90 degree) bends that might damage the cables or connectors.
(R1-) Storage Cage 1 (-U1-) R1-U1-W1 R1-U1-W2 R1-U1-W3 R1-U1-W4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Storage Cage 2 (-U2-) R1-U2-W1 R1-U2-W2 R1-U2-W3 R1-U2-W4

Front View

Storage Cage 2 (-U2-) R1-U2-W5 R1-U2-W6 R1-U2-W7 R1-U2-W8


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Storage Cage 1 (-U1-) R1-U1-W5 R1-U1-W6 R1-U1-W7 R1-U1-W8

Rear View

Figure 269. 2105 Model 800 DDM bay Locations (S009136)

302

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure

Figure 270. DDM bay SSA Connector Locations (S007703l)

4. Did the 2105 Model 800 being installed come with Feature Code 0970 (DDM bays removed for weight reduction)? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to step 6. 5. Locate each pair of adjacent 2105 Model 800 DDM bays that do not have short SSA cables installed to connectors JD or J8. Find and connect the short SSA cables as shown in Figure 271. Adjacent DDM bay pairs are: (Reference Figure 269 on page 302.) v R1-U1-W1 and R1-U1-W2 v R1-U1-W3 and R1-U1-W4 v R1-U1-W5 and R1-U1-W6 v R1-U1-W7 and R1-U1-W8 v R1-U2-W1 and R1-U2-W2 v R1-U2-W3 and R1-U2-W4 v R1-U2-W5 and R1-U2-W6 v R1-U2-W7 and R1-U2-W8

JD DDM Bay J8

J8 Front View JD

Figure 271. DDM Bay Short Cable SSA Connector Locations (s009608)

6. Remove the Do Not Operate tag and the lockout padlock from each customer mainline ac voltage circuit breaker. 7. Instruct the customer to switch on each circuit breaker that supplies the mainline ac power to each customer ac power outlet or wired mainline power cable.
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

303

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


8. Switch the System Power CB 13 on the rear of each primary power supplies to On (up).

13

Rear View
Figure 272. Primary Power Supply (S009108)

9. Verify that all the 390 V battery cables are connected at battery 1 (three cables) 15 and battery 2 (one cable) 14 : v Battery 1, J1A to PPS 1, J5A v Battery 1, J1B to PPS 1, J5B v Battery 2, J1 to Battery 1, J2 Notes: a. If battery cables are disconnected set the MASTER circuit breaker (S2) on 390 V battery 1 16 to Off (down) before connecting any 390 V battery cable. b. On newer batteries, S2 is labeled CB06. 10. Set the MASTER circuit breaker (S2) on 390 V battery 1 16 to On (up). Note: This circuit breaker is normally set to off by manufacturing.
2105 Expansion Enclosure

Battery 2

Battery 1

Rear View

14

15

16

Figure 273. 2105 Expansion Enclosure 390 V Battery Circuit Breaker (S008667m)

11. Are you using MES instructions to install the 2105 Expansion Enclosure? v Yes, continue with How to Power on the 2105 Expansion Enclosure and Test the Installation on page 305. v No, continue with the next step.

304

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


12. Continue with Checking the 2105 Model 800 Switch Settings on page 202. Note: The 2105 Expansion Enclosure will be configured and tested as part of the 2105 subsystem.

How to Power on the 2105 Expansion Enclosure and Test the Installation
This section describes the actions that should be done to power on and test the 2105 Expansion Enclosure using an MES. v Powering on the 2105 Expansion Enclosure v Attachment and activation of the service terminal. v Installation using the service terminal.

Check the 2105 Expansion Enclosure Rack Operator Panel Switches


Attention: Do not install any cables until you are instructed to do so. __ 1. You must use one of the following methods to install the required power checks: v If you are familiar with the 2105 UEPO and power supply checks, you can use Table 48 as a checklist and source of further reference information. v If you are not familiar with the 2105 UEPO and power supply checks, continue with step 2 on page 306.
Table 48. Check the 2105 UEPO and Power Supplies Power Check Procedure (You must do each power check listed.) Set the operator panel Unit Emergency (UEPO) switch to OFF (also on Expansion Enclosure (EE)). Attempt to power on the 2105 Subsystem (operator panel Local Power switch). Observe the operator panel Power Complete, Line Cord LEDs (EE also). Set UEPO switch to ON (EE also). Attempt to power on the 2105 Wait up to 4 minutes for Subsystem (operator panel the final state. Local Power switch). Observe the operator panel Power Complete, Line Cord LEDs (EE also). Observe each storage cage power supplies CHK/PWR-GOOD LED (EE also). LEDs ON LEDs OFF Good Condition (If this condition is not good, use the Reference column Information.) For Reference Information, Go to: Step 2 on page 306

Step

__ 2.

__ 3.

Step 3 on page 306

__ 4.

Step 4 on page 306

__ 5. __ 6.

Step 5 on page 307 Step 6 on page 307

__ 7.

Step 7 on page 307

__ 8.

LEDs ON (green)

Step 8 on page 307

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

305

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


Table 48. Check the 2105 UEPO and Power Supplies (continued) Power Check Procedure (You must do each power check listed.) Observe each primary power supplies PWR Good LED (front of 2105 subsystem, EE also). Good Condition (If this condition is not good, use the Reference column Information.) LEDs ON For Reference Information, Go to: Step 9 on page 308

Step

__ 9.

__ 10. Observe each primary power supplies digital status display (EE also). __ 13. Continue with Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure Using the Service Terminal on page 309.

Each display is blank.

Step 10 on page 308

__ 2. On the 2105 Expansion Enclosure operator panel, set the Unit Emergency switch 2 to Off (down). __ 3. On the 2105 Model 800 operator panel, set the Local Power switch 1 to On (up) momentarily, then release it. Note: This testing is to verify that the 2105 Expansion Enclosure will not power on with the UEPO switch set to Off (down).
2105 Model 800 Unit Emergency 2105 Expansion Enclosure

2
Unit Emergency

1
Local Power

Ready Cluster 1 Cluster 2 Power Complete Line Cord 1 Line Cord 2 Messages Cluster 1 Cluster 2 Power Complete Line Cord 1 Line Cord 2

Figure 274. 2105 Expansion Enclosure Operator Panel Locations (S009420)

__ 4. Go to the 2105 Expansion Enclosure operator panel. Observe the Power Complete indicators for Line Cords 1 and 2 and perform the action described in Table 49 on page 307. Attention: If the 2105 powers on, the Unit Emergency switch is not working. You must repair the problem before continuing, see MAP 2360: UEPO in chapter 3 of Volume 1.

306

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


Table 49. 2105 Expansion Enclosure Rack Operator Panel Power Complete Indicators Power Complete, Line Cord 1 Off Blinking On Power Complete, Line Cord 2 Off Blinking On

Action Normal, go to step 5 Go to MAP 2380: 2105 Expansion Enclosure UEPO in chapter 3 of Volume 1. Go to MAP 2380: 2105 Expansion Enclosure UEPO in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step. Go to MAP 2380: 2105 Expansion Enclosure UEPO in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step. Go to MAP 2380: 2105 Expansion Enclosure UEPO in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step.

On

Off

Off

On

__ 5. On the 2105 Expansion Enclosure operator panel, set the Unit Emergency switch 2 , in Figure 274 on page 306, to On (up). __ 6. On the 2105 Model 800 operator panel, set the Local Power switch 1 , in Figure 274 on page 306, to On (up), then release it. You may have to wait up to four minutes for the final state of the Power Complete, Line Cord indicators (indicators stop blinking and remain on). Note: This power sequence testing does not require waiting for IML to complete. __ 7. Observe the Power Complete indicators for Line Cords 1 and 2 and perform the action described in Table 50.
Table 50. 2105 Expansion Enclosure Rack Operator Panel Power Complete Indicators Power Complete, Line Cord 1 On On Power Complete, Line Cord 2 On Off

Action Normal, go to step 9 on page 308. Go to MAP 2420: 2105 Expansion Enclosure Local Power On Problems in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step. Go to MAP 2420: 2105 Expansion Enclosure Local Power On Problems in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step. Go to MAP 2420: 2105 Expansion Enclosure Local Power On Problems in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step.

Off

On

Off or blinking

Off or blinking

__ 8. Observe the CHK/PWR-GOOD (check/power) indicator 1 and 2 [Figure 266], on the installed storage cage power supplies. Perform the action described in Table 51 on page 308.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

307

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


Table 51. 2105 Model 800 Storage Cage Power Supply CHK/PWR-GOOD Indicators Power Supply Action CHK/PWR-GOOD Indicators all on (green) only 1 off/amber 2 or more off/amber Normal, go to step 12 on page 213 Delay repair, go to 12 on page 213. Go to MAP 1320: Visual Symptoms in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step.

__ 9. Go to the front of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. Verify that the PWR Good indicator, 3 in Figure 275, on the front of both primary power supplies 1 and 2 is on. Perform the action described in Table 52.
2105 Expansion Enclosure

PPS 1/2
.

J8 J9

Front View PWR Good Indicator

PPS Digital Status Display Front View

3
Figure 275. Primary Power Supply (S008668n) Table 52. 2105 Expansion Enclosure Primary Power Supply PPS Good Indicators Power Supply PWR Good Indicators Both on 1 on, 1 off Both off

Action Normal, go to step 10 Go to MAP 1320: Visual Symptoms in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step. Go to MAP 1320: Visual Symptoms in chapter 3 of Volume 1. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step.

__ 10. Verify that the digital display, 4 in Figure 275, on the front of primary power supplies 1 and 2 is blank. You may have to wait up to four minutes for the final state of the Power Complete, Line Cord indicators (indicators stop blinking and remain on). v If both digital displays are blank, continue with Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure Using the Service Terminal on page 309.

308

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


v If either status display is NOT blank, go to MAP 1320: Visual Symptoms in chapter 3 of Volume 1, to isolate the problem. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step. v If both status display is NOT blank, go to MAP 1320: Visual Symptoms in chapter 3 of Volume 1, to isolate the problem. When you complete the repair, return here and continue with the next step.

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure Using the Service Terminal


The service terminal will guide you through the physical installation and testing of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. The 2105 Expansion Enclosure will be logically configured later in this procedure after testing verifies that the 2105 is operating correctly. Attention: Verify that the Configuration Worksheets are available and have been completed by both the customer and the service support representative. __ 1. Place the service terminal on the service terminal table, power it on, and connect it to the S2 connector on cluster 1 (left). Refer to Service Terminal Setup in chapter 8 of Volume 3 __ 2. Refer to the Configuration Worksheets from the IBM Enterprise Storage Server Configuration Planner book. __ 3. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Install/Remove Menu Rack Menu Install an Additional Rack __ 4. Using the configuration worksheets, follow the instructions on the service terminal to install the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. __ 5. Is the 2105 Expansion Enclosure that is being installed an empty frame (no DDM bays installed)? v Yes, logical configuration is not required, go to Completing the Installation on page 314. v No, continue with Complete the Physical Install of the 2105.

Complete the Physical Install of the 2105


This section describes the actions that will be done after the rack has been installed using the service terminal. v Check the rack and drawer indicators. v Indicator problem repair.

Checking the SSA DASD DDM Bay Indicators


The operation of all 2105 Expansion Enclosure and SSA DASD DDM bays has been verified, the operation of the previously unchecked indicators are verified here. __ 1. Observe the indicators on all front and rear SSA DASD DDM bays in the 2105 Expansion Enclosure: Refer to Figure 276 on page 310. v All disk drive module Ready indicators, On v All disk drive module Check indicators, Off v If all of the DDM Ready indicators are on, and all of the DDM Check indicators are off, continue with step 2 on page 310. v If any of the DDM Ready indicators are off, or any of the DDM check indicators are on, display and repair any related problems. If there are no related problems, replace the DDM using the service terminal. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select:
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

309

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


Repair Menu Replace a FRU Move cursor to desired item and press Enter: Select DDM bay that contains the DDM. Select the DDM you wish to replace. After the repair, continue with step 2.

Figure 276. SSA DASD DDM Bay Indicators (S008021l)

__ 2. Continue with Completing the Installation of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure.

Completing the Installation of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


This section describes the actions that should be done after the 2105 Expansion Enclosure has been physically installed. v Logically install the storage cages containing DDM bays v Connect the SSA cables to the DDM bays per service terminal instructions v v v v Logically install the DDM bays Configure subsystem Update installation records Organize installation documents and forms

Logically Install the Storage Cages and DDM Bays


This procedure will logically install both the DDM bays and the storage cages that they are installed in. __ 1. Determine the locations of the storage cages installed in the 2105 Expansion Enclosure using Figure 277 on page 312. __ 2. Logically install the storage cages. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Install/Remove Menu Storage Cage Menu Install an SSA Storage Cage Using the storage cage locations information obtained above, follow the instructions on the service terminal to logically install the 2105 Expansion Enclosure storage cages. __ 3. Determine the locations of the DDM bays installed in the 2105 Expansion Enclosure using Figure 277 on page 312. __ 4. Logically install the DDM Bays.

310

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


Note: The service terminal will tell you when and where to connect the SSA cables from the DDM bays in the 2105 Expansion Enclosure to the device cards in the 2105 Model 800. Store the extra SSA cable loops in the front and rear side spacer area. Go to Logically Installing the DDM Bay Using the Service Terminal on page 336. Return here when all of the DDM bays and SSA cables have been installed in the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. __ 5. Continue with Certify DDMs on page 312.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

311

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


2105 Expansion Enclosure (R2-) Storage Cage 1 (-U1-) R2-U1-W1 12345678 R2-U1-W2 R2-U1-W3 R2-U1-W4 Storage Cage 3 (-U3-) R2-U3-W1 R2-U3-W2 R2-U3-W3 R2-U3-W4 Storage Cage 2 (-U2-) R2-U2-W1 R2-U2-W2 R2-U2-W3 R2-U2-W4 Storage Cage 4 (-U4-) R2-U4-W1 R2-U4-W2 R2-U4-W3 R2-U4-W4

Front View

Storage Cage 2 (-U2-) R2-U2-W5 R2-U2-W6 R2-U2-W7 R2-U2-W8 Storage Cage 4 (-U4-) R2-U4-W5 R2-U4-W6 R2-U4-W7 R2-U4-W8 12345678

Storage Cage 1 (-U1-) R2-U1-W5 R2-U1-W6 R2-U1-W7 R2-U1-W8 Storage Cage 3 (-U3-) R2-U3-W5 R2-U3-W6 R2-U3-W7 R2-U3-W8

Rear View

Figure 277. Location Codes for DDM bays in a 2105 Expansion Enclosure (S007741s)

Certify DDMs
__ 1. Check that all DDM drawers are formatted. Connect the service terminal to the working cluster. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Install/Remove Menu DDM Bay (Drawer) Menu

312

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


Format DDM Bays (Drawers) Did you see the message, There are no device drawers needing format? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, take the option to Format All Drawers Listed. When the format has completed, continue with the next step. Will the DDM certify be run overnight or will you be leaving the customer site? v Yes, perform a background certify using the Perform Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA option. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Install/Remove Menu Enterprise Storage Server Menu Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA Menu Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from ISA Set Certify DDMs to Yes and Import and build logical config from ISA to No. When you return to the site, continue with step 7 on page 253. v No, continue with the next step. It is recommended that you use the Master Console (MC) instead of the service terminal to certify the DDMs. Certify will normally take between 35 minutes and 2 hours, depending on the machines configuration (number of DDM bays, DDM capacity, and DDM speed). The certify process requires that the terminal emulator session for service login, stays connected until certify is complete. If you choose to use your service terminal, it will have to stay connected to the 2105 until the certify is completed (possibly overnight). Will the MC be used to certify the DDMs? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to step 6. Verify that a service terminal is not logged into or connected to either cluster of the ESS. Use the Master Console terminal emulator to login to the 2105 Model 800 and perform the ESS Configuration: a. On the Linux desktop, double click on the ESS Terminal Selector icon. b. Select the cluster 1 port for the ESS that you are installing. c. Press Enter, then read the instructions and press Enter again to bring up the Terminal Login screen.

__ 2.

__ 3.

__ 4. __ 5.

d. Login as service. __ 6. Run DDM Certify to verify that all DDMs are free from defects. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Machine Test Menu SSA Devices Certify Menu Select All Drawers/DDMs Listed Below to start Certify on all DDMs. Certify will normally take between 35 minutes and 2 hours, depending on the machine configuration (number of DDM bays, DDM capacity, and DDM speed).

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

313

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


Notes: a. Certify time can be reduced by selecting Enable distributed operations. This will spread the workload across both clusters. b. During Certify the service terminal must remain connected and cannot be used for other service functions. __ 7. After the certify is started, continue with Logical Configurations.

Logical Configurations
__ 1. Wait for the certify DDMs process to complete, then continue with the next step. __ 2. Is the customer going to do the logical configuration of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure? v Yes, go to step Completing the Installation. v No, continue with the next step. __ 3. Use the customer provided configuration planner worksheets (appendix A and or appendix D) to do the following: v To configure open systems volumes, you must use the ESS Specialist. v To configure S/390 custom volumes, you must use the ESS Specialist. When logical configuration is complete, go to Completing the Installation.

Completing the Installation


__ 1. Disconnect the service terminal cables from the 2105 Model 800 and remove the service terminal from the table. __ 2. Push the service terminal table 1 in until the latches on each side engage the frame on both sides.

Front View
Figure 278. Storing the Service Terminal Table (S009161)

__ 3. Install the front or rear spacer service panels, see step 7 on page 269. To install the service panels, do the step in the reverse order. __ 4. Place the following items in the front and rear document enclosures for future reference and use:

314

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing the 2105 Expansion Enclosure


v Copies of the configuration worksheets v Spare ship group components v CD-ROMs v Cable planning worksheets __ 5. Complete all installation records. __ 6. Update the account records to include this installation. __ 7. Reference the pack/unpack instructions for return/discard information. Discard the shipping material locally. Installation Complete The installation of the 2105 Expansion Enclosure is complete. Return to the MES instructions that directed you here.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

315

2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation

2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation


Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. You should have started this procedure at the service terminal. Perform the tailgate cable clamp procedures only at the direction of the service terminal or other service guide procedures. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when working with cables and clamps in the tailgate area. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. __ 1. Determine if the cables you are working with are associated with: v Cluster 1 v Cluster 2 v Clusters 1 and 2

Cluster 1 (R1-T1)

Cluster 2 (R1-T2-)

Cluster 1 Tailgate
Front View

Cluster 2 Tailgate

Figure 279. 2105 Model 800 Cluster Locations (S009154)

__ 2. Do the following steps only on the tailgate or tailgates with the cables you are installing or removing. __ 3. Determine which cables you will be installing or removing: v SCSI cables v Cluster communication: Ethernet, LAN, or Modem cables v Fibre channel or ESCON cables Are you installing or removing ONLY Fibre channel or ESCON cables? v Yes, go to Cluster Fibre Channel and ESCON Cable Tailgate Clamps on page 322. v No, go to Tailgate Hardware Removal and Installation.

Tailgate Hardware Removal and Installation


The tailgate hardware must be removed to access the tailgate cable clamps. __ 1. Determine if the 2105 Model 800 tailgate you are working on is a SCSI or Fibre/ESCON/SCSI tailgate: v SCSI cable tailgate, has solid end tailgate plates at 1 and 2 . If it is a SCSI cable tailgate, continue with step 6 on page 317.

316

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation


v Fibre/ESCON/SCSI cable tailgate, has end plates with rubber grommet at 3 and 4 . If it is a Fibre/ESCON/SCSI cable tailgate, continue with step 2.

Cluster 1

Cluster 2

1
Cluster 1

SCSI Tailgates

2
Cluster 2

Front View

Top Views Fibre / ESCON / SCSI Tailgates

Figure 280. 2105 Model 800 Tailgate Configurations (S009155)

__ 2. Remove the two rear end plate screws: v Cluster 1 v Cluster 2 __ 3. Remove the v Cluster 1 __ 4. __ 5. __ 6. 5 6 front screw from the end plate: 8

__ 7.

v Cluster 2 11 Remove the free end plate from the tailgate. Pull the rubber cable grommet out of the plate that is still fastened to the tailgate. Remove the two end tailgate plate bracket mounting screws: v Cluster 1 7 and 9 v Cluster 2 10 and 12 Remove the tailgate bar and the attached tailgate plates from the tailgate. Continue with Cluster SCSI and Communication Cable Tailgate Clamps on page 318.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

317

2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation

5
Cluster 1 Cluster 2

Top View

7
Front View
Figure 281. Tailgate Bar Removal (S009156)

10

11

12

Cluster SCSI and Communication Cable Tailgate Clamps


__ 1. Use the following figures to determine which tailgate cable clamps you need to remove from the tailgate: v SCSI cable tailgate information, see Figure 284 on page 321 v Cluster communication cable tailgate information, see Figure 285 on page 321 __ 2. Refer to the following figures to determine the location of the cable clamps in each tailgate: v Cluster 1, see Figure 286 on page 322 v Cluster 2, see Figure 287 on page 322 __ 3. Remove the cable clamps from the tailgate: See Figure 282 on page 319. v Left cable clamp removal: a. Remove the screw from the bottom 1 of each cable clamp you are removing. b. Pull the pin out on the clamp you are removing 2 . c. Move the front of the clamp to the left and lift it out of the rear slot in the tailgate. v Right cable clamp removal: a. Remove the screw from the bottom 4 of each cable clamp you are removing. b. Pull the pin out on the clamp next to the clamp you are removing 3 . c. Move the front of the clamp to the right and lift it out of the rear slot in the tailgate.

318

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation

10

Figure 282. Tailgate Clamp Removal (S008275n)

__ 4. Install or remove the SCSI or cluster communication cables. If installing cables, feed enough of the cable through the strain relief gate so the cable reaches the cluster and can be retained. Note: Position the SCSI cables in the tailgate so the cables exposed metal braid will be clamped by the grounding area of the clamp.

Host Bay

Exposed Metal Grounding Braid Tailgate

Figure 283. SCSI Cable Grounding Braid Position in Tailgate (S008525m)

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

319

2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation


Special Instructions for ESSNet and Null-Modem Cables: Use the following procedure to retain the ESSNet cables, null modem cables, or both cables to cluster 1 or 2. Do the procedure on the cluster and tailgate below it. a. Locate the cluster end of the cables with the square toroids clamped near the end of the cables. b. Position these cables in the tailgate with the toroids just above the tailgate clamps. This will support the toroids and allow the correct cable length for cluster service access. c. Feed the cables up behind the CPI cables, then up to the cluster. d. Allow enough free cable for attachment to the clusters later in this procedure. Do not connect the cables until instructed to do so. e. Retain the cables to the trays in front of the clusters with the velcro straps. f. Feed the cables down with the CPI cables. Retain the cables to the lower cluster cable bracket with the CPI velcro cable clamps. Note: The cable service loop should be between the lower cluster cable bracket and the tailgate. This will allow the cluster to move to its service position. Attention: Do not connect or disconnect any cables until instructed to do so. Cable changes must be supported by configuration changes. Reinstall any cable strain relief as required. Reinstall the cluster tailgate clamps and bottom mounting screws. Reinstall the tailgate bar and plates. Do you have any fibre channel or ESCON cables to install? v Yes, go to Cluster Fibre Channel and ESCON Cable Tailgate Clamps on page 322. v No, continue with the next step. If this is a Fibre/ESCON/SCSI tailgate, reinstall the rubber grommet and the end plate. Verify that all tailgate screws and hardware have been installed correctly. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

__ __ __ __

5. 6. 7. 8.

__ 9. __ 10. __ 11.

320

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation

Cluster 1 Host Bays 1(-B1) 2(-B2)

Cluster 2 3(-B3) 4(-B4)

Front View
ESD Pad

Figure 284. Cluster SCSI Cable Tailgate Clamps (S009152)

I/O Drawer 1

I/O Drawer 2

Front View

Figure 285. Cluster Communication Cable Tailgate Clamps (S009151)

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

321

2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation


Cluster 1 Tailgate

Fibre and ESCON Cables Cluster, Ethernet, LAN, ESS Net, and Modem Cables SCSI Interface Cables Bay 1, cards 1 and 2 Bay 1, cards 3 and 4 Bay 2, cards 1 and 2 Bay 2, cards 3 and 4

Clamp P/N 07H6821 Clamp P/N 07H6824 Clamp P/N 07H6821

Figure 286. Cluster 1, Tailgate Cable and Cable Clamp Locations (S008270m)

Cluster 2 Tailgate

Cluster, Ethernet, LAN, ESS Net, and Modem Cables SCSI Interface Cables Bay 3, cards 1 and 2 Bay 3, cards 3 and 4 Bay 4, cards 1 and 2 Bay 4, cards 3 and 4 Fibre and ESCON Cables

Clamp P/N 07H6821 Clamp P/N 07H6824 Clamp P/N 07H6821


Figure 287. Cluster 2, Tailgate Cable and Cable Clamp Locations (S008271m)

Cluster Fibre Channel and ESCON Cable Tailgate Clamps


__ 1. Determine if you are installing or removing fibre channel or ESCON Cables: v If installing a fibre channel or ESCON cable, continue with the next step. v If removing a fibre channel or ESCON cable, go to step 3 on page 324. __ 2. Feed the fibre channel or ESCON cable through the rubber grommet in the end plate: v Cluster 1 1 v Cluster 2 2

322

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation

Cluster 1 1(-B1) Host Bays 2(-B2)

Cluster 2 3(-B3) 4(-B4)

Front View

Figure 288. Cluster Fibre Channel or ESCON Cable Installation (S009153)

If there is not enough room for the fibre channel or ESCON connector to pass through the grommet, do the following steps: a. Remove both screws from the end plate: See Figure 289 on page 324. v Cluster 1 3 and 5 v Cluster 2 4 and 6 Remove the free end plate from the tailgate. Pull the rubber cable grommet out of the plate that is still fastened to the tailgate. Open the split in the rubber grommet and add or remove the fibre channel or ESCON cable. Reinstall the grommet and end plate into the tailgate. Continue with the next step.

b. c. d. e. f.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

323

2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation

3
Cluster 1 Cluster 2

Top View

5
Front View
Figure 289. Tailgate Bar Removal (S009157)

__ 3. Determine if you have an ESCON only gate or ESCON/fibre bracket for cable strain relief. See Figure 290 on page 325. v If ESCON only strain relief gate, continue with the next step. v If ESCON/fibre strain relief bracket, go to 12 on page 327. Note: Both brackets can retain ESCON cables, if you have any fibre channel cables you must have the fibre/ESCON strain relief bracket.

324

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation

Cluster 1

ESCON only

ESCON / fibre

FRONT (LEFT)

Cluster 2

ESCON / fibre

ESCON only

FRONT

(RIGHT)

Figure 290. ESCON and ESCON/fibre Strain Relief Hardware (S009012S)

__ 4. Refer to Figure 291 on page 326 for the following steps. Remove the screw 7 that holds the ESCON strain relief gate closed. __ 5. Open the strain relief gate and remove the strain relief plate 9 . If removing an ESCON cable, remove it from the strain relief plate. __ 6. Feed the ESCON cable through the grommet 10 in the bottom of the strain relief gate.
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

325

2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation


v If installing an ESCON cable, continue with the next step. v If removing an ESCON cable, go to step 8. __ 7. Feed enough of the cable 8 through the strain relief gate so the cable reaches the cluster and can be retained. Attention: Do not connect or disconnect any ESCON cables until instructed to do so. ESCON cable changes must be supported by configuration changes. __ 8. Feed the ESCON cable through the rubber grommet in the end plate: See Figure 288 on page 323. v Cluster 1 1 v Cluster 2 2 If there is not enough room for the ESCON connector to pass through the grommet, do the procedure in step 2 on page 322.

10

Figure 291. ESCON Cable Strain Relief Hardware (S008276p)

__ 9. Reinstall any ESCON cable strain relief as required. Note: Allow enough extra cable length so the host bays can be moved to their service position with all cables connected. v If installing an ESCON cable, install the new cable into the strain relief plate. Then reinstall the cable strain relief plate into the gate.

326

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation


v If removing an ESCON cable, reinstall the cable strain relief plate into the gate. __ 10. Close the ESCON cable strain relief gate and install the locking screw. __ 11. Return to the procedure that sent you here. __ 12. Refer to Figure 292 on page 328 and Figure 293 on page 328 for the following steps. __ 13. Press the latches 11 on the strain relief bracket cover together and pull the cover 12 out. Lift the cover off of the side pins on the bracket. If removing a fibre channel or ESCON cable 14 , remove it from the upper and lower fingers 15 on the bracket. __ 14. Feed the fibre channel or ESCON cable through the bottom and top grommets 13 and 15 in the strain relief bracket. Note: These grommets are split and can be removed from the bracket. v If installing a fibre channel or ESCON cable, continue with the next step. v If removing a fibre channel or ESCON cable, go to step 16. __ 15. Feed enough of the cable through the strain relief bracket so the cable reaches the cluster and can be retained. Attention: Do not connect or disconnect any fibre channel or ESCON cables until instructed to do so. Fibre channel or ESCON cable changes must be supported by configuration changes. __ 16. Feed the fibre channel or ESCON cable through the rubber grommet in the end plate: See Figure 288 on page 323. v Cluster 1 1 v Cluster 2 2 If there is not enough room for the ESCON connector to pass through the grommet, do the procedure in step 2 on page 322. __ 17. Reinstall any fibre or ESCON cable strain relief as required. Note: Allow enough extra cable length so the host bays can be moved to their service position with all cables connected. v If installing a fibre channel or ESCON cable, install the new cable 14 into the fingers 15 on the strain relief bracket. Note: Do not install more than two cables into each bracket finger slot 15 . v If removing a fibre channel or ESCON cable, reinstall the cable strain relief plate into the gate. __ 18. Reinstall the cable strain relief cover 12 onto the bracket. __ 19. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

327

2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation

11 12

Figure 292. Fibre/ESCON Cable Strain Relief Cover Removal (S009014M)

13 14

15

16
Figure 293. Fibre/ESCON Cable Strain Relief Bracket Hardware (S009013M)

328

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation

Figure 294. Cluster Fibre/ESCON Cable Tailgate Clamps (S008259p)

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

329

Installing a DDM Bay

Installing a DDM Bay


Attention: This procedure can be performed concurrent with customer operation, and is not a stand-alone procedure. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Attention: If you bring a DDM bay into the operating environment from an area that is outside the normal operating temperature of 20 - 25 degrees C (66 - 77 degrees F), allow the DDM bay time to acclimate to the operating environment. Remove the DDM bay from any shipping package, leave the DDM bay in the sealed plastic bag (if present) to prevent condensation from forming. These instructions describe how to: v Install a DDM bay into a 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure rack. v Connect the DDM bay to the SSA loop. v Test the installation. These instructions assume that: v The SSA loop does not yet have the maximum number of DDMs installed (48 DDMs per loop). v The SSA loop is on a matched set of SSA device cards, one in the same I/O drawer planar assembly slot of each cluster. v You have access to the preinstallation planning information for the system.

Preparing a DDM Bay for Installation


Place a check mark next to each completed step. __ 1. A detailed list of items is shipped with the DDM bay. Ensure that you have all the items that are shown on the list. Refer to the diagram below to identify the items. 1 Frame, DDM bay (1 frame) 2 Host Bypass Card, (1 card) 3 Controller Card, (1 card) 4 Front mounting screws (4 screws) 5 Disk Drive Modules, (8 DDMs) 6 SSA device cables, (2 cables) 7 Passthrough Card, (2 cards)

330

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing a DDM Bay

Figure 295. DDM Bay Installation Parts (S007694m)

Preparing the Rack for Drawer Installation


__ 1. Use Table 53 or Table 54 on page 332 to determine the physical location where each DDM bay, or DDM bays, will be installed. This table includes the rack, storage cage, physical location, and install sequence for the DDM bays.
Table 53. DDM Bay Physical Installation Sequence Loop Color 2105 Model 800 Install Sequence on Loop - - - > 1st Green Red Gray Orange Violet Yellow Blue Brown 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 2105 Expansion Enclosure

R1U1W4 R1U1W3 R2U1W4 R2U1W3 R2U3W4 R2U3W3 R1U2W4 R1U2W3 R2U2W4 R2U2W3 R2U4W4 R2U4W3 R1U1W2 R1U1W1 R2U1W2 R2U1W1 R2U3W2 R2U3W1 R1U2W2 R1U2W1 R2U2W2 R2U2W1 R2U4W2 R2U4W1 R1U1W8 R1U1W7 R2U1W8 R2U1W7 R2U3W8 R2U3W7 R1U2W8 R1U2W7 R2U2W8 R2U2W7 R2U4W8 R2U4W7 R1U1W6 R1U1W5 R2U1W6 R2U1W5 R2U3W6 R2U3W5 R1U2W6 R1U2W5 R2U2W6 R2U2W5 R2U4W6 R2U4W5

Notes: a. This table shows the standard configuration for DDM bays. If the customer chooses a different configuration, contact your next level of support to understand the unusual configuration. b. There may be times when DDM bay pairs with different capacities and speeds are available for installation. When installing more than one pair of DDM bays on an SSA loop, installation of the higher capacity and speed DDM bays first is recommended.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

331

Installing a DDM Bay


Table 54. DDM Bay Physical Installation Sequence for Each Loop on AAL Configured Machines SSA Adaptor Pair 1 Loop Color 2105 Model 800 Install Sequence on Loop - - - > 1st Green Red 2 Gray Orange 3 Violet Yellow 4 Blue Brown R1U1W4 R1U2W4 R1U1W2 R1U2W2 R1U1W8 R1U2W8 R1U1W6 R1U2W6 2nd R1U1W3 R1U2W3 R1U1W1 R1U2W1 R1U1W7 R1U2W7 R1U1W5 R1U2W5 3rd R2U1W4 R2U2W4 R2U1W2 R2U2W2 R2U1W8 R2U2W8 R2U1W6 R2U2W6 4th R2U1W3 R2U2W3 R2U1W1 R2U2W1 R2U1W7 R2U2W7 R2U1W5 R2U2W5 5th R2U3W4 R2U4W4 R2U3W2 R2U4W2 R2U3W8 R2U4W8 R2U3W6 R2U4W6 6th R2U3W3 R2U4W3 R2U3W1 R2U4W1 R2U3W7 R2U4W7 R2U3W5 R2U4W5 2105 Expansion Enclosure

Note: For AAL configured machines, drawers are added in increments of four; two on each loop of an SSA adapter pair. For example, if two drawers are added to the Green loop then two drawers will be added to the Red loop. If the drawers are being added concurrently, the service login process will guide adding the drawers one at a time. __ 2. Locate the physical location where the DDM bay is to be installed. Unlatch the air door 33 and push it in and look into the opening. a. Check that the power cable docking connector is installed in the rear crossbar 34 . b. Check that the other end of the cable is plugged into the correct storage cage power planar 35 connector. See Figure 297 on page 333 and Figure 298 on page 334.

DDM Bay

Storage Bay Power Planar

33

34
Figure 296. DDM Bay Air Door and Power Cable (S007697L)

35

332

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing a DDM Bay

2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure Storage Cage U1


F1 F3
Power Planar Q1
F1 J18 J17 J16 J15 J14 J13 J12 J11 J28 J27 J26 J25 J24 J23 J22 J21

Storage Cage U2
F1 F3

DDM Bay U1 - W1 DDM Bay U1 - W2 DDM Bay U1 - W3 DDM Bay U1 - W4

DDM Bay U2 - W1 DDM Bay U2 - W2 DDM Bay U2 - W3 DDM Bay U2 - W4

F2

Storage Cage U3
F1 F3
Power Planar Q2
F1 J18 J17 J16 J15 J14 J13 J12 J11 J28 J27 J26 J25 J24 J23 J22 J21

Storage Cage U4
F1 F3

DDM Bay U3 - W1 DDM Bay U3 - W2 DDM Bay U3 - W3 DDM Bay U3 - W4

DDM Bay U4 - W1 DDM Bay U4 - W2 DDM Bay U4 - W3 DDM Bay U4 - W4

F2

Front View
Figure 297. DDM Bay Front Power Cable Locations (s009349)

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

333

Installing a DDM Bay

2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure Storage Cage U2


F6 F4
Power Planar Q1
J28 J27 J26 J25 J24 J23 J22 J21 J18 J17 J16 J15 J14 J13 J12 J11

Storage Cage U1
F6 F4

DDM Bay U2 - W5 DDM Bay U2 - W6 DDM Bay U2 - W7 DDM Bay U2 - W8

DDM Bay U1 - W5 DDM Bay U1 - W6 DDM Bay U1 - W7 DDM Bay U1 - W8

Storage Cage U4
F6 F4
Power Planar Q2
J28 J27 J26 J25 J24 J23 J22 J21 J18 J17 J16 J15 J124 J13 J12 J11

Storage Cage U3
F6 F4

DDM Bay U4 - W5 DDM Bay U4 - W6 DDM Bay U4 - W7 DDM Bay U4- W8

DDM Bay U3 - W5 DDM Bay U3 - W6 DDM Bay U3 - W7 DDM Bay U3 - W8

Rear View
Figure 298. DDM Bay Rear Power Cable Locations (s009350)

__ 3. Pull the air door down until it latches closed. __ 4. Continue with Installing the DDM Bay.

Installing the DDM Bay


__ 1. Press the storage cage air door 1 in until it is free of the latch. __ 2. Observe the SSA cables next to the DDM bay being installed. Temporarily relocate any SSA cables that restrict the installation of the bay. This may require temporarily removing that velcro straps that securing the SSA cables. __ 3. Position the DDM bay frame with its serial number plate on the lower right corner 3 . Slide the DDM bay frame partially (about three quarters in) into the storage cage slot. __ 4. Open the DDM handle on each DDM, press the blue latch 1 Figure 302], and pull the handle down 2 [Figure 302]. Attention: The DDMs must be removed or unlatched and pulled out slightly before the DDM bay is installed. This will avoid any power surges that could disrupt concurrent operations.

334

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing a DDM Bay


__ 5. Slide the DDM bay fully into the storage cage slot until it docks with the power distribution connections at the rear of the storage cage. __ 6. Install the four DDM bay frame front mounting screws 2 .

1
Figure 299. DDM Bay Locations (s009555)

DDM Bay Frame

2
(4 Screws)

3
Front View
Figure 300. DDM Bay Frame Installation (s009556)

__ 7. Remove and reseat the host bypass card 4 and controller card 5 . Note: This will help resolve any problems associated with the cards becoming unseated during shipment.

4 5

Front View DDM Bay


Figure 301. DDM Bay Card Locations (s009594)

__ 8. Continue with Reinstalling the Disk Drive Modules on page 336.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

335

Installing a DDM Bay

Reinstalling the Disk Drive Modules


Attention: Disk drive modules (DDMs) are fragile. Handle them with care, and keep them well away from strong magnetic fields. __ 1. Install all eight DDMs as follows: a. Open the DDM handle before installation, press the blue latch 1 , and pull the handle down 2 b. With one hand under the DDM, and the handle down 3 , align the drive with the groove and push it into its slot 4 . The drive stops before it is fully seated. c. Push the DDM handle up 5 until it latches closed. d. Repeat the above steps for all eight disk drive modules. e. Verify that the front of all of the DDMs are aligned.

Figure 302. Disk Drive Module Installation (S007701m)

__ 2. Are you installing multiple DDM bays on a loop at the same time? Note: Installing DDM bays at the same time will take much less time than installing them one at a time. Installing multiple DDM bays on a loop with an existing DDM bay, requires that you take the existing DDM bay from the customer during the installation. v Yes, go to step 3. v No, go to Logically Installing the DDM Bay Using the Service Terminal. __ 3. Is this the last DDM bay being installed on this loop? v Yes, go to Logically Installing the DDM Bay Using the Service Terminal. v No, to install the next DDM bay, return to Preparing a DDM Bay for Installation on page 330.

Logically Installing the DDM Bay Using the Service Terminal


__ 1. Ensure that the storage cage or cages that contains the new DDM bay or bays are logically installed. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Install/Remove Menu Storage Cage Menu

336

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing a DDM Bay


List Installed Storage Cages If the storage cage or cages are not logically installed, use the Storage Cage Menu, Install a Storage Cage option. Install the cage or cages now and then return here and continue with the next step. __ 2. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Install/Remove Menu DDM Bay Drawer Menu Install a Single DDM Bay (Drawer) or Install Multiple DDM Bays (Drawers) Notes: a. With Install a Single DDM Bay (Drawer), a drawer can be installed non-disruptive (concurrent loop install) when there are drawers already installed on a loop. This process is slower, but doesnt interrupt customer access to drawers currently on the loop. b. With Install Multiple DDM Bays (Drawers), multiple drawers can be installed disruptively (disruptive loop install) when there are drawers already on a loop. This process is faster, but requires that the customer give up access to drawers currently on the loop. c. When single or multiple device drawers are installed on an empty loop, the Install Multiple Device Drawers option should always be used (its faster). d. When installing device drawers on an existing SSA loop, you may be presented with this Warning screen Continuing this installation may degrade the performance on this SSA loop. This screen is presented to alert the service representative (SR) that there is a mismatch between the speed of the currently installed DDMs and those DDMs that are being added. Since disk speed (RPM) directly affects performance, one of the following conditions should be brought to the customers attention: v When faster-speed DDMs are installed on an existing slow DDM loop (Although the current performance is not degraded, the customer is not getting the full benefit from the added DDMs.) The loop maintains the performance of the slowest DDM. v When slower-speed DDMs are installed on an existing fast DDM loop (There is degraded performance. Ensure that the customer is aware of this condition so that the configuration can be changed.) The loop changes to the speed of the newly installed slow DDM. __ 3. Follow the service terminal guided procedure. The following is help text for screens that will be displayed in these two options: v The Select a Device Drawer screen displays any drawers not fully installed (normally due to delaying formatting) and a new drawer option. Select New Drawer. v At the Select Device Drawer Type screen, use F4 to display and select the 2105 DDM bay. v At the Select an SSA Loop screen, select the SSA loop with the appropriate location code and Loop. Each loop has two location codes, one for each end of the loop: a. SSA device card R1-Tx-U0.1-P1-Ixx: R1=Rack 1 Tx=Cluster X

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

337

Installing a DDM Bay


U0.1-P1 = I/O drawer planar assembly Ixx =I/O drawer planar assembly slot for SSA card` yy=cable connector, A1, A2, B1, or B2 b. SSA device card connectors, loop A or B: A=A1/A2 connectors B=B1/B2 connectors v At the Drawer Information Options screen, use F4 to list and select the Drawer Location. v Use the information in Figure 303, Figure 304 on page 339, and Figure 305 on page 339 to help understand the standard DDM bay physical locations and loop assignments.

2105 Model 800 Loop Configurations


Cluster Slots Tx-U0.1-P1-I11-A Tx-U0.1-P1-I11-B LOOP A:R1-U1-W1 LOOP B:R1-U2-W1 LOOP A:R1-U1-W2 LOOP B:R1-U2-W2

LOOP COLORS

< GRAY > < ORANGE >

Tx-U0.1-P1-I1-A Tx-U0.1-P1-I1-B

LOOP A:R1-U1-W3 LOOP B:R1-U2-W3

LOOP A:R1-U1-W4 LOOP B:R1-U2-W4

< GREEN > < RED >

Tx-U0.1-P1-I12-A Tx-U0.1-P1-I12-B

LOOP A:R1-U1-W5 LOOP B:R1-U2-W5

LOOP A:R1-U1-W6 LOOP B:R1-U2-W6

< BLUE > < BROWN >

Tx-U0.1-P1-I2-A Tx-U0.1-P1-I2-B

LOOP B:R1-U1-W7 LOOP B:R1-U2-W7

LOOP A:R1-U1-W8 LOOP B:R1-U2-W8

< VIOLET > < YELLOW >

Figure 303. 2105 Model 800 SSA Loop Configurations (s009419)

338

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing a DDM Bay

LOOP COLORS

Expansion Enclosure Loop Configurations

< GRAY > < ORANGE >

LOOP A:R2-U1-W1 LOOP B:R2-U2-W1

LOOP A:R2-U1-W2 LOOP B:R2-U2-W2

LOOP A:R2-U3-W1 LOOP B:R2-U4-W1

LOOP A:R2-U3-W2 LOOP B:R2-U4-W2

< GREEN > < RED >

LOOP A:R2-U1-W3 LOOP B:R2-U2-W3

LOOP A:R2-U1-W4 LOOP B:R2-U2-W4

LOOP A:R2-U3-W3 LOOP B:R2-U4-W3

LOOP A:R2-U3-W4 LOOP B:R2-U4-W4

< BLUE > < BROWN >

LOOP A:R2-U1-W5 LOOP B:R2-U2-W5

LOOP A:R2-U1-W6 LOOP B:R2-U2-W6

LOOP A:R2-U3-W5 LOOP B:R2-U4-W5

LOOP A:R2-U3-W6 LOOP B:R2-U4-W6

< VIOLET > < YELLOW >

LOOP A:R2-U1-W7 LOOP B:R2-U2-W7

LOOP A:R2-U1-W8 LOOP B:R2-U2-W8

LOOP A:R2-U3-W7 LOOP B:R2-U4-W7

LOOP A:R2-U3-W8 LOOP B:R2-U4-W8

Figure 304. 2105 Expansion Enclosure SSA Loop Configurations (s009346)

I/O Drawer 1/2 SSA Device Card Connectors B2 B1 A2 A1

Front View
I/O DRAWER 1 (R1-T1) I/O DRAWER 2 (R1-T2) Tx-u0.1-P1-I1 Tx-u0.1-P1-I2 SSA Device Cards Tx-u0.1-P1-I11 Tx-u0.1-P1-I12

Figure 305. Cluster SSA Device Card Connector Locations (s009166)

Continuing the Installation of a DDM Bay


Attention:
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

339

Installing a DDM Bay


v The logic cards the SSA cables connect to in this procedure are ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap during this procedure. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. v If this upgrade consists of a new expansion frame with more than two storage cages and you are using Install a Single DDM Bay, then you must check the SSA cabling carefully at drawer install time. The Expansion Frame will be shipped with SSA cables routed to their final location. Some cables in the Expansion Frame may need to be disconnected and re-routed to a temporary location during the Install a Single DDM Bay process. The SMIT screens will show the proper cabling. __ 1. The Install SSA Cables screen has directed you back here for additional information. The screen lists the SSA locations and three actions needed to connect the new DDM bays into the SSA loop. a. The following cable location(s) need to be disconnected. Disconnect both ends of each cable. Do not remove the cable yet, as it may be used below as a new cable. b. The following cable location(s) are new. Please add or move cables to the appropriate locations. v All existing factory installed cages will come with the pre-labeled SSA cables installed. Any new SSA cable requirements are ordered and supplied with the storage upgrade MES. Attention: When routing the new SSA cables, avoid making sharp (90 degree) bends that might damage the cables or connectors. Follow the routing and bends used on previously installed SSA cables. For examples, see SSA cables installed by manufacturing. c. The following cable location(s) remain the same. These SSA cables are already installed and will stay connected to the existing locations. These cables and the list of new cables above are all cables on this SSA loop.

Figure 306. DDM Bay SSA Connector Locations (S007703l)

__ 2. A label is attached only to each SSA cable that connects to an SSA Card in each cluster. The label lists the cluster I/O drawer planar assembly slot the SSA card is plugged into. It also lists the SSA card connector the cable is plugged into. Notes: a. To prevent damage to cables with plastic connector screws, always use the special screwdriver (SSA tool, P/N 32H7059). This screwdriver is in the 2105 ship group.

340

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing a DDM Bay


b. The SSA DASD DDM bay and SSA card indicators will come on and off as cables are connected and disconnected. The state of these indicators should be ignored until they are tested later in the install procedure. __ 3. The SSA device card automatically configures the SSA loop when power is supplied to the disk drive modules. This configuration might take a few minutes to complete. When the indicators of all the disk drive modules are on continuously (not blinking), configuration is complete. __ 4. The DDM bay indicators are as described here: Refer to Figure 307.
Controller card, Power indicator 1 : Controller card, DDM Check indicator 2 : Controller Card Check indicator 3 : All disk drive module, Ready indicators 4 : All disk drive module, Check indicators 5 : On Off Off On Off

When the service terminal configuration process is complete, and any related problems have been repaired, ensure the indicators are as listed above. If any indicator is not correct, replace the FRU that contains the indicator. See Replacing a FRU Using the Service Terminal on page 6 and Chapter 4: FRU Removal and Replacement Procedures on page 1. When all the Power indicators and Ready indicators are on, and all the Check indicators are off, continue with the next step.

Figure 307. DDM bay Indicator Locations (S007704l)

Completing the Installation of a DDM Bay


__ 1. Do you have any additional DDM bays to install on this SSA loop? v Yes, Go to Logically Installing the DDM Bay Using the Service Terminal on page 336. v No, go to step 3. __ 2. Do you have any additional DDM bays to install on another SSA loop? v Yes, Go to Logically Installing the DDM Bay Using the Service Terminal on page 336. v No, go to step 3. __ 3. Do the following: v Complete the physical install of each SSA cable by ensuring it is properly routed and all velcro cable ties are fastened. v Remove any SSA cables that where disconnected and not reused. v Ensure all SSA cables plugged into SSA cards have a location label at the SSA card connector end. v Ensure that the new DDM bays have been formatted.
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

341

Installing a DDM Bay


__ 4. The installation of the DDM bay or bays is complete, inform the customer the new DDM bay is ready to be configured with ESS Specialist.

342

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

DDM Bay Installation with FC 0970

2105 Model 800 DDM Bay Installation with FC 0970


Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Attention: If you bring a DDM bay into the operating environment from an area that is outside the normal operating temperature of 20 - 25 degrees C (66 - 77 degrees F), allow the DDM bay time to acclimate to the operating environment. Remove the DDM bay from any shipping package, leave the DDM bay in the sealed plastic bag (if present) to prevent condensation from forming. With FC 0970, DDM bays were removed during manufacturing and shipped on separate pallets to reduce the shipping weight required at the customers account. These instructions describe how to: v Reinstall a DDM bay into a 2105 Model 800 in their original locations. v Connect the SSA cables to each DDM bay. Attention: The 2105 retains configuration information established during manufacture. All DDM bays and DDMs must be reinstalled into their original locations or significant problems will result. If it is necessary to remove a DDM from a DDM bay, you must first record the DDMs serial number and location.

Installing DDM Bays


__ 1. Remove the DDM Bay Location Chart from the CE envelope. The chart lists each DDM bay by serial number and the original location code for where it was installed. Use Figure 308 on page 344 to translate the location codes into the physical position in the 2105 subsystem.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

343

DDM Bay Installation with FC 0970


(R1-) Storage Cage 1 (-U1-) Storage Cage 2 (-U2-)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 (R1-U1-W1) 2 (R1-U1-W2) 3 (R1-U1-W3) 4 (R1-U1-W4)

9 (R1-U2-W1) 10 (R1-U2-W2) 11 (R1-U2-W3) 12 (R1-U2-W4)

Front View
Storage Cage 2 (-U2-) Storage Cage 1 (-U1-)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

13 (R1-U2-W5) 14 (R1-U2-W6) 15 (R1-U2-W7) 16 (R1-U2-W8)

5 (R1-U1-W5) 8 (R1-U1-W6) 7 (R1-U1-W7) 6 (R1-U1-W8)

Rear View
Figure 308. R1- Location Codes for DDM Bays in a 2105 Model 800 (s009134)

__ 2. Install DDM bays in the order shown on the DDM Bay Location Chart: (Reference Figure 309 on page 345 and Figure 310 on page 345.) a. Press the storage cage air door 1 in until it is free of the latch. b. Temporarily move the adjacent SSA cables out of the way to prevent damage. c. Slide the DDM bay frame fully into the storage cage slot. Verify that the DDM bay serial number plate is on the lower right corner 3 .

344

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

DDM Bay Installation with FC 0970


d. Install the four DDM bay frame front mounting screws 2 that came with the DDM bay.

1
Figure 309. DDM Bay Storage Cage Air Door (s009555)

DDM Bay Frame

2
(4 Screws)

3
Front View
Figure 310. DDM Bay Frame Installation (s009556)

__ 3. Using the information on the SSA device cable connector labels, connect the SSA cables to each DDM bay (refer to Figure 311 for the DDM bay connector locations).

Figure 311. DDM Bay SSA Connector Locations (S007703l)

__ 4. Are you installing this 2105 Model 800 with a 2105 Expansion Enclosure? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to step 6 on page 346. __ 5. Are you using an MES to install the 2105 Expansion Enclosure?
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

345

DDM Bay Installation with FC 0970


v Yes, do not connect the short SSA cables that plug between connectors J8 and JD on pairs of adjacent DDM bays. These jumpers will be connected later. Return to the procedure that sent you here. v No, you must complete the 2105 Model 800 install before beginning the MES to install the 2105 Expansion Enclosuree. Continue the install of the 2105 Model 800 only at the next step. __ 6. Locate each pair of adjacent 2105 Model 800 DDM bays on the same SSA loop. Connect the two short SSA cables that go between them. Connector JD on each DDM bay connects to J8 on the other DDM bay. Reference Figure 312. v R1-U1-W1 and R1-U1-W2 v R1-U1-W3 and R1-U1-W4 v R1-U1-W5 and R1-U1-W6 v R1-U1-W7 and R1-U1-W8 v R1-U2-W1 and R1-U2-W2 v R1-U2-W3 and R1-U2-W4 v R1-U2-W5 and R1-U2-W6 v R1-U2-W7 and R1-U2-W8

JD DDM Bay J8

J8 Front View JD

Figure 312. DDM Bay Short Cable SSA Connector Locations (S007703l)

__ 7. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

346

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

DDM Bay Installation with FC 0970

2105 Expansion Enclosure DDM Bay Installation with FC 0970


Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Attention: If you bring a DDM bay into the operating environment from an area that is outside the normal operating temperature of 20 - 25 degrees C (66 - 77 degrees F), allow the DDM bay time to acclimate to the operating environment. Remove the DDM bay from any shipping package, leave the DDM bay in the sealed plastic bag (if present) to prevent condensation from forming. With FC 0970, DDM bays were removed during manufacturing and shipped on separate pallets to reduce the shipping weight required at the customers account. These instructions describe how to: v Reinstall a DDM bay into a 2105 Expansion Enclosure in their original locations. v Connect the SSA cables to each DDM bay. Attention: The 2105 retains configuration information established during manufacture. All DDM bays and DDMs must be reinstalled into their original locations or significant problems will result. If it is necessary to remove a DDM from a DDM bay, you must first record the DDMs serial number and location.

Installing DDM Bays


__ 1. Remove the DDM Bay Location Chart from the CE envelope. The chart lists each DDM bay by serial number and the original location code for where it was installed. Use Figure 313 on page 348 to translate the location codes into the physical position in the 2105 subsystem.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

347

DDM Bay Installation with FC 0970


2105 Expansion Enclosure (R2-) Storage Cage 1 (-U1-) R2-U1-W1 12345678 R2-U1-W2 R2-U1-W3 R2-U1-W4 Storage Cage 3 (-U3-) R2-U3-W1 R2-U3-W2 R2-U3-W3 R2-U3-W4 Storage Cage 2 (-U2-) R2-U2-W1 R2-U2-W2 R2-U2-W3 R2-U2-W4 Storage Cage 4 (-U4-) R2-U4-W1 R2-U4-W2 R2-U4-W3 R2-U4-W4

Front View

Storage Cage 2 (-U2-) R2-U2-W5 R2-U2-W6 R2-U2-W7 R2-U2-W8 Storage Cage 4 (-U4-) R2-U4-W5 R2-U4-W6 R2-U4-W7 R2-U4-W8 12345678

Storage Cage 1 (-U1-) R2-U1-W5 R2-U1-W6 R2-U1-W7 R2-U1-W8 Storage Cage 3 (-U3-) R2-U3-W5 R2-U3-W6 R2-U3-W7 R2-U3-W8

Rear View

Figure 313. R2- Location Codes for DDM Bays in a 2105 Expansion Enclosure (s007741s)

__ 2. Install DDM bays in the order shown on the DDM Bay Location Chart: (Reference Figure 314 on page 349 and Figure 315 on page 349.) a. Press the storage cage air door 1 in until it is free of the latch. b. Temporarily move the adjacent SSA cables out of the way to prevent damage. c. Slide the DDM bay frame fully into the storage cage slot. Verify that the DDM bay serial number plate is on the lower right corner 3 .

348

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

DDM Bay Installation with FC 0970


d. Install the four DDM bay frame front mounting screws 2 that came with the DDM bay.

1
Figure 314. DDM Bay Storage Cage Air Door (s009555)

DDM Bay Frame

2
(4 Screws)

3
Front View
Figure 315. DDM Bay Frame Installation (s009556)

__ 3. Using the information on the SSA device cable connector labels, connect the SSA cables to each DDM bay (refer to Figure 316 for the DDM bay connector locations).

Figure 316. DDM Bay SSA Connector Locations (S007703l)

__ 4. Return to the procedure that directed you here.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

349

Installing a Host Card

Installing a Host Card


Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. You should have started this procedure at the service terminal. Perform the installation of a host card only at the direction of the service terminal or other service guide procedures. Go to the service terminal and perform Remove and/or Install Host Card(s). Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Attention: Do not swap Fibre card modules. Although the Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC) and Gigabit Link Module (GLM) modules on Fibre cards may appear to be removable, removing and swapping modules between cards could invalidate the card VPD and the product MLC records. A valid VPD is necessary to obtain the correct replacement parts during a repair action. Place a check mark next to each completed step. Note: Unless you have a particular reason, do not power off the 2105 Model 800 rack when removing the host bay. __ 1. This procedure supports the installation and testing of single or multiple host cards. __ 2. Ensure that the customer has made the configuration changes at the host that are needed to support the attachment of the type of 2105 host card that you are installing. __ 3. Ensure that the customer has the MES available for the installation of the new host interface cables. __ 4. Use the service terminal to install the host card or cards. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Install/Remove Menu Host Card Menu Remove and/or Install Host Card(s) You must now select the correct service action and then follow the service terminal instructions for that procedure: v Concurrent, the customer will not have access to the host cards in the selected bay, it allows installation of one to four host cards in a single host bay. v Nonconcurrent, the customer will not have access to the entire ESS, it allows installation of multiple host cards in multiple host bays. Follow the directions on the service terminal for the option that was selected. __ 5. Locate the host bay you will be installing the host cards into. Move the host bay to the service position, see Moving the Host Bay to Its Service Position, 2105 Model 800 on page 109.

350

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing a Host Card

(R1-)

Host Bays

Cluster 1 1(-B1) 2(-B2)

Cluster 2 3(-B3) 4(-B4)

Front View

Figure 317. Locating a Host Bay (s009139)

__ 6. Install the host cards in the card slot indicated by the service terminal: v Host card 1, (R1-Bx-H1) v Host card 2, (R1-Bx-H2) v Host card 3, (R1-Bx-H3) v Host card 4, (R1-Bx-H4)

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

351

Installing a Host Card

Host Bays

R1-B1

R1-B2

R1-B3

R1-B4

Front View Ultra SCSI Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4 SCSI Connectors ESCON Link Connectors ESCON Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4

ZA ZB

ZA/LINK 00 ZB/LINK 01

Fibre Channel Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4 Fibre Channel Card Type LW2 (Long Wave Card) SW2 (Short Wave Card) Fibre Link Connectors Link A

Figure 318. Host Bay Card Locations (s009142)

Note: There are two types of Fibre channel cards: v Short Wave (SW2) v Long Wave (LW2) a. Do the following steps only on the host cards and the host bay slots the cards are being installed into. Note: Repeat the following steps for multiple cards. b. Remove the two block plate mounting screws 1 then remove the block plate 2 .

352

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing a Host Card


Note: This plate will not be used when the host card is installed. c. Remove the host card, rear locking pin 3 .

2 3

Figure 319. Host Card Installation Locations (s009351)

d. Install the host cards 6 with its connector bracket 5 against the inside of the front of the host bay. e. Install and tighten the two host card connector bracket screws 4 , f. Install the host card, rear locking pin 7 .

7
Front View Front View

Figure 320. Host Card Installation Locations (s009557)

__ 7. Replace parts in the reverse order, see Moving the Host Bay to Its Service Position, 2105 Model 800 on page 109. Note: Fibre host cards have a combination dust cover and wrap tool installed on each port. Leave the wrap tool installed until connecting the host cables. __ 8. After the part replacement is complete, return to the service terminal to continue the install process. This will test the complete host bay and its cards. Is this a nonconcurrent install? v Yes, A nonconcurrent host card install will require a machine IML. After the IML is complete, continue with the next step.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

353

Installing a Host Card


v No, at the completion of the successful verification testing of a concurrent install, the service terminal will then direct you to go to Completing the Installation of a Host Card on page 355. Note: If additional host cards are to be installed concurrently, repeat steps 1 on page 350 through 8 on page 353 of this procedure before continuing with Completing the Installation of a Host Card on page 355. Was the nonconcurrent install IML successful? v Yes, at the completion of the successful verification testing of a nonconcurrent install, the service terminal will then direct you to go to Completing the Installation of a Host Card on page 355. v No, If the machine fails to IML successfully following a nonconcurrent multiple host card install, log back in, and check the problem. If the newly-installed host cards have problems opened against them, use the Remove and/or Install Host Card(s) with the Nonconcurrent process to remove defective cards and reinstall new cards. For a detailed procedure for this recovery, do the following Recovery Procedure for Nonconcurrent Host Card Install Failures. Recovery Procedure for Nonconcurrent Host Card Install Failures Following a failed IML during a nonconcurrent install of multiple host cards: a. Login the on the service terminal Entry Point for All Service Terminal Activities in chapter 8 of Volume 3. b. Determine the location of the failing host cards: From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Utility Menu Problem Log Menu List Problems Write down the locations of the failing host cards c. The service terminal will instruct you to Power Off the ESS and then remove the failing host cards: From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Install/Remove Menu Host Card Menu Remove and/or Install Host Card(s) Nonconcurrent Remove the failing host cards, indicated in step 9b: 1) Logically remove the failing host cards (using the SMIT process) then 2) Physically remove the failing host cards d. After the cards are logically and physically removed, power the ESS On. The ESS should IML successfully. v If replacement host cards are not available, you can continue the normal nonconcurrent MES install instructions to verify and complete the installation of remaining installed host cards. v If replacement host cards are available, continue with the next step. e. Re-install the replacement host cards one host bay at a time. Use the Remove and/or Install Host Card(s) and Nonconcurrent service

__ 9.

354

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing a Host Card


terminal instructions. This should allow the machine to IML successfully, because it prevents multiple host bays from being fenced at the same time. f. After each successful IML, repair any open host card problems using the normal repair procedure. g. When all of the failures have been repaired, go to Completing the Installation of a Host Card.

Completing the Installation of a Host Card


Note: If the service terminal directed you to this procedure, the testing of the new host cards was successful. Attention: To prevent electrostatic discharge, ensure you discharge all SCSI host cables to the ESD discharge pad, before you plug them into the 2105 Model 800. The ESD discharge pads are mounted on the front right and left corners of the 2105 Model 800 frame, next to each tailgate. See Figure 226 on page 254 for the location of the ESD discharge pads. Attention: Do not swap Fibre card modules. Although the Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC) and Gigabit Link Module (GLM) modules on Fibre cards may appear to be removable, removing and swapping modules between cards could invalidate the card VPD and the product MLC records. A valid VPD is necessary to obtain the correct replacement parts during a repair action. __ 1. Verify that no problems were created during the host card installation. Note: If you have already checked for problems, continue with the next step. Log back onto the I/O drawer being serviced. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Repair Menu Show/Repair Problems Needing Repair Repair any new problems. If no new problems were found, continue with the next step. __ 2. Was an ESCON host card installed? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to step 5 on page 356. __ 3. Before installing the host cables, do you want to test the FOSA interface? Note: Running the ESCON wrap test will require the installation of the ESCON wrap tool (P/N 5605670, large or P/N 05N6767, small) from the ship group. v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to step 5 on page 356. __ 4. Use the service terminal to run the ESCON Port Optical Wrap Test. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Machine Test Menu Host Interface Cards Menu ESCON Host Cards Menu ESCON Port Optical Wrap Test Follow the service terminal instructions.
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

355

Installing a Host Card


Note: The wrap test will instruct you when to install and remove the ESCON wrap tool. When the wrap test is complete, continue with step 5. __ 5. Was a Fibre channel host card installed? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to step 11 on page 357. __ 6. Using the Configuration Resources worksheet information, ensure that the Port Topology is set correctly for the card or cards that were just installed: From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Systems Attachment Resources Menu Configure Fibre Channel Port Select the desired host port and then set the Network Topology Type to either Undefined, Point-to-Point_FCP (open), Point-to-Point_FICON, or FCAL (Arbitrated Loop) as indicated on the configuration resources worksheets. __ 7. Before installing the host cables, do you want to test the Fibre channel interface (a Yes response is recommended)? Note: Running the Fibre channel wrap test requires that a Fibre channel wrap tool be installed. The host card should come from the factory with one of the following wrap tools already installed: v P/N 11P3847 = use with LW2 and SW2 Fibre cards v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to step 9. __ 8. Use the service terminal to run the Fibre channel Port Optical Wrap Test. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Machine Test Menu Host Interface Cards Menu Fibre Channel Host Cards Menu Fibre Channel Port Optical Wrap Test Follow the service terminal instructions. Notes: a. The wrap test will instruct you when to install and remove the Fibre channel wrap tool. b. There is no wrap test for SCSI host cards. __ 9. Is the fibre card being installed using Fibre Channel Port (FCP) protocol (Open Systems)? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to step 11 on page 357. __ 10. When the fibre-channel port protocol of the fibre card being installed is FCP (vs FICON), the Fibre Channel LUN Access Control must be checked. Verify that the LUN Access Control has been set correctly for fibre channel (Any or Restricted). From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Change / Show Control Switches

356

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing a Host Card


Fibre Channel LUN Access Control Enter the information from the configuration resources worksheet. Note: If the control switches are changed, inform the customer that the subsystem must be rebooted for the change to take effect. __ 11. Label and route each host cable from the customer host adapter through the front right or left tailgate of the 2105 Model 800. Route each host cable to the host card connector referenced in the Configuration Worksheets. __ 12. Clean the host card connectors and host cable connectors using the Fibre Optic Connector Cleaning Kit (P/N 5453521). __ 13. Connect the host cables to the host system. The cables are supplied with the host adapter Feature Code (FC). Refer to Routing Host System cables and Connecting the 2105 Model 800 to the Host System on page 254. __ 14. Install the host cables to the host card connectors indicated by the Configuration Worksheets. See Figure 321 on page 358 for card and connector locations. Attention: To prevent electrostatic discharge, ensure you discharge all SCSI host cables to the ESD discharge pad, before you plug them into the 2105 Model 800. The ESD discharge pads are mounted on the front right and left corners of the 2105 Model 800 frame, next to each tailgate. See Figure 131 on page 123 for the location of the ESD discharge pads.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

357

Installing a Host Card

Host Bays

R1-B1

R1-B2

R1-B3

R1-B4

Front View Ultra SCSI Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4 SCSI Connectors ESCON Link Connectors ESCON Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4

ZA ZB

ZA/LINK 00 ZB/LINK 01

Fibre Channel Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4 Fibre Channel Card Type LW2 (Long Wave Card) SW2 (Short Wave Card) Fibre Link Connectors Link A

Figure 321. Host Bay Card Connectors Locations (s009142)

Note: There are two types of Fibre channel cards: v Short Wave (SW2) v Long Wave (LW2) __ 15. Verify that each host cable passes through the 2105 Model 800 tailgate below it, and is held by the tailgate cable clamps. Verify that the tailgate hardware is installed correctly. See 2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation on page 316. __ 16. Inform the customer that the 2105 host connections are ready for use.

358

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing a Host Card


Notes: a. When a fibre channel host card is installed or replaced, the world-wide port name (WWPN) of the new card may be displayed during the service terminal Install or Repair process. Provide the customer with the new WWPN or WWPNs that were indicated. b. Configuration and connecting logical volumes is a customer operation using the ESS Specialist. __ 17. Store all channel wrap tools (ESCON and Fibre) with the ESS ship group so they can be used later when testing or isolating host card problems. __ 18. Return to the procedure that sent you here or to the MES instructions to complete the installation and install strain relief hardware.

Removing a Host Card


Attention: This is not a stand-alone procedure. You should have started this procedure at the service terminal. Perform the installation of a host card only at the direction of the service terminal or other service guide procedures. Go to the service terminal and perform Remove and/or Install Host Card(s). Note: The service terminal will allow concurrent (in same host bay) or nonconcurrent (in multiple host bays) host card removals. Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Attention: Do not swap Fibre card modules. Although the Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC) and Gigabit Link Module (GLM) modules on Fibre cards may appear to be removable, removing and swapping modules between cards could invalidate the card VPD and the product MLC records. A valid VPD is necessary to obtain the correct replacement parts during a repair action. Place a check mark next to each completed step. Note: Unless you have a particular reason, do not power off the 2105 Model 800 rack when removing the host bay. __ 1. Ensure that the customer has made the configuration changes at the host that are needed to support the removal of the 2105. __ 2. Locate the host bay you will be removing the host card or cards from. Move the host bay to the service position, see Moving the Host Bay to Its Service Position, 2105 Model 800 on page 109.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

359

Removing a Host Card

(R1-)

Host Bays

Cluster 1 1(-B1) 2(-B2)

Cluster 2 3(-B3) 4(-B4)

Front View

Figure 322. Locating a Host Bay (s009139)

__ 3. Remove the host card from the card slot indicated by the service terminal: v Host card 1, (R1-Bx-H1) v Host card 2, (R1-Bx-H2) v Host card 3, (R1-Bx-H3) v Host card 4, (R1-Bx-H4)

360

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Removing a Host Card

Host Bays

R1-B1

R1-B2

R1-B3

R1-B4

Front View Ultra SCSI Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4 SCSI Connectors ESCON Link Connectors ESCON Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4

ZA ZB

ZA/LINK 00 ZB/LINK 01

Fibre Channel Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4 Fibre Channel Card Type LW2 (Long Wave Card) SW2 (Short Wave Card) Fibre Link Connectors Link A

Figure 323. Host Bay Card Locations (s009142)

Note: There are two types of Fibre channel cards: v Short Wave (SW2) v Long Wave (LW2) a. Do the following steps only on the host card and the host bay slot the card is being removed from. b. Remove the two card connector plate mounting screws 1

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

361

Removing a Host Card

3
Front View
Figure 324. Host Card Removal Locations (s009558)

Front View

c. Remove the host card, rear locking pin 3 . d. Remove the host card 2 from the bay by pulling straight up. e. Install the block plate 5 , install and tighten the two block plate screws 4 . f. Install the host card, rear locking pin 6 .

5 6

Figure 325. Host Card Removal Locations (s009352)

__ 4. Replace parts in the reverse order, see Moving the Host Bay to Its Service Position, 2105 Model 800 on page 109. __ 5. After the part replacement is complete, return to the service terminal to continue the removal process. This will test the complete host bay and its cards. When the verification testing is complete at the service terminal, return to the procedure that sent you here (such as a repair or MES).

362

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Relocating a 2105 Subsystem

Relocating a 2105 Model 800 Subsystem


Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: This procedure should only be used when the entire ESS subsystem is being relocated within the same customers enterprise and the data must be retained. If all other cases the Discontinuing a 2105 Model 800 Subsystem procedure must be used. Go to Discontinuing a 2105 Model 800 Subsystem on page 386. Failure to use the correct procedure will result in problems or delays during reinstallation. These instructions describe how to: v Repair any existing problems. v Power off the 2105. v Reinstall the cluster to cluster ethernet jumper cable. v Identify and label disconnected cable connectors. v Disconnect the 2105 power cables. v Disconnect the 2105 Model 800 interface, control, and communication cables. v Disconnect 2105 Expansion Enclosure racks from a 2105 Model 800 rack. v Reinstall the 2105 subsystem at the new location. v Use the service terminal to test the 2105 subsystem after relocation Notes: 1. These instructions describe moving 2105 Model 800 and 2105 Expansion Enclosure racks within an account (relocating). The term moving will be used in this procedure to identify relocation activities. 2. These instructions only support moving all 2105 Model 800 and 2105 Expansion Enclosure racks in a subsystem at the same time. 3. This procedure supports moving multiple 2105 racks only when they are part of the same subsystem. 4. Because these instructions describe moving 2105 Model 800 and 2105 Expansion Enclosure racks, some diagrams might not specifically show the model that you are moving. 5. Before you can move a 2105 subsystem, all problems must be repaired.

Data Considerations when Moving a 2105


Before moving a 2105 advise the customer to make a copy of any needed data before continuing.

Determine if Shipping Containers are Required?


Place a check mark next to each completed step. __ 1. Determine if you are relocating the 2105 to another location on the same floor, or relocating it to another floor/building: v Relocating to same floor, go to Determine Configuration and Racks Being Moved on page 364. v Relocating to another floor/building, go to step 2. __ 2. Verify that the correct Asset Sealing and Physical Protection kits are available for the 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure you are relocating:
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

363

Relocating a 2105 Subsystem


v 2105 Model 800, use Asset Sealing kit part number 7334849 and Physical Protection kit part number 17P6483 v 2105 Expansion Enclosure, use Asset Sealing kit part number 7334849 and Physical Protection kit part number 17P6483 Note: For additional relocation packaging information, refer to the following website: http://rtsatl.ibmus2.ibm.com/Homepage.nsf/FrameIndex/packingsealing.html __ 3. Verify that the correct Ship Group Packaging Materials kit is available for the 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure you are relocating: Note: The Relocation Packaging Materials kit is only available for U.S., Canada, and EMEA. v 2105 Model 800 with ESSNet, use Relocation Packaging Materials kit part number 18P2232 v 2105 Model 800 without ESSNet, use Relocation Packaging Materials kit part number 18P2234 v 2105 Expansion Enclosure, use Relocation Packaging Materials kit part number 18P2236 Continue with Determine Configuration and Racks Being Moved.

Determine Configuration and Racks Being Moved


Place a check mark next to each completed step. __ 1. Determine what the configuration of the subsystem you are working with is. __ 2. Determine the Type-Model and Serial Number of each 2105 you will be moving. __ 3. Continue with Check the Customer Preparation.

Check the Customer Preparation


Place a check mark next to each completed step. __ 1. Inform the customer that all devices in the entire 2105 subsystem will be powered off and all of the devices will not be available. Attention: Before disconnecting/connecting host cables, ask the customer to remove host I/O activities to all devices on the affected cables. The customer should refer to the host documentation to determine if host power also needs to be off. __ 2. Verify that the customer knows which logical devices will be affected by the removal of the physical devices in the 2105 you are moving. __ 3. Verify that the customer has copied all needed data to other devices. __ 4. Verify that the customer has performed all needed data security procedures on the machine or machines you are moving. __ 5. Continue with Considerations when Moving a 2105.

Considerations when Moving a 2105


Place a check mark next to each completed step. __ 1. Ensure the customer has varied offline all the devices in the subsystem. __ 2. Continue with Repairing Existing Problems Using the Service Terminal on page 365.

364

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Relocating a 2105 Subsystem

Repairing Existing Problems Using the Service Terminal


Place a check mark next to each completed step. __ 1. Connect the service terminal to the S2 connector on the front of 1 in the 2105 Model 800. For service terminal connection and activation, see Preparing the Service Terminal for Use with the 2105 in chapter 8 of Volume 3.
I/O Drawer 1/2

CLUSTER 1 CLUSTER 2 Cluster Connectors S1 S2 S3 Front View

Front View

Figure 326. Service Terminal Interface Connection (s009132)

__ 2. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Repair Menu Show/Repair Problems Needing Repair Menu Select and repair all open problems. __ 3. Disconnect the service terminal from the 2105 Model 800 and push the service terminal table in. Continue with Powering Off the 2105 Subsystem.

Powering Off the 2105 Subsystem


Place a check mark next to each completed step. __ 1. Set the Local Power switch on the 2105 Model 800 operator panel to off (down). Wait about 30 seconds for the subsystem to completely power off.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

365

Relocating a 2105 Subsystem

2105 Model 800 Unit Emergency

Local Power

Ready Cluster 1 Cluster 2 Power Complete Line Cord 1 Line Cord 2 Messages Cluster 1 Cluster 2

Figure 327. 2105 Model 800 Operator Panel Switch Locations (s009421)

__ 2. At the rear of each 2105 in the subsystem, set the 390 V battery 1 MASTER circuit breaker (CB, S2) 1 to Off (down). Note: 2105 Model 800 shown.

Battery 2

Battery 1

Rear View
Figure 328. 350 Volt Battery Locations (s009159)

__ 3. Open the rear cover of each 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure rack in the subsystem and locate the primary power supplies (PPS): v 2105 Model 800: Primary power supply-1, right 3 Primary power supply-2, left 2 v 2105 Expansion Enclosure: Primary power supply-1, right 5 Primary power supply-2, left 4

366

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Relocating a 2105 Subsystem

2105 Model 800

2105 Expansion Enclosure

2
PPS-2

3
PPS-1

4
PPS-2

5
PPS-1

Rear View
Figure 329. Primary Power Supply Locations (s009579)

Rear View

__ 4. Switch the PPS system power MAIN LINE circuit breaker (CB00) 6 to Off (down) on all primary power supplies in the subsystem.

CB1 CB2 CB3 CB4 CB5 J1 J2 J3 J4 J7-1 J7-2 J7-3 J7-4 J7-5
J5A J5B J6

CB00

Rear View
Figure 330. Primary Power Supply System Power CB Location (S008689l)

__ 5. Instruct the customer to switch off the circuit breaker that supplies mainline ac voltage to both mainline power cables for each 2105 rack you are moving in the subsystem. Attach a Do Not Operate tag (S229-0237) and the safety lockout padlock to each of these tripped customer ac mainline voltage circuit breakers. Refer to Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers book. Note: Each 2105 Model 800 and 2105 Expansion Enclosure rack in the subsystem has two mainline power cables that connect to the primary power supplies in each rack. __ 6. Determine where the two mainline power cables from each 2105 you are moving connect to the customers power. Note if the customer end of the mainline power cable is connected to customer power by a pluggable connector or wires and terminals. Disconnect these mainline power cables from the customers AC power: v For plug in mainline power cables, you can disconnect the connector.
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

367

Relocating a 2105 Subsystem


v For wired in mainline power cables, instruct the customer to call a license electrician to disconnect the wired mainline power cables from the customers mainline power sources. Continue with Reinstall the Cluster to Cluster Ethernet Jumper Cable.

Reinstall the Cluster to Cluster Ethernet Jumper Cable


1. Reinstall the cluster to cluster communication Ethernet (RJ45) cable 1 between the I/O drawers (10/100 connectors).

I/O Drawer 1

I/O Drawer 2

Front View

Figure 331. Cluster Communications Cable Location (S009120)

2. Continue with Disconnect Mainline Power Cables from Rack Being Moved.

Disconnect Mainline Power Cables from Rack Being Moved


Attention: Do the following mainline power cable procedures only on the 2105 being moved. Place a check mark next to each completed step. __ 1. Open the front cover of the 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure rack and locate mainline power cable you will be removing: Note: The mainline power cables are connected to the line cord bracket next to the PPS they feed. v 2105 Model 800: Mainline power cable 1, 1 Mainline power cable 2, 2 v 2105 Expansion Enclosure: Mainline power cable 1, 1 Mainline power cable 2, 2 Note: 2105 Model 800 shown.

368

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Relocating a 2105 Subsystem

Front View

(2 Screws)

Figure 332. Mainline Power Cable Locations (s009150)

__ 2. Remove the two center tailgate bar mounting screws 3 and remove the bar. __ 3. Release the top and bottom line cord latches, then disconnect the mainline power cables 1 and 2 from the line cord brackets __ 4. Remove the mainline power cables from the 2105. With some installations, you may have to remove the tailgate bar for additional clearance. __ 5. Continue with Disconnect Control and Interface Cables.

Disconnect Control and Interface Cables


Place a check mark next to each completed step. __ 1. Does this 2105 subsystem have an 2105 Expansion Enclosure? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to step 7 on page 372. __ 2. Use this step to remove and install the rack spacer service access panels from the front 3 and rear 1 of the 2105 subsystem. a. Loosen the service panels two lower mounting screws 4 . b. Remove the service panels two upper mounting screws 2 . c. Pull the side spacer out by the handle 3 , and lift off of the lower screws 4 . d. Reinstall the service panels when service access is no longer needed.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

369

Relocating a 2105 Subsystem


2105 Expansion Enclosure

2 1

3
FRONT

FRONT

Figure 333. Rack Spacer Service Panel Removal (S008695p)

__ 3. Locate and disconnect the two primary power supply to RPC card control cables. These cables are between the 2105 Expansion Enclosure primary power supplies 1 8 and 2 7 and the 2105 Model 800 rack power control-1 6 and -2 cards 5 . See Figure 334 on page 371. Note: The primary power supply to RPC card control cables run through the openings in the sides of the attached 2105s. a. Disconnect the control cables connected to the 2105 Model 800 RPC cards at 5 and 6 . Note: Each control cable assembly consists of a power cable, connected to the 2105 Expansion Enclosures PPS, and an interposer cable (P/N 18P4495) that allows the power cable to connect to the2105 Model 800 RPC card. b. Verify that the disconnected cable connectors are labeled for reinstallation. c. Feed the disconnected end of the cables through the rear side of the rack spacer, and into the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. d. Coil up the excess cable and store it in the 2105 Expansion Enclosure.

370

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Relocating a 2105 Subsystem


Top View J2 Connectors RPC-1 2105 Model 800
RPC-1 Card
J2

5
16

1
~
~

5 P/N 18P4495

15

RPC-2 2

6
16

RPC-2 Card

J2

1
~
~

15

P/N 18P4495 15

Rear View

RPC-1 RPC-2 Switch Card Switch Card

1 J2-5

(PPS-2, J4)

P/N 34L3085 P/N 34L3086

(PPS-1, J4)

PPS-2

PPS-1

2105 Expansion Enclosure

Rear View

Figure 334. Primary Power Supply Control Cable Locations (s009212)

__ 4. Locate the frame ground strap 9 from the 2105 Expansion Enclosure to the 2105 Model 800. Remove the ground strap screw from the 2105 Model 800 end of the ground strap. Feed the ground strap through the frame spacer and attach it to the 2105 Expansion Enclosure frame.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

371

Relocating a 2105 Subsystem


Expansion Enclosure

Front View

Figure 335. 2105 Expansion Enclosure Ground Strap Location (S008696m)

__ 5. Locate all of the SSA device cables from the 2105 Expansion Enclosure to the 2105 Model 800 DDM bays. Disconnect all of these SSA cables from the 2105 Model 800 DDM bays they attach to. Notes: a. Ensure that all SSA device cable connectors are labeled for reinstallation before disconnecting them. b. To prevent damage to cables with plastic connector screws, always use the special screwdriver (SSA tool, P/N 32H7059). This screwdriver is in the 2105 ship group.

Figure 336. DDM bay SSA Connector Locations (S007703l)

__ 6. Free the SSA device cables from the 2105 Model 800 and pull them through the rack spacer into the 2105 Expansion Enclosure. Roll these cables up and strap or tape them, in any open area, near the opening in the 2105 Expansion Enclosure they feed through. __ 7. At the front of the 2105 Model 800, disconnect all of the SCSI, ESCON, or Fibre channel host cables from the host bay, see Figure 337 on page 373.

372

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Relocating a 2105 Subsystem

Host Bays

R1-B1

R1-B2

R1-B3

R1-B4

Front View Ultra SCSI Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4 SCSI Connectors ESCON Link Connectors ESCON Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4

ZA ZB

ZA/LINK 00 ZB/LINK 01

Fibre Channel Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4 Fibre Channel Card Type LW2 (Long Wave Card) SW2 (Short Wave Card) Fibre Link Connectors Link A

Figure 337. 2105 Model 800 Host Bay Connector Locations (s009142)

Note: There are two types of Fibre channel cards: v Short Wave (SW2) v Long Wave (LW2) __ 8. Disconnect all Ethernet 10 and modem 11 cables from the front of 1 and 2. Note: Ensure that all disconnected cable connectors are properly labeled for reinstallation.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

373

Relocating a 2105 Subsystem

I/O Drawer 1/2

CLUSTER 1 CLUSTER 2 Cluster S1 Front View

Front View

10 Connectors 11 S2
S3

Figure 338. Cluster Connector Locations (s009160)

__ 9. If the remote power control feature in installed, disconnect the remote power control cables from the remote power control card. See Figure 156 on page 147. __ 10. Free all cables retained by the tailgate cable clamps, use 2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation on page 316. Pull all of the free SCSI, ESCON, fibre channel, and communication cables out of the 2105 Model 800. __ 11. Continue with Disconnecting 2105 Model 800 and 2105 Expansion Enclosure Frames.

Disconnecting 2105 Model 800 and 2105 Expansion Enclosure Frames


Place a check mark next to each completed step. __ 1. Remove the wedge locks 1 from the casters of all 2105s you will be moving.

Figure 339. Caster Wedge Locks (S008406m)

374

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

s008406m

Relocating a 2105 Subsystem


__ 2. Remove the rack spacers between the 2105 Model 800 and the 2105 Expansion Enclosure: a. Refer to Figure 340. b. Reinstall the front and rear rack spacer service access panels, see step 2 on page 369. c. Remove the front and rear spacer side panels. Loosen the two bottom screws 6 then remove the two top screws 5 and lift the side panel 4 off of the bottom screws. Reinstall all screws after removing the side panels. d. Remove the eight nuts from the top and bottom spacer mounting studs 2 and 9 . e. Move the 2105 Expansion Enclosure frame so the studs 3 and 8 . in the upper and lower spacers slide out of the holes in the top and bottom of its frame. f. Remove the upper and lower spacers. Loosely install the eight nuts on the spacer studs for reinstallation.

2105 Expansion Enclosure

FRONT

7 8 9
FRONT

Figure 340. Installation of 2105 Rack Spacers (S008699q)

__ 3. On the 2105 Model 800 rack being moved, reinstall all of the tailgate cable clamps and ESD plates. See 2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation on page 316. __ 4. Continue with Moving the 2105 Model 800 Subsystem on page 376.
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

375

Relocating a 2105 Subsystem

Moving the 2105 Model 800 Subsystem


Place a check mark next to each completed step. __ 1. Select your move activity below: v Relocating 2105 subsystem on the same floor: Note: If you are installing 2105 Model 800 and 2105 Expansion Enclosure racks, always install the 2105 Model 800 rack first. Continue with Installing a Relocated 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure Subsystem on page 377. v Relocating 2105 subsystem to another floor/building: Pack the 2105 Model 800 or 2105 Expansion Enclosure for removal. Follow the instructions that come with the Asset Sealing kit and the Relocation Packaging Materials kit to pack the 2105 for shipping. Asset Sealing Kit - U.S. or Canada, use Asset Sealing kit part number 7334847 - Asia Pacific, use Asset Sealing kit part number 7334847 - Latin America, use Asset Sealing kit part number 7334847 - EMEA, use Asset Sealing kit part number 7334847 Relocation Packaging Materials Kit Note: The Relocation Packaging Materials kit is only available for U.S., Canada, and EMEA. - 2105 Model 800 with ESSNet, use Relocation Packaging Materials kit part number 18P2232 - 2105 Model 800 without ESSNet, use Relocation Packaging Materials kit part number 18P2234 - 2105 Expansion Enclosure, use Relocation Packaging Materials kit part number 18P2236 Continue with Installing a Relocated 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure Subsystem on page 377.

376

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing a Relocated 2105 Subsystem

Installing a Relocated 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure Subsystem


Attention: This FRU is ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap when servicing this FRU. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Note: These instructions are only to be used to relocate (move) an entire 2105 subsystem. The procedure to remove (discontinue) the subsystem or a 2105 Model 800 is not offered at this time. These instructions describe how to: v Connect the 2105 Expansion Enclosure racks to a 2105 Model 800 rack. v Connect the 2105 power cables. v v v v Connect disconnected cable connectors. Connect the 2105 Model 800 interface, control, and communication cables. Power on the 2105 subsystem. Use the service terminal to test the 2105 subsystem after relocation.

Reinstallation of a 2105 Subsystem


Attention: In order to preserve the integrity of customer data, it is critical that 2105 subsystem be reconnected exactly the way it was connected before it was disassembled for relocation. Note: Hardware can not be changed or added during the relocation process. The following procedure will reassemble the 2105 subsystem by reversing the just completed disassembly process and by providing reference information to the normal 2105 installation process. Place a check mark next to each completed step. __ 1. If the 2105 subsystem was relocated using the Asset Sealing kit, unpack the 2105 or 2105s using the unpack instructions that come with the kit. __ 2. Ensure that the required customer preparation has been completed at the new location, perform steps 1 on page 171 through 4 on page 172. __ 3. Position the 2105 racks in their new locations then: v Install the rack spacers. v Bolt the frames together. v Install the frame ground strap. v Install the caster wedge locks. v Connect the primary power interconnect cables between frames. v Route the mainline power cable to the customers power connectors. 2105 Model 800: - Plug in mainline power cable, Perform steps 1 on page 180 through 5 on page 181. - Wired mainline power cable, Perform steps 1 on page 191 through 7 on page 194. 2105 Expansion Enclosure: - Plug in mainline power cable, Perform steps 1 on page 276 through 5 on page 277.
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

377

Installing a Relocated 2105 Subsystem


- Wired mainline power cable, Perform steps 1 on page 287 through 7 on page 290. __ 4. Determine if the customer power at the new location had been used previously and was checked for safety: v Customer power previously safety checked, go to step 5. v Customer power is new and requires a safety check: 2105 Model 800: - Plug in mainline power cable, Perform Check Customer Receptacle Ground Pin Continuity With Customer CB Off (Plug in) on page 182 to step 10 on page 190. - Wired mainline power cable, Perform Check Customer Ground Continuity with Customer CB Off (Wired) on page 194 to step 10 on page 202. 2105 Expansion Enclosure: - Plug in mainline power cable, Perform Check Receptacle Ground Pin Continuity with the Customer CB Off (Plug in) on page 278 to step 10 on page 286. - Wired mainline power cable, Perform Check Customer Ground Continuity with the Customer CB Off (Wired) on page 290 to step 10 on page 298. __ 5. Read the following attentions before connecting the host cables: Attention: The FRUs and cables in this procedure are ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap during this isolation procedure. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. Attention: To prevent electrostatic discharge, ensure you discharge all SCSI host cables to the ESD discharge pad, before you plug them into the 2105 Model 800. The ESD discharge pads are mounted on the front right and left corners of the 2105 Model 800 frame, next to each tailgate. Attention: Before disconnecting/connecting SCSI host cables, ask the customer to remove host I/O activities to all devices on the affected SCSI cables. The customer should refer to the host documentation to determine if host power also needs to be off.

Cluster 1

Cluster 2

ESD Discharge Pad

Top View Tailgate

ESD Discharge Pad

Front View
Figure 341. 2105 Model 800 ESD Discharge Pad Location (s009395)

378

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing a Relocated 2105 Subsystem


Route and connect the SCSI, ESCON, or Fibre channel host cables to the cluster connector locations identified by the labels on the cables.

Host Bays

R1-B1

R1-B2

R1-B3

R1-B4

Front View Ultra SCSI Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4 SCSI Connectors ESCON Link Connectors ESCON Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4

ZA ZB

ZA/LINK 00 ZB/LINK 01

Fibre Channel Host Cards Card 1, R1-Bx-H1 Card 2, R1-Bx-H2 Card 3, R1-Bx-H3 Card 4, R1-Bx-H4 Fibre Channel Card Type LW2 (Long Wave Card) SW2 (Short Wave Card) Fibre Link Connectors Link A

Figure 342. 2105 Model 800 Host Bay Connector Locations (s009142)

Note: There are two types of Fibre channel cards: v Short Wave (SW2) v Long Wave (LW2) __ 6. Route and connect the SSA device cables stored in the 2105 Expansion Enclosure through to the DDM bay they connect to in the 2105 Model 800. Refer to the label on each SSA cable. See Figure 343 on page 380 and

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

379

Installing a Relocated 2105 Subsystem


Figure 344 on page 381. Connect the SSA device cables to the indicated 2105 Model 800 DDM bays.
(R1-) Storage Cage 1 (-U1-) R1-U1-W1 R1-U1-W2 R1-U1-W3 R1-U1-W4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Storage Cage 2 (-U2-) R1-U2-W1 R1-U2-W2 R1-U2-W3 R1-U2-W4

Front View

Storage Cage 2 (-U2-) R1-U2-W5 R1-U2-W6 R1-U2-W7 R1-U2-W8


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Storage Cage 1 (-U1-) R1-U1-W5 R1-U1-W6 R1-U1-W7 R1-U1-W8

Rear View

Figure 343. 2105 Model 800 DDM bay Locations (s009136)

380

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing a Relocated 2105 Subsystem

Figure 344. DDM bay SSA Connector Locations (S007703l)

__ 7. Is the 2105 being reconnected to the same ESSNet with no communication configuration changes? v Yes, go to step 10. v No, continue with the next step. __ 8. Route the ethernet LAN cables to the RJ45 connector (10/100) on each cluster using the labels on the cables. Do NOT connect them at this time. __ 9. Check that the cluster to cluster communication Ethernet (RJ45) cable 1 is connected between the I/O drawers. Continue with step 11 on page 382

I/O Drawer 1

I/O Drawer 2

Front View

Figure 345. Cluster Communications Cable Location (S009120)

__ 10. Connect the ethernet LAN cables to the RJ45 connector on each cluster using the labels on the cables.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

381

Installing a Relocated 2105 Subsystem

I/O Drawer 1/2

CLUSTER 1 CLUSTER 2 Cluster Connectors S1 S2 S3 Front View

Front View

Figure 346. Cluster Ethernet Connectors (s009132)

__ 11. Connect the ESSNet hub and Master Console. Using Figure 347 on page 383, perform steps 2 on page 226 to 4 on page 226 and step 2 on page 228.

382

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing a Relocated 2105 Subsystem

2105 Subsystem #1 Cluster 1

Ethernet 10/100 Base T (RJ45) connector ESSNET* Ethernet RJ45 cable Ethernet Hub 1X 2X 3X 4X 5X 6X 7X

Master Console

Master Console RJ45 cable 8X

IBM

9X

10X

11X

12X 13X

14X

15X 16 MDI-X 16 MDI MDI PORT Customer Port (non-crossover) Customer Port (crossover)

MDI-X PORTS Front View 2105 Subsystem #1 Cluster 2

Ethernet 10 Base T (RJ45) connector * Note: See table for recommended plugging of additional 2105 subsystem connections to the Ethernet Hub

8X
Crossover

16 Ethernet Switch
Figure 347. ESSNet Hub Port Connector Locations (S008603p)

__ 12. Install all the cable clamps and strain relief for all cables entering the 2105 Model 800, see 2105 Model 800 Tailgate Cable Clamp Removal and Installation on page 316.

Powering On a Relocated 2105 Subsystem


Place a check mark next to each completed step. __ 1. Set the MASTER circuit breaker (CB06) on 390 V battery 1 3 to On (up). Attention: This circuit breaker is normally set to off by manufacturing to conserve battery power. The circuit breaker must be set to On (up) to prevent an entry into the problem.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

383

Installing a Relocated 2105 Subsystem

Battery 2

Battery 1

Rear View

Figure 348. 2105 Model 800 390 V Battery Circuit Breaker (s009128)

__ 2. Switch the System Power CB 4 on the rear of each primary power supply to On (up).

Rear View
Figure 349. Primary Power Supply (s009616)

__ 3. Power on the 2105 subsystem, perform steps 2 on page 209 through 13 on page 214. __ 4. Continue with Testing a Relocated 2105 Subsystem.

Testing a Relocated 2105 Subsystem


Place a check mark next to each completed step. __ 1. Connect the service terminal to cluster 1, perform steps 2 on page 215 through step 6 on page 216. __ 2. Use the service terminal to Install/Re-Install/Relocate Storage Facility, perform steps 1 on page 218 through 5c on page 219. __ 3. Follow the instructions on the service terminal to test the relocated 2105 subsystem. __ 4. Was the cluster to cluster communication Ethernet (RJ45) cable 1 installed in a previous step?

384

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Installing a Relocated 2105 Subsystem

I/O Drawer 1

I/O Drawer 2

Front View

Figure 350. Cluster Communications Cable Location (S009120)

v Yes, disconnect the cluster to cluster ethernet cable and connect the ethernet LAN cables to the RJ45 connector on each cluster using the labels on the cables. Continue with Testing Customer Ethernet LAN Cables and Master Console. v No, continue with Testing Customer Ethernet LAN Cables and Master Console.

Testing Customer Ethernet LAN Cables and Master Console


Place a check mark next to each completed step. __ 1. Use the service terminal to test the ethernet LAN and Master Console, perform step 2 on page 228 and steps 1 on page 248 through 5 on page 248.

Testing Modem Communications


Place a check mark next to each completed step. __ 1. Use the service terminal to test the modem connections, perform steps 1 on page 248 through 13 on page 249.

Completing the Relocation


Place a check mark next to each completed step. __ 1. Disconnect the service terminal, perform steps 7 on page 261 to 9 on page 261. __ 2. Connect the remote power control cables. Perform steps 2 on page 259 and 3 on page 259. __ 3. Reference the Asset Sealing kit for instructions on returning and discarding information. Discard shipping material locally. __ 4. Inform the customer that the 2105 Subsystem has been relocated and is available.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

385

Discontinuing a 2105 Model 800 Subsystem

Discontinuing a 2105 Model 800 Subsystem


Attention:This procedure should ONLY be used when the customer wants to discontinue the 2105 Model 800 subsystem. All customer data will be destroyed. Verify that the customer has removed all data that needs to be saved. If the ESS subsystem is being relocated within the same customers enterprise, and the data must be retained, go to Relocating a 2105 Model 800 Subsystem on page 363. Attention: To discontinue a 2105 subsystem, all of the logical configuration of the subsystem MUST be removed before the subsystem is disassembled. The logical configuration removed consists of: arrays, volumes, and host connections. Any physical configuration changes (for example: removal of an expansion enclosure or DDM bays, will require a separate RPQ. The removal RPQ must either be completed before starting the discontinue procedure or after the subsystem is installed in a new account. Any hardware changes made between the discontinue and the next install are highly discouraged, and unsupported. Unsupported changes, or a failure to follow the discontinue procedure, could cause the reinstallation of the 2105 subsystem to fail. Recovery from this type of installation failure will require the assistance of product engineering, this assistance is billable to the customer. This procedure will: v Allow the repair of all existing problems. v Remove the logical configuration from the ESS subsystem. v Provide instructions to mechanically disconnect any package the subsystem.

Discontinuing a 2105 Model 800 Subsystem Using the Service Terminal


Attention: The 2105 Model 800 and cable in this procedure are ESD-sensitive. Always wear an ESD wrist strap during this procedure. Follow the ESD procedures in Working with ESD-Sensitive Parts on page 4. __ 1. Connect the service terminal to the S2 connector on the front of cluster 1 in the 2105 Model 800. For service terminal connection and activation, see Connect the Service Terminal to the 2105 Subsystem on page 214.
I/O Drawer 1/2

CLUSTER 1 CLUSTER 2 Cluster Connectors S1 S2 S3 Front View

Front View

Figure 351. Service Terminal Interface Connection (s009132)

__ 2. Ensure that all problems are repaired before continuing. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select:

386

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Discontinuing a 2105 Model 800 Subsystem


Repair Menu Show/Repair problems Needing Repair __ 3. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Install/Remove Menu Enterprise Storage Server Menu Discontinue 2105 (Enterprise Storage Server) __ 4. Follow the instructions on the Service Terminal. Additional panels will be presented to confirm the removal of customer data and configurable items. The default values should be used unless the customer specifically requested otherwise. Note: Failure to take the default values may lead to increased time to re-install the ESS. __ 5. When the service terminal returns the service representative to this procedure, the removal of the logical configuration of this 2105 Model 800 subsystem is complete. Notes: a. If the default option Remove Logical Configuration was selected and the customer would like you to verify that the Logical Configuration was removed, then select: Utility Menu Display Physical and Logical Configuration Menu List All Logical Subsystems List All Ranks You should see that no Logical Subsystems or Ranks are listed. b. If the default option Remove Logical Configuration was selected, the DDM drawers will need to be reformatted before a new logical configuration can be built on the 2105. This is normally done when the 2105 is reinstalled. However, the customer may prefer that you format the DDMs before the subsystem is disconnected. This may take several hours to complete. If requested use: Install/Remove Menu DDM Bay (Drawer) Menu Format DDM Bays (Drawers) Format All Drawers Listed __ 6. Use the Relocating a 2105 Model 800 Subsystem on page 363 procedure to: v Power off the 2105 Model 800 v Reinstall the cluster to cluster ethernet jumper cable. v Identify and label disconnected cable connectors. v Disconnect the 2105 Model 800 power cables. v Disconnect the interface, control, and communication cables. v Disconnect 2105 Expansion Enclosure racks from a 2105 Model 800 rack. v Place the 2105 Model 800 racks in their shipping containers. Note: Do only the steps in this procedure necessary to discontinue or relocate the 2105 Model 800 subsystem racks using their shipping containers.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

387

Test Master Console Configuration and Communication Status

Test Master Console Configuration and Communication Status


These instructions check the status and configuration of the Master Console.

Master Console Status


At the end of an installation or if there are any problems with the Master Console configuration, you can use the Console Status task to help diagnose the cause of the problem. This is specifically used for communication problems between the Master Console and the Enterprise Storage Server, the Master Console and the network, or the Master Console and RETAIN. Perform the following steps to launch the Master Console status task 1. Did you come to this procedure from the 2105 Model 800 install instructions? v Yes, go to step 5. v No, continue with the next step. 2. Log into the master console with the user service and password as previously set. 3. At the Master Console desktop screen, double click on the Console Launcher icon. 4. Click on the Console Actions icon. 5. Double click the Console Status icon on the Console Actions frame. The Console Status window is displayed. 6. Continue with View the Message File.

View the Message File


The Message file is a log of internal communication processes. Click on the Display Message File tab and then click on the Display Message File button to display the contents of the message file. This opens a window with the contents of the message file. The data in this window will be constantly updated as information is added to the message file. This can be used to determine where errors occurred, or to track the progress of tests run from other tabs in this task. When you are done viewing this information close the window by pressing the Close button. Continue with Test Subsystem Communication.

Test Subsystem Communication


To test the IP (ethernet) communication between the Master Console and the attached ESS or ESSs do the following: 1. Click on the Test Subsystem Communication tab. This displays the IP address of the Master Console in the column labeled Source IP, and the IP addresses of all attached ESSs in the column labeled Target IP. 2. Select one or more rows that you would like to test, by clicking on the row. 3. Click on the Test button, to start the test. 4. The test results are displayed in the table as OK, Error, or Not Tested. Once a test encounters an error on that row, the remaining portions will not be tested. If any errors occur, the Show Errors button will be enabled. Click on the Show Errors button to get more detailed information on the failure, and steps to resolve this problem. 5. Determine if the Master Console is attached to the customer LAN. v If the Master Console is attached to the customer LAN, continue with Test Customer Network on page 389.

388

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Test Master Console Configuration and Communication Status


v If the Master Console is not attached to the customer LAN, continue with Test RETAIN Connection.

Test Customer Network


The Master Console is attached to the customer LAN, to test the IP (ethernet) communication between the Master Console and the configured customer network devices (gateway and name servers) do the following: 1. Click on the Test Customer Network tab. This displays the IP address of the Master Console in the column labeled Source IP, and the IP addresses of the customer network devices in the column labeled Target IP. 2. Select one or more rows that you would like to test, by clicking on the row. 3. Click on the Test button, to start the test. 4. The test results are displayed in the table as OK, Error, or Not Tested. Once a test encounters an error on that row, the remaining portions will not be tested. If any errors occur, the Show Errors button will be enabled. Click on this button to get more detailed information on the failure, and steps to resolve this problem. 5. Continue with Test RETAIN Connection.

Test RETAIN Connection


Data is sent to RETAIN using two protocols. One for problem notification, and one for data upload. Data upload refers to sending data like dumps or traces. Both protocols can be tested. The phone numbers displayed are those selected when the Call Home information was configured on the Master Console. This test requires that the Primary Shark be at LIC level 1.5.2.91 or higher. The primary shark is defined on the Call Home Settings under the Machine Information Settings tab. To test the RETAIN connection do the following: 1. Click on the Test RETAIN Connection tab. This displays the configured phone numbers, and a network connection. The network connection is only available if the customer LAN is connected to the IBM intranet. 2. Select one of the phone numbers or the network. 3. Click on the Test Problem Notification button, or the Test Data Upload button, to start the test. 4. The test results are displayed in a window, with information on how to fix any problems if the test was not successful. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all desired phone numbers have been tested for problem notification and or data upload. 6. If you make any changed in the Call Home configuration click on the Refresh button to update the phone numbers on the panel. 7. Continue with Test Serial Connection.

Test Serial Connection


The serial connection test, tests communication between the Master Console and the attached ESS or ESSs through the Multiport Serial Adapter (MSA) card. The Communications Adapter Configuration task was used to configure the serial connection. To test the serial connections do the following: 1. Click on the Test Serial Connection tab. This displays all the ports on the MSA card in the column labeled MSA Port Number. 2. Select one or more ports that you would like to test, by clicking on the row of the correspond port. 3. Click on the Test button, to start the test.
Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

389

Test Master Console Configuration and Communication Status


4. The test results are displayed in the table as OK, Error, or Not Tested. Once a test encounters an error on that row, the remaining portions will not be tested. If any errors occur, the Show Errors button will be enabled. Click on this button to get more detailed information on the failure, and steps to resolve this problem. 5. Continue with Display Console VPD.

Display Console VPD


You can view key Vital Product Data (VPD) associated withe the Master Console by clicking on the Display Console VPD tab. This data contains information about the PC, current LIC levels, and key network configuration data. To view the VPD do the following: 1. Click on the Display Console VPD tab. This displays Vital Product data for the Master Console and key configuration item. 2. Click on the Close button when complete. 3. Did you come to this procedure from the 2105 Model 800 install instructions? v Yes, go to Master Console Backup and Restore Configuration Data on page 238. v No, end of procedure.

390

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Duplicating the Configuration of a 2105 ESS Subsystem

Duplicating the Configuration of a 2105 ESS Subsystem


Attention: This procedure should only be used if you are installing a new machine that will have the EXACT same duplicate Hardware and Logical Volume definitions as a previously installed 2105. The purpose of this procedure is to verify that the New Machine (called a Target) is equivalent to the Source Machine (where a duplicate configuration is being generated). This procedure checks for problems and possible configuration differences between the Source and the Target 2105s. Attention: This procedure does not support duplicating an ESS configuration into a Target ESS with larger capacity DDMs. If the Target ESS has larger capacity DDMs than the Source ESS, contact your next level of support to determine the impact. These instructions describe: v What to do before you start the duplication process. v How to capture the configuration of the Source ESS on diskette. v How to duplicate the captured configuration on the Target ESS.

Source ESS Subsystem Requirements


1. Verify and record the LIC EC Levels that are installed. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Licensed Internal Code Maintenance Menu Display all Installed EC Levels Record the installed EC Levels. Note: LIC EC levels must be identical between the Source and the Target ESS Subsystems. If the Target machine is at a higher EC level, then update the Source to the same EC level. 2. Verify and record the LIC Features that are installed. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Licensed Internal Code Maintenance Menu LIC Feature Menu Record the installed Active LIC Features.

Note: LIC Features must be identical between the Source and the Target ESS Subsystems. 3. Perform an End of Call Status to check for open problems and quiesced or fenced resources. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Repair Menu End of Call Status Resolve all open problems. Note: All problems must be resolved before any attempt is made to capture the Source ESS configuration. 4. Record the physical location of all Fibre Channel and SCSI Host cards. Note: The physical locations of all Fibre Channel and SCSI Host cards must be identical between the Source and Target ESS Subsystems.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

391

Duplicating the Configuration of a 2105 ESS Subsystem

Capture the Source ESS Subsystem Configuration


Note: The following procedure requires the use of blank formatted diskettes. Because of the failure rate of diskettes, it is recommended that a second back-up diskette be made (especially when the Target ESS is at a remote location). 1. Capture the configuration of the Source ESS on diskette: From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Copy Services Menu Configuration Duplication Menu Capture Configuration Follow the service terminal instructions to capture the Source ESS Configuration on diskette.

Target ESS Subsystem Requirements


Note: Use the recorded information obtained in Source ESS Subsystem Requirements on page 391 when performing the following procedure. 1. Verify that the physical locations of all Fibre Channel and SCSI Host cards are identical between the Source and Target ESS Subsystems. Note: Fibre Channel and SCSI Host cards that are not in identical physical locations will not be configured. 2. Verify and record the LIC EC Levels that are installed. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Licensed Internal Code Maintenance Menu Display all Installed EC Levels Record the installed EC Levels. Note: LIC EC levels must be identical between the Source and the Target ESS Subsystems. Install any new code requirements on the Target ESS. 3. Verify and record the LIC Features that are installed. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Licensed Internal Code Maintenance Menu LIC Feature Menu Record the installed Active LIC Features. Note: LIC Features must be identical between the Source and the Target ESS Subsystems. If the customer has ordered the required LIC Features, update any new LIC Features on the Target ESS. 4. Perform an End of Call Status to check for open problems and quiesced or fenced resources. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Repair Menu End of Call Status Resolve all open problems.

392

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Duplicating the Configuration of a 2105 ESS Subsystem


Note: All problems must be resolved before any attempt is made to configure the Target ESS.

Duplicate the Configuration on the Target ESS Subsystem


The following procedure requires the use of the diskette with the configuration captured from the Source ESS. 1. Duplicate the configuration on the Target ESS Subsystem: From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Copy Services Menu Configuration Duplication Menu Duplicate Configuration Follow the service terminal instructions to duplicate the configuration on the Target ESS. 2. Since the Target ESS subsystem will be configured with the EXACT same settings as the Source, some settings may need to be changed. Read the following and perform only those that apply: v If a S/390 Storage Configuration was created, you may need to update the SSID using the Configure LCU option for S/390 Storage in the ESS Specialist. v If Open System volumes were created, you may need to update: Host Names (Nickname) using the Modify Host Systems option for Open Systems storage in the ESS Specialist. World Wide Port Names (WWPNs) using the Modify Host Systems option for Open Systems storage in the ESS Specialist.

Install and Remove, CHAPTER 5

393

Duplicating the Configuration of a 2105 ESS Subsystem

394

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Chapter 6: Logical Configuration of Storage Facility


Pre-Installation Configuration Worksheets . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filling in fields on the Communications Resources Worksheet . Activating LIC Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications Configuration of the 2105 . . . . . . . . . Configure Customer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure SIM Reporting Options (System/390 only) . . . . Configure Maximum Overall Problem Presentation Count . . . Configure Call Home / Remote Services . . . . . . . . . Configure E-Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Pager Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logical Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure ESS Specialist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Fibre Channel Port Topology . . . . . . . . . Configure Control Switches Configuration. . . . . . . . . Additional Configuration Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . Change Date, Time, and Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . Changing TCP/IP Configuration (Dual Cluster Version) . . . . Changing TCP/IP Configuration (Single Cluster Version) . . . Updating the Master Console TCP/IP Information . . . . . . Regenerate ESS Specialist Certificate . . . . . . . . . . Configure Copy Services, With DNS . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Copy Services, Without DNS . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change/Show Control Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable or Disable CUIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Passwords on the Master Console . . . . . . . Changing the Master Console Userid Password . . . . . Changing the Master Console Console Launcher Password . Master Console Queue Management . . . . . . . . . . . Master Console PE Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Console Offload User Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 395 396 396 397 397 397 397 397 398 399 399 399 400 400 400 401 401 401 405 409 410 410 410 412 413 415 415 415 416 416 416 417 418

Pre-Installation Configuration Worksheets Overview


The following customer worksheets have fields that must be filled in AFTER the customer has completed their portion of the Communication Resources Worksheets from the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server Introduction and Planning Guide manual, and the Configuration Worksheets from the IBM Enterprise Storage Server Configuration Planner manual. The service support representative must then fill in additional information (shaded areas on the worksheets) PRIOR to: v Installation or reconfiguration of the IBM 2105 TotalStorage ESS v Installation or reconfiguration of the ESSNet console v Adding SSA DASD DDM bays v Adding SCSI Host Cards v Adding Fibre Host Cards

Copyright IBM Corp. 2004, 2005

395

Configuration
Note: 2105 Model 750 information v The 2105 Model 750 is fully supported by the service information in this chapter when following guided procedures. However, the service information will only reference the 2105 Model 800. v The 2105 Model 750 supports limited configuration options when compared to the 2105 Model 800. For further information, reference the IBM TotalStorage ESS Introduction and Planning Guide (form number SC267246).

Filling in fields on the Communications Resources Worksheet


Attention: Prior to the installation of an ESS, the customer and the service representative (SR) must have completed and reviewed the Worksheets. This should be done prior to or during the System Assurance meeting. The SR is responsible for the: Remote telephone numbers (RETAIN), Do not wait for dial tone before dialing, HB and MRPD record destination, and the Support Catcher telephone number fields. v Remote telephone numbers (RETAIN) Refer to step 5f of the Guidelines for completing the Communications Resources work sheet in the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server Introduction and Planning Guide manual, form number GC26-7444, Do not wait for dial tone before dialing Refer to step 5g of the Guidelines for completing the Communications Resources work sheet in the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server Introduction and Planning Guide manual, form number GC26-7444, v HB and MRPD record destination Refer to step 5h of the Guidelines for completing the Communications Resources work sheet in the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server Introduction and Planning Guide manual, form number GC26-7444, v v Support Catcher telephone number Refer to step 5i of the Guidelines for completing the Communications Resources work sheet in the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server Introduction and Planning Guide manual, form number GC26-7444,

Activating LIC Features


Note: This procedure requires the LIC Feature Control Records diskette. Even though a diskette may have been provided in the ship group or MES, you should always download the latest version from ViewBlue. See Check On ViewBlue If LIC Features Have Been Ordered For This Machine on page 170. Requirements: Must have the DOS diskette containing the LIC Feature Control Record specifically written for the selected 2105 storage server. The diskette will be labeled FEA#####.BIN, with ##### the serial number of the 2105. Procedure: Log the service terminal into cluster 1. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select:

396

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Configuration
Licensed Internal Code Maintenance Menu LIC Feature Menu Activate LIC Feature 1. Follow all of the screen instructions, they will guide you through the diskette insertion and removal steps. 2. When completed, all LIC features will be enabled per the file record on the diskette. Note: When the LIC features are displayed, a serial number will be listed on the right. This is a unique Serial Number for the LIC feature and it will be different from the 2105 serial number. In some cases this may appear as 00-00000 (no action is required).

Communications Configuration of the 2105


Do the following procedures to configure the communications of the 2105.

Configure Customer Information


From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu Change / Show Customer Information Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet

Configure SIM Reporting Options (System/390 only)


From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu Change/Show SIM Reporting Options Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet.

Configure Maximum Overall Problem Presentation Count


From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu Change/Show Maximum Overall Problem Presentation Count Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet.

Configure Call Home / Remote Services


1. Determine if you have a Master Console or an ESSNet console. v Master Console, continue with the next step. v ESSNet console, go to step 3 on page 398. Note: To determine what type of console you have, reference Begin Installation and Connection to the ESSNet on page 220. 2. Do the configuration based on the Modem Expander type. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select:

Logical Configuration of Storage Facility, CHAPTER 6

397

Configuration
Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu Call Home / Remote Services Menu Change / Show Modem Configuration Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet then return to the Call Home / Remote Services Menu and select: When entering modem information, always select the Microcom DeskPorte modem (even if you are installing a Multitech MultiModem). 3. Configure the remaining Call Home / Remote Services: From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communication Resources Menu Call Home / Remote Services Menu Change / Show Call Home / Remote Services Enter information from the Communications Resources Worksheets.

Configure E-Mail
Note: The following actions must be performed on both clusters. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu E-Mail Menu Change / Show Error Notification Count Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet then return to the Configure E-Mail Menu and select one of the following: - Smart-Host Relay Menu v Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet then return to the Configure E-Mail Menu and select: v Change Local E-Mail Configuration v Enter information from the Communication Resources worksheet. Note: Local E-Mail and Smart-Host Relay can not be enabled at the same time. - Add E-Mail Destination v Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet then return to the Configure E-Mail Menu and select: v Change / Show E-Mail Destination Settings v Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet.

398

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Configuration

Configure SNMP
From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu SNMP Menu Change / Show SNMP Configuration Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet.

Configure Pager Users


Note: This menu will allow both the customer and the service personnel to enter pager information. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu Pager Menu Pager Users Menu

Logical Configurations
Notes: 1. If the customer chooses to perform their own logical configuration using the ESS Specialist, this procedure is not necessary. 2. When storage is being added to a previously configured SSA loop, the ESS Specialist must be used. The ESS Batch Configuration Tool (below) can only be used on previously unconfigured SSA loops. 3. The Batch Configuration Tool is no longer supported for LIC levels higher than VRMF 2.3.0.0 To apply the logical configuration, use one of the following alternate methods: v ESS Specialist or v Configuration Duplication Menu option or v Background Certify and Build Logical Configuration from the ISA menu option Procedure: 1. Define the storage configuration. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu ESS Batch Configuration Tool Menu Define a Storage Configuration Note: Check if the SSA card that you want to configure is in the A List of All Unconfigured SSA Cards. If the SSA card is not listed, the drawers belonging to that SSA card must be configured using the ESS Specialist. Enter the information from the Configuration Worksheets to do the following: v To configure open systems volumes, you must use the ESS Specialist and the IBM Enterprise Storage Server Configuration Planner for Open-System manual, form number SC26-7477
Logical Configuration of Storage Facility, CHAPTER 6

399

Configuration
v To configure S/390 custom volumes, you must use the ESS Specialist and the IBM Enterprise Storage Server Configuration Planner for S/390 and eServer zSeries manual, form number SC26-7476 (Appendix B). v To configure S/390 standard volumes, you can use either the ESS Specialist or the service terminal ESS Batch Configuration Tool and the IBM Enterprise Storage Server Configuration Planner for S/390 and eServer zSeries manual, form number SC26-7476 (Appendix A). 2. Apply the defined storage configuration list. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu ESS Batch Configuration Tool Menu Apply Defined Storage Configuration List

Note: The application of the Defined Storage Configuration is a background process that may take several hours to complete. This installation procedure will later use the Display Status of Apply Process to verify completion status before giving the 2105 to the customer. 3. Perform ESS Specialist Configuration from Master Console If additional configuration needs to be completed, use the ESS Specialist from the Master Console. Note: The IBM TotalStorage ESS Master Console will be referred to as the Master Console in this document.

Configure ESS Specialist


From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu ESS Specialist Menu Enter Enable / Disable ESS Specialist information as indicated in the Communication Resources Worksheet

Configure Fibre Channel Port Topology


From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Systems Attachment Resources Menu Configure Fibre Channel Port Select the desired host port and then set the Network Topology Type to either FCAL, Point-to-Point (FCP), or Point-to-Point (FICON) as indicated in the Configuration Resources Worksheets.

Configure Control Switches Configuration


Note: Control switches only need to be set for any of the following conditions: v Fibre-channel FCP host connections are installed (Fibre Channel LUN Access Control) v CUIR is installed (Allow CUIR to Automatically Vary Paths OFF/ON)

400

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Configuration
v WEB Copy Services enablement for S/390 (WEB Copy Services commands for S/390 volumes) From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Change / Show Control Switches Fibre Channel LUN Access Control Enter information from the Configuration Resources Worksheet. Note: Control switches cannot be set by the customer using the ESS Specialist. You, the field service representative, must set the control switches correctly for fibre channel operation. Allow CUIR to Automatically Vary Paths OFF/ON Enter the Enabled/Disabled information from the Configuration Worksheet. WEB Copy Services commands for S/390 volumes Enter the Enabled/Disabled information from the Configuration Resources Worksheet.

Additional Configuration Procedures


Additional 2105 configuration procedures.

Change Date, Time, and Time Zone


Note: To activate configuration changes to date, time, and time zone, this procedure will reboot each cluster. This can take up to 45 minutes to complete. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Change / Show Date, Time, and Time Zone Enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet.

Changing TCP/IP Configuration (Dual Cluster Version)


This procedure allows changes to the TCP/IP configuration after the initial minimal TCP/IP configuration has already been installed. Both clusters will be updated at the same time and cluster to cluster communications tests will be run. 1. Notify the customer that the ESS Specialist must disable Copy Services because TCP/IP information changes are being made. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu ESS Specialist Menu Disable the ESS Specialist 2. Does the customer use Copy Services? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to step 4 on page 402.

Logical Configuration of Storage Facility, CHAPTER 6

401

Configuration
3. Notify the customer that you must disable Copy Services because TCP/IP information changes are being made. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Copy Services Menu Copy Services Server Menu Disable ( Disable Copy Services ) Note: Review the Copy Services worksheet information to determine if TCP/IP changes affect the Copy Services Configuration. Any Copy Services changes will need to be made prior to restarting Copy Services. 4. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu Change / Show TCP/IP Configuration Minimum Configuration & Startup (Dual Cluster Version) Select en0. Note: If the customer wants to use et0 Ethernet interface, call your next level of support. 5. Is the ESSNet already attached to the customers network? v Yes, enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet. Press Enter then continue with the next step. v No, enter the default TCP/IP configuration information from Table 55 on page 403. Press Enter then continue with the next step. Note: Defaults can only be used when the ESSNet is not attached to the customer network.

402

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Configuration
Table 55. Default TCP/IP Settings 2105 Subsystem on ESSNet First First Second Second Third Third Fourth Fourth Fifth Fifth Sixth Sixth Seventh Seventh Cluster HOST NAME Internet Address 172.31.1.1 172.31.1.2 172.31.1.3 172.31.1.4 172.31.1.5 172.31.1.6 172.31.1.7 172.31.1.8 172.31.1.9 172.31.1.10 172.31.1.11 172.31.1.12 172.31.1.13 172.31.1.14 Network Mask

1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2

ess1c1 ess1c2 ess2c1 ess2c2 ess3c1 ess3c2 ess4c1 ess4c2 ess5c1 ess5c2 ess6c1 ess6c2 ess7c1 ess7c2

255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

[ESSNet1 Console] [Master Console]

[essnet1] [essnet1]

[172.31.1.250] [172.31.1.250]

255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

Notes: a. Set the following additional TCP/IP Settings not covered in the table above as follows: v NAME SERVER Internet Address, blank*. v NAME SERVER Domain Name, blank*. v Default Gateway Address, blank*. b. A blank* indicates that this field should be blank. c. Spaces following Host Names can also cause problems. 6. You will be asked if you wish to Verify Cluster to Cluster communication. Move the cursor and press enter as directed. The verification tests will then run. Did the verifications tests run successfully? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to MAP 4410: Cluster to Cluster Ethernet Communication Test in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 to repair the problem. When the problem is resolved, return here and continue with the next step. 7. Press F3 until you receive the Restarting TCP/IP daemons message, wait for the Press enter to continue message then press Enter. 8. If applicable, refer to to Communications Resources Worksheet. Determine if there is a second DNS assigned. Is there a second DNS assigned? v Yes, do this step. v No, continue with the next step. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select:
Logical Configuration of Storage Facility, CHAPTER 6

403

Configuration
Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu Change / Show TCP/IP Configuration Further Configuration Name Resolution Domain Name Server Add a Name Server Enter information from the Communications Resources Worksheet. 9. A new ESS Specialist certificate must be created if this machine was previously installed at another location, or the NAMESERVER Domain Name, or the TCP/IP address was changed. Use the following procedure: From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu ESS Specialist Menu Create New Key Files/Certificate Follow the service terminal instructions. 10. Restart the ESS Specialist. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu ESS Specialist Menu Enable the ESS Specialist 11. Notify the customer to restart Copy Services. 12. Update the ESSNet1 or Master console to use the changed ESS TCP/IP information. v If you have a Master console continue with the next step. v If you have an ESSNet1 continue with step 24 on page 405. 13. At the Master Console Login window, log in using the userid of service and the default password of service (or the locally assigned password). 14. At the Master Console desktop, double click on the Console Launcher icon. Then type in the password of service and click the Connect button. 15. At the Views frame, click on the Groups icon. 16. At the Groups frame, double click on the ESS Networks icon. 17. At the ESS Networks frame, select (single click) the ESS Network 1 icon. 18. At the ESS Networks Tasks frame, double click on ESS Configurations. 19. At the pop-up warning screen, click the OK button. 20. At the ESS Configurations screen, press the Refresh button. The clusters with updated TCP/IP information will show as N/A. 21. Select the first N/A entry and click Edit. Update the new Cluster IPAddress for each cluster of the ESS subsystem which was changed. 22. Click the OK button. Note: If N/A is returned in one or more columns, this indicates that the Master Console cannot communicate with the ESS. Check the network settings for both the ESS and the Master Console.

404

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Configuration
23. Click the OK button. The update is now completed. 24. Configuring the Network Information of the 2105s on the ESSNet1 Console: a. On the ESSNet console, double click the ESSNet Toolkit icon on the desktop. b. Select the Install/Configure tab. c. Click on the Subsystem tab. d. Select the HostName of the cluster of the 2105 that needs to be changed. (To do this click on the Device-Model of the row you wish to edit.) e. Click on Edit Subsystem and change the following as supplied by the customer on the Communications Resources Worksheet. v HostName v IP Address v Subnet Mask f. Click on Save. Note: The window may not close if data is missing or not correct. g. Click OK. h. Close the ESSNet Toolkit window. i. The update is now complete.

Changing TCP/IP Configuration (Single Cluster Version)


This procedure allows changes to the TCP/IP configuration after the initial minimal TCP/IP configuration has already been installed. Attention: Cluster TCP/IP configuration can be changed using the Single or Dual Cluster Version. Use of the Dual Cluster Version is recommended since BOTH clusters will be updated at the same time and cluster to cluster tests will then be run automatically. Please refer to Changing TCP/IP Configuration (Dual Cluster Version) on page 401. 1. Notify the customer that the ESS Specialist must disable Copy Services because TCP/IP information changes are being made. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu ESS Specialist Menu Disable the ESS Specialist 2. Does the customer use Copy Services? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to step 4 on page 406. 3. Notify the customer that you must disable Copy Services because TCP/IP information changes are being made. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Copy Services Menu Copy Services Server Menu Disable ( Disable Copy Services )

Logical Configuration of Storage Facility, CHAPTER 6

405

Configuration
Note: Review the Copy Services worksheet information to determine if TCP/IP changes affect the Copy Services Configuration. Any Copy Services changes will need to be made prior to restarting Copy Services. 4. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu Change / Show TCP/IP Configuration Minimum Configuration & Startup Select en0. Note: If the customer wants to use et0 Ethernet interface, call your next level of support. 5. Is the ESSNet already attached to the customers network? v Yes, enter information from the Communication Resources Worksheet. Continue with the next step. v No, enter the default TCP/IP configuration information from Table 56. Continue with the next step. Note: Defaults can only be used when the ESSNet is not attached to the customer network.
Table 56. Default TCP/IP Settings 2105 Subsystem on ESSNet First First Second Second Third Third Fourth Fourth Fifth Fifth Sixth Sixth Seventh Seventh Cluster HOST NAME Internet Address 172.31.1.1 172.31.1.2 172.31.1.3 172.31.1.4 172.31.1.5 172.31.1.6 172.31.1.7 172.31.1.8 172.31.1.9 172.31.1.10 172.31.1.11 172.31.1.12 172.31.1.13 172.31.1.14 Network Mask

1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2

ess1c1 ess1c2 ess2c1 ess2c2 ess3c1 ess3c2 ess4c1 ess4c2 ess5c1 ess5c2 ess6c1 ess6c2 ess7c1 ess7c2

255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

[ESSNet1 Console] [Master Console]

[essnet1] [essnet1]

[172.31.1.250] [172.31.1.250]

255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

Notes: a. Set the following additional TCP/IP Settings not covered in the table above as follows:

406

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Configuration
v NAME SERVER Internet Address, blank*. v NAME SERVER Domain Name, blank*. v Default Gateway Address, blank*. b. A blank* indicates that this field should be blank. c. Spaces following Host Names can also cause problems. 6. Press F3 to Change / Show TCP/IP Configuration Configure Alternate Cluster IP Address and Hostname. Use the information from the Communications Resources Worksheet or Table 56 on page 406 as determined in step 5 on page 406 to enter the INTERNET ADDRESS (dotted decimal) and HOSTNAME of the Alternate cluster (the cluster the service terminal is NOT connected to) of the 2105. Attention: The same TCP/IP and Hostname information must be repeated and entered on both clusters to avoid cluster-to-cluster communication error/timeouts. This will be done later in step 9. 7. Press F3 until you receive the Restarting TCP/IP daemons message, wait for the Press enter to continue message then press Enter. 8. If applicable, refer to to Communications Resources Worksheet. Determine if there is a second DNS assigned. Is there a second DNS assigned? v Yes, do this step. v No, continue with the next step. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu Change / Show TCP/IP Configuration Further Configuration Name Resolution Domain Name Server Add a Name Server Enter information from the Communications Resources Worksheet. Repeat steps 4 on page 406 through 8 on the alternate cluster. Verify Cluster-Cluster communication. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Machine Test Menu External Connections Menu Cluster-Cluster Communication Test Did the verifications tests run successfully? v Yes, continue with the next step. v No, go to MAP 4410: Cluster to Cluster Ethernet Communication Test in chapter 3 of the Volume 1 to repair the problem. When the problem is resolved, return here and continue with the next step. A new ESS Specialist certificate must be created if this machine was previously installed at another location, or the NAMESERVER Domain Name, or the TCP/IP address was changed. Use the following procedure: From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu
Logical Configuration of Storage Facility, CHAPTER 6

9. 10.

11.

12.

407

Configuration
ESS Specialist Menu Create New Key Files/Certificate Follow the service terminal instructions. 13. Restart the ESS Specialist. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu ESS Specialist Menu Enable the ESS Specialist Notify the customer to restart Copy Services. Update the ESSNet1 or Master console to use the changed ESS TCP/IP information. v If you have a Master console continue with the next step. v If you have an ESSNet1 continue with step 27. At the Master Console Login window, log in using the userid of service and the default password of service (or the locally assigned password). At the Master Console desktop, double click on the Console Launcher icon. Then type in the password of service and click the Connect button.

14. 15.

16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23.

At the Views frame, click on the Groups icon. At the Groups frame, double click on the ESS Networks icon. At the ESS Networks frame, select (single click) the ESS Network 1 icon. At the ESS Networks Tasks frame, double click on ESS Configurations. At the pop-up warning screen, click the OK button. At the ESS Configurations screen, press the Refresh button. The clusters with updated TCP/IP information will show as N/A. 24. Select the first N/A entry and click Edit. Update the new Cluster IPAddress for each cluster of the ESS subsystem which was changed. 25. Click the OK button. Note: If N/A is returned in one or more columns, this indicates that the Master Console cannot communicate with the ESS. Check the network settings for both the ESS and the Master Console. 26. Click the OK button. The update is now completed. 27. Configuring the Network Information of the 2105s on the ESSNet1 Console: a. On the ESSNet console, double click the ESSNet Toolkit icon on the desktop. b. Select the Install/Configure tab. c. Click on the Subsystem tab. d. Select the HostName of the cluster of the 2105 that needs to be changed. (To do this click on the Device-Model of the row you wish to edit.) e. Click on Edit Subsystem and change the following as supplied by the customer on the Communications Resources Worksheet. v HostName v IP Address v Subnet Mask f. Click on Save. Note: The window may not close if data is missing or not correct.

408

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Configuration
g. Click OK. h. Close the ESSNet Toolkit window. i. The update is now complete.

Updating the Master Console TCP/IP Information


1. At the Master Console Login window, log in using the userid of service and the default password of service (or the locally assigned password). 2. At the Master Console desktop screen, double click the Console Launcher icon. 3. At the Master Console Launcher screen, type in the password service and then click the Connect button. Note: It will take a few seconds until it comes up. At the Localhost: Hardware Management Console screen, click on Console Actions in the Views frame. At the Console Actions frame, double click on Console Settings. At the Console Settings screen, enter the Master Console TCP/IP Information in the displayed fields using the Communications Resources Worksheets for Master Console (appendix B). After all the information has been entered, click the OK button. At the Warning pop-up screen, click the Yes button. The PC will reboot. Note: The reboot activates the network interface and allows network communication to all of the attached ESS subsystems. The master console TCP/IP information must now be updated on all the attached ESSs. Double click the ESS Terminal Selector icon on the desktop. Select the Cluster 1 on the ESS to be updated an login as service. Enter the password that is displayed on the Cluster 1 operator panel LCD. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu Call Home / Remote Services Menu Change / Show Master Console Host Name and IP Address Enter the information from the Communications Resources Worksheet for the ESS Master Console (appendix B) for the ESSNet TCP/IP host name and internet address. After the information is entered, using the Command Status screen, verify that the changes were activated and completed successfully.

4. 5. 6.

7. 8.

9. 10. 11. 12.

13.

14.

Note: This will update the information on both clusters. 15. Press F3 repeatedly until you are given the option to logoff. Enter y. 16. Close the login screen by pressing the following keys: a. Press and release the Ctrl and A keys. b. Press and release the X key. c. Enter Yes to leave the minicom session. 17. Repeat steps 11 through 16 to update the master console TCP/IP information for each attached ESS. 18. Close the ESS Terminal Selector window.
Logical Configuration of Storage Facility, CHAPTER 6

409

Configuration
19. Continue with Figure 189 on page 193.

Regenerate ESS Specialist Certificate


From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu ESS Specialist Menu Disable the ESS Specialist From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu ESS Specialist Menu Create New Key Files/Certificate Follow the service terminal instructions. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communications Resources Menu ESS Specialist Menu Enable the ESS Specialist

Configure Copy Services, With DNS


This section covers the steps needed to configure the ESS Specialist Copy Services. Attention: 1. Verify that the LIC features have been ordered and installed for the Copy Services feature. Refer to Activating LIC Features on page 396. 2. Entering the Copy Services Server and Client Configuration: v If the ESS is running at Code level 2.2.x.x or above, then the Copy Services Server and Client Configuration (Step 4 on page 411) can be entered by the customer using the ESS Specialist / Tools Options. v If the ESS is running at Code level 3.3.x.x or above, then the Copy Services Client Configuration (Step 4 on page 411) can only be entered using the ESS Specialist / Tools Options. 3. The Communication Resources Worksheets must be available, with the Copy Services information completed by the customer, for this ESS subsystem before starting copy services configuration. 4. The ESS subsystem with the cluster designated as the Primary Server must be configured first, then the ESS subsystem with the Backup Server can be configured.

Procedure
1. ALL of the 2105 subsystems using the ESS Specialist Copy Services, must be connected to the customer network. If the 2105s are not connected to the customer network, follow the steps in Connecting an ESSNet1 or Master Console to a Customer Network on page 243. When complete, return here to configure the ESS Specialist Copy Services. 2. Verify that DNS is configured.

410

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Configuration
From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Configure Communication Resources Menu Change / Show TCP/IP Configuration Minimum Configuration and Startup (Dual Cluster Version) Select en0. Note: Verify that under the NAMESERVER, the internet ADDRESS and DOMAIN Name are specified. If not, enter the information from the Communications Resources Worksheets. If the NAMESERVER internet ADDRESS or DOMAIN Name are changed, this information change must be repeated on the other cluster. You will be asked if you want to switch cluster connections at the end of this procedure. 3. Enable ESS Specialist Copy Services for S/390 for each ESS cluster in this server group, as defined in the Communications Resources (Enable ESS Copy Services with DNS) Worksheet. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Change / Show Control Switches WEB Copy Service Commands for S/390 Volumes Note: Early levels of this service terminal screen may show System 390 Command Switch for smitty. Enter this information from the Communications Resources (Enable ESS Copy Services with DNS) Worksheet. The default is set to Disable. 4. Read the notes below before proceeding. Configure the ESS Specialist Copy Services for each ESS cluster in this server group, as defined in the Communications Resources (Enable ESS Copy Services with DNS) Worksheet. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Copy Services Menu Copy Services Server Menu Change Server Definitions Enter the Primary Server and Backup Server IP Address then enter the requested client Cluster x Hostname and IP Address information. This information is from the Communications Resources (Enable ESS Copy Services with DNS) Worksheet. Notes: a. If the ESS is running at Code level 2.2.x.x or above, then the Copy Services Server and Client Configuration can be entered by the customer using the ESS Specialist / Tools Options. b. If the ESS is running at Code level 3.3.x.x or above, then the Copy Services Client Configuration can only be entered using the ESS Specialist / Tools Options. 5. Are you configuring copy services on the Primary Server?

Logical Configuration of Storage Facility, CHAPTER 6

411

Configuration
v Yes, to complete the configuration of copy services on the entire Server Group, this procedure must also be performed on the ESS subsystem containing the backup server (unless the backup server is on the same ESS subsystem). Instruct the customer to verify that the Backup Server site has: a. Copies of the Communications Resources (Enable ESS Copy Services with DNS) Worksheet for this ESS group b. Microcode at EC F25683 or higher installed c. A new ESS subsystem needs to be installed or an MES is required to install Copy Services on a currently installed machine d. Continue with the next step. v No, continue with the next step. 6. Verify that Copy Services is running and that the configuration is correct. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Utility Menu Show Web Status v On the Primary web server, the status should read: Copy Services Status: Copy Services is running The Local cluster is the Primary Copy Services Server v On the Backup web server, the status should read: Copy Services Status: Copy Services is running The Local cluster is the Backup Copy Services Server v If the Web Status doesnt show that copy services is running, ask the customer to restart the Copy Services server.

Configure Copy Services, Without DNS


This section covers the steps needed to configure the ESS Specialist Copy Services. Attention: 1. Verify that the LIC features have been ordered and installed for the Copy Services feature. Refer to Activating LIC Features on page 396. 2. Entering the Copy Services Server and Client Configuration: v If the ESS is running at Code level 2.2.x.x or above, then the Copy Services Server and Client Configuration (step 3 on page 413) can be entered by the customer using the ESS Specialist / Tools Options. v If the ESS is running at Code level 3.3.x.x or above, then the Copy Services Client Configuration (step 3 on page 413) can only be entered using the ESS Specialist / Tools Options. v Updates to the Hosts tables (/etc/hosts) in step 4 on page 413 must always be performed by the Service Representative. 3. The Communication Resources Worksheets must be available, with the Copy Services information completed by the customer, for this ESS subsystem before starting copy services configuration. 4. The ESS subsystem with the cluster designated as the Primary Server must be configured first, then the ESS subsystem with the Backup Server can be configured.

412

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Configuration

Procedure
1. ALL of the 2105 subsystems using ESS Specialist Copy Services within the SAME Copy Services Group MUST be connected to the SAME network. If the 2105s need to be connected to the customer network (for ESS Specialist, ESS Expert or CLI), then follow the steps in Connecting an ESSNet1 or Master Console to a Customer Network on page 243. When complete return here to configure the ESS Specialist Copy Services. 2. Enable ESS Specialist Copy Services for S/390 for each ESS cluster in this server group, as defined in the Communications Resources (Enable ESS Copy Services without DNS) Worksheet. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Change / Show Control Switches WEB Copy Service Commands for S/390 Volumes Note: Early levels of this service terminal screen may show System 390 Command Switch for smitty. Enter the information from the Communications Resources (Enable ESS Copy Services without DNS) Worksheet. The default is set to Disable. 3. Read the notes below before proceeding. Configure the ESS Specialist Copy Services for each ESS cluster in this server group, as defined in the Communications Resources (Enable ESS Copy Services without DNS) Worksheet. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Copy Services Menu Copy Services Server Menu Change Server Definitions Enter the Primary Server and Backup Server IP Address then enter the requested client Cluster x Hostname and IP Address information. This information is from the Communications Resources (Enable ESS Copy Services without DNS) Worksheet. Notes: a. If the ESS is running at Code level 2.2.x.x or above, then the Copy Services Server and Client Configuration can be entered by the customer using the ESS Specialist / Tools Options. However the updates to the Hosts tables (/etc/hosts) in Step 4 must be performed by the Service Representative. b. If the ESS is running at Code level 3.3.x.x or above, then the Copy Services Client Configuration can only be entered using the ESS Specialist / Tools Options. 4. Configure the host tables for each ESS cluster in this server group, as defined in the Communications Resources (Enable ESS Copy Services without DNS) Worksheet. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Communications Resources Menu Change/Show TCP/IP Configuration Further Configuration
Logical Configuration of Storage Facility, CHAPTER 6

413

Configuration
Name Resolution Host Tables (/etc/hosts) Add a Host From the Communications Resources (Enable ESS Copy Services without DNS) Worksheet, enter the: - Verify that the local cluster Hostname and IP Address are already there, then enter the Hostname and IP Address for every other ESS cluster in this server group from the Enable Copy Services table - IP Address and Hostname of each Host that uses CLI commands to this server group, from the Enable Copy Services without DNS worksheet - IP Address and Hostname of the ESSNet, from the Enable Copy Services without DNS table Attention: If the current host table needs to be modified, use the Remove a Host option and then the Add a Host option to replace existing information. Using the Change option may result in multiple entries for the same host. Connect the service terminal to the other ESS cluster and repeat step 4 on page 413. Remember, do not include the cluster that you are attached to! 5. Are you configuring copy services on the Primary Server? v Yes, to complete the configuration of copy services on the entire Server Group, this procedure must be performed on the ESS subsystem containing the Backup server (unless the Backup server is on the same ESS subsystem). a. Instruct the customer to verify that the backup server site has: 1) Copies of the Communications Resources (Enable ESS Copy Services without DNS) Worksheet for this ESS group 2) Microcode at EC F25683 or higher installed 3) A new ESS subsystem needs to be installed or an MES is required to install Copy Services on a currently installed machine b. Instruct the customer to verify that all Host machines have: 1) Updated the Host Tables in the host to include the IP Addresses and Hostnames of all attached ESS clusters and any other hosts in this server group 2) Continue with the next step. v No, continue with the next step. 6. Verify that Copy Services is running and that the configuration is correct. From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Utility Menu Show Web Status v On the Primary web server, the status should read: Copy Services Status: Copy Services is running The Local cluster is the Primary Copy Services Server v On the Backup web server, the status should read: Copy Services Status: Copy Services is running

414

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Configuration
The Local cluster is the Backup Copy Services Server v If the Web Status doesnt show that copy services is running, ask the customer to restart the Copy Services server.

Change/Show Control Switches


From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Change / Show Control Switches Enter the information from the configuration resources worksheet. Note: If the control switches were changed, use the table below to determine if the 2105 subsystem must be rebooted to activate the control switch function.
Table 57. Control Switch Activation Reboot Requirements Control Switch Function Must Reboot the 2105 to Activate the Control Switch function? Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No N/A

Maximum LSS for System 390, Max = 16 Maximum LSS for Open Systems, Max = 16 Fibre (Access Any vs. Restricted) AS/400 Serial number usage (Box serial vs. XXX) Fibre Channel Pot Name Usage (WWNN vs. Standard) Sequential Fast Write (True or False) Fast Check 1 Recovery (True or False) Cluster Over-Temp Reporting (True or False) DDM Over-Temp Reporting (True or False) Allow Lower DDM RPM Speeds (True or False) rsCsS390CM (Command line Copy Services) (Enable vs Disable) Web Copy Services Commands (Enable vs Disable) Allow CUIR (Control Unit Initiated Reset), S390 Path management for CC code load (Enable vs Disable) Configure Arrays Across SSA Loops (True or False)

Enable or Disable CUIR


From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: From the service terminal Main Service Menu, select: Configuration Options Menu Change / Show Control Switches Allow CUIR to Automatically Vary Paths OFF/ON Enter the Enabled/Disabled information.

Changing Passwords on the Master Console


There are two different types of passwords for the Master Console: the Userid password and the second is the Console Launcher password.

Logical Configuration of Storage Facility, CHAPTER 6

415

Configuration

Changing the Master Console Userid Password


There are three types of userids available: service, guest, and customer. This procedure works for all three types of userid. 1. Logon to userid (example: service) 2. Click the right mouse button in a blank (blue) area of the desktop screen. a. A pop-up window should appear. b. Move cursor and highlight the Utilities option. c. Select Change User Password. d. A pop-up window will appear, follow the instructions to change the password. Note: Do not use words found in an English dictionary, spelled normally or backwards, as Linux passwords. Attention: If you change the default password from service, you will not be allowed to use service as a password again. To use the password of service again, you must use the Recovery CD to rebuild the entire program. 3. The userid password can also be changed by clicking on the Linux foot icon and then Program/Utilities.

Changing the Master Console Console Launcher Password


The Console Launcher passwords cannot be changed. There are three console userids and passwords, they are as shown in Table 58.
Table 58. Master Console Launcher Passwords Userid service customer guest Password service customer guest

Note: Some early levels of Master Console code allowed the customer to create new users, and change the passwords. This function was removed.

Master Console Queue Management


Each ESS connected to the Master Console sends trace and error information to the Master Console. The Queue Management task allows you to display, offload and delete the trace and error information contained in queue entries. 1. Log into the master console with the user service and password as previously set. 2. At the Master Console desktop screen, double click on the Console Launcher icon. 3. Click on the Console Actions icon. 4. Double-click the Queue Management icon on the Console Actions frame. The Queue Management window is displayed. 5. Select the desired queue Call Home or pager by clicking on the Call Home Queue or Pager Queue tab. 6. To see details about the entry, click on the desired entry, (multiple entries can be selected by holding down the Shift and Ctrl keys) and click on the Show Details button.

416

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Configuration
7. To increase the priority of a queue entry so that it will be sent sooner, click on the desired entry, and click on the Increase Priority button. Follow the on screen instructions. 8. To delete a queue entry, click on the desired entry, and click on the Delete button. Follow the on screen instructions. 9. To copy the queue entry to a diskette, click on the desired entry, and click on the Offload to Diskette button. Follow the on screen instructions. 10. To offload the queue entry to the MoST or another PC using a serial port, click on the desired entry, and click on the Offload to Serial Port button. Follow the on screen instructions. 11. Click on Refresh to refresh the list of queue entries. Click Close when complete. 12. Click Close when complete.

Master Console PE Package


When errors occur on the Master Console it is possible to create a PE package of Master Console trace information to be sent to IBM. The Console PE Package task allows you to do this. When creating a console PE Package you can limit the size of the package or only create a package with trace information relating to a specific category. This function requires that the Primary Shark be at LIC level 1.5.2.91 or higher. The primary shark is defined on the Call Home Settings under the Machine Information Settings tab. Perform the following steps to create a Master Console PE Package: 1. Log into the master console with the user service and password as previously set. 2. At the Master Console desktop screen, double click on the Console Launcher icon. 3. Click on the Console Actions icon. 4. Double-click the Console PE Package icon on the Console Actions frame. The Console PE Package window is displayed. 5. If you do NOT want to limit the PE package size click on the No package size limit button, if you want to limit the package size click on the Package size limit by number of button and then select one of the following: v If you want to limit the trace information by the number of most recent lines in the trace file, click the Lines button, and select the number of lines from the drop down list box or enter in the number of lines of each trace file to include. v If you want to limit the package size by the number of days since the error occurred, click the Elapsed days button and select the numbers of days. v If you want to limit the package size by kbytes, click on the KBytes button and select the number of kbytes to be the maximum overall package size. 6. If you want to get trace information from all trace files select the All Files button, or if you know the category of the error that occurred click on the By categories button and highlight the desired categories. 7. Click on the Create button to begin creating the PE package. After the PE package is created it will be put in the normal Call Home queue and be automatically sent to IBM as configured in the Call Home Setup. Note: This requires that call home be previously set up. 8. Click Close when complete.

Logical Configuration of Storage Facility, CHAPTER 6

417

Configuration

Master Console Offload User Files


Offloading user files allows you to offload files that you have saved. These files contain configuration data saved from Netscape while using the Specialist. The files may be offloaded to a diskette or sent to one or more E-mail addresses. Each user has a special directory that is used to save and offload files. You are only allowed to offload files saved in this directory. For the user, service, this directory is /home/service/offload. Perform the following steps to save the files that you want to offload: 1. Log into the master console with the user service and password as previously set. 2. At the Master Console desktop screen, double-click the ESS Specialist Launcher icon. 3. Use the internet browser as desired and when you want to save the html generated continue with the next step. 4. Click File->Save As to save the screen information. The Save As window is displayed. 5. At the Save As window, make sure the Selection field states the following: /home/customer/offload/<filename>.htm where <filename> is the name of the file that you wish to save. Note: You can only offload with the directory prefix set to /home/customer/offload/. 6. Click the OK button when done. Perform the following steps to copy user files to a diskette: 1. At the Master Console desktop screen, double click on the Console Launcher icon 2. Click on the Console Actions icon. 3. Double-click on the Offload User Files icon at the Console Actions frame. The Offload User Files panel is displayed. 4. Select one or more files to offload. 5. Click the Copy to Diskette button. The Offload to Diskette panel is displayed. 6. Check the Delete after successful copy box, if you want to delete the files, after the offload completes successfully. 7. Click OK to begin offloading the files. 8. Click Close when done. Perform the following steps to send the saved files using e-mail: Note: In order to offload the files by sending through E-mail, the ESS Network must be attached to the LAN and a gateway device configured. 1. At the Master Console desktop screen, double click on the Console Launcher icon 2. Click on the Console Actions icon. 3. Double-click on the Offload User Files icon at the Console Actions frame. The Offload User Files panel is displayed. 4. Select one or more files to offload. 5. Click the Send using E-mail button. The Send via E-mail panel is displayed. 6. Check the Delete after successful send box, if you want to delete the files, after the files are successfully sent. 7. Click OK to begin offloading the files.

418

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Configuration
8. Click Close when done.

Logical Configuration of Storage Facility, CHAPTER 6

419

420

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Appendix. Accessibility
Accessibility features help a user who has a physical disability, such as restricted mobility or limited vision, to use software products successfully.

Features
These are the major accessibility features in the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server information: 1. You can use screen-reader software and a digital speech synthesizer to hear what is displayed on the screen. IBM Home Page Reader version 3.0 has been tested. 2. You can operate features using the keyboard instead of the mouse.

Navigating by keyboard
You can use keys or key combinations to perform operations and initiate menu actions that can also be done through mouse actions. You can navigate the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server information from the keyboard by using the shortcut keys for your browser or Home Page Reader. See your browser Help for a list of shortcut keys that it supports. See the following Web site for a list of shortcut keys supported by Home Page Reader:
http://www-306.ibm.com/able/solution_offerings/keyshort.html

Accessing the publications


You can find HTML versions of the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server information at the following Web site:
http://www.ehone.ibm.com/public/applications/publications/cgibin/pbi.cgi

You can access the information using IBM Home Page Reader 3.0.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2004, 2005

421

422

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Index Numerics
2105 124 2105 communications configuration See communications configuration 397 2105 expansion enclosure install certify DDMs 312 check customer preparation 265 check SSA DASD DDM bay indicators 309 checking customer power 273 checking customer power, plug in MPC 276 checking switch settings 298 checking worksheets 264 checks for 2105 expansion enclosure MES 301 complete the installation 310 complete the physical install 309 completing the install 314 customer ground check with CB off, plug in MPC 278 customer ground check with CB off, wired in MPC 290 customer power: plug in or wired 275 customer receptacle voltage check with CB off, plug in MPC 281 customer receptacle voltage check with CB on, plug in MPC 284 customer voltage check with CB off, wired in MPC 293 customer voltage check with CB on, wired in MPC 295 EMEA electrician information 290 entry for EE with 2105 264 ground continuity check, plug in MPC 276 ground continuity check, wired in MPC 287 inspect for ship damage and missing parts 266 install and test 264 install entry for MES 264 install using the service terminal 309 installing 272 logical configuration 314 logically install storage cages and DDM bays 310 position the rack 267, 272 power on and test 305 safety inspection 266 verify ship group is complete 266 2105 expansion enclosure install, check customer preparation 265 2105 expansion enclosure install, checking customer power 273 2105 expansion enclosure install, checking worksheets 264 2105 expansion enclosure install, customer ground check with CB off, plug in MPC 278 2105 expansion enclosure install, customer power: plug in or wired 275 2105 expansion enclosure install, entry for EE with 2105 264 2105 expansion enclosure install, ground continuity check, plug in MPC 276 2105 expansion enclosure install, inspect for ship damage and missing parts 266 2105 expansion enclosure install, install and test 264 2105 expansion enclosure install, install entry for MES 264 2105 expansion enclosure install, installing 272 2105 expansion enclosure install, position the rack 267, 272 2105 expansion enclosure install, safety inspection 266 2105 expansion enclosure install, verify ship group is complete 266 2105 Model 800 duplicating the configuration of a 2105 ESS subsystem 391 tailgate clamp remove/replace 316 test MC configuration and communication status 388 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure FRU replacement procedures 124 2105 model 800 install activate LIC features 249 additional checkout, monitor panel was not displayed 262 additional testing of retain connection for problem notification and data upload (Master Console only) 253 background certify and build logical configuration from ISA 258 before you install the 166 begin install of Master Console 221 begin installation and connection to the ESSNet 220 certify DDMs 252 check on ViewBlue if LIC features have been ordered for this machine 170 check Retain for install tips 171 checking availability of logical configuration 168 checking customer power 177 checking customer power, plug in MPC 179 checking customer power, wired MPC 191, 287 checking customer preparation 171 checking for feature code 0970 177 checking required microcode 169 checking worksheets 168 cluster configuration for customer network 245 complete the physical install 220 completing the installation 251 configure 239 configure call home and remote services 239 configure control switches 243 configure copy services 250 configure customer information 239 configure E-mail 241 configure fibre channel port topology 242 configure Master Console 231

Copyright IBM Corp. 2004, 2005

423

2105 model 800 install (continued) configure maximum problem presentation count 239 configure pager users 242 configure SIM reporting options (S/390) 239 configure SNMP 242 connect 2105 to MSA 226 connect 2105 to the host system 254 connect and test customer network connection 247 connect ESSNet or MC to customer network 243 connect the 2105 to the ethernet hub and configure cluster and MC IP address 234 connecting the 2105 to the ethernet hub 228 customer ground check with CB off, wired in MPC 194 customer power: plug in or wired 179 customer receptacle ground check with CB off, plug in MPC 182 customer receptacle voltage check with CB off, plug in MPC 185 customer receptacle voltage check with CB on, plug in MPC 188 customer voltage check with CB off, wired in MPC 197 customer voltage check with CB on, wired in MPC 199 EMEA electrician information 194 enable or disable ESS Specialist 239 finish the install 259 finish the install (background certify and build config from ISA) 261 ground continuity check, plug in MPC 180 ground continuity check, wired in MPC 191 initial MC network settings 231 inspect for ship damage 173 install and test 162 install required microcode 250 install using the service terminal 218 installation process and checkpoints 163 installation sequence with multiple service representatives 165 label and route cables 174 logical configuration 257 login Master Console 231 MC backup and restore configuration data 238 MC call home settings 232 MC configuration for customer network 244 MC date and time settings 231 MC remote service settings 232 modem install 222 MSA install 225 position the rack 174 power on, connect MC to Ethernet hub 229 routing and connecting the cables to the Master Console 226 safety inspection 174 serial port configure MC to cluster 233 SR worksheet fields 169 target time for install phases 164 test customer E-mail and SNMP 248 test modem communications 248 test UEPO and power supplies 305

2105 model 800 install (continued) verify cluster IP address on the MC 246 verify MC network setup 237 verify ship group complete 173 2105 Model 800, discontinuing 386 2105 rack 390 V battery set 135 cable 159 mainline power cable 131 operator panel 139 PPS fan 133 primary power supply (PPS) 125 rack power control card (RPC) 140 RPC power control card 147 RPC switch card (local and remote) 143 storage cage fan (center) 151 storage cage fan (top) 150 storage cage fan/power sense card 157 storage cage power planar 153 storage cage power supply 148 2105 subsystem install activate LIC features 249 additional checkout, monitor panel was not displayed 262 additional testing of retain connection for problem notification and data upload (Master Console only) 253 background certify and build logical configuration from ISA 258 before you install the 166 begin install of Master Console 221 begin installation and connection to the ESSNet 220 certify DDMs 252 check on ViewBlue if LIC features have been ordered for this machine 170 check Retain for install tips 171 checking availability of logical configuration 168 checking customer power 177 checking customer power, plug in MPC 179 checking customer power, wired MPC 191 checking customer preparation 171 checking for feature code 0970 177 checking required microcode 169 checking worksheets 168 cluster configuration for customer network 245 complete the physical install 220 completing the installation 251 configure 239 configure call home and remote services 239 configure control switches 243 configure copy services 250 configure customer information 239 configure E-mail 241 configure fibre channel port topology 242 configure Master Console 231 configure maximum problem presentation count 239 configure pager users 242 configure SIM reporting options (S/390) 239 configure SNMP 242 connect 2105 to MSA 226

424

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

2105 subsystem install (continued) connect and test customer network connection 247 connect ESSNet or MC to customer network 243 connect the 2105 to the ethernet hub and configure cluster and MC IP address 234 connecting the 2105 to the ethernet hub 228 customer ground check with CB off, wired in MPC 194 customer power: plug in or wired 179 customer receptacle ground check with CB off, plug in MPC 182 customer receptacle voltage check with CB off, plug in MPC 185 customer receptacle voltage check with CB on, plug in MPC 188 customer voltage check with CB off, wired in MPC 197 customer voltage check with CB on, wired in MPC 199 EMEA electrician information 194 enable or disable ESS Specialist 239 finish the install 259 finish the install (background certify and build config from ISA) 261 ground continuity check, plug in MPC 180 ground continuity check, wired in MPC 191 initial MC network settings 231 inspect for ship damage 173 install and test 162 install required microcode 250 install using the service terminal 218 installation process and checkpoints 163 installation sequence with multiple service representatives 165 label and route cables 174 logical configuration 257 login Master Console 231 MC backup and restore configuration data 238 MC call home settings 232 MC configuration for customer network 244 MC date and time settings 231 MC remote service settings 232 modem install 222 MSA install 225 position the rack 174 power on, connect MC to Ethernet hub 229 routing and connecting the cables to the Master Console 226 routing cables and connect 2105 to the host system 254 safety inspection 174 serial port configure MC to cluster 233 SR worksheet fields 169 target time for install phases 164 test customer E-mail and SNMP 248 test modem communications 248 verify cluster IP address on the MC 246 verify MC network setup 237 verify ship group complete 173 2105, reinstallation 377 2105, relocating 363, 377

390 V battery set, 2105 rack 135

A
accessibility 421 activate LIC features 2105 model 800 install 249 activate LIC features 2105 subsystem install 249 activating LIC features 396 additional checkout, monitor panel was not displayed 2105 model 800 install 262 additional checkout, monitor panel was not displayed 2105 subsystem install 262 additional configuration procedures 401 change date, time, and time zone 401 changing TCP/IP configuration (dual cluster) 401 changing TCP/IP configuration (single cluster) 405 control switches, change/show 415 copy services, with DNS 410 copy services, without DNS 412 regenerate ESS specialist certificate 410 updating MC TCP/IP information 409 additional testing of retain connection for problem notification and data upload (Master Console only) 2105 model 800 install 253 additional testing of retain connection for problem notification and data upload (Master Console only) 2105 subsystem install 253

B
background certify and build logical configuration from ISA 2105 model 800 install 258 background certify and build logical configuration from ISA 2105 subsystem install 258 backplane removal and replacement, host bay 116 before you install the 2105 model 800 166 before you install the 2105 subsystem 166 begin install of Master Console 2105 model 800 install 221 begin install of Master Console 2105 subsystem install 221 begin installation and connection to the ESSNet 2105 model 800 install 220 begin installation and connection to the ESSNet 2105 subsystem install 220 bypass and passthrough card removal and replacement, DDM bay 11

C
cable removal and replacement, CEC drawer 56 cable removal and replacement, I/O drawer 105 cable, 2105 rack 159 call home / remote services configure 397 Canadian compliance statement xx CD-ROM and hard disk drive removal and replacement, CEC drawer 28 CEC drawer cable removal and replacement 56 CD-ROM and hard disk drive removal and replacement 28
Index

425

CEC drawer (continued) CEC drawer power supply removal and replacement 41 fan controller and LED card removal and replacement 53 fan removal and replacement 51 memory DIMM (memory riser card) removal and replacement 48 memory riser card removal and replacement 46 operator pane and EEPROM removal and replacement 26 planar assembly removal and replacement 35 processor card removal and replacement 44 service position 23 top service access 25 CEC drawer FRU repair entry table 1 CEC drawer power supply removal and replacement, CEC drawer 41 certify DDMs 2105 model 800 install 252 certify DDMs 2105 subsystem install 252 certify DDMs, 2105 expansion enclosure install 312 change date, time, and time zone 401 changing customer information 397 chapter 4, FRU removal and replacement procedures 1 chapter 5, install and remove 161 chapter 6, logical configuration of storage facility 395 check customer preparation, 2105 expansion enclosure install 265 check on ViewBlue if LIC features have been ordered for this machine, 2105 model 800 install 170 check on ViewBlue if LIC features have been ordered for this machine, 2105 subsystem install 170 check Retain for install tips 2105 model 800 install 171 check Retain for install tips 2105 subsystem install 171 check SSA DASD DDM bay indicators, 2105 expansion enclosure install 309 checking availability of logical configuration 2105 model 800 install 168 checking availability of logical configuration 2105 subsystem install 168 checking customer power 2105 model 800 install 177 checking customer power 2105 subsystem install 177 checking customer power, 2105 expansion enclosure install 273 checking customer power, plug in MPC, 2105 expansion enclosure install 276 checking customer power, plug in MPC, 2105 model 800 install 179 checking customer power, plug in MPC, 2105 subsystem install 179 checking customer power, wired MPC, 2105 model 800 install 191, 287 checking customer power, wired MPC, 2105 subsystem install 191 checking customer preparation 2105 model 800 install 171 checking customer preparation 2105 subsystem install 171 checking for feature code 0970 2105 model 800 install 177

checking for feature code 0970 2105 subsystem install 177 checking required microcode 2105 model 800 install 169 checking required microcode 2105 subsystem install 169 checking switch settings 2105 expansion enclosure install 298 checking the items rack 330 checking worksheets 2105 model 800 install 168 checking worksheets 2105 subsystem install 168 checking worksheets, 2105 expansion enclosure install 264 checks for 2105 expansion enclosure MES 2105 expansion enclosure install 301 Chinese EMI statement xxii cluster power off using RPC card switches 20, 61 power off using service terminal 20, 61 power on using RPC card switches 22, 63 power on/off, procedure 20, 61 cluster CEC drawer replacement procedures 20 cluster configuration for customer network 2105 model 800 install 245 cluster configuration for customer network 2105 subsystem install 245 cluster I/O drawer replacement procedures 61 cluster, power off using RPC card switches 20, 61 cluster, power off using service terminal 20, 61 cluster, power on using RPC card switch 22, 63 communications configuration activating LIC features 396 call home / remote services 397 changing customer information 397 configure pager users 399 configure problem presentation count 397 configure SIM reporting (OS 390) 397 control switches, change/show 400 E-mail 398 ESS specialist 400 fibre channel port topology 400 logical configurations 399 SNMP 399 communications configuration, 2105 See communications configuration 397 communications statement xx complete the installation, 2105 expansion enclosure install 310 complete the physical install 2105 expansion enclosure install 309 complete the physical install 2105 model 800 install 220 complete the physical install 2105 subsystem install 220 completing install ESCON channel host card 355, 359 fibre channel host card 355 host card 355 ultra scsi host card 355 completing install of a host card 355

426

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

completing the install, 2105 expansion enclosure install 314 completing the installation 2105 model 800 install 251 completing the installation 2105 subsystem install 251 compliance statement, radio frequency energy xx compliance statement, Taiwan xxii configuration See logical configuration 395 configuration, additional procedures 401 configuration, change date, time, and time zone 401 configuration, change/show control switches 400 configuration, change/show control switches additional 415 configuration, changing TCP/IP (dual cluster) 401 configuration, changing TCP/IP (single cluster) 405 configuration, communications 397 See communications configuration 397 configuration, logical Seelogical configuration 395 configurations, logical 399 configure call home / remote services 397 configure call home and remote services 2105 model 800 install 239 configure call home and remote services 2105 subsystem install 239 configure control switches 2105 model 800 install 243 configure control switches 2105 subsystem install 243 configure copy services 2105 model 800 install 250 configure copy services 2105 subsystem install 250 configure copy services, with DNS 410 configure copy services, without DNS 412 configure customer information 2105 model 800 install 239 configure customer information 2105 subsystem install 239 configure E-mail 398 configure E-mail 2105 model 800 install 241 configure E-mail 2105 subsystem install 241 configure ESS specialist 400 configure fibre channel port topology 400 configure fibre channel port topology 2105 model 800 install 242 configure fibre channel port topology 2105 subsystem install 242 configure Master Console 2105 model 800 install 231 configure Master Console 2105 subsystem install 231 configure maximum problem presentation count 2105 model 800 install 239 configure maximum problem presentation count 2105 subsystem install 239 configure pager users 399 configure pager users 2105 model 800 install 242 configure pager users 2105 subsystem install 242 configure problem presentation count 397 configure SIM reporting (OS 390) 397 configure SIM reporting options (S/390) 2105 model 800 install 239 configure SIM reporting options (S/390) 2105 subsystem install 239 configure SNMP 399 configure SNMP 2105 model 800 install 242

configure SNMP 2105 subsystem install 242 configure, 2105 model 800 install 239 configure, 2105 subsystem install 239 connect 2105 to MSA 2105 model 800 install 226 connect 2105 to MSA 2105 subsystem install 226 connect and test customer network connection 2105 model 800 install 247 connect and test customer network connection 2105 subsystem install 247 connect ESSNet or MC to customer network 2105 model 800 install 243 connect ESSNet or MC to customer network 2105 subsystem install 243 connect the 2105 to the ethernet hub and configure cluster and MC IP address 2105 model 800 install 234 connect the 2105 to the ethernet hub and configure cluster and MC IP address 2105 subsystem install 234 connecting the 2105 to the ethernet hub 228 connecting the DDM bay 339 control switches, change/show configuration 400 control switches, change/show configuration additional 415 controller card removal and replacement, DDM bay 13 copy services, with DNS, configure 410 copy services, without DNS, configure 412 customer ground check with CB off, plug in MPC, 2105 expansion enclosure install 278 customer ground check with CB off, wired in MPC, 2105 expansion enclosure install 290 customer ground check with CB off, wired in MPC, 2105 model 800 install 194 customer ground check with CB off, wired in MPC, 2105 subsystem install 194 customer information, changing 397 customer power: plug in or wired 2105 model 800 install 179 customer power: plug in or wired 2105 subsystem install 179 customer power: plug in or wired, 2105 expansion enclosure install 275 customer receptacle ground check with CB off, plug in MPC, 2105 model 800 install 182 customer receptacle ground check with CB off, plug in MPC, 2105 subsystem install 182 customer receptacle voltage check with CB off, plug in MPC, 2105 expansion enclosure install 281 customer receptacle voltage check with CB off, plug in MPC, 2105 model 800 install 185 customer receptacle voltage check with CB off, plug in MPC, 2105 subsystem install 185 customer receptacle voltage check with CB on, plug in MPC, 2105 expansion enclosure install 284 customer receptacle voltage check with CB on, plug in MPC, 2105 model 800 install 188 customer receptacle voltage check with CB on, plug in MPC, 2105 subsystem install 188 customer voltage check with CB off, wired in MPC, 2105 expansion enclosure install 293

Index

427

customer voltage check with CB off, wired 2105 model 800 install 197 customer voltage check with CB off, wired 2105 subsystem install 197 customer voltage check with CB on, wired 2105 expansion enclosure install 295 customer voltage check with CB on, wired 2105 model 800 install 199 customer voltage check with CB on, wired 2105 subsystem install 199

in MPC, in MPC, in MPC, in MPC, in MPC,

D
date, time, and time zone change 401 DDM bay bypass and passthrough card removal and replacement 11 controller card removal and replacement 13 disk drive module locations 7 disk drive module removal and replacement 7 frame assembly removal and replacement 14 installation 330 installation with fc 0970 with 2105 expansion enclosure 347 installation with fc 0970 with 2105 model 800 343 SSA cable removal and replacement 17 DDM bay FRU repair entry table 1 DDM bay FRU replacement procedures 7 DDM bay SSA cable FRU replacement procedures 17 disability 421 discontinue, 2105 Model 800 discontinuing 386 disk drive module locations, DDM bay 7 disk drive module removal and replacement, DDM bay 7 diskette drive removal and replacement, I/O drawer 67 duplicating the configuration of a 2105 ESS subsystem 391

entry table install activity 161 ESCON and fibre channel wrap tools removal and replacement, host bay 118 ESCON channel host card completing install 355 installation 350 removal 359 ESD attachment of wrist strap 5 electrostatic discharge 4 ESD-sensitive parts, working with 4 grounding locations 4 precautions 5 wrist strap 4 ESD precautions 5 ESS specialist certificate regenerate 410 ESS specialist configure 400 European Community Compliance statement xx

F
fan controller and LED card removal and replacement, CEC drawer 53 fan controller card removal and replacement, I/O drawer 96 fan removal and replacement, CEC drawer 51 FCC (see Federal Communications Commission) xx Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement xx fibre channel host card completing install 355 installation 350 removal 359 fibre channel port topology configure 400 finish the install (background certify and build config from ISA) 2105 model 800 install 261 finish the install (background certify and build config from ISA) 2105 subsystem install 261 finish the install 2105 model 800 install 259 finish the install 2105 subsystem install 259 frame assembly removal and replacement, DDM bay 14 FRU remove and replace 1 FRU removal and replacement procedures 1, 4 FRU replacement replacing a cluster FRU 6 replacing a non-cluster FRU 6 service terminal FRU menu 6

E
E-mail configure 398 electronic emission notices xx electrostatic discharge (ESD) 4 EMEA electrician information 194 EMEA electrician information 2105 expansion enclosure install 290 EMEA electrician information 2105 model 800 install 194 EMEA electrician information 2105 subsystem install 194 EMI statement, Chinese xxii enable disable CUIR 415 enable or disable ESS Specialist 2105 model 800 install 239 enable or disable ESS Specialist 2105 subsystem install 239 entry for EE with 2105, 2105 expansion enclosure install 264 entry for repair 1

G
ground continuity check, enclosure install 276 ground continuity check, install 180 ground continuity check, install 180 ground continuity check, enclosure install 287 plug in MPC, 2105 expansion plug in MPC, 2105 model 800 plug in MPC, 2105 subsystem wired in MPC, 2105 expansion

428

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

ground continuity check, wired in MPC, 2105 model 800 install 191 ground continuity check, wired in MPC, 2105 subsystem install 191

H
host bay backplane removal and replacement 116 ESCON and fibre channel wrap tools removal and replacement 118 host bay power supply removal and replacement 114 host card removal and replacement 111 planar removal and replacement 120 service position removal and replacement 109 host bay FRU repair entry table 2 host bay power supply removal and replacement, host bay 114 host bay replacement procedures 109 host card completing install 355 installation 350 removal 359 host card removal and replacement, host bay 111 how to attach the ESD wrist strap 5

I
I/O drawer cable removal and replacement 105 diskette drive removal and replacement 67 fan controller card removal and replacement 96 I/O drawer power supply removal and replacement 78 NVS battery assembly removal and replacement 92 NVS battery charger card removal and replacement 88 NVS/IOA card removal and replacement 85 planar assembly removal and replacement 69, 72 RIO card removal and replacement 98 RJ45 card removal and replacement 102 service position 64 SSA device card removal and replacement 81 top service access removal and replacement 66 I/O drawer FRU repair entry table 2 I/O drawer power supply removal and replacement, I/O drawer 78 IBM patents xix products xix programs xix services xix trademarks xxii Industry Canada Compliance statement xx initial MC network settings 2105 model 800 install 231 initial MC network settings 2105 subsystem install 231 inspect for ship damage 2105 model 800 install 173 inspect for ship damage 2105 subsystem install 173 inspect for ship damage and missing parts, 2105 expansion enclosure install 266

install 2105 expansion enclosure 264 certify DDMs 312 check customer preparation 265 check SSA DASD DDM bay indicators 309 checking customer power 273 checking customer power, plug in MPC 276 checking switch settings 298 checking worksheets 264 checks for 2105 expansion enclosure MES 301 complete the installation 310 complete the physical install 309 completing the install 314 customer ground check with CB off, plug in MPC 278 customer ground check with CB off, wired in MPC 290 customer power: plug in or wired 275 customer receptacle voltage check with CB off, plug in MPC 281 customer receptacle voltage check with CB on, plug in MPC 284 customer voltage check with CB off, wired in MPC 293 customer voltage check with CB on, wired in MPC 295 EMEA electrician information 290 entry for EE with 2105 264 entry for MES install 264 ground continuity check, plug in MPC 276 ground continuity check, wired in MPC 287 inspect for ship damage and missing parts 266 install using the service terminal 309 installing 272 logical configuration 314 logically install storage cages and DDM bays 310 position the rack 267, 272 power on and test 305 safety inspection 266 test UEPO and power supplies 305 verify ship group is complete 266 2105 model 800 162 activate LIC features 249 additional checkout, monitor panel was not displayed 262 additional testing of retain connection for problem notification and data upload (Master Console only) 253 background certify and build logical configuration from ISA 258 before you install the 166 begin install of Master Console 221 begin installation and connection to the ESSNet 220 certify DDMs 252 check on ViewBlue if LIC features have been ordered for this machine 170 check Retain for install tips 171 checking availability of logical configuration 168 checking customer power 177
Index

429

install (continued) 2105 model 800 (continued) checking customer power, plug in MPC 179 checking customer power, wired MPC 191, 287 checking customer preparation 171 checking for feature code 0970 177 checking required microcode 169 checking worksheets 168 cluster configuration for customer network 245 complete the physical install 220 completing the installation 251 configure 239 configure call home and remote services 239 configure control switches 243 configure copy services 250 configure customer information 239 configure E-mail 241 configure fibre channel port topology 242 configure Master Console 231 configure maximum problem presentation count 239 configure pager users 242 configure SIM reporting options (S/390) 239 configure SNMP 242 connect 2105 to MSA 226 connect and test customer network connection 247 connect ESSNet or MC to customer network 243 connect the 2105 to the ethernet hub and configure cluster and MC IP address 234 connecting the 2105 to the ethernet hub 228 customer ground check with CB off, wired in MPC 194 customer power: plug in or wired 179 customer receptacle ground check with CB off, plug in MPC 182 customer receptacle voltage check with CB off, plug in MPC 185 customer receptacle voltage check with CB on, plug in MPC 188 customer voltage check with CB off, wired in MPC 197 customer voltage check with CB on, wired in MPC 199 EMEA electrician information 194 enable or disable ESS Specialist 239 finish the install 259 finish the install (background certify and build config from ISA) 261 ground continuity check, plug in MPC 180 ground continuity check, wired in MPC 191 initial MC network settings 231 inspect for ship damage 173 install required microcode 250 install using the service terminal 218 installation process and checkpoints 163 installation sequence with multiple service representatives 165 label and route cables 174 logical configuration 257 login Master Console 231

install (continued) 2105 model 800 (continued) MC backup and restore configuration data 238 MC call home settings 232 MC configuration for customer network 244 MC date and time settings 231 MC remote service settings 232 modem install 222 MSA install 225 position the rack 174 power on, connect MC to Ethernet hub 229 routing and connecting the cables to the Master Console 226 routing cables and connect 2105 to the host system 254 safety inspection 174 serial port configure MC to cluster 233 SR worksheet fields 169 target time for install phases 164 test customer E-mail and SNMP 248 test modem communications 248 verify cluster IP address on the MC 246 verify MC network setup 237 verify ship group complete 173 2105 subsystem 162 activate LIC features 249 additional checkout, monitor panel was not displayed 262 additional testing of retain connection for problem notification and data upload (Master Console only) 253 background certify and build logical configuration from ISA 258 before you install the 166 begin install of Master Console 221 begin installation and connection to the ESSNet 220 certify DDMs 252 check on ViewBlue if LIC features have been ordered for this machine 170 check Retain for install tips 171 checking availability of logical configuration 168 checking customer power 177 checking customer power, plug in MPC 179 checking customer power, wired MPC 191 checking customer preparation 171 checking for feature code 0970 177 checking required microcode 169 checking worksheets 168 cluster configuration for customer network 245 complete the physical install 220 completing the installation 251 configure 239 configure call home and remote services 239 configure control switches 243 configure copy services 250 configure customer information 239 configure E-mail 241 configure fibre channel port topology 242 configure Master Console 231

430

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

install (continued) 2105 subsystem (continued) configure maximum problem presentation count 239 configure pager users 242 configure SIM reporting options (S/390) 239 configure SNMP 242 connect 2105 to MSA 226 connect and test customer network connection 247 connect ESSNet or MC to customer network 243 connect the 2105 to the ethernet hub and configure cluster and MC IP address 234 connecting the 2105 to the ethernet hub 228 customer ground check with CB off, wired in MPC 194 customer power: plug in or wired 179 customer receptacle ground check with CB off, plug in MPC 182 customer receptacle voltage check with CB off, plug in MPC 185 customer receptacle voltage check with CB on, plug in MPC 188 customer voltage check with CB off, wired in MPC 197 customer voltage check with CB on, wired in MPC 199 EMEA electrician information 194 enable or disable ESS Specialist 239 finish the install 259 finish the install (background certify and build config from ISA) 261 ground continuity check, plug in MPC 180 ground continuity check, wired in MPC 191 initial MC network settings 231 inspect for ship damage 173 install required microcode 250 install using the service terminal 218 installation preparations 166 installation process and checkpoints 163 installation sequence with multiple service representatives 165 label and route cables 174 logical configuration 257 login Master Console 231 MC backup and restore configuration data 238 MC call home settings 232 MC configuration for customer network 244 MC date and time settings 231 MC remote service settings 232 modem install 222 MSA install 225 position the rack 174 power on, connect MC to Ethernet hub 229 routing and connecting the cables to the Master Console 226 routing cables and connect 2105 to the host system 254 safety inspection 174 serial port configure MC to cluster 233 SR worksheet fields 169

install (continued) 2105 subsystem (continued) target time for install phases 164 test customer E-mail and SNMP 248 test modem communications 248 verify cluster IP address on the MC 246 verify MC network setup 237 verify ship group complete 173 install activity entry table 161 install and remove 161 install and test 2105 model 800 162 install and test 2105 subsystem 162 install and test, 2105 expansion enclosure install 264 install entry for MES, 2105 expansion enclosure install 264 install required microcode 2105 model 800 install 250 install required microcode 2105 subsystem install 250 install using the service terminal 2105 model 800 install 218 install using the service terminal 2105 subsystem install 218 install using the service terminal, 2105 expansion enclosure install 309 install, completing host card 355 install, host card 350 completing installation 355 installation DDM bay with 2105 model 800 330 DDM bay with fc 0970 with 2105 expansion enclosure 347 DDM bay with fc 0970 with 2105 model 800 343 ESCON channel host card 350 fibre channel host card 350 host card 350 ultra scsi host card 350 installation and testing instructions connecting the DDM bay 339 rack checking the items 330 preparing the rack 331 installation process and checkpoints 2105 model 800 163 installation sequence with multiple service representatives 2105 model 800 165 installation sequence with multiple service representatives 2105 subsystem 165 installation, 2105 expansion enclosure position for install 272 installation, 2105 Expansion Enclosure position for install 267 installation, 2105 Model 800 duplicating the configuration of a 2105 ESS subsystem 391 primary power supply checks 202 rack operator panel 207 switches 207 tailgate clamp, installation/removal 316 tailgate hardware removal 316 test MC configuration and communication status 388
Index

431

installation, SSA DASD DDM bay using service terminal 336 installing a host card 350 installing SSA DASD DDM bay using service terminal 336 installing, 2105 expansion enclosure install 272

logically install storage cages and DDM bays, 2105 expansion enclosure install 310 login Master Console 2105 model 800 install 231 login Master Console 2105 subsystem install 231

M
mainline power cable, 2105 rack 131 manuals, related xxvii master console (MC) connect the 2105 to the ethernet hub and configure cluster and MC IP address 234 initial MC network settings 231 MC backup and restore configuration data 238 MC call home settings 232 MC date and time settings 231 MC remote service settings 232 serial port configure MC to cluster 233 test MC configuration and communication status 388 verify MC network setup 237 MC backup and restore configuration data 2105 model 800 install 238 MC backup and restore configuration data 2105 subsystem install 238 MC call home settings 2105 model 800 install 232 MC call home settings 2105 subsystem install 232 MC configuration for customer network 2105 model 800 install 244 MC configuration for customer network 2105 subsystem install 244 MC date and time settings 2105 model 800 install 231 MC date and time settings 2105 subsystem install 231 MC remote service settings 2105 model 800 install 232 MC remote service settings 2105 subsystem install 232 MC TCP/IP information update 409 memory DIMM (memory riser card) removal and replacement, CEC drawer 48 memory riser card removal and replacement, CEC drawer 46 MOC (see Korean Government Ministry of Communication) xxi modem install 2105 model 800 install 222 modem install 2105 subsystem install 222 MSA install 2105 model 800 install 225 MSA install 2105 subsystem install 225

J
Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) class A statement xxi

K
Korean Government Ministry of Communication (MOC) statement xxi

L
label and route cables 2105 model 800 install 174 label and route cables 2105 subsystem install 174 LIC features, activating 396 logical configuration 2105 communications 397 additional configuration procedures 401 change date, time, and time zone 401 changing TCP/IP configuration (dual cluster) 401 changing TCP/IP configuration (single cluster) 405 control switches, change/show 415 copy services, with DNS 410 copy services, without DNS 412 regenerate ESS specialist certificate 410 updating MC TCP/IP information 409 communications configuration activating LIC features 396 call home / remote services 397 changing customer information 397 configure pager users 399 configure problem presentation count 397 configure SIM reporting (OS 390) 397 control switches, change/show 400 E-mail 398 ESS specialist 400 fibre channel port topology 400 logical configurations 399 SNMP 399 enable disable CUIR 415 pre-installation communication resource worksheet fields 396 pre-installation configuration worksheet overview 395 pre-installation worksheets 395 storage facility 395 logical configuration 2105 expansion enclosure install 314 logical configuration 2105 model 800 install 257 logical configuration 2105 subsystem install 257 logical configuration of storage facility 395 logical configurations 399

N
notices laser safety xix safety xix notices, electronic emission xx NVS battery assembly removal and replacement, I/O drawer 92 NVS battery charger card removal and replacement, I/O drawer 88 NVS/IOA card removal and replacement, I/O drawer 85

432

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

O
operator pane and EEPROM removal and replacement, CEC drawer 26 operator panel, 2105 rack 139 ordering publications xxvii overview of repair chapter 4

P
pager users configure 399 patent licenses xix planar assembly removal and replacement, CEC drawer 35 planar assembly removal and replacement, I/O drawer 69, 72 planar removal and replacement, host bay 120 position the rack 2105 model 800 install 174 position the rack 2105 subsystem install 174 position the rack, 2105 expansion enclosure install 267, 272 power control 2105 subsystem 124 cluster 20, 61 power off cluster, using RPC card switches 20, 61 cluster, using service terminal 20, 61 power off using RPC card switches, cluster 20, 61 power off using service terminal, cluster 20 power off using service terminalf, cluster 61 power on cluster, using RPC card switch 22, 63 power on and test 2105 expansion enclosure install 305 power on using RPC card switch, cluster 22, 63 power on, connect MC to Ethernet hub 2105 model 800 install 229 power on, connect MC to Ethernet hub 2105 subsystem install 229 power on/off procedure 124 power on/off, cluster 20, 61 PPS fan, 2105 rack 133 pre-installation communication resource worksheet fields 396 pre-installation configuration worksheet overview 395 pre-installation configuration worksheets 395 communication resource worksheet fields 396 overview 395 primary power supply (PPS), 2105 rack 125 problem presentation count, configure 397 processor card removal and replacement, CEC drawer 44 products xix programs xix publications, ordering xxvii

R
rack FRU repair entry table 2 rack power control card (RPC), 2105 rack 140 rack, preparing 331

radio-frequency energy compliance statement xx regenerate ESS specialist certificate 410 reinstalling with relocation 377 related manuals xxvii relocating, 2105 reinstallation 377 relocating 363 removal fibre channel host card 359 host card 359 ultra scsi host card 359 remove and replace, 2105 rack 390 V battery set 135 cable 159 mainline power cable 131 operator panel 139 PPS fan 133 primary power supply (PPS) 125 rack power control card (RPC) 140 RPC power control card 147 RPC switch card (local and remote) 143 storage cage fan (center) 151 storage cage fan (top) 150 storage cage fan/power sense card 157 storage cage power planar 153 storage cage power supply 148 remove and replace, CEC drawer cable 56 CD-ROM and hard disk drive 28 CEC drawer power supply 41 fan 51 fan controller and LED card 53 memory DIMM (memory riser card) 48 memory riser card 46 operator pane and EEPROM 26 planar assembly 35 processor card 44 service position 23 top service access 25 remove and replace, DDM bay bypass and passthrough card 11 controller card 13 DDM 7 disk drive module 7 frame assembly 14 SSA cable 17 remove and replace, host bay backplane 116 ESCON and fibre channel wrap tools 118 host bay power supply 114 host card 111 planar 120 service position 109 remove and replace, I/O drawer cable 105 diskette drive 67 fan controller card 96 I/O drawer power supply 78 NVS battery assembly 92 NVS battery charger card 88 NVS/IOA card 85
Index

433

remove and replace, I/O drawer (continued) planar assembly 69, 72 RIO card 98 RJ45 card 102 service position 64 SSA device card 81 top service access 66 remove, host card 359 remove/replace, 2105 Model 800 tailgate clamps 316 remove/replace, 2105 subsystem 2105 subsystem power on/off 124 remove/replace, cluster cluster power on/off 20, 61 removing a host card 359 repair 2105 Model 800 and Expansion Enclosure FRU replacement procedures 124 390 V battery set, 2105 rack 135 backplane removal and replacement, host bay 116 bypass and passthrough card removal and replacement, DDM bay 11 cable removal and replacement, CEC drawer 56 cable removal and replacement, I/O drawer 105 cable, 2105 rack 159 CD-ROM and hard disk drive removal and replacement, CEC drawer 28 CEC drawer power supply removal and replacement, CEC drawer 41 cluster CEC drawer replacement procedures 20 cluster I/O drawer replacement procedures 61 controller card removal and replacement, DDM bay 13 DDM bay FRU replacement procedures 7 DDM bay SSA cable FRU replacement procedures 17 disk drive module locations, DDM bay 7 disk drive module removal and replacement, DDM bay 7 diskette drive removal and replacement, I/O drawer 67 entry for repair 1 entry tables 1 entry tables, CEC drawer 1 entry tables, DDM bay 1 entry tables, host bay 2 entry tables, I/O drawer 2 entry tables, rack 2 ESCON and fibre channel wrap tools removal and replacement, host bay 118 ESD precautions 5 fan controller and LED card removal and replacement, CEC drawer 53 fan controller card removal and replacement, I/O drawer 96 fan removal and replacement, CEC drawer 51 frame assembly removal and replacement, DDM bay 14 FRU removal and replacement procedures 4 host bay power supply removal and replacement, host bay 114 host bay replacement procedures 109

repair (continued) host card removal and replacement, host bay 111 how to attach the ESD wrist strap 5 I/O drawer power supply removal and replacement, I/O drawer 78 mainline power cable, 2105 rack 131 memory DIMM (memory riser card) removal and replacement, CEC drawer 48 memory riser card removal and replacement, CEC drawer 46 NVS battery assembly removal and replacement, I/O drawer 92 NVS battery charger card removal and replacement, I/O drawer 88 NVS/IOA card removal and replacement, I/O drawer 85 operator pane and EEPROM removal and replacement, CEC drawer 26 operator panel, 2105 rack 139 overview of repair chapter 4 planar assembly removal and replacement, CEC drawer 35 planar assembly removal and replacement, I/O drawer 69, 72 planar removal and replacement, host bay 120 PPS fan, 2105 rack 133 primary power supply (PPS), 2105 rack 125 processor card removal and replacement, CEC drawer 44 rack power control card (RPC), 2105 rack 140 replace a cluster FRU 6 replace a FRU using the service terminal 6 replacing a non-cluster FRU 6 RIO card removal and replacement, I/O drawer 98 RJ45 card removal and replacement, I/O drawer 102 RPC power control card, 2105 rack 147 RPC switch card (local and remote), 2105 rack 143 service position removal and replacement, host bay 109 service position, CEC drawer 23 service position, I/O drawer 64 SSA cable removal and replacement, DDM bay 17 SSA device card removal and replacement, I/O drawer 81 standard tools needed for FRU replacement 4 storage cage fan (center), 2105 rack 151 storage cage fan (top), 2105 rack 150 storage cage fan/power sense card, 2105 rack 157 storage cage power planar, 2105 rack 153 storage cage power supply, 2105 rack 148 top service access removal and replacement, I/O drawer 66 top service access, CEC drawer 25 using the repair chapter 4 working with ESD sensitive parts 4 replace a cluster FRU 6 replace a FRU using the service terminal 6 replace FRUs 1 replacing a non-cluster FRU 6 RIO card removal and replacement, I/O drawer 98

434

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

RJ45 card removal and replacement, I/O drawer 102 routing and connecting the cables to the Master Console 2105 model 800 install 226 routing and connecting the cables to the Master Console 2105 subsystem install 226 routing cables and connect 2105 to the host system 2105 model 800 install 254 routing cables and connect 2105 to the host system 2105 subsystem install 254 RPC power control card, 2105 rack 147 RPC switch card (local and remote), 2105 rack 143

T
tailgate cable clamps, 2105 Model 800 install 316 remove 316 tailgate hardware, remove/install removal, 2105 Model 800 316 Taiwan compliance statement xxii target time for install phases 2105 model 800 164 TCP/IP configuration change (dual cluster) 401 TCP/IP configuration change (single cluster) 405 test customer E-mail and SNMP 2105 model 800 install 248 test customer E-mail and SNMP 2105 subsystem install 248 test MC configuration and communication status 388 test modem communications 2105 model 800 install 248 test modem communications 2105 subsystem install 248 test UEPO and power supplies 2105 expansion enclosure install 305 tools needed for FRU replacement 4 top service access removal and replacement, I/O drawer 66 top service access, CEC drawer 25 trademarks xxii

S
safety inspection 2105 model 800 install 174 safety inspection 2105 subsystem install 174 safety inspection, 2105 expansion enclosure install 266 safety notices attention xix caution xix danger xix laser xix notices xix translations of xix serial port configure MC to cluster 2105 model 800 install 233 serial port configure MC to cluster 2105 subsystem install 233 service position removal and replacement, host bay 109 service position, CEC drawer 23 service position, I/O drawer 64 services xix SIM reporting (OS 390), change 397 SNMP configure 399 SR worksheet fields 2105 model 800 install 169 SR worksheet fields 2105 subsystem install 169 SSA cable removal and replacement, DDM bay 17 SSA device card removal and replacement, I/O drawer 81 standard tools needed for FRU replacement 4 statement of compliance European Community Compliance xx Federal Communications Commission xx Industry Canada Compliance xx Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) xxi Korean Government Ministry of Communication (MOC) xxi Taiwan xxii statement of EMI Chinese xxii storage cage fan (center), 2105 rack 151 storage cage fan (top), 2105 rack 150 storage cage fan/power sense card, 2105 rack 157 storage cage power planar, 2105 rack 153 storage cage power supply, 2105 rack 148 storage facility logical configuration 395

U
ultra SCSI host card completing install 355 installation 350 removal 359 updating MC TCP/IP information 409 using the repair chapter 4

V
VCCI (see Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference) xxi verify cluster IP address on the MC 2105 model 800 install 246 verify cluster IP address on the MC 2105 subsystem install 246 verify MC network setup 2105 model 800 install 237 verify MC network setup 2105 subsystem install 237 verify ship group complete 2105 model 800 install 173 verify ship group complete 2105 subsystem install 173 verify ship group is complete, 2105 expansion enclosure install 266

W
working with ESD sensitive parts 4 worksheet fields pre-installation communication resource worksheet fields 396 worksheets pre-installation communication resource worksheet fields 396
Index

435

worksheets (continued) pre-installation configuration 395 pre-installation configuration overview 395

436

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

Readers Comments Wed Like to Hear from You


IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server Service Guide 2105 Models 750/800 and Expansion Enclosure Volume 2 Chapters 4, 5, and 6 Publication No. SY27-7636-05 Overall, how satisfied are you with the information in this book? Very Satisfied h Satisfied h Neutral h Dissatisfied h Very Dissatisfied h

Overall satisfaction

How satisfied are you that the information in this book is: Very Satisfied h h h h h h Satisfied h h h h h h Neutral h h h h h h Dissatisfied h h h h h h Very Dissatisfied h h h h h h

Accurate Complete Easy to find Easy to understand Well organized Applicable to your tasks

Please tell us how we can improve this book:

Thank you for your responses. May we contact you?

h Yes

h No

When you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.

Name Company or Organization Phone No.

Address

___________________________________________________________________________________________________

Readers Comments Wed Like to Hear from You


SY27-7636-05

Cut or Fold Along Line

Fold and _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Fold and_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Please _ _ _ _ _ staple _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Tape _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Tape _ _ _ _ do not _ _ _ _ NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL


FIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO. 40 ARMONK, NEW YORK POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

IBM Information Development Department 61C 9000 South Rita Road Tucson, Arizona U.S.A. 85775-4401

_________________________________________________________________________________________ Please do not staple Fold and Tape Fold and Tape

SY27-7636-05

Cut or Fold Along Line

Part Number: 23R0914

Printed in U.S.A. (ss)

SY27-7636-05

(1P) P/N: 23R0914

Spine information:

IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server

VOLUME 2, TotalStorage ESS Service Guide

You might also like